Mechanical Specifications - Fire, Plumbing, HVAC

Project No.: PGC-230033-C-P8 Volume 2 General Specifications Part B Mechanical Specifications REVISION Revision-00 PURPOSE Issue for Tender DATE February 2024 PGC-230033-C-P8 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 10 SECTION SPECIALITIES 10 04 16 DIVISION 21 SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION REV0 FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT 21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 12 00 STANDPIPE SYSTEM 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 20.0020 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIRCRAFT HANGERS 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS DIVISION 22 SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHERS REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 PLUMBING 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 12 00 WATER STORAGE TANK 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS 22 32 00 WATER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 22 33 30.0010 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT 22 66 53.0040 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) SECTION SECTION 23 05 00 23 05 13 SECTION SECTION 23 05 16 23 05 16.13 SECTION SECTION SECTION 23 05 19 23 05 23 23 05 23.13 SECTION 23 05 29 SECTION 23 05 29.13 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING (UNDERGROUND) METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING (UNDERGROUND) HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PIPE SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, & SLEEVES STABLE OF CONTENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 PGC-230033-C-P8 REV0 REV0 REV0 23 05 93 (UNDERGROUND) VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT (UNDERGROUND) TESTING ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 13 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC REV0 SECTION SECTION SECTION 23 05 48 23 05 53 23 05 53.13 SECTION SECTION REV0 REV0 (UNDERGROUND) SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION 23 07 13 23 07 16 23 07 16.13 23 07 19 23 09 13 SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION 23 21 13 23 21 13.13 23 21 23 23 21 30 23 25 00 23 25 13 23 31 00 23 33 00 23 33 19 23 34 13 23 34 16 23 34 23 23 36 00 23 37 00 23 40 00 23 62 13 SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION 23 64 26 23 73 13 23 81 23 23 81 26 23 82 19 DIVISION33 SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION DUCTWORK INSULATION HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION(INFRA) HVAC PIPING INSULATION INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC HYDRONIC PIPING UNDERGROUND HYDRONIC PIPING HYDRONIC PUMPS HYDRONIC SPECIALITIES HVAC WATER TREATMENT CHEMICAL TREATMENT DUCTWORK DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SOUND ATTENUATORS INLINE HVAC FANS CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS HVAC POWER VENTILATORS AIR TERMINAL UNITS AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES PACKAGED AIR COOLED DX AIR CONDITIONING UNITS AIR COOLED ROTARY-SCREW CHILLERS MODULAR AIR HANDLING UNITS COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT SPLIT SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS FAN COIL UNITS UTILITIES 33 05 23.19 TRENCHLESS EXCAVATION 33 11 00 19 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 33 11 00 26 (HDPE) PIPING, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 33991300.26.9 16 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUSTION VALVES 33 32 13.13 PACKAGE SEWAGE LIFTING STATIONS 33 41 00 STORM DRAINAGE AND SEWAGE PIPING 33 42 00. CULVERTS 33 49 29 STORM DRAINAGE AND SAN SEWER UTILITY INSULATION DIVISION46 SECTION 46 07 00 10 04 16 ANNEXURES STABLE OF CONTENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS WATER & WASTE WATER EQUIPMENT WASTE WATER RECYCLING PLANT FIRE EXTINGUISHERS MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 REV0 PGC-230033-C-P8 ANNEXURE A ANNEXURE B STABLE OF CONTENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS MATERIALS / BRANDS APPROVED LIST MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION - EXTERNAL CHILLED WATER NETWORK (INFRA) & ETS REV0 REV0 PGC-230033-C-P8 SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL 2 1.1 REFERENCES ....................................................................................................................... 2 1.2 SUBMITTALS ....................................................................................................................... 3 1.3 DELIVERABLES .................................................................................................................. 4 1.3.1 Samples ...................................................................................................................................... 4 1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE ........................................................................ 4 1.5 WARRANTY ......................................................................................................................... 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS 5 2.1 TYPES ................................................................................................................................... 5 2.2 MATERIAL ........................................................................................................................... 5 2.3 SIZE ....................................................................................................................................... 5 2.4 ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................................................... 5 2.5 CABINETS ............................................................................................................................ 6 2.5.1 Material ...................................................................................................................................... 6 2.5.2 Type ........................................................................................................................................... 6 2.5.3 Size............................................................................................................................................. 6 2.6 WALL BRACKETS ............................................................................................................... 6 PART 3 EXECUTION 7 3.1 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 7 3.2 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS .............................................................................................. 7 3.2.1 Repairing .................................................................................................................................... 7 3.2.2 Cleaning ..................................................................................................................................... 7 10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC) a. 2. 3. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) a. NFPA 1 (2012; TIA 11-1) Fire Code b. NFPA 10 (2010; Errata 2012) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers c. NFPA 101 (2012; Amendment 1 2012) Life Safety Code d. NFPA 303 (2011) Fire Protection Standards for Marinas and Boatyards e. NFPA 385 Liquids (2012) Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flammable and Combustible f. NFPA 409 (2011; Errata 11-1) Standard on Aircraft Hangars g. NFPA 418 (2011) Standard for Heliports h. NFPA 505 (2011) Fire Safety Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks Including Type Designations, Areas of Use, Conversions, Maintenance, and Operations i. NFPA 99 (2012; TIA 11-1; TIA 11-2; Errata 12-1) Health Care Facilities Code U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) a. b. 4. 5. ICC IFC (2009) International Fire Code 29 CFR 1910.106 Flammable and Combustible Liquids 29 CFR 1910.157 (2003) Portable Fire Extinguishers UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) a. UL 154 (2005; Reprint Nov 2010) Carbon-Dioxide Fire Extinguishers b. UL 2129 (2005; Reprint Mar 2012) Halocarbon Clean Agent Fire Extinguishers c. UL 299 d. UL 626 (2005; Reprint Mar 2012) 2-1/2 Gallon Stored-Pressure, Water-Type Fire Extinguishers e. UL 8 (2012) Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers (2005; Reprint Jun 2011) Water Based Agent Fire Extinguishers UAE FIRE & LIFE SAFETY CODE OF PRACTICE a. Chapter 4 portable fire extinguishers 10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: a. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals 1. Manufacturer's Data b. SD-02 Shop Drawings 1. Fire Extinguishers 2. Accessories 3. Cabinets 4. Wall Brackets c. SD-03 Product Data 1. Fire Extinguishers 2. Accessories 3. Cabinets 4. Wall Brackets 5. Replacement Parts d. SD-04 Samples 1. Fire Extinguisher 2. Cabinet 3. Wall Brackets 4. Accessories e. SD-07 Certificates 1. Fire Extinguishers 2. Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag 10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.3 DELIVERABLES 1.3.1 Samples Provide the following samples: One of each type of Fire Extinguisher being installed; one full-sized sample of each type of Cabinet being installed; three samples of Wall Brackets and Accessories of each type being used. Approved samples may be used for installation, with proper identification and storage. 1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE Protect materials from weather, soil, and damage during delivery, storage, and construction. Deliver materials in their original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the brand name and the name and type of the material. [Provide portable fire extinguishers in compliance with NFPA 505 for all ancillary vehicles where Fire Safety Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks, including type designations, special c conditions relating to areas of use, conversions, maintenance, or specific operations apply. 1.5 WARRANTY Guarantee that Fire Extinguishers are free of defects in materials, fabrication, finish, and installation and that they will remain so for a period of not less than [5years after completion. 10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS Submit fabrication drawings consisting of fabrication and assembly details performed in the factory and product data for the following items: Fire Extinguishers; Accessories, Cabinets, Wall Brackets. 2.1 TYPES Submit certificates that show Fire Extinguishers comply with local codes and regulations. Provide Fire Extinguishers conforming to NFPA 10. Provide quantity and placement as shown on drawings and in compliance with the applicable sections of ICC IFC, Section 1414 and ICC IFC, Section 906, NFPA 1, NFPA 101, [NFPA 99], [NFPA 303], [NFPA 385], [NFPA 409], [NFPA 418],[29 CFR 1910.106] and 29 CFR 1910.157. and UAE FIRE & LIFE SAFETY CODE OF PRACTICE • Provide [stored-pressure] water type fire extinguishers. • Provide [foam] type fire extinguishers. • Provide carbon-dioxide type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 154. • Provide dry chemical type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 299. • Provide wet chemical type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 8. • Provide clean agent type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 2129. • Provide dry powder type fire extinguishers. • Provide water mist type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 626. Submit Manufacturer's Data for each type of Fire Extinguisher required, detailing all related Cabinet, Wall Mounting and Accessories information, complete with Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag. 2.2 MATERIAL Provide [corrosion-resistant steel] extinguisher shell. The cylinder should be painted with electrostatic powder paint, oven backed. 2.3 SIZE Sizes to be as indicated on drawings, and complying with UAE FIRE & LIFE SAFETY CODE OF PRACTICE chapter 4. 2.4 ACCESSORIES • Forged brass valve • Fusible plug • Safety release 10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.5 • Hose and nozzle gun • Pressure gage CABINETS 2.5.1 Material Provide corrosion-resistant steel all round folded edges cabinets. Exposed parts to be stainless steel mirror polished unexposed parts to be painted with electrostatic powder oven backed red color paint. 2.5.2 Type Provide [recessed] type cabinets where ever possible, otherwise Provide semi-recessed cabinet for a [150] [100] millimeter wall .door to be fitted with piano type stainless steel hinges Instruction should be silk screened written in Arabic and English, no stickers allowed. 2.5.3 Size Dimension cabinets to accommodate the specified fire extinguishers. 2.6 WALL BRACKETS Provide wall-hook fire extinguisher wall brackets. Provide wall bracket and accessories as approved. 10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install Fire Extinguishers where indicated on the drawings. Verify exact locations prior to installation. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for all installations. Provide extinguishers which are fully charged and ready for operation upon installation. Provide extinguishers complete with Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag attached. The wall mount type portable fire extinguishers shall be installed in such a way that the top of the fire extinguisher is not more than 1.5 meters above the floor and not less than 30 cm from the bottom of extinguisher to the finished floor 3.2 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS 3.2.1 Repairing Remove and replace damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work with new work at no additional cost to the Government. Submit Replacement Parts list indicating specified items replacement part, replacement cost, and name, address and contact for replacement parts distributor. 3.2.2 Cleaning Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces which are soiled as a result of the work. Remove from the site all construction equipment, tools, surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the work. -- End of Section -- 10.44.16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 21 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................2 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 RELATED DOCUMENTS......................................................................................... 2 SCOPE OF WORK .................................................................................................. 2 CODES AND STANDARDS ..................................................................................... 2 1.04 MANUFACTURERS ......................................................................................... 2 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE........................................................................................... 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS ..............................................................................................................4 2.1 ELECTRIC MOTORS............................................................................................... 4 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) ..........................................................................5 21 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 5 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Architectural and Structural Specification sections apply to work of this section. B. Separate electrical components and materials required for field installation and electrical connections are specified in Division 26. 1.2 1.3 1.4 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. These components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and disconnect switches furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. Horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical equipment are specified within the individual equipment specification sections, or are scheduled on the Drawings. CODES AND STANDARDS A. Electrical components of mechanical equipment to conform to the following codes and standards: B. NEMA Standards MG1: Motors and Generators C. NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies D. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosed Switches E. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) F. Under Writer Laboratory (ul) G. Factory Mutual (FM) 1.04 MANUFACTURERS A. Obtain equipment and accessories from one of the following: Westinghouse (U.S.A.) Square D (U.S.A.) General Electric (U.S.A.) Siemens (Germany) AEG (Germany) Klockner Moeller (Germany) English Electric (U.K.) AEI (U.K.) Ottermill (U.K.) Crabree (U.K.) Midland Electric Mfg. Co. (U.K.) GEC (U.K.) Newman (U.K.) 21 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 5 PGC-230033-C-P8 Merlin Gerin 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. 1.6 (France) No separate submittal is required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the individual equipment specification sections. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A. Electrical components and materials to be UL labeled. 21 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 5 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. Motors to be supplied by driven equipment manufacturer, to be as specified for equipment concerned and specifically supplied for available supply voltage and frequency. B. Motors 1/2 horsepower and under to be single phase and over 1/2 horsepower to be three phase. Motors to be totally enclosed, fan cooled type, unless otherwise specified. C. Motors to have Class F insulation with 120 deg. C continuous temperature rise above average ambient temperature of 50 deg. C, unless otherwise specified. D. Motors that will operate outdoors are to have Class F insulation. E. Motors operating in ambient temperatures of 50 deg. C and above to be tropicalized and derated for satisfactory operation. F. Motors to be rated for continuous operation with service factor of 1.15 G. POWER to be adequate to operate driven equipment without motor overload under all operating conditions and loads and throughout capacity range of equipment. Motor to be capable of delivering full rated output when operating at voltage deviating by 5% from rated voltage at rated frequency. H. Starting AND Torque Characteristics to be as required by driven equipment. I. Speed to be as specified for equipment concerned. J. Conduit Terminal Box on Motor to be approved model for type of motor enclosure. Motor windings to be connected to terminals in terminal box at factory. One additional earthling terminal to be connected to motor frame. K. Motor Base to be adjustable where motors are directly connected to driven equipment, unless otherwise specified. Motors connected to equipment through V-belt drive to have adjustable sliding base. Fractional horsepower motors to have slotted mounting holes in base 21 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 5 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION 21 05 13 21 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 5 PGC-230033-C-P8 21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTS............................................................................................. 2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS............................................................................ 2 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 3 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 MANUFACTURERS .................................................................................................... 3 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL ...................................................................... 4 PACKLESS-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ........................................................... 4 SLIP-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ...................................................................... 4 BALL-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ..................................................................... 4 GROOVED-PIPING-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ............................................... 5 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES ........................................................................................ 5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................. 5 PART 3 EXECUTION ........................................................................................................... 6 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................ 6 PIPE EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION ................................................................. 6 FABRICATED-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION COMPENSATION INSTALLATION ............. 6 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE INSTALLATION................................................................. 6 PIPE ANCHOR INSTALLATION .................................................................................. 6 PAINTING .................................................................................................................... 7 21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General andSupplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. SUMMARY C. This Section includes pipe expansion joints, guides, and anchors for mechanical piping systems. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Provide pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures. B. Fabricate and install expansion and anchor system capable of sustaining forces generated by gravity, thermal movement, and seismic events. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of pipe expansion joint and pipe alignment guide specified. C. Pipe expansion joint schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required expansion joint. D. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of pipe expansion joint, pipe alignment guide, and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component assembly. E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. F. 1.4 welders comply Maintenance data for each type pipe expansion joint specified to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in the Division 1 Section "Project Closeout". QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel". 1. B. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications". 21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following: 1. Metal-Bellows, Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Adsco Manufacturing Corp. Anamet, Inc. Badger Industries, Inc. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Keflex, Inc. Metraflex Co. Pathway Bellows, Inc., Dover Corp. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. Proco Products, Inc. Senior Flexonics Inc., Expansion Joint Div. B. Expansion-Compensator, Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Adsco Manufacturing Corp. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Keflex, Inc. Metraflex Co. Senior Flexonics Inc., Expansion Joint Div. C. Slip-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: 1. Adsco Manufacturing Corp. 2. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. D. Ball-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: 1. 2. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. Barco Div., Marison Industries. E. Coupling, Grooved-Piping-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: 1. 2. 3. 4. Grinnell Corp., Pipe Supports Div. Gustin-Bacon Div., Tyler Pipe Subsid., Tyler Corp. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. Victaulic Company of America. F. Slip-Joint, Grooved-Piping-Type, Pipe Expansion Joints: 1. Victaulic Company of America. G. Pipe Alignment Guides: 1. 2. 3. 4. Adsco Manufacturing Corp. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. B-Line Systems, Inc. Grinnell Corp., Pipe Supports Div. 21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 5. 6. 7. 2.2 Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Keflex, Inc. Metraflex Co. PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL A. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors. B. Refer to "Pipe Expansion Joint Schedule" for criteria of individual pipe expansion joints. C. Pipe expansion joint pressure ratings shall be compatuble with piping system where system pressures require PN 16 or PN 32 components. This applies to all the following joint types. 2.3 PACKLESS-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS A. Metal-Bellows Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: Pressure rated for 2070 kPa minimum; conform to the standards of Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (EJMA); with end fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel. Features include the following: 1. 2. B. 2.4 Copper Piping Systems: 2 ply phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shrouds. Steel Piping Systems: 2 ply stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shrouds. Expansion-Compensator Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: Pressure rated for 3200 kPa minimum. Include 2 ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds, and end fittings for copper piping systems and 2 ply stainless-steel bellows, carbon-steel shrouds, and end fittings for steel piping systems. Include internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for proper positioning. SLIP-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS A. Carbon-steel packing-type expansion joint designed for repacking under pressure. Include limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match piping system, and drip connection where used for steam piping systems. 1. 2. 2.5 Joint Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) compound. Pressure Rating: 2070 kPa minimum at 204 deg C minimum. BALL-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Designed for 360 degree (6.3rad) rotation and minimum of 30 degree (0.52rad) angular deflection for sizes 150 mm and smaller and 15 degree (0.26rad) for sizes 200 mm and larger. B. Carbon steel and comply with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section II "Materials Specifications" and ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials and design of pressure containing parts and bolting. 1. 2. Packing: Asbestos-free composition. Pressure Rating: 2070 kPa minimum at 204 deg C minimum. 21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 3. 2.6 2.7 Factory Test: Test before shipment with steam at working pressure of piping system with no leaks. GROOVED-PIPING-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS A. Coupling: ASTM A 53, cut-grooved, short, steel-pipe nipples, and ductileiron or malleable-iron shouldered couplings. Include removable ties to hold joint compressed or expanded during piping fabrication. Include suitable gasket materials for piping system. B. Slip-Joint: ASTM A 53, steel-pipe body; polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), modified- polyphenylene-coated steel-pipe slide; and ductile-iron or malleable-iron housing. Include suitable gasket material for piping system. PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES A. Factory-fabricated cast semisteel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted twosection outer cylinder and base. Include two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to the pipe. 1. 2.8 Alignment Guide Lengths: As required for indicated travel. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, traand nuts. C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. D. Power-Actuated Fasteners: Attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. E. Concrete: Portland-cement mix, (20.7 MPa). 1. 2. 3. 4. F. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. Water: Potable. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink, nonmetallic. 1. 2. 3. 4. Characteristics include post-hardening volume-adjusting dry hydrauliccement-type grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: (34.5 MPa), 28 day compressive strength. Water: Potable. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Examine substrates and conditions under which pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PIPE EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION A. Install pipe expansion joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Align expansion joints to avoid end-loading and torsional stress. 3.3 3.4 FABRICATED-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION COMPENSATION INSTALLATION A. Install pipe expansion loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to absorb 50 percent of total compression or tension that will be produced during anticipated change in temperature. B. Connect risers to mains with at least 5 pipe fittings including tee in main. C. Connect risers to terminal units with at least 4 pipe fittings including tee in riser. PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE INSTALLATION A. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion joints. B. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion loops. C. Install pipe alignment guides on piping elsewhere as indicated. D. 3.5 Secure pipe alignment guides to building substrate. PIPE ANCHOR INSTALLATION A. Install pipe anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS D1.1. C. Construct concrete pipe anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated. D. Where pipe expansion joints are indicated, install pipe anchors according to expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to compensators. 21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.6 E. Pipe Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install pipe anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Preset anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. F. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors that are installed on or in concrete. PAINTING A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint, exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting". C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 21 05 16 21 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................. 2 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 2 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................ 2 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................................... 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................................................... 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................................... 3 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 MANUFACTURERS ................................................................................................................................ 3 BI METAL DIAL THERMOMETERS .................................................................................................... 3 PRESSURE GAGES ............................................................................................................................... 4 PRESSURE-GAGE ACCESSORIES ................................................................................................... 5 TEST PLUGS ........................................................................................................................................... 5 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS, GENERAL ..................................................................................... 5 FLOW-MEASURING METERS ............................................................................................................. 6 METERS .................................................................................................................................................... 6 PART 3 EXECUTION.......................................................................................................................................... 7 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 METER AND GAGE APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................. 7 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL ............................................................................ 7 PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION ................................................................................................... 7 TEST PLUG INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................ 7 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM, FLOW ELEMENT AND METER INSTALLATION ................... 7 FLOW METER INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................... 7 CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING .............................................................................................................. 8 21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes meters and gages used in mechanical systems. B. Related Sections: Division 21 piping Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1.3 1. Meters and gages furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division 21 Sections. 2. Division 21 Section "Fire Pumps" for flow meters for testing fire pumps. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of meter, gage, and fitting specified. Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves, certified where indicated. Submit a meter and gage schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, scale range, location, and accessories for each meter and gage. C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements. D. Maintenance data to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout". Include data for the following: 1. 2. 3. 1.4 Test plugs. Flow measuring systems. Flow meters. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable portions of American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) and Instrument Society of America (ISA) standards pertaining to construction and installation of meters and gages. 21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: a. b. c. d. e. Marsh Instrument Co. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc. H.O. Trerice Co. Weiss Instruments, Inc. Weksler Instruments Corp. B. Direct-Mounting Filled-System Dial Thermometers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ashcroft Instrument Div. of Dresser Industries. Marsh Instrument Co. H.O. Trerice Co. Weiss Instruments, Inc. Weksler Instruments Corp. C. Remote-Reading Filled-System Dial Thermometers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.2 AMETEK, U.S. Gauge Div. Ashcroft by Dresser Industries, Instrument Div. Marsh Instrument Co. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Co., Inc. H.O. Trerice Co. Weiss Instruments, Inc. Weksler Instruments Corp. BI METAL DIAL THERMOMETERS A. Ashcroft by Dresser Industries, Instrument Div. B. Marsh Instrument Co. C. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc. D. Reotemp Instrument Corp. E. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Co., Inc. F. H.O. Trerice Co. G. Weiss Instruments, Inc. H. Weksler Instruments Corp. 1. Pressure Gages: 21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 a. b. AMETEK, U.S. Gauge Div. Ashcroft by Dresser Industries, Instrument Div. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2. Test Plugs: a. b. c. d. e. f. 3. ABB Kent-Taylor, Inc. Brooks Instrument Div., Emerson Electric Co. Dynasonics, Inc. Fischer & Porter Co. Johnson Yokogawa Corp. Monitek Technologies, Inc. Schlumberger Industries, Inc., Measurement Div. Wallace & Tiernan, Inc. Flow Indicators: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2.3 Armstrong Pumps, Inc. BIF by Leeds & Northrup. Badger Meter, Inc. Barco Div., Marison Industries. Fischer & Porter Co. Gerand Engineering Co. Preso Industries, Ltd. Victaulic Company of America. Electromagnetic Flow Meters: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 5. Flow Design, Inc. MG Piping Products Co. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. Sisco Co., Spedco, Inc. H.O. Trerice Co. Watts Regulator Co. Venturi-Type Flow Elements: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 4. Marsh Instrument Co. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc. H.O. Trerice Co. Weiss Instruments, Inc. Weksler Instruments Corp. WIKA Instruments Corp. Anderson by Dwyer Instruments, Inc. Brooks Instrument Div., Emerson Electric Co. Ernst Gage Co. Ketema, Inc., Schutte and Koerting Div. Penberthy, Inc. Visi-Flo by OPW Div., Dover Corp. PRESSURE GAGES A. Description: ASME B40.1, Grade A phosphor-bronze Bourdon-tube pressure gage, with bottom connection. B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115 mm (4-1/2") diameter glass lens. 21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 C. Connector: Brass, 6 mm (1/4") NPS. D. Scale: White-coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings. E. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span. F. Range: Conform to the following: 1. 2. 3. 2.4 Vacuum: 30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 100 kPa of pressure. Fluids Under Pressure: 2 times operating pressure. PRESSURE-GAGE ACCESSORIES A. Syphons: 6 mm straight coil of brass tubing with threads on each end. B. Snubbers: 6 mm brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. 2.5 TEST PLUGS A. Description: Nickel-plated brass-body test plug in 15 mm fitting. B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation. C. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa (500 psig) minimum. D. Core Inserts: 2 self-sealing valve types, suitable for inserting a 3 mm outsidediameter probe from a dial thermometer or pressure gage. E. Core Material: According to the following for fluid and temperature range: 1. Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to 93 deg C , neoprene rubber. 2. Air and Water: Minus 35 to 136 deg C, ethylene-propylene-dieneterpolymer (EPDM) rubber. F. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain. G. Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of 1 pressure gage and gage adapter with probe, 2 bimetal dial thermometers and a carrying case. H. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately 2 times systems operating conditions. 2.6 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Flow-measuring systems include calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings, and conversion chart that is compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid. B. Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of equipment or system where used. 21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.7 FLOW-MEASURING METERS A. Permanent Meters: Suitable for mounting on wall or bracket, 150 mm dial or equivalent with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flow element. 1. 2. Scale: In L/s (gallons/minute) unless otherwise indicated. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 to 80 percent of range. B. Include complete operating instructions with each meter. 2.8 METERS A. Fire Pump Test Meters shall be Fire Pump Test Meter, Factory Mutual Approved, incorporating a calibrated venturi and attached GPM meter, to be installed on the discharge side of the fire pump, to accurately measure pump performance. Test Meter shall be supplied with grooved ends for installation with grooved end couplings. 21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 METER AND GAGE APPLICATIONS A. General: Where indicated, install meters and gages of types, sizes, capacities, and with features indicated. 3.2 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions for applications where used. 3.3 PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION A. Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage valve located on pipe at most readable position. B. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated: 1. 2. At suction and discharge of each pump. At discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. C. Pressure Gage Needle Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon instead of snubber for steam pressure gages. 3.4 TEST PLUG INSTALLATION A. Install test plugs in piping tees where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap. 3.5 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM, FLOW ELEMENT AND METER INSTALLATION A. General: Install flow meters for piping systems located in accessible locations at most readable position. B. Locations: Install flow measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of each hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flow meters in readily accessible locations. D. Permanently Mounted Meters for Flow Elements: brackets in accessible locations. Install meters on walls or E. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 FLOW METER INSTALLATION A. Include 10 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream of straight unrestricted piping for 32 mm and smaller pipe. Include 20 pipe diameters upstream and 10 pipe diameters downstream for 40 mm and larger pipe. 21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 21 Sections. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow servicing and maintenance. C. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters. D. Connect flow-meter transmitters to meters. E. 3.8 Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and devices. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation. B. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. C. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked and broken windows and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup paint. END OF SECTION 21 05 19 21 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER – BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 2 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTS............................................................................................. 2 SCOPE OF WORK ...................................................................................................... 2 CODES AND STANDARDS ......................................................................................... 2 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................. 4 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS - GENERAL................................................................ 4 BASIC IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................. 4 BASIC VALVES-GROOVED END ................................................................................ 4 SPECIAL VALVES ....................................................................................................... 6 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES ............................................................................. 6 SIAMESE CONNECTIONS .......................................................................................... 7 ALARM TEST MODULE .............................................................................................. 7 PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................ 8 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................... 8 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION ............................................................. 8 INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION VALVES ...................................................... 8 INSTALLATION OF VALVES ....................................................................................... 8 21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Division-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. B. Division-21 Section 210500 "Common Work Results For Fire Suuppression" apply to work of this section. SCOPE OF WORK A. Extent of General-Duty Valves for fire protection work is indicated on Drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Installation of valves, sized to meet the system flow and pressure per NFPA 14. C. Installation of valves for the proper operation of the system as per NFPA 13. 1.3 D. Engage a fire fighting designer approved by Civil Defence to assist in preparation of fire fighting scheme and location of valves and obtaining Civil Defence approval. E. Include cost for all necessary works related to Civil Defence approvals whether shown on document or not, include for inspection and obtaining completion certificate. CODES AND STANDARDS A. NFPA Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with the following NFPA Standards: B. Standards for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems NFPA 14. C. Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems NFPA13. D. National Electrical Code - NFPA 70. E. UL Compliance: Provide fire protection products in accordance with UL standards; provide UP label on each product. F. FM (Factory Mutual) Compliance: Provide fire protection products and installations in accordance with FM standards and approved for 300 psi working pressure; provide FM label on each product. G. Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: All material and equipment necessary to meet the requirements of codes and the requirements of the local fire authorities are to be provided regardless of failure to specifically mention same in this Section or to show on Drawings. H. Screw Thread Connections: Comply with local Fire Department regulations for sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment to fire protection systems. 21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for fire protection materials and products. Manufacturer's literature and data sheets are to be submitted indicating the necessary installation dimensions, weights, materials and performance information. The performance is to include capacities, pressure drop, design and operating pressure, temperatures, and similar data. Complete electrical data, including power conditions, and identifying types and numbers, to be included. Where pertinent, electrical diagrams are to be provided. Literature and data sheets may be provided by standard sales sheets marked to indicate the specific equipment provided. B. Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data and parts lists for fire protection materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, approval drawings, approval calculations, certificate of installation, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. Contractor is to furnish data covering model, type and serial numbers, capacities, maintenance and operation of each item of equipment or apparatus. Operating instructions are to cover all phases of control. C. Valve Schedule: Furnish a printed schedule, in duplicate, describing each valve by number, giving locations and service for which used. System identification to be as stipulated in the other sections of these specifications. One copy of this schedule is to be mounted under glass in a simple black enamel steel frame and hung in the mechanical equipment room where directed. The other copy is to be submitted to the Engineer before completion of the work. D. Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Literature: Submit shop drawings and manufacturers literature on fire protection system components, according to the following listing: E. Valve Supervisory Switches F. Valve and Hydraulically Calculated ID signs G. Manufacturers Installation Instructions for all equipment in brochure 1. Other a. b. Leak Test Certificates Operation and Maintenance Instructions 21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS - GENERAL A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection to comply with installation requirements. B. Provide materials and products of sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections. C. Provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in fire protection systems. 2.2 BASIC IDENTIFICATION A. Provide identification complying with Division-21 "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression". B. Fire Protection Signs: Provide the following signs: 1. 2. 2.3 At each sprinkler valve, sign indicating what portion of system valve controls. At each outside alarm device, sign indicating what authority to call if device is activated. BASIC VALVES-GROOVED END A. Butterfly Valves 1. B. Shall be Underwriters Laboratories Listed for UL Butterfly Specification 1091 and Factory Mutual Approval Standard 1112, sizes 2-1/2" through 12" (DN65 through DN300), supplied with a ductile iron body conforming to ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, coated with a polyphenylene sulfide blend, a disc of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, with EPDM coating providing bubble tight shutoff. Sizes 2-1/2" through 12" (DN65 through DN300) shall have an approved weatherproof manual actuator suitable for indoor or outdoor use with two single pole, double throw supervisory switches either pre-wired (WRD) or unwired (UWD) monitoring the open position as specified on the drawings. Shall be supplied with grooved ends for installation with grooved end couplings and rated for service up to 300 psi (2065 kPa) working pressure. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the latest manufacturer’s specifications. Check Valves 1. Shall be single disc, spring loaded, check valves 21/2"-12" (DN50-DN300), as Underwriters Laboratories Listed and Factory Mutual Approved for a single check and anti-water hammer service and for horizontal or vertical installation, supplied drilled, tapped and plugged downstream for drainage outlet with Grade “E” EPDM seal, housing cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, with grooved ends for installation with grooved end couplings rated for service up to 21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 250 psi (1725 kPa) working pressure. For system subjects to more than 10 bar static head or pressure exceeds the 1725 kpa, use valve with 2400 kPa working pressure. C. Ball Valves 1. D. Alarm Check Valves 1. E. Shall be spring assisted Alarm Check Valves, as Underwriters Laboratories Listed and Factory Mutual Approved, for vertical installation, supplied with Grade “E” EPDM clapper seal, housing cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, serviceable without removal from the line, with grooved 1 1/2"-6" (DN40 - DN150) or flange by groove 4"-6" (DN100-DN150) ends for installation with ANSI Class 150 flange or manufacturer grooved end couplings as applicable, rated for service up to 300 psi (2065 kPa) working pressure. Actuated Check Valve with Deluge Trim 1. F. Shall be sizes 2" through 3" (DN50 through DN80), Underwriters Laboratories Listed for UL Specification 1091 and Factory Mutual Approval Standard 1112, supplied with a ductile iron body conforming to ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, painted, and a ball conforming to Type 316 stainless steel. Shall be unsupervised or have factory installed double pole, double throw switches monitoring the open position as specified on the drawings. The valve should be with grooved ends to connect with grooved end couplings and rated for service up to 300 psi (2065 kPa) working pressure. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the latest published manufacturer specifications. Shall be of low differential, latched closed spring assisted, self resetting clapper, pneumatic, hydraulic, or electric release, Actuated Check Valve with Deluge Trim as Underwriters Laboratories, Listed and Factory Mutual Approved, for vertical installation, supplied with Grade “E” EPDM clapper seal, housing cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, serviceable without removal from the line, with grooved 1-1/2"-6" (DN40-DN150) or flange by groove 4"-6" (DN100- DN150) ends for installation with ANSI Class 150 flange or manufacturer grooved end couplings as applicable, rated for service up to 300 psi (2065 kPa) working pressure. Actuated Check Valve with Pre-Action Trim 1. Shall be of low differential, latched closed spring assisted, self resetting clapper, pneumatic or electric release, non, single, or double interlock Actuated Check Valve with Pre-Action Trim as Underwriters Laboratories Listed and Factory Mutual Approved, for vertical installation, supplied with Grade “E” EPDM clapper seal, housing cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, GRADE 65-45-15, serviceable without removal from the line, with grooved 1 1/2"-6" (DN40-DN150) or flange by groove 4"-6" (DN100DN150)) ends for installation with ANSI Class 150 flange or grooved end couplings as applicable, rated for service up to 300 psi (2065 kPa) working pressure. 21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4 SPECIAL VALVES A. Provide valves, UL-listed, where indicated, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections. B. Detector Check Valves: Detector check valves to be galvanized cast iron detector check with bronze bypass meter with gate and check valves, and weighted flapper and flanged ends. Provide Hersey-Sparling Meter Co. No. DC, Grinnell Fig. 1371, or Viking Model C-2. C. Backflow Preventers: Backflow preventers to be reduced pressure type, consisting of two spring-loaded check valves and a spring-loaded, diaphragm actuated, differential pressure relief valve located between the check valves. Unit to be galvanized cast iron. Unit to be as manufactured by, or approved equal: D. Cla-Val Co., Model RP E. Hersey Products, Equivalent F. Watts Regulator Co., Equivalent G. Alarm Check Valves: Alarm check valves to be flanged units complete with gauges and accessories piped to unit, retarding chamber, and less water motor alarm and outside gong. Provide Grinnell Model A. Standard alarm trimming to include electric outlet for alarm connection. H. 2.5 Deluge Valves: Deluge valves to be flanged units complete with trim package and water gauges, diaphragm bypass, emergency release panels, dehydrator, and air maintenance device accessories. Provide Viking Model D-5. Standard alarm trimming to include electric pressure alarm switch for alarm connection. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES A. Provide fire protection specialties, UL-listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections. B. Water Flow Indicators: Water flow indicators to be of the paddle flow clamp-on type with vane projecting into pipe through a hole drilled in pipe, instantly recycling operation on 110 volt, single phase, 50 hertz service, with contacts for connection to alarm center. Water flow indicators to be as manufactured by, or approved equal: 1. 2. 3. Grinnell, Model F-620 Autocall, Type WF5 Potter D. Alarm Bells: Provide alarm bell at each waterflow indicator and at central location where indicated. Bells to be 150 mm size unless otherwise indicated, single stroke or vibrating type as required by the service, and are to operate on 110 volts, single phase, 50 hertz. Alarm bells to be as manufactured by, or approved equal: 1. Edwards Co. 21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 2. 3. E Water-Motor Gongs: Provide where indicated, and for each alarm check valve 250 mm weatherproof, red enameled finish, water-motor gongs. F. Supervisory Switches: Provide UL-listed tamper switches for each sprinkler, standpipe and fire pump control valve or where indicated, arranged to detect the open or closed position of control valves and to be connected to the fire alarm system. Standpipe hose valves and test and drain valves shall not be provided with supervisory switches. Switches to be attached to the various control valves being supervised and to be complete with tamper switches, required trim and electrical characteristics compatible with those of the fire alarm system. Switch housing to be finished in red baked enamel Supervisory switches to be as manufactured by, or approved equal: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.6 Autocall Co. Kidde Ultrasonic and Detection Alarms Faraday Temptron Honeywell Simplex Potter SIAMESE CONNECTIONS A. Wall Type Siamese Connections: Provide where indicated, wall type cast brass flush Siamese connections and escutcheon plate assembly, with two, 65 mm fire department inlets with female hose connections, fire hose connection screw thread adapted to locally used hoses, equipped with individual drop clapper valves, equipped with plugs and chains, construction features as indicated, and constructed with the following additional construction features: 1. 2. 3. 4. Finish: Chrome plate. Inlet Pipe: 100 mm (4") pipe, 125 mm (5") pipe, or 150 mm (6") pipe (pipe size). Cast Lettering: "AUTO. SPKR."/”STAND PIPE”. Escutcheon: 180 mm x 360 mm rectangular. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide siamese connections of one of the following manufacturers, or approved equal: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.7 Potter-Roemer, 5206 Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co. Equivalent Croke-Standard, Equivalent Sierra Fire Equipment Co., Equivalent J.W. Moon, Inc. Equivalent ALARM TEST MODULE A. Test master 1. Threaded Outlet Alarm Test Module shall be (threaded) inlet and outlet, a combination sight glass/orifice, bronze top works and 1/4" NPT plug for attachment of a gauge water hose for pressure testing. 21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. 3.2 3.3 Examine areas and conditions under which fire protection materials and products are to be installed. INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION A. Install mechanical identification in accordance with Division-21 Section 210553 "Identification for Fire- Suppression Piping and Equipment". B. Install fire protection signs on valves in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 requirements. INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION VALVES A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 for installation of fire protection piping materials. B. Install piping products where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that piping systems comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. C. Install drain piping at low points of piping systems. where required. Provide dry drum drips D. Install sectional valves in inlet piping, at bottom of each riser, and in loops as indicated. E. Install water flow indicators where indicated. Mount supervisory switches on each sectional valve. F. Install Inspector's test connection where indicated, or at most remote point from riser. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. Provide valves on mains and branches for sectionalising the system for maintenance and operation and for flushing, draining and testing the system. B. Provide 50 mm drain valves of the globe valve type at base of stack. Slope piping not less than 2% towards drain valves C. Install alarm check valves on main water supply pipe to every fire fighting water distribution system at source of pressure. Install, test and adjust in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install detector check valves in horizontal position as indicated, orientated for proper flow direction. Install by-pass meter with globe valve and check valve, in accordance with manufacturer's installation directions. END OF SECTION 21 05 23 21 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR WATER - BASED FIRE – SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS............................................................................................. 2 1.2 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................. 2 1.3 MSS STANDARD (MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTING INDUSTRY) COMPLIANCE ................................................................. 2 1.4 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 2 1.5 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 3 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................. 4 2.1 2.2 2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - GENERAL .................................................................. 4 MANUFACTURED UNITS ........................................................................................... 4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS.................................................................................. 5 PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................ 6 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS ................................................................ 6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION ................................................................. 6 SPACING OF PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS....................................................... 8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS ........................................................................................... 8 METAL FABRICATION ................................................................................................ 9 PAINTING .................................................................................................................... 9 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 9 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping and equipment. hangers and supports for mechanical systems B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure. 2. Division 21 Section 210548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for FireSuppression Piping and Equipment. 3. Division 21 Section 211200 " Fire Suppression Stand Pipes" & Section 211300 "Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems". C. Approved types of pipe hangers, supports and anchors are shown on the Drawings, and described in this section. Contractor may provide other types subject to approval by the Engineer. D. Pipe supports and anchors are to be provided following the requirements of this section and other Division-21 sections irrespective of whether they are indicated on the Drawings or not. 1.3 MSS STANDARD (MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTING INDUSTRY) COMPLIANCE 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.4 Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP-90. Provide pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-69. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-89. SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment suitable for seismic zone of project. B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. C. Design and obtain approval from the Engineer for seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment suitable for seismic zone of the project. Upon application of seismic forces of computed intensity, piping shall remain fully connected into operable systems and shall not be displaced 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 9 PGC-230033-C-P8 sufficiently to damage adjacent or connecting equipment, or building members. Thermal expansion flexibility shall not be impaired. Seismic rate shall be as follows: 1. 2. D. 1.5 Project seismic zone is 2A with a zone factor of 0.15 Building Importance Factor: 1.0 All hangers and supports installation details and any cutting and drilling in structural elements shall be approved by the Engineer. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of hanger and support. 1.6 C. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's Figure No., size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support. D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. E. Shop drawings for each type of hanger and support, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component assembly. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13 for hangers and supports used as components of fire protection systems. B. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 9 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - GENERAL A. Hangers and supports are to allow adjustment of slope of piping and removal without dismantling pipes. B. Hangers and supports to be designed and tested to sustain load eight times actual supported load. C. Hangers and supports to be steel with smooth flat bearing surfaces, to carry weight of piping and contents without sagging, swaying, vibrating or deforming, and to allow free movement of pipes due to expansion and contraction without noise or damage to piping or construction. D. Hangers and supports to be complete with all necessary structural steel, rods, bolts, nuts, turnbuckles and other components. E. Select only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. F. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. G. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Hangers, Supports, and Components: Factory-fabricated according to MSS SP-58. 1. Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not have a field-applied finish. 2. Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 690 kPa (100 psi) average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium silicate, encased with sheet metal shield. Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe and are of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation. C. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include UL listing and FM approval. D. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include UL listing and FM approval. E. Pipe Anchor and Guides: 20 mm diameter U-bolts to fit around pipe loosely for guides and welded to pipe for anchors. 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 9 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: and galvanized. ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts. C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink, nonmetallic. 1. Characteristics include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cementtype grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 34.5 MPa , 28-day compressive strength. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged. 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 9 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in the Section specifying the equipment and systems. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping specification Sections. C. Install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. D. Do not use wire, rope, wood, chain, strap or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. E. Hangers and supports in mechanical rooms including chiller hall and pump room floor to be spring type. HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. A. General: Comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. Provide intermediate steel where required to transfer loads to areas of structure where they can be safely accommodated. B. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field- fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. Keep pipes in position with U- bolts. Lines subject to extreme thermal expansion to be free to slide or roll. (Provide rollers on trapeze hangers) C. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69, and the requirements of this section. Specified maximum spans are for straight runs of pipe. D. Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. Support vertical pipe risers independently of adjacent horizontal hangers. E. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. F. Install concrete inserts in new construction prior to placing concrete. G. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 100 mm thick. H. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install according to fastener manufacturer's written 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 9 PGC-230033-C-P8 instructions. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 100 mm thick or in post tensioned slabs. I. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. J. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36 steel shapes selected for loads being supp. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1. K. Support fire protection systems piping independent of other piping. L. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. Support piping independently of equipment. N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" is not exceeded. O. Anchors: Weld U-bolts to pipes at points of contact and bolt to structural angle frame securely fixed to structure. P. Insulated Piping: Protect pipe insulation at hangers and supports from weight or movement of pipe. Provide firm attachment to pipe. Comply with the following installation requirements. 1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. 2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields to span an arc of 180 degrees (3.1 rad) and have dimensions in mm not less than the following: PIPE SIZE Mm LENGTH mm 0 0 8 to 900 3000 1.220 1000 3000 1.520 125 and 1500 4500 1.520 200 to 3500 6000 1.910 400 to 6000 6000 2.670 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS THICKNES S Mm PAGE 7 OF 9 PGC-230033-C-P8 4. 5. 6. 3.3 4. Pipes 200 mm and Larger: Include wood inserts. 5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as the protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping. SPACING OF PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Ductile Iron Pipe Supports: 1. Support ductile iron pipes with at least one support per length of pipe and at intervals not exceeding 3.5 m with hanger preferably located adjacent to joint. B. Steel Pipe Supports: 1. Support horizontal steel pipes at intervals not exceeding maximum support spacing and by hanger rod of minimum size as follows: PIPE DIAMETER (m) 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 2. 3.4 MAXIMUM SUPPORT SPACING (m) MINIMUM SIZE OF HANGER ROD (mm) 1.5 10 1.8 10 2.0 10 2.5 10 2.7 10 3.0 10 3.3 13 3.6 4.2 13 16 4.2 4.2 4.8 4.8 4.8 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 16 22 25 25 25 25 28 32 32 38 38 Support vertical steel pipes at a minimum of every storey height. EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor. 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 9 PGC-230033-C-P8 B. 3.5 Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make a smooth bearing surface. METAL FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. C. D. 3.6 Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.l procedures for manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so that contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. PAINTING A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas immediately after erection of hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections. and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section “Painting”. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with AST\I A ~‘SC’. END OF SECTION 21 05 29 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 9 PGC-230033-C-P8 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 RELATED DOCUMENTS............................................................................................. 2 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................. 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 2 NOISE CRITERIA: ....................................................................................................... 3 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................. 5 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................ 5 VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORTS UNITS .................................. 5 VIBRATION ISOLATORS ............................................................................................ 5 BASES......................................................................................................................... 6 GENERAL ISOLATOR REQUIREMENTS: .................................................................. 7 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT...................................... 7 PART 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 10 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................. 10 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS ............................................................................ 10 APPLICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 10 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................... 10 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ................................................................................... 11 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Architectural layout and locations of sound related materials. Also site layout with respect to adjacent buildings. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of vibration control work required by this section is indicated on Drawings and schedules, and/or specified in other Division 21sections. Noise criteria, seismic restraints for equipment, vibration tolerance, and vibration isolation for HVAC and plumbing work. B. Types of vibration control products specified in this section include the following: 1. Neoprene Pads. 2. Vibration Isolation Springs. 3. All-Directional Anchors. 4. Neoprene Mountings. 5. Spring Isolators, Vertically-Restrained. 6. Thrust Restraints. 7. Fabricated Equipment Bases. 8. Inertia Base Frames. 9. Isolation Hangers. 10. Flexible Pipe Connectors. 1.3 C. Vibration control products furnished as integral part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 21 sections. D. Refer to other Division 21 sections for equipment foundations, hangers, sealants, gaskets, and other work related to vibration control work. E. Refer to other Division 21 and 26 sections for requirements of electrical connections to equipment isolated on vibration control products. F. Refer to other Division 23 sections for requirements of duct connections to air handling equipment isolated on vibration control products. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration control products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, obtain vibration control products from single manufacturer. 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.4 NOISE CRITERIA: A. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall not exceed NC 35 within the occupied room, except as mentioned in the design guidelines. B. For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans, the contractor shall select equipment such that the fore-going noise criteria, local ordinance noise levels, and OSHA requirements are not exceeded. Selection procedure shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 1999 HVAC Applications Handbook, Chapter 43, SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL. Cooling Tower shall not exceed 80 dB at 3 metre. C. An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to compensate for the variation of the room attenuating effect between room test condition prior to occupancy and design condition after occupancy which may include the addition of sound absorbing material, such as, furniture. This allowance may not be taken after occupancy. The room attenuating effect is defined as the difference between sound power level emitted to room and sound pressure level in room. D. In absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment noise levels one meter from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise generation. E. Seismic Restraint Requirements: 1. For equipment: a. All mechanical equipment shall be suitable for applications requiring equipment anchorage to resist seismic forces of Seismic Zone 2A, per the Uniform Building Code (UBC). b. All mechanical equipment not supported with isolators external to the unit shall be securely anchored to the structure. Such mechanical equipment, shall be properly supported to resist a horizontal force of 20 percent of the weight of the equipment furnished c. All mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be provided with seismic restraints capable of resisting a horizontal force of 20 percent of the weight of the equipment furnished. d. Mechanical Equipment: Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected shall include the following items to the extent required on the Drawings or in other Sections of the Specification: e. i. ii. iii. iv. Storage tanks for oil and water. Expansion air separator tanks. Valves and fittings for piping. Air compressors. 1. For piping: i. a. Mechanical Systems: The following mechanical systems shall be installed as required on the Drawings and other Sections of the Specification and shall be seismically protected in accordance with this Specification: 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 1) All Piping Inside the Building Except as Specifically Stated Below Under "Items Not Covered By This Section". 2) Fuel piping outside of buildings. F. Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment: Not to exceed a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per second RMS, filter in, when measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed. Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors may be made at the mounting feet. G. The contractor shall employ an Acoustic Consultant to ensure he meets the criteria. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection, and location for each product furnished. Manufacturer's Literature shall include: 1. Vibration isolators: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. Floor mountings. Hangers. Snubbers. Thrust restraints. Bases. Seismic restraint provisions and bolting. Acoustical enclosures. B. Isolator manufacturer shall furnish with submittal load calculations for selection of isolators, including supplemental bases, based on lowest operating speed of equipment supported. C. Seismic Requirements: Submittals are required for all equipment anchors, supports and seismic restraints. Submittals shall include weights, dimensions, standard connections, manufacturer's recommendations, behavior problems (vibration, thermal, expansion etc.) associated with equipment or piping D. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and method of assembly of components. Detail bases, and show location of equipment anchoring points, coordinated with equipment manufacturer's shop drawings. E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of vibration control product. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering vibration control products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.2 VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORTS UNITS A. 2.3 Amber/Booth Co. Korfund Dynamics Corp. Kinetics Noise Control Mason Industries, Inc. Peabody Noise Control, Inc. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. General: Type of isolator, base, and minimum static deflection shall be as required for each specific equipment application as recommended by isolator or equipment manufacturer but subject to minimum requirements indicated in the schedule on the drawings. VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Hangers: Shall be combination neoprene and springs unless otherwise noted and shall allow for expansion of pipe. 1. Combination Neoprene and Spring (Type H): Vibration hanger shall contain a spring and double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent between design height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular misalignment without rubbing on hanger box. 2. Spring Position Hanger (Type HP): Similar to combination neoprene and spring hanger except hanger shall hold piping at a fixed elevation during installation and include a secondary adjustment feature to transfer load to spring while maintaining same position. 3. Neoprene (Type HN): Vibration hanger shall contain a double deflection type neoprene isolation element. Hanger rod shall be separated from contact with hanger bracket by a neoprene grommet. 4. Spring (Type HS): Vibration hanger shall contain a coiled steel spring in series with a neoprene grommet. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent between design height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular misalignment without rubbing on hanger box. 5. Hanger supports for piping 50 mm and larger shall have a pointer and scale deflection indicator. 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4 B. Snubbers: Each spring mounted base shall have a minimum of four alldirectional or eight two directional (two per side) seismic snubbers that are double acting. Elastomeric materials shall be shock absorbent neoprene bridge quality bearing pads, maximum 60 durometer, replaceable and have a minimum thickness of 6 mm. Air gap between hard and resilient material shall be not less than 3 mm nor more than 6 mm. Restraints shall be capable of withstanding design load without permanent deformation. C. Thrust Restraints (Type THR): Restraints shall provide a spring element contained in a steel frame with neoprene pads at each end attachment. Restraints shall have factory preset thrust and be field adjustable to allow a maximum movement of 6 mm when the fan starts and stops. Restraint assemblies shall include rods, angle brackets and other hardware for field installation. BASES A. Rails (Type R): Design rails with isolator brackets to reduce mounting height of equipment and cradle machines having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. To assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base dimension but not less than 100 mm (four-inches). Where rails are used with neoprene mounts for small fans or close coupled pumps, extend rails to compensate overhang of housing. B. Integral Structural Steel Base (Type B): Design base with isolator brackets to reduce mounting height of equipment which require a complete supplementary rigid base. To assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base dimension, but not less than 100 mm. C. Inertia Base (Type I): This applies to diesel generators, any floor mounted pumps and as shown on drawings. Base shall be a reinforced concrete inertia base. Pour concrete into a welded steel channel frame, incorporating prelocated equipment anchor bolts and pipe sleeves. Level concrete to provide a smooth uniform bearing surface for equipment mounting. Provide grout under uneven supports. Channel depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest dimension of base but not less than 150 mm. Form shall include 13 mm reinforcing bars welded in place on minimum of 203 mm centers running both ways in a layer 40 mm above bottom. The whole assembly shall be supported on spring isolators carrying the base from brakets that keep the centre of gravity low. Use height saving brackets in all mounting locations. Weight of inertia base two to three the weight of equipment supported to provide a maximum peak-to-peak displacement of 2 mm. For pumps use wide enough base, so that the supports for the pipe connections are made on the base. D. Curb Mounted Isolation Base (Type CB): Fabricate from aluminum to fit on top of standard curb with overlap to allow water run-off and have wind and water seals which shall not interfere with spring action. Provide resilient snubbers with 6 mm clearance for wind resistance. Top and bottom bearing surfaces shall have sponge type weather seals. Integral spring isolators shall comply with Spring Isolator (Type S) requirements. 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.5 GENERAL ISOLATOR REQUIREMENTS: A. Elastomeric isolators shall comply with ASTM D2240 and be oil resistant neoprene with a maximum stiffness of 60 durometer and have a straight-line deflection curve. B. Exposure to Weather: Isolators, including springs, exposed to weather shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Hot-dip zinc coating shall be not less than 609 grams per square meter (two ounces per square foot) by weight complying with ASTM A123. In addition, provide limit stops to resist wind velocity. Comply with the design wind velocity for hurricane areas as per VA Construction Standard CD-54. C. Uniform Loading: Select and locate isolators to produce uniform loading and deflection even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed. D. Color code isolator by type and size for easy identification of capacity. 2.6 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Bolt pad mounted equipment, without vibration isolators, to the floor or other support using ASTM A307 standard bolting material; or, equal. B. Floor Mounted Equipment, With Vibration Isolators: Type SS. Where Type N isolators are used provide channel frame lease horizontal restraints bolted to the floor, or other support, on all sides of the equipment. Size and material required for the lease shall be as recommended by the isolator manufacturer. C. On all sides of suspended equipment, provide bracing for rigid supports and provide restraints for resiliently supported equipment. The slack cable restraint method, Mason Industries, or equal, is acceptable. D. Neoprene Pads: Oil-resistant neoprene sheets, of manufacturer's standard hardness and cross-ribbed or waffled pattern. E. Vibration Isolation Springs: Wound-steel compression springs, or high-strength spring alloy steel; with spring diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed height of spring at rated loads. Provide minimum additional travel to solid, equal to 50% of rated deflection. Provide spring wire with elastic limit stress exceeding at solid deflection. F. All-Directional Anchors: Provide all-directional acoustical pipe anchor consisting of telescopic arrangement of 2 sizes of steel tubing separated by minimum 12.7 mm thickness of heavy-duty neoprene and duck, or neoprene isolation material. Provide vertical restraints by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Design for maximum 3450 kPa load on isolation materials, and provide for equal resistance in any direction. Equip anchor with threaded hole on top and 2 holes in base plate for bolting down; or provide welding provisions top and bottom, if indicated. G. Thrust Restraints: Provide horizontal thrust restraints consisting of spring element in series with neoprene pad. Select spring deflection same as for equipment loading. Design so thrust restraints can be pre-set and adjusted 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 in field. Attach horizontal restraints at centerline of thrust and symmetrically on either side of unit. H. Fabricated Equipment Bases: Where supplementary bases are indicated for use with isolator units to support equipment (base not integral with equipment), provide welded rectangular unit, fabricated of structural steel shapes, plates and bars complying with ASTM A36, as shown. Provide welded support brackets at points indicated, and anchor base to spring isolator units. Except as otherwise indicated arrange brackets to result in lowest possible mounting height for equipment, but provide minimum of 25 mm. Provide bolt holes in base matching anchor bolt holes in equipment. 1. 2. I. Inertia Base Frames: Where inertia bases are indicated for use with pad type isolation units to support equipment, provide rectangular structural beam channel, or complete sheet metal box concrete forms for floating foundations, with materials complying with ASTM A36. Frame unit as shown or, if not shown, with minimum depth of 0.08 x longest dimension of base, but not less than 150 mm deep. Size frame as shown or, if not shown, so that weight of frame plus concrete fill will be greater than operating weight of equipment supported. Provide steel reinforcing both ways with both ends of reinforcing butt welded to base framing. 1. 2. J. Where indicated, provide for auxiliary motor slide base under motor or motor slide rails for adjusting belt tension. Design primary base for bolting of rails or slide base in position. Where sizes of base framing members are not indicated, fabricate base with depth of structure not less than 0.10 x longest span of base, rigidly braced to support equipment without deflections or distortions which would be detrimental to equipment or equipment performance. Provide anchor bolts, located as required for equipment anchorage and supported for casting of concrete. Locate bolts as indicated. Provide adjustable bolts in pipe sleeves; for minimum of 12.7 mm (1/2") adjustment around anchor bolts. Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's standard compression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for 3 times rated loading of units. Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 15 degrees off center in any direction before contacting hanger box, and for use with either rod or strap type members, and including acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal contacts. 1. Provide vibration isolation spring with cap in lower part of hanger and rubber hanger element in top, securely retained in unit. 2. K. Provide hangers, precompressed to rated load to limit deflection during installation. Design so hanger may be released after full load is applied. Flexible Pipe Connectors: 1. For non-ferrous piping, provide bronze hose covered with copper tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze-welded to hose. 2. For ferrous piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with stainless steel wire braid with NPT steel nipples or 1030 kPa ANSI flanges, welded to hose. 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 3. Flexible pipe connectors to have screwed ends for pipes 50 mm and under and flanged ends for pipes over 50 mm . 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible pipe connectors of one of the following manufacturers, or approved equal: a. b. c. d. e. Mason Industries Anaconda Aeroquip Corp. Flexonics Keflex, Inc. 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. 3.2 Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS A. General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated. B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units. 3.3 3.4 APPLICATIONS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, select vibration control products in accordance with latest edition of ASHRAE Handbook, Systems Volume, Chapter 35 "Sound and Vibration Control", Table 27. Where more than one type of product is offered, selection is Contractor's option. B. Piping: For piping connected to equipment mounted on vibration control products, install isolation hangers as indicated, and for first 3 points of support for pipe sizes 100 mm and less, for first 4 points of support for pipe sizes 125 mm through 200 mm , and for first 6 points of support for pipe sizes 250 mm and over. C. Comply with NFPA 13 & 14 for requirements related to seismic and vibration requirements. INSTALLATION A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration control materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units have equal deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and are not short- circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for temporary support during installation. B. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated. C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where substrate is not level. D. Install inertia base frames on isolator units as indicated, so that minimum of 25 mm clearance below base will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed and loaded for operation. 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 E. For air handling equipment, install thrust restraints as indicated, and also wherever thrust exceeds 10% of equipment weight. F. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible. G. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible. H. Provide Seismic snubbers on cooling towers, air handling units, pumps, chillers and boilers. I. Vibration Isolation: J. 3.5 1. Connections to Equipment: do not apply any flexible couplings on discharge from fire pumps as per NFPA 20 A. 2. Common Foundation: Mount each electric motor on same foundation as driven machine. Hold driving motor and driven machine in positive rigid alignment with provision for adjusting motor alignment and belt tension. Bases shall be level throughout length and width. Provide shims to facilitate pipe connections, leveling, and bolting. 2. Provide heat shields where elastomers are subject to temperatures over 38 degrees C (l00 degrees F). 4. Extend bases for pipe elbow supports at discharge and suction connections at pumps. Pipe elbow supports shall not short circuit pump vibration to structure. Inspection and Adjustments: Check for vibration and noise transmission through connections, piping, foundations, and walls. Adjust, repair, or replace isolators as required to reduce vibration and noise transmissions to specified levels. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of vibration control work, prepare report showing measured equipment deflections for each major item of equipment as indicated. B. Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely, and that there is no dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short-circuit unit isolation. END OF SECTION 21 05 48 21 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 RELATED DOCUMENTS............................................................................................. 2 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................. 2 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 2 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING ............................................................................ 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................. 3 2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS ....................................................................... 3 PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................ 6 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS ..................................................... 6 VALVE TAGS .............................................................................................................. 7 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS ......................................................................... 8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ..................................................................................... 8 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes mechanical identification materials and devices. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices. B. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on tag, room or space location of valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Besides mounted copies, furnish copies for maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 21 Sections. If more than one type is specified for application, selection is the Contractor's option, but provide one selection for each product category. B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped. Nameplates for external and wet applications to be stainless steel. C. 1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data. 2. Location: Accessible and visible. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared with letter sizes conforming to recommendations of ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 30 mm for ducts, and 20 mm for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 1. Material: Brass. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. enamel in colors D. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl type with permanent adhesive, complying with ASME A13.1. E. Pipes, Including Insulation: around pipe at each location. Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees F. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by the Engineer. 1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow. G. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap on, color-coded, complying with ASME A13.1. H. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, selfadhesive, vinyl tape, at least 0.08 mm thick. 1. 2. Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65 mm for larger pipes. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 I. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6 mm letters for piping system abbreviation and 13 mm sequenced numbers. Include 4 mm hole for fastener. 1. Material: 0.8 mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum for indoor and internal applications, and stainless steel for external and wet applications. Size: 40 mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 2. J. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks. K. Access Panel Markers: 2 mm thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 3 mm center hole for attachment. L. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include screws. 1. Frame: Extruded aluminum. 2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5 mm, single- thickness glass. M. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. 1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification. 2. Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive. N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Green: Cooling equipment and components. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following: a. b. c. d. O. Name and plan number. Equipment service. Design capacity. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed. Size: 65 mm by 100 mm for control devices, dampers, and valves; 115 mm by 150 mm for equipment. 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 P. Plasticized T a g s : Preprinted o r p a r t i a l l y p r e p r i n t e d , a c c i d e n t -prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing. 1. 2. 3. Size: 85 mm by 145 mm. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE. Q. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. R. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of same name are indicated. 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ASME A13.1. C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by following method: 1. D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and larger by following method: 1. E. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 20 mm wide, lapped a minimum of 40 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 40 mm wide, lapped a minimum of 75 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, ceilings, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations according to the following: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at a maximum of 15 m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 7.5 m in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers. F. Route Markers for underground services: 1. Route markers for underground abbreviations as follows: services shall have standardized 2. FPL - Fire Pipeline 3. FUEL - Fuel Pipeline 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 4. All presently used services shall be classified under the aforesaid categories as deemed relevant. If new services are identified and cannot be logically classified under any of the aforesaid categories, then such services shall be provided with a new, separate abbreviated standard, as approved by the Engineer. 5. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the abbreviations shall be imprinted clearly in English letters of 12 mm height and 3 mm depth, as per lettering sample shown, on a 100 mm diameter, 10 mm thick circular castaluminum stud which has an insert length of at least 100 mm, to allow it to be set into concrete. The insert section shall have a thickness sufficient to prevent break-off of the stud and shall be provided with “back-cut” indentations to ensure that the route marker is firmly held in place by the surrounding concrete. 6. The route markers shall be set into the ground surface at finished grade level (FGL) in areas where concrete/tile paving or asphalt is provided. At locations where the FGL finish is bare earth, the route markers shall be embedded onto the top of a concrete pillar which is buried into the earth as detailed below. 7. The concrete pillars shall be of class P1, filled into 150 mm diameter GRP pipe 600 mm long. The pillars shall be buried into the ground to a depth of 400 mm with the remaining 200 mm projecting above FGL. 8. The route markers shall be placed along the center line of the underground service route and shall be located at every 75 m along straight runs of the underground service and at every bend on the route. Spacing on curved sections shall be suitably reduced in consultation with the Engineer. Where the underground service is laid in pre-formed raceways that are provided with covers, that cannot accept embedding of the route marker studs, these shall be located at FGL adjacent to the relevant raceway, as approved by the Engineer. 9. Samples of all the various route markers shall be submitted for approval to the Engineer. 10. All buried underground services including, fire, pipes etc … shall be further identified to show service below. The buried pipes shall be covered with plastic sheet identifying type of service. Sheet to extend 300 mm on both sides of pipe and shall be located at 300 mm above identified pipe. Agree with the engineer on colour of plastic sheet and identification letters. 3.2 VALVE TAGS A. B. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in valve schedule. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color scheme, and with captions similar to those indicated in the following: 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 C. Tag Material: Brass or aluminum for indoor and internal applications, and stainless steel for outdoor and wet applications. D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following: 1. 2. 3. E. Tag Color: According to the following: 1. 2. 3. F. Fire Protection: 40 mm, round. Sprinkler: 40 mm, round. Gas: 40 mm, round. Fire Protection: Red. Sprinkler: Red. Gas: Yellow. Letter Color: According to the following: 1. Fire Protection: White. 2. Sprinkler: White. 3. Gas: Black. G. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in exposed sign outside concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or similar concealment. 1. 3.4 Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. Fire department hose valves and hose stations. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units. Pumps and similar motor-driven units. Tanks and pressure vessels. Strainers, filters and similar equipment. Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in unoccupied spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions. B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts. END OF SECTION 21 05 53 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE – SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 8 PGC-230033-C-P8 21 12 00 STANDPIPE SYSTEM CONTENTS PART 1 - GENERAL.............................................................................................................. 3 1.1 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 3 1.2 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 3 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 5 1.3.1 Qualifications of Installer ............................................................................................ 5 1.3.2 System As-Built Drawings ........................................................................................... 6 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................................................... 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................. 7 2.1 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS ............................................................................... 7 2.1.1 Pipe and Fittings ......................................................................................................... 7 2.1.2 Pipe Hangers and Supports ........................................................................................ 7 2.1.3 Valves......................................................................................................................... 7 2.1.3.1 Hose Valves ............................................................................................................. 7 2.1.4 Identification Signs ...................................................................................................... 7 2.1.5 Water flow Test Connection ........................................................................................ 7 2.1.6 Main Drains ................................................................................................................ 8 2.1.7 Pipe Sleeves ............................................................................................................... 8 2.1.7.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs ....................................... 8 2.1.7.2 Sleeves in Partitions .................................................................................................. 8 2.1.8 Escutcheon Plates ...................................................................................................... 8 2.1.9 Fire Department Connections ..................................................................................... 8 2.1.10 Alarm Valves............................................................................................................. 9 2.1.11 Water Motor Alarms .................................................................................................. 9 2.1.12 Pressure Switch ........................................................................................................ 9 2.1.13 Waterflow Detector ................................................................................................... 9 2.1.14 Fire Hose Cabinets ................................................................................................... 9 2.1.15 Valve Tamper Switch .............................................................................................. 10 2.1.16 Fire Pumps ............................................................................................................. 10 2.1.17 Backflow Preventer ................................................................................................. 10 2.2 BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS ...................................................................................... 10 2.2.1 Buried Pipe and Fittings ............................................................................................ 10 2.2.2 Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape ........................................................... 10 2.3 ELECTRICAL WORK ................................................................................................. 11 PART 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 12 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING ................................................. 12 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS ................................... 12 STANDPIPE SYSTEM INSTALLATION ..................................................................... 12 DISINFECTION.......................................................................................................... 12 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.5 FIELD PAINTING ....................................................................................................... 12 3.6 ELECTRICAL WORK ................................................................................................. 13 3.7 FLUSHING................................................................................................................. 13 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ...................................................................................... 13 3.8.1 Preliminary Tests ...................................................................................................... 13 3.8.2 Formal Inspection and Tests (Acceptance Tests)...................................................... 13 3.8.2.1 Flow Test ............................................................................................................... 13 3.8.2.2 Alarm Testing......................................................................................................... 14 3.8.3 Additional Tests ........................................................................................................ 14 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) a. 2. 6. 1.2 FM APP GUIDE Approval Guide FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approve Backflow Prevention Assemblies NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) a. NFPA 13 (2010; Errata 10-1; TIA 10-1; TIA 11-2) Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems b. NFPA 14 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems c. NFPA 24 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances d. NFPA 70 (2011; Errata 2 2012) National Electrical Code e. NFPA 72 (2010; TIA 10-4) National Fire Alarm and Signalling Code UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) a. 7. (2010e1) Standard Specification for Flat Glass FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR) a. 5. ASTM C1036 FM GLOBAL (FM) a. 4. (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a. 3. AWWA C651 UL Fire Prot Dir (2012) Fire Protection Equipment Directory UAE FIRE & LIFE SAFETY CODE OF PRACTICE SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 a. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals 1- Hydraulic Calculations: Submit hydraulic calculations to the Engineer for approval. b. SD-02 Shop Drawings Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Literature: Submit shop drawings and manufacturers literature on fire protection system components, according to the following listing: 1. Hanger Supports 2. Brackets 3. Hangers 4. Clamps 5. List of Manufacturers 6. Piping Layout and Details 7. Valves 8. Pipe 9. Fittings 10.Leak Test Certificates 11.Operation and Maintenance Instructions 12.Mechanical couplings 13.Fire Department Breaching Points 14.Alarm valves 15.Water motor alarms 16.Pressure switch 17.Water flow detector 18.Fire hose cabinets 19.Valve tamper switch 20.Backflow preventer c. SD-03 Product Data 1. Technical Data Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for fire protection materials and products. Manufacturer's literature and data sheets are to be submitted indicating the necessary installation dimensions, weights, materials and performance information. The performance is to include capacities, pressure drop, design and operating pressure, temperatures, and similar data. Complete electrical data, including power conditions, and identifying types and numbers, to be included. Where pertinent, electrical diagrams are to be provided. Literature and data sheets may be provided by standard sales sheets marked to indicate the specific equipment provided. 2. Certificate of Installation: Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects. 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 3. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed fire protection piping and products; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 4. Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data and parts lists for fire protection materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, approval drawings, approval calculations, certificate of installation, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division1. Contractor is to furnish data covering model, type and serial numbers, capacities, maintenance and operation of each item of equipment or apparatus. Operating instructions are to cover all phases of control. 5. Valve Schedule: Furnish a printed schedule, in duplicate, describing each valve by number, giving locations and service for which used. System identification to be as stipulated in the other sections of these specifications. One copy of this schedule is to be mounted under glass in a simple black enamel steel frame and hung in the mechanical equipment room where directed. The other copy is to be submitted to the Engineer before completion of the work. d. SD-05 Design Data Design Analysis and Calculations e. SD-06 Test Reports Test reports shall be submitted for the following tests in accordance with the paragraph entitled, "System Testing," of this section 1. Pressure Tests 2. System Operating Tests 3. Air Tests 4. Valve-Operating Tests 5. Drainage Tests Data which describes more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to indicate which type the Contractor intends to provide. Submit one original for each item and clear, legible, first-generation photocopies for the remainder of the specified copies. Incomplete or illegible photocopies will not be accepted. Partial submittals will not be accepted. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Qualifications of Installer Prior to commencing work, submit data showing that the specialized sub-Contractor has successfully installed fire extinguishing standpipe systems of the same type and design 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having the required experience. Include the names and locations of at least five installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate the type and design of each system, and certify that the system has performed satisfactorily for a period of at least 18 months. Qualifications of System Technician: Installation drawings, shop drawing and as-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an individual who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and is currently certified by UAE Civil Defence. Contractor shall submit data for approval showing the name and certification of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings. 1.3.2 System As-Built Drawings Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, submit a complete set of asbuilt drawings of each system. Furnish as-built (record) working drawings in addition to the as-built drawings required by Division 1, "General Requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Protect stored equipment from weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt, dust, and other contaminants 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for connections. Make changes in piping sizes through tapered reducing pipe fittings; bushings will not be permitted. Perform welding in the shop; field welding will not be permitted. [Conceal piping in areas with suspended ceiling.] 2.1.1 Pipe and Fittings NFPA 14, except as modified herein. Steel piping shall be Schedule 40 for sizes less than 200 mm 8 inches, and Schedule 30 or 40 for sizes 200 mm 8 inches and larger. Fittings shall be welded, threaded, or grooved-end type. Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings and fittings which use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe when pressure is applied will not be permitted. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings shall be permitted in pipe sizes 40 mm 1.5 inches and larger. Fittings shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM APP GUIDE approved for use in dry /wet pipe sprinkler systems. Fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. Steel piping with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 shall not be threaded.[Side outlet tees using rubber gasketed fittings shall not be permitted. Pipe and fittings shall be metal. 2.1.2 Pipe Hangers and Supports Provide in accordance with NFPA 14. 2.1.3 Valves NFPA 14. Provide valves of types approved for fire service. Hose and gate valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation. Provide isolation and check valves as required by NFPA 14. Isolation valves shall be OS&Y type. Check valves shall be flanged clear opening swing-check type with flanged inspection and access cover plate for sizes 100 mm 4 inches and larger. 2.1.3.1 Hose Valves Provide bronze [pressure regulating type] hose valve with 65 mm National Standard male hose threads, and 65 mm NH female by 40 mm IPT male reducer with cap and chain. 2.1.4 Identification Signs NFPA 14. Attach properly lettered and approved metal signs to each valve and alarm device. 2.1.5 Water flow Test Connection Provide test connections approximately 1.83 m above the floor for each standpipe system or portion of each standpipe system equipped with an alarm device; locate downstream and adjacent to each alarm actuating device. Provide test connection piping to a location where the discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged without property damage. Discharge to janitor sinks or similar fixtures shall not be permitted. Provide discharge orifice equivalent to 15 mm sprinkler orifice. 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.1.6 Main Drains Provide separate drain piping to discharge at safe points outside each building or to sight cones attached to drains of adequate size to readily receive the full flow from each drain under maximum pressure. Provide auxiliary drains as required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. 2.1.7 Pipe Sleeves Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, floors, roofs and partitions. Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, floors, roofs and partitions. Provide one inch minimum clearance between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve or core-drilled hole. Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. Seal space at both ends of the sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or provide a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomeric seal. In fire walls and fire floors, seal both ends of pipe sleeves or core-drilled holes with UL listed fill, void, or cavity material. 2.1.7.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs Provide hot-dip galvanized steel, ductile-iron, or cast-iron sleeves. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the coredrilled hole are completely grouted smooth. Extend sleeves in floor slabs 76 mm above finished floors. 2.1.7.2 Sleeves in Partitions Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet. 2.1.8 Escutcheon Plates Provide one piece or split hinge type metal plates for piping passing through walls, floors, and ceilings in both exposed and concealed spaces. Provide polished stainless steel plates or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces. Securely anchor plates in place. 2.1.9 Fire Department Connections Provide Wall Type Siamese Connections: Provide where indicated, wall type cast brass flush Siamese connections and escutcheon plate assembly, with two, 65 mm fire department inlets with female hose connections, fire hose connection screw thread adapted to locally used hoses, equipped with individual drop clapper valves, equipped with plugs and chains, construction features as indicated, and constructed with the following additional construction features: Finish: Chrome plate. Inlet Pipe: 100 mm pipe, 125 mm pipe, or 150 mm pipe (pipe size). Cast Lettering: "AUTO. SPKR."/”STAND PIPE”. English and Arabic Escutcheon: 180 mm x 360 mm rectangular. 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.1.10 Alarm Valves Provide variable pressure type alarm valve complete with retarding chamber, alarm test valve, alarm shutoff valve, drain valve, pressure gages, accessories, and appurtenances for the proper operation of the system. The alarm shut-off valve in the piping between the alarm valve and the alarm pressure switch shall be a UL listed electrically supervised quarter-turn valve. Connection of switch shall be under Section [28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM.] [28 31 63.00 20 ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.] 2.1.11 Water Motor Alarms Provide alarms of the approved weather proof and guarded type, to sound locally on the flow of water in each corresponding standpipe. Mount alarms on the outside of the outer walls of each building. Provide separate drain piping directly to exterior of building. 2.1.12 Pressure Switch Provide switch with circuit opener or closer [SPDT contacts] for the automatic transmittal of an alarm over the facility fire alarm system. Connect into the building fire alarm system. Alarm actuating device shall have mechanical diaphragm controlled retard device adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds and shall instantly recycle. 2.1.13 Waterflow Detector Provide vane-type waterflow detector. Provide detector with adjustable retard feature to prevent false alarms caused by momentary water surges. Connect into the building fire alarm system. [Alarm actuating device shall have mechanical diaphragm controlled retard device adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds and shall instantly recycle.] Provide detector in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.1.14 Fire Hose Cabinets A. Recessed type, with stainless steel body and trim and door. Body and trim to be 16 gauge and door 20 gauge thickness. Door to have full panel double strength glass ( or solid as indicated or approved at site ) with "Fire Hose" decal. Hose rack cabinet to be supplied from factory with the following equipment: 1. one 65 mm pressure restricting angle valve, 2. one 65 mm x 40 mm chrome finished brass reducer, 3. one stainless steel hose rack with rack nipple, 4. one 40 mm unlined linen fire hose 30 m long, with brass hose couplings attached. 5. one 4o mm brass nozzle, 250 mm long, 15 mm discharge, with chrome finish, 6. one 4.5 kg ABC nitrogen operated dry chemical fire extinguisher, with steel body and stainless steel finish. B. Surface mounted type, with clear anodized, 16 gauge thick stainless steel body, trim and door. Door to have full panel double strength glass ( or solid as indicated or approved at site ) with "Fire Hose" decal. Hose rack cabinet to be supplied from factory with the following equipment: 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 1. one 65 mm pressure restricting angle valve, 2. one 65 mm x 40 mm chrome finished brass reducer, 3. one stainless steel hose rack with rack nipple, 4. one 40 mm unlined linen fire hose 30 m long, with brass hose couplings attached. 5. one 40 mm brass nozzle, 250 mm long, 15 mm discharge, with chrome finish, 6. one 4.5 kg ABC nitrogen operated dry chemical fire extinguisher, with stainless steel body . C. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. Provide pipe knockouts. 2.1.15 Valve Tamper Switch Provide valve tamper switch(es) to monitor the open position of valve(s) controlling water supply to the standpipe system. Switch contacts shall transfer from the normal (valve open) position to the off-normal (valve closed) position during the first two revolutions of the hand wheel or when the stem of the valve has moved not more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal position. Switch shall be tamper resistant. Removal of the cover shall cause switch to operate into the off-normal position. 2.1.16 Fire Pumps Provide as specified in Section 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS. 2.1.17 Backflow Preventer Provide [reduced pressure principle] or [double check] valve assembly backflow preventer with OS&Y gate valve on both ends. Each check valve shall have a drain. Backflow prevention assemblies shall have current "Certificate of Approval from the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research, FCCCHR List. Listing of the specific make, model, design, and size in the FCCCHR List shall be acceptable as the required documentation." 2.2 BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS 2.2.1 Buried Pipe and Fittings NFPA 24, outside coated, cement lined, ductile iron pipe and fittings or HDPE or as indicated on plans for piping under the building and to a point 1.52 m outside the building walls. Anchor the joints in accordance with NFPA 24 using pipe clamps and steel rods. Minimum pipe size shall be 150 mm. Minimum depth of cover shall be one meter. Piping more than 1.52 m outside the building walls shall be provided under Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION. 2.2.2 Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape Provide detectable tape in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.3 ELECTRICAL WORK Provide electrical work associated with this section under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except for fire alarm wiring. Provide fire alarm wiring and connection to fire alarm systems under Section [ 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM], [28 31 63.00 20 ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.],[this section in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 72] 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING Provide under this section as specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. 3.2 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS Connections to existing water supply system are specified in Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION. 3.3 STANDPIPE SYSTEM INSTALLATION Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with the NFPA standards referenced herein. Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. [Conceal piping to the maximum extent possible. Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed.] Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for all connections Make changes in piping sizes through standard reducing pipe fittings; do not use bushings. Cut pipe accurately and work into place without springing or forcing. Ream pipe ends and free pipe and fittings from burrs. Clean with solvent to remove all varnish and cutting oil prior to assemble. Make screw joints with PTFE tape applied to male thread only. 3.4 DISINFECTION Disinfect new water piping from the point of connection at the water main and existing water piping affected by the Contractor's operation in accordance with AWWA C651. Exercise caution when mixing chlorine disinfectant solutions. Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million of free available chlorine and allow solution to stand for a minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from systems with clean water until maximum residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million. Obtain at least two consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from new water piping, analyze by a certified laboratory, and submit results prior to new water piping being placed into service. 3.5 FIELD PAINTING Field painting of fire extinguishing standpipe system shall be specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Field painting requirements for "Fire Extinguishing Sprinkler Systems" shall apply. 3.5.1 Piping Labels Provide permanent labels in mechanical rooms, spaced at 6 meters maximum intervals along pipe, indicating "STANDPIPE". 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 12 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.6 ELECTRICAL WORK Provide electrical work associated with this section under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except for fire alarm wiring. Provide fire alarm wiring and connection to fire alarm systems under Section [ 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM], [28 31 63.00 20ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE INTERIOR ALARM SYSTEM.], [this section in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 72]. 3.7 FLUSHING Flush the piping system with potable water in accordance with NFPA 14. Continue flushing operation until water is clear, but for not less than 10 minutes. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Prior to initial operation, inspect equipment and piping systems for compliance with drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's submittals. Perform tests in the presence of PGC Engineer to determine conformance with the specified requirements. 3.8.1 Preliminary Tests Each piping system shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 14 and NFPA 24 and shall show no leakage or reduction in gauge pressure after 2 hours. The Contractor shall conduct complete preliminary tests, which shall encompass all aspects of system operation. [Individually test alarms, and all other components and accessories to demonstrate proper functioning. Test water flow alarms by flowing water.] When tests have been completed and all necessary corrections made, submit to PGC Engineer a signed and dated certificate, similar to that specified in NFPA 13, attesting to the satisfactory completion of all testing and stating that the system is in operating condition. Also include a written request for a formal inspection and test. 3.8.2 Formal Inspection and Tests (Acceptance Tests) PGC Engineer and / or committee, Fire Protection Engineer, (Civil Defence or Military fire brigade) will witness formal tests and approve all systems before they are accepted. The system shall be considered ready for such testing only after all necessary preliminary tests have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected to the satisfaction of PGC Engineer and written certification to this effect is received by the Fire Protection Engineer. Submit the request for formal inspection at least 15 working days prior to the date the inspection is to take place. Experienced technicians regularly employed by the Contractor in the installation of both the mechanical and electrical portions of such systems shall be present during the inspection and shall conduct the testing. All instruments, personnel, appliances and equipment for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor is responsible to provide test water in case instructed by PGC All necessary tests encompassing all aspects of system operation shall be made including the following, and any deficiency found shall be corrected and the system retested at no cost to the Government. 3.8.2.1 Flow Test Perform flow tests of each standpipe riser in accordance with NFPA 14. Affix [0-200] [0300] psi pressure gauges to lowest hose valve and next-to-highest hose valve. Connect lined, 65 mm diameter fire hose with underwriter's playpipe to highest hose valve and flow at least 946 L/m ( 250 gpm) for 5 minutes from standpipe to a safe location outside the 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 13 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 building. [For dry pipe system, supply system through 65 mm fire hose connected to the nearest fire hydrant which is Furnish hose, nozzles and fittings required for this test. 3.8.2.2 Alarm Testing a. Each pressure switch, water flow detector, and water motor gong shall be activated by flow of water. b. Each valve tamper switch shall be activated by partially closing the associated control valve. c. Alarm annunciation at the fire alarm control panel shall be verified. d. Circuit supervision shall be demonstrated. 3.8.3 Additional Tests When deficiencies, defects or malfunctions develop during the tests required, all further testing of the system shall be suspended until proper adjustments, corrections or revisions have been made to assure proper performance of the system. If these revisions require more than a nominal delay, the PGC Engineer shall be notified when the additional work has been completed, to arrange a new inspection and test of the system. All tests required shall be repeated prior to final acceptance, unless directed otherwise. END OF SECTION 21 12 00 21 12 00 STAND PIPE SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 14 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 SECTION 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS CONTENTS PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 4 1.1 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 4 1.2 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 6 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 8 1.3.1 Qualifications of Installer .......................................................................................... 8 1.3.2 System As-Built Drawings ........................................................................................... 9 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................................................... 9 PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................... 10 2.1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................. 10 2.2 UNDERGROUND PIPING MATERIALS..................................................................... 10 2.2.1 Type CIWP ............................................................................................................... 10 2.2.2 Type DIWP ............................................................................................................... 10 2.3 ABOVEGROUND PIPING MATERIALS ..................................................................... 11 2.3.1 Type BCS - Black Carbon Steel ................................................................................ 11 2.3.2 Type GCS - Galvanized Carbon Steel ....................................................................... 11 2.4 SUPPORTING ELEMENTS ....................................................................................... 12 2.4.1 Building-Structure Attachments ................................................................................. 12 2.4.1.1 Anchor Devices, Concrete and Masonry .................................................................. 12 2.4.1.2 Beam Clamps ......................................................................................................... 12 2.4.1.3 C-Clamps ............................................................................................................... 13 2.4.1.4 Inserts, Concrete..................................................................................................... 13 2.4.2.1 Single Pipes............................................................................................................ 13 2.4.2.2 Parallel Fire-Protection Pipes ................................................................................. 13 2.4.3 Vertical-Pipe Attachments ......................................................................................... 13 2.4.4 Hanger Rods and Fixtures ........................................................................................ 13 2.4.5 Supplementary Steel................................................................................................. 13 2.5 FIRE-DEPARTMENT BREECHING CONNECTIONS ................................................ 13 2.5.1 Wall Siamese............................................................................................................ 14 2.5.2 Sidewalk Siamese .................................................................................................... 14 2.5.3 Wall Hydrant ............................................................................................................. 14 2.5.4 Roof Manifold ........................................................................................................... 14 2.6 RISER ALARM EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................... 14 2.6.1 Wet-Pipe Alarm Check Valve .................................................................................... 14 2.6.2 Standard Check Valve .............................................................................................. 14 2.6.3 Dry-Pipe Alarm Check Valve ..................................................................................... 14 2.6.4 Water-Flow Alarm Device ......................................................................................... 15 2.6.4.1 Water Motor Gong Local Alarm .............................................................................. 15 2.6.4.2 Pressure Switch Remote Alarm ............................................................................... 15 2.6.4.3 Vane-Type Flow Alarm ............................................................................................ 15 2.6.4.4 Electric Motor Gong................................................................................................. 15 2.7 DRY-PIPE MAINTENANCE AIR ................................................................................ 15 2.7.1 Independent Source ................................................................................................. 15 2.7.2 Continuous Source ................................................................................................... 15 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.7.3 Retard Orifice ........................................................................................................... 15 2.8 STANDPIPE EQUIPMENT AND FIRE HOSE CABINET STATIONS.......................... 16 2.8.1 Fire Hose Cabinet Stations ....................................................................................... 16 2.8.2 Firehouse Racks and Hoses ..................................................................................... 16 2.8.3 Standpipe-Mounted Hose Racks and Hoses ............................................................. 16 2.8.4 Hose Reels and Hoses ............................................................................................. 16 2.8.5 Standpipe Valve........................................................................................................ 17 2.8.6 Fire-Hose Cabinet ..................................................................................................... 17 2.9 SPRINKLER HEADS ................................................................................................. 18 2.9.1 Head Categories ....................................................................................................... 18 2.9.1.1 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS TYPE SP-1 ................................................................. 18 2.9.1.2 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS TYPE SP-2: ............................................................... 18 2.9.1.3 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS TYPE SP-3: ............................................................... 18 2.9.2 Head Types .............................................................................................................. 18 2.9.3 Temperature Rating .................................................................................................. 19 2.9.4Spares ....................................................................................................................... 19 2.9.5 Head Protection ........................................................................................................ 19 2.10 VALVES ..................................................................................................................... 19 2.10.1 Underground ........................................................................................................... 19 2.10.1.1 Post Indicator Valve Assembly (PIV) ...................................................................... 19 2.10.1.2 Fire-Hydrant Service Valves .................................................................................. 19 2.10.1.3 Valve Boxes .......................................................................................................... 19 2.10.2 Aboveground .......................................................................................................... 20 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS................................................................................ 20 2.11.1 Bituminous Coating ................................................................................................. 20 2.11.2 Bolting .................................................................................................................... 20 2.11.3 Elastomer Calk ....................................................................................................... 20 2.11.4 Escutcheons ........................................................................................................... 20 2.11.5 Flashing .................................................................................................................. 21 2.11.5.1 Lead ..................................................................................................................... 21 2.11.5.2 Copper ................................................................................................................. 21 2.11.6 Flange Gaskets........................................................................................................ 21 2.11.7 Pipe-Thread Compounds ......................................................................................... 21 2.12 FIRE-PROTECTION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION ...................................................... 21 2.12.1 Diagrams ................................................................................................................ 21 2.12.2 Metal Tags .............................................................................................................. 21 2.12.3 Service Labeling ..................................................................................................... 22 2.13 PAINTING .................................................................................................................. 22 PART 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................................... 23 3.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 23 3.2 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION ............................................................... 23 3.2.1 Construction Tolerances for Types CIWP and DIWP ................................................ 23 3.2.2 Fire Hydrants ............................................................................................................ 24 3.2.3 Valve Boxes .............................................................................................................. 24 3.2.4 Thrust Blocks ............................................................................................................ 24 3.3 ABOVEGROUND PIPING-SYSTEMS INSTALLATION .............................................. 24 3.4 SOUND STOPPING .................................................................................................. 25 3.5 SLEEVES .................................................................................................................. 25 3.6 ESCUTCHEONS ....................................................................................................... 26 3.7 FLASHINGS .............................................................................................................. 26 3.8 BRANCH-LINE TESTERS ......................................................................................... 26 3.9 PAINTING .................................................................................................................. 26 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.10 ELECTRICAL WORK ................................................................................................. 26 3.11 SYSTEM TESTING .................................................................................................... 27 3.11.1 Test Gages ............................................................................................................. 27 3.11.2 Pneumatic Testing .................................................................................................. 27 3.11.3 Test and Acceptable Criteria ................................................................................... 27 3.12 DISINFECTION.......................................................................................................... 28 3.13 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING ................................................................................... 28 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI) a) AISC/AISI 121 (2004) Standard Definitions for Use in the Design of Steel Structures 2. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) a) AWWA C104/A21.4 (2008) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water b) AWWA C110/A21.10 (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water c) AWWA C111/A21.11 (2000) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings d) AWWA C151/A21.51 (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water 3. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) a) ASME A112.18.1 (2005) Standard for Plumbing Fixture Fittings d) ASME B16.1 (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 125 and 250 e) ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300 d) ASME B16.34 (2009) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End 4. f) ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron f) Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300 g) ASME B16.4 (2006) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 125 and 250 h) ASME B16.9 (2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings i) ASME B31.1 (2007; Addenda 2008; Addenda 2009) Power Piping ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a) ASTM A 1008/A 1008M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened b) ASTM A 126 (2004) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 c) ASTM A 135/A 135M (2009) Standard Specification for Electric-ResistanceWelded Steel Pipe d) ASTM A 183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts e) ASTM A 197/A 197M (2000; R 2006) Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron f) ASTM A 234/A 234M (2007) Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service g) ASTM A 307 (2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength h) ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless i) ASTM A 563 (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts j) ASTM A 563M (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric) k) ASTM A 568/A 568M (2009a) Standard Specifications for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High- Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for l) ASTM B 370 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction m) ASTM B 749 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet and Plate n) Products o) ASTM C 592 (2008a) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type) p) ASTM C 920 (2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants q) ASTM D 2000 (2008) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications r) ASTM F 568M (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners 5. FM GLOBAL (FM) a) FM P7825a (2005) Approval Guide Fire Protection 6. MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS) 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 a) MSS SP-58 (2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture 7. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) a) NFPA 13 (2010) Installation of Sprinkler Systems b) NFPA 13E (2010) Fire Department Operations in Properties Protected by Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems c) NFPA 14 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrants and Hose Systems d) NFPA 1961 (2007) Standard on Fire Hose e) NFPA 1963 (2009) Standard for Fire Hose Connections e) NFPA 24 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances f) 8. 9. NFPA 291 (2010) Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants h) NFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code - 2008 Edition U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD) a) MIL-C-18480 (Rev B; Notice 2) Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent, Coal-Tar Base b) MIL-STD-101 (Rev B) Color Code for Pipelines & for Compressed Gas Cylinders U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA) a) FED-STD-595 (Rev C) Colors Used in Government Procurement b) FS FF-S-325 (Int Amd 3) Shield, Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry) c) FS WW-P-421 (Rev D) Pipe, Cast, Gray and Ductile Iron, Pressure (For Water and Other Liquids) 10. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) a) UL 19 (2001) Standard for Lined Fire Hose and Hose Assemblies b) UL 6 (2007) Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel 11. UAE FIRE & LIFE SAFETY CODE OF PRACTICE 1.2 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 a. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals 1- Hydraulic Calculations: Submit hydraulic calculations to the Engineer for approval. b. SD-02 Shop Drawings Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Literature: Submit shop drawings and manufacturers literature on fire protection system components, according to the following listing: 1. Hanger Supports 2. Brackets 3. Hangers 4. Clamps 5. List of Manufacturers 6. Piping Layout and Details 7. Valves 8. Piping materials 9. Fittings 10. Leak Test Certificates 11. Operation and Maintenance Instructions 12. Mechanical couplings 13. Fire Department Breaching Points 14. Alarm valves 15. Water motor alarms 16. Pressure switch 17. Water flow detector 18. Fire hose cabinets 19. Valve tamper switch 20. Backflow preventer 21. Compressor 22. Sprinkler Heads 23. Underground Piping Materials c. SD-03 Product Data 1. Technical Data Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for fire protection materials and products. Manufacturer's literature and data sheets are to be submitted indicating the necessary installation dimensions, weights, materials and performance information. The performance is to include capacities, pressure drop, design and operating pressure, temperatures, and similar data. Complete electrical data, including power conditions, and identifying types and numbers, to be included. Where pertinent, electrical diagrams are to be provided. Literature and data sheets may be provided by standard sales sheets marked to indicate the specific equipment provided. 2. Certificate of Installation: Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects. 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 3. As Build Drawings: At project closeout, submit As Build drawings of installed fire protection piping and products; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 4. Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data and parts lists for fire protection materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, approval drawings, approval calculations, certificate of installation, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division1. Contractor is to furnish data covering model, type and serial numbers, capacities, maintenance and operation of each item of equipment or apparatus. Operating instructions are to cover all phases of control. 5. Valve Schedule: Furnish a printed schedule, in duplicate, describing each valve by number, giving locations and service for which used. System identification to be as stipulated in the other sections of these specifications. One copy of this schedule is to be mounted under glass in a simple black enamel steel frame and hung in the mechanical equipment room where directed. The other copy is to be submitted to the Engineer before completion of the work. d. SD-05 Design Data Design Analysis and Calculations e. SD-06 Test Reports Test reports shall be submitted for the following tests in accordance with the paragraph entitled, "System Testing," of this section 1. Pressure Tests 2. System Operating Tests 3. Air Tests 4. Valve-Operating Tests 5. Drainage Tests Data which describes more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to indicate which type the Contractor intends to provide. Submit one original for each item and clear, legible, first-generation photocopies for the remainder of the specified copies. Incomplete or illegible photocopies will not be accepted. Partial submittals will not be accepted. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Qualifications of Installer Prior to commencing work, submit data showing that the specialized subContractor has successfully installed fire extinguishing standpipe and sprinkler systems of the same type and design as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having the required experience. Include the names and locations of at least five installations where the Contractor, 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 or the subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate the type and design of each system, and certify that the system has performed satisfactorily for a period of at least 18 months. Qualifications of System Technician: Installation drawings, shop drawing and as-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an individual who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and is currently certified by UAE Civil Defence. Contractor shall submit data for approval showing the name and certification of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings. 1.3.2 System As-Built Drawings Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, submit a complete set of as-built drawings of each system. Furnish as-built (record) working drawings in addition to the as-built drawings required by Division 1, "General Requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Protect stored equipment from weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt, dust, and other contaminants 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL Fire-protection system materials and equipment provided under this section shall conform to the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or the Factory Mutual (FM P7825a) Approval Guide. Products with UL label or seal or listing in UL 6, and products with FM label or listed in the FM P7825a Approval Guide are acceptable fire-protection system materials and equipment. Materials and equipment furnished shall be compatible with existing system. Equipment and Performance Data shall be submitted for fire protection sprinkler systems consisting of information on use life, system functional flows, safety features, and mechanical automated details. 2.2 UNDERGROUND PIPING MATERIALS Ells, tees, reducing tees, wyes, couplings, increasers, crosses, transitions, and end caps shall be the same type and class of material as the pipe or shall be material having equal or superior physical and chemical properties. 2.2.1 Type CIWP Cast-iron water pipe shall be mechanical joint or push-on type, centrifugally cast, UL listed and labeled, conforming to FS WW-P-421and, as applicable, to AWWA C151/A21.51, AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C111/A21.11. Piping shall be Class 150. Bell-and-spigot fittings shall conform to AWWA C110/A21.10. For FS WW-P-421 wall-thickness criteria only, depth of cover shall be 1500 millimeter unless drawings indicate less, in which case, drawing requirements shall apply; field-laying conditions shall be B (flat-bottom trench, without blocks, tamped backfill). Flanged cast-iron pipe fittings shall be Class 125 conforming to ASME B16.1. Piping and fittings shall be coated on the [inside] and [outside] with a bituminous sealer in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4. [Piping and fittings shall be coated on the inside with a mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4.] Restraining joint against endwise separation due to internal pressure may be accomplished by NFPA-recommended metal harness consisting of clamping devices and bolting or by hardened-metal retainers molded into a push-on gasket and engaged by a groove in the spigot end. Where electrical continuity is indicated, pipe shall be supplied with factory-brazed heavy cross section copper connectors to be joined with copper fasteners upon joint assembly. Connectors, as a minimum, shall be equal to No. 1/0. 2.2.2 Type DIWP Ductile-iron water pipe shall be mechanical-joint or push-on type, centrifugally cast, UL listed and labeled, conforming to applicable provisions of AWWA C111/A21.11, and AWWA C151/A21.51. Wall- thickness criteria shall be 1380 kilopascal 200-pounds per square inch (psi) working pressure plus 690 kilopascal 100-psi surge allowance, AASHTO H-20 loading with specified trench conditions. Gasket elastomeric shall be chloroprene. Piping shall be coated on the [inside] and [outside] with a bituminous sealer in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4. [Piping and fittings shall be coated on the inside with a mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4.] Restraining joint against endwise 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 separation due to internal pressure may be accomplished by using a metal harness consisting of clamping devices and bolting or by hardened- metal retainers molded into a push on gasket and engaged by a groove in the spigot end. Where electrical continuity is indicated, pipe shall be supplied with factory-brazed heavy cross section copper connectors to be joined with copper fasteners upon joint assembly. Connectors, at a minimum, shall be equal to No. 1/0 2.3 ABOVEGROUND PIPING MATERIALS 2.3.1 Type BCS - Black Carbon Steel Pipe(DN6 through DN40) : Schedule 40 furnace butt weld black-carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, or ASTM A 135/A 135M, Type F furnace butt welded; Schedule 10 conforming to ASTM A 135/A 135M, Grade B Pipe (DN50 through DN206, where indicated): Schedule 40 seamless or electricresistance welded black carbon steel, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 135/A 135M, Type E (electricresistance welded), Grade B, or Type S (seamless), Grade B; Schedule 10 conforming to ASTM A 135/A 135M, Grade B Pipe (DN250): Schedule 30 black carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E (electricresistance welded) or Type S (seamless) Unions (DN50 and under): 2068 kilopascal working steam pressure (wsp) female, screwed, black malleable iron, with ground joint and brass-to-iron seat conforming to ASME B16.39 Standard pipe couplings: Extra-heavy screwed black steel Grooved pipe couplings (all sizes): 1207 kilopascal minimum working pressure with a housing fabricated in two or more parts of black malleable-iron castings. Coupling gasket shall be molded of synthetic rubber, conforming to requirements of ASTM D 2000. Coupling bolts shall be oval-neck, track-head type with heavy hexagonal nuts, conforming to ASTM A 183 Fittings (DN100): 1207 kilopascal working pressure, cast iron, screwed, conforming to ASTM A 126, Class A, and ASME B16.4 Fittings (DN150): 1207 kilopascal working pressure, cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 126, Class A, screwed, conforming to ASME B16.4, or flanged, conforming to ASME B16.1 Fittings (DN200 and under): Couplings shall be rolled-groove type or mechanical locking (push-on) type. Grooves for rolled-groove type shall be rolled only; cut grooving will not be allowed. Rolled grooves shall be dimensionally compatible with the couplings. Grooved fittings (all sizes): 1207 kilopascal working pressure fittings used with grooved couplings shall be fabricated of black malleable-iron castings. If a manufacturer's standard-size malleable-iron fitting pattern is not available, fabricated fittings shall be used; fittings shall be fabricated from Grade B seamless-steel pipe and long-radius seamless welding fittings, with wall thickness to match pipe, conforming to ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9. 2.3.2 Type GCS - Galvanized Carbon Steel Pipe (DN15 through DN250 and where indicated): Schedule 40 seamless or electric resistant welded galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E (electric- 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 resistance welded) or Type S (seamless). Type F (furnace butt welded continuous welded) is acceptable for sizes less than DN50 . Fittings (all sizes): 1034 kilopascal working pressure banded, galvanized, malleable, screwed, conforming to ASTM A 197/A 197M and ASME B16.3 Fittings (DN65 and over): 862 kilopascal working pressure cast-iron flanges and flanged fittings conforming to ASTM A 126, Class A and to ASME B16.1 Grooved pipe couplings (all sizes): 1207 kilopascal minimum working pressure with a housing fabricated in two or more parts of galvanized malleable-iron castings. Coupling gasket shall be molded of synthetic rubber, conforming to requirements of ASTM D 2000. Coupling bolts shall be oval-neck, track-head type with heavy hexagonal nuts, conforming to ASTM A 183. Grooved fittings (all sizes): 1207 kilopascal working pressure fittings used with grooved couplings shall be fabricated of galvanized malleable-iron castings. If a manufacturer's standard-size malleable-iron fitting pattern is not available, fabricated fittings shall be used; fittings shall be fabricated from Grade B seamless steel pipe and long-radius seamless welding fittings, with wall thickness to match pipe, conforming to ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9. Unions (DN50 and under): 2070 kilopascal working pressure female, screwed, galvanized malleable iron, with brass-to-seat and ground joint 2.4 SUPPORTING ELEMENTS Piping system components and miscellaneous supporting elements shall be provided, including, but not limited to, building-structure attachments; supplementary steel; hanger rods, stanchions, and fixtures; vertical-pipe attachments; horizontal-pipe attachments; restraining anchors; and guides. Supporting elements shall be suitable for stresses imposed by systems pressures and temperatures, natural, and other external forces. Supporting elements shall be FM approved or UL listed and shall conform to ASME B31.1, MSS SP-58, and ASME B16.34. 2.4.1 Building-Structure Attachments 2.4.1.1 Anchor Devices, Concrete and Masonry Anchor devices shall conform to FS FF-S-325: Group I: Shield, expansion (lead, bolt, and stud anchors) Group II: Shield, expansion (bolt anchors), Type 2, Class 2, Style 1 or 2 Group III: Shield, expansion (self drilling tubular expansion shell bolt anchors Cast-in floor-mounted equipment-anchor devices shall provide adjustable positions. Powder-actuated anchoring devices shall not be used to support mechanical-systems components. 2.4.1.2 Beam Clamps Beam clamps shall be center-loading Types 21, 28, 29, and 30, UL listed, cataloged, and load-rated commercially manufactured products. Type 20 beam clamps shall be 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 12 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 used for pipe DN50 and under. Two Type 25 beam clamps shall be used per point of pipe support. 2.4.1.3 C-Clamps C-clamps shall [not be used] 2.4.1.4 Inserts, Concrete Concrete inserts shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of MSS SP58 for Type 18 and ASME B16.34. When applied to piping in sizes DN50 iron pipe size (ips) and larger, and where otherwise required by imposed loads, a 300 millimeter length of 15 millimeter reinforcing rod shall be inserted and wired through wing slots. 2.4.2 Horizontal-Pipe Attachments 2.4.2.1 Single Pipes Piping in sizes up to and including DN50 ips shall be supported by Type 1, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, or 12 solid, split-ring, or band type attachments. Piping in sizes DN65 and larger shall be supported by Type 1, 2, 3, or 4 attachments or with Type 41 or Type 49 pipe rolls. 2.4.2.2 Parallel Fire-Protection Pipes Trapeze hangers fabricated from approved structural steel shapes, with U-bolts, shall be used when so specified. Structural-steel shapes shall conform to supplementary steel requirements or the support shall be of commercially available, approved proprietarydesign rolled steel. 2.4.3 Vertical-Pipe Attachments Single vertical-pipe attachments shall be Type 8. 2.4.4 Hanger Rods and Fixtures Only circular solid cross section rod hangers shall be used to connect building structure attachments to pipe-support devices. Pipe, straps, or bars of equivalent strength shall be used for hangers. Turnbuckles, swing eyes, and clevises shall be provided as required by support system to accommodate temperature changes, pipe accessibility, and adjustment for load and pitch. 2.4.5 Supplementary Steel Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members or where structural members are used in lieu of commercially rated supports, such supplementary steel shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with AISC/AISI 121. 2.5 FIRE-DEPARTMENT BREECHING CONNECTIONS Hose connections shall have National Fire hose standard-thread form and rocker lugs in accordance with NFPA 1963. Hose-connection sizes and threads shall be compatible with the equipment used by the fire department serving the facility. 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 13 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.5.1 Wall Siamese Unit shall be cast brass or bronze flush-mounted escutcheon-plate type, with two DN65 , fire- department, swivel, female inlets; double-clapper valves; rocker-lug caps and chains; and cast-in function-identifying lettering. Finish shall be chrome-plated or polished surface. Chrome plate shall be in accordance with ASME A112.18.1. 2.5.2 Sidewalk Siamese Unit shall be cast brass or bronze, with two DN65 , fire-department, swivel, female inlets; double- clapper valves; rocker-lug caps and chains; and cast-in function-identifying lettering. Finish shall be chrome-plated or polished surface. Chrome plate shall be in accordance with ASME A112.18.1. Unit shall be mounted on a Schedule 40 ASTM A 53/A 53M galvanized carbon-steel pipe with red- enameled finish on prime-coated surface. All surfaces embedded in concrete or below grade shall be protected with a 0.508 millimeter thick bituminous coating 2.5.3 Wall Hydrant Unit shall be of cast brass or bronze flush-mounted escutcheon-plate type with two DN65, fire- department, male outlets; rocker lug caps and chains; and cast-in functionidentifying lettering. Finish shall be chrome-plated or polished surface. Chrome plate shall be in accordance with ASME A112.18.1. 2.5.4 Roof Manifold Unit shall be of cast brass or bronze, horizontal type, with two DN65, 1200 kilopascal rated hose valves fitted with rocker-lug caps and chains. Finish shall be rough body with polished trim. 2.6 RISER ALARM EQUIPMENT Riser alarm equipment shall be UL listed or FM approved for fire-protection use. 2.6.1 Wet-Pipe Alarm Check Valve Wet-pipe alarm check valve shall be complete with standard accessories and trim necessary to give an alarm and shall include pressure gages, retard chamber, testing provisions, and all necessary intercomponent piping, fittings, and valves. Pilot valve and clapper shall have individual elastomer seats. 2.6.2 Standard Check Valve Check valve shall be FM-approved or UL-listed standard swing-check type with elastomerdisc seat. Pressure gages shall be provided on both sides of the clapper. Water-flow alarm shall be vane type. 2.6.3 Dry-Pipe Alarm Check Valve Dry-pipe alarm check valve shall be complete with standard accessories and trim necessary to give an alarm, and shall include pressure gages, accelerator, priming provisions, testing provisions, and all necessary intercomponent compressed-air and water piping, fittings, and valves. 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 14 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 System shall include a trouble alarm indicating a loss of air pressure. 2.6.4 Water-Flow Alarm Device Water-flow alarm devices shall be UL listed for the particular type of system. 2.6.4.1 Water Motor Gong Local Alarm Assembly shall include a gong with an aluminum or chrome-plated brass hood with nonstaining weather-resistant mounting. Water motor shaft shall have tetrafluoroethylene bearings and an inlet strainer. Waste water shall drain as indicated. 2.6.4.2 Pressure Switch Remote Alarm Pressure switch shall be wired to make or break a circuit depending on rise or fall of water pressure. 2.6.4.3 Vane-Type Flow Alarm Vane-type flow alarm shall make or break an alarm circuit upon deflection by a volume of flowing water that equals or exceeds the capacity of a single sprinkler. Alarm shall have an instant-recycle pneumatic-retard time delay. 2.6.4.4 Electric Motor Gong Electric motor gong shall be a 150 millimeter diameter bell, synchronous-motor type. Weather-exposed units shall be weatherproof and shall be provided with a weather hood. Assembly shall be constructed of nonstaining materials 2.7 DRY-PIPE MAINTENANCE AIR 2.7.1 Independent Source Dry-pipe system air pressure shall be maintained by an independent Air Compressor mounted on the riser. Compressor shall be spring and elastomer vibration-isolated from the riser, of oil-free construction, complete with adjustable set point low-differential pressure switch, check valve, and necessary unloader and intercomponent piping and wiring. Spare inlet-air filter media shall be provided. 2.7.2 Continuous Source Dry-pipe system air pressure shall be maintained by an adjustable set point lowdifferential-diaphragm pressure-reducing valve connected to 690 kilopascal facility compressed-air system to maintain air side of dry-pipe valve. Unit shall be entirely of nonferrous-metal construction with a replaceable cartridge inlet-air filter. Air-maintenance device shall be complete with intercomponent piping, fittings, and valves. Spare inlet-air filter media shall be provided. 2.7.3 Retard Orifice Air-supply line near each dry-pipe valve shall be provided with an orifice union with a 3 millimeter orifice corrosion-resistant steel plate, externally identified, and a DN15 threevalve bypass around the orifice union. 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 15 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.8 STANDPIPE EQUIPMENT AND FIRE HOSE CABINET STATIONS 2.8.1 Fire Hose Cabinet Stations Fire hose cabinet stations shall be furnished with cabinet, fire hose rack, DN40 hose, valve, and spanner wrench. 2.8.2 Firehouse Racks and Hoses Rack-and-hose assemblies shall be nipple mounted, swinging, semiautomatic, and red enameled. Racks shall be fitted with spring-friction retainer clip. Hoses shall be DN40 diameter, 20 meter long, cotton-polyester jacketed, rubber lined, mildew-proof, conforming to NFPA 1961, and UL approved for rack service. Couplings shall be rockerlug type. A spanner, mounted in clips, shall be provided at each rack. Rack valves shall be polished brass, 1200 kilopascal rated, DN65 angle valve with 65 millimeter 2-1/2- inch female to 40 millimeter male reducer, and fitted with automatic drainvent device. Hose nozzles shall be DN40 chemical hose thread, polished brass, adjustable fog, offand-on solid- stream type. 2.8.3 Standpipe-Mounted Hose Racks and Hoses Hose racks shall be suitable for specified hose length. Firehouse racks and accessories shall be red enameled, designed for standpipe mounting at an elevation high enough to avoid damage. Suitable clips or spring-loaded retainers shall be provided to prevent hoses from unwinding and hoses and nozzles from swinging from their mounted position until placed into service. Rack hoses shall be DN40 diameter, 30 meter long, cotton-polyester jacketed, rubber lined and mildew-proof, conforming to [ NFPA 1961] [UL 19]. Couplings shall be rockerlug type. A spanner, mounted in clips, shall be provided at each rack. Rack valve shall be polished brass, 1200 kilopascal rated, DN65 angle valve with 65 millimeter 2- female to 40 millimeter male reducer, and fitted with automatic drain-vent device. Hose nozzle shall be DN40 chemical hose thread, polished brass, adjustable fog, offand-on solid- stream type. 2.8.4 Hose Reels and Hoses Hose reels, frames, and accessories shall be red enameled and suitable for specified hose diameter and length. Reels shall be fitted with a swivel and piping to allow continuous flow through hoses. Friction brakes shall be provided to prevent hoses from accidentally unwinding. Hoses shall be 40 millimeter inside diameter, 45 millimeter outside diameter, 3-braid, single-jacket, 2070 kilopascal working pressure, 30 meter long, hard rubber or heavy duty synthetic cover, noncollapsible, and fitted with couplings. Hoses shall be red covered, flexible, nonkinking, and shall weigh not over 35 kilogram per 30 meter . Couplings shall be hole type, one female swivel and one male, both with chemical hose thread (M44 - 3.175 male) 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 16 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 Reel control valve shall be 1200 kilopascal rated, quarter-turn, ball- or butterfly-valve, for quick- opening operation. Hose nozzle shall be DN40 chemical hose thread, polished brass, adjustable fog, offand-on solid- stream type. 2.8.5 Standpipe Valve Valve shall be DN65 angle hose type, 1200 kilopascal rated, with 65 millimeter female to 40 millimeter male reducer, 40 millimeter cap and chain, and chrome-plated polished brass. In multistory buildings with fire pumps, valve shall include orifice plate to restrict discharge pressure to 450 kilopascal. 2.8.6 Fire-Hose Cabinet A. Recessed type, with stainless steel body and trim and door. Body and trim to be 16 gauge and door 20 gauge thickness. Door to have full panel double strength glass ( or solid as indicated or approved at site ) with "Fire Hose" decal. Hose rack cabinet to be supplied from factory with the following equipment: 1. one 65 mm pressure restricting angle valve, 2. one 65 mm x 40 mm chrome finished brass reducer, 3. one stainless steel hose rack with rack nipple, 4. one 40 mm unlined linen fire hose 30 m long, with brass hose couplings attached. 5. one 4o mm brass nozzle, 250 mm long, 15 mm discharge, with chrome finish, 6. one 4.5 kg ABC nitrogen operated dry chemical fire extinguisher, with steel body and stainless steel finish. B. Surface mounted type, with clear anodized, 16 gauge thick stainless steel body, trim and door. Door to have full panel double strength glass ( or solid as indicated or approved at site ) with "Fire Hose" decal. Hose rack cabinet to be supplied from factory with the following equipment: 1. One 65 mm pressure restricting angle valve, 2. One 65 mm x 40 mm chrome finished brass reducer, 3. One stainless steel hose rack with rack nipple, 4. One 40 mm unlined linen fire hose 30 m long, with brass hose couplings attached. 5. One 40 mm brass nozzle, 250 mm long, 15 mm discharge, with chrome finish, 6. One 4.5 kg ABC nitrogen operated dry chemical fire extinguisher, with stainless steel body . C. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. Provide pipe knockouts. 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 17 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.9 SPRINKLER HEADS Provide automatic sprinklers of type indicated on Drawings, and in accordance with the following listing. Quick response wet type sprinklers with fusible links rated for 74 °C, and with sprinkler head finishes as mentioned below shall be the standard type except as noted in the table below or unless otherwise indicated. The sprinkler shall be installed in the flush position with the element exposed below the ceiling line 2.9.1 Head Categories 2.9.1.1 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS TYPE SP-1 For installation in false ceilings, quick response type, decorative style extending less than 25 mm below ceiling with only fusible link, levers and ceiling plate visible. Deflector and retaining parts to be concealed in sprinkler body. Visible parts to be stainless steel and ceiling plate satin finish chrome. Sprinkler body to be high quality bronze. Sprinklers to have 15 mm male thread inlet and a K-factor of 5.6 . 2.9.1.2 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS TYPE SP-2: For exposed installations, quick response upright type of high quality bronze construction. Sprinklers to have 15 mm male thread inlet and a K-factor of 5.6 . 2.9.1.3 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS TYPE SP-3: For transformer rooms, quick response upright type of high quality bronze construction. Sprinklers to have 15 mm male thread inlet and a K-factor of 57 (U.S). 2.9.2 Head Types • Sprinkler Heads - No false ceiling Areas: Sprinkler heads to be rough bronze finish, of an approved upright type, installed in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 13. • Sprinkler Heads - No false ceiling Areas: Sprinkler heads to be rough bronze finish, of an approved pendant type, installed in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 13. • Sprinkler Heads - Ceiling Areas: Sprinkler heads to be of types in accordance with the following listing: 1. Pendant Type: Sprinkler heads to be polished chrome plated finish, of an approved pendant type, installed in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 13. The maximum distance from the deflector to finished ceiling shall be 50 mm. 2. Recessed Type: Sprinkler heads to be new automatic pendent chrome plated sprinkler heads with matching chrome plated recessed cup. 3. Concealed Type: New automatic concealed sprinkler heads with white finish cover plate. • Sprinkler Heads - Sidewall: Sidewall sprinkler heads to be chrome plated • Sprinklers types: Provided sprinklers at the specified locations or as shown on plans. Follow NFP13 in selecting and installing sprinklers. 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 18 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.9.3 Temperature Rating Fusible links shall be for ordinary hazard, except where otherwise indicated. 2.9.4Spares Spares shall be furnished for each type of sprinkler head, complete with appropriate storage cabinet and wrench. 2.9.5 Head Protection Heads shall be protected with paper or plastic bags during painting operations. Protection shall be removed immediately upon finishing painting operations. Head guards shall be provided wherever mechanical damage could occur. Guard finish shall be red enamel 2.10 VALVES 2.10.1 Underground 2.10.1.1 Post Indicator Valve Assembly (PIV) Assembly shall consist of a standard FM-approved or UL-listed inside-screw gate valve with an above-grade post indicator or a completely factory-assembled FMapproved quarter-turn valve and above-grade post indicator-operator. Direction to open shall be counterclockwise. Quarter-turn valve shall be a wafer-type butterfly valve, rated at 1200 kilopascal, elastomer-lined and sealed. Liner shall act as a gasket between ASME B16.1, Class 125 or Class 250 flanges. Post shall have a fail- safe feature to keep valve intact in case of breaking off above grade. Operator shall be worm-gear type with permanently oil-lubricated watertight gear case complete with handle. Surfaces below grade shall receive a coating of bitumen not less than 0.508 millimeter thick. Above-grade surfaces shall be filled, primed, and finished with a multiple coat of high-gloss, weather-resistant, red enamel. Post indicator valves shall be fitted to accommodate electrical supervisory switches. Electrical supervisory switches shall be provided for interconnection to the building Fire Alarm System. Switches and connections shall meet the requirements of Section 28 31 13.00 40 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM CONTROL, GUI, AND LOGIC SYSTEMS. 2.10.1.2 Fire-Hydrant Service Valves Fire-hydrant service valves shall be standard FM-approved or UL-listed inside-screw gate valve, with valve box connection flange. 2.10.1.3 Valve Boxes Valve boxes shall be not less than 5 millimeter thick cast-iron construction with locking cover that has a cast-in identification legend. Boxes shall be adjustable extension type with screw- or slide-type adjustment. Base flange shall be fitted to the valve flange. Full 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 19 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 extended length of box shall be greater than required by depth of cover by not less than 100 millimeter. One valve-operating wrench shall be supplied for each size valve nut. Guide rings shall be provided where operating rods are longer than 2 meter. 2.10.2 Aboveground Gate, globe, and check valves (all sizes) shall be FM approved or UL listed. Ball valves, DN50 and under, shall be FM approved, rated 2070 kilopascal, with provisions to wire or lock handle in place where critical alarm function may be isolated. Butterfly valves, DN150, DN200, and DN250 shall be FM approved, rated 1200 kilopascal, cast-iron bodied wafer type, with elastomer liners and seals. Liners shall act as gasket between standard piping- system flanges. Operator shall be worm-gear type, with permanently lubricated gears, and oil-tight and watertight case, complete with handle and automatic position indication. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 2.11.1 Bituminous Coating Bituminous coating shall be a solvent cutback, heavy-bodied material to produce not less than a 0.305 millimeter dry-film thickness in one coat and shall be as recommended by the conduit manufacturer for compatibility with factory coating and rubber joints. For previously coal-tar-coated and for uncoated ferrous surfaces underground, bituminous coating shall be solvent cutback coal-tar type, conforming to MIL-C-18480. 2.11.2 Bolting Flange and general-purpose bolting shall be hex-head and shall conform to ASTM F 568M, Class 4.8 or higher ASTM A 307, Grade B. Heavy hex-nuts shall conform to ASTM A 563M. ASTM A 563.Square- head bolts and nuts are not acceptable. 2.11.3 Elastomer Calk Polysulfide- or polyurethane-base elastomer-calking material shall be two-component type, conforming to ASTM C 920. 2.11.4 Escutcheons Escutcheons shall be manufactured from nonferrous metals and shall be chrome-plated, except when AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel is provided. Metals and finish shall conform to ASME A112.18.1. Escutcheons shall be one-piece type where mounted on chrome-plated pipe or tubing and one-piece or split-pattern type elsewhere. Escutcheons shall have provisions consisting of internal spring tension devices or setscrews to maintain a fixed position against a surface. 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 20 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.11.5 Flashing 2.11.5.1 Lead Sheet lead shall conform to ASTM B 749, and shall weigh not less than 20 kilogram per square meter 4 pounds per square foot. 2.11.5.2 Copper Sheet copper shall conform to ASTM B 370 and shall weigh not less than 4.88 kilogram per square meter. 2.11.6 Flange Gaskets Gaskets shall be suitable for the intended use and shall contain no asbestos. 2.11.7 Pipe-Thread Compounds Tetrafluoroethylene tape or other suitable compounds shall be used. 2.12 FIRE-PROTECTION SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A coordinated system of piping and equipment identification shall be provided which includes the following: Framed and plastic-protected diagrammatic layout of all piping systems, identifying and locating piping, equipment, and valves. Where existing systems are being modified, existing layouts shall be brought up to date. Metal-tag-identified major valves, piping-system components, and equipment Metal identification plate at controlling alarm valve identifying system and area protected Service-labeled piping Color coding shall be in accordance with NFPA 291. 2.12.1 Diagrams Chart listing of equipment shall be by designation number and shall show pertinent data. Diagrams shall be neat, mechanical drawings mounted in extruded aluminum frames, with 3 millimeter thick acrylic plastic protection. Location shall be as directed by PGC engineer. A minimum of one mounted chart and diagram, plus one extra copy of each, shall be provided for each fire-protection system. 2.12.2 Metal Tags Identification tags made of brass or aluminum and indicating function of valve or similar component, shall be installed on such system devices. Tags shall be not less than 50 millimeter in diameter and marking shall be stamped. Equipment shall be provided with metal identification tags bearing an equipment designation number matching the drawing or diagram designations. Tags shall be secured to valve or equipment items with 2.7 millimeter galvanized wire. 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 21 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.12.3 Service Labeling Piping, including that concealed in accessible spaces, shall be labeled to designate service. Each label shall include an arrow or arrows to indicate flow direction. Labels or tag designations shall be as follows: SERVICE LABEL OR TAG DESIGNATION Main sprinkler supply MAIN SPRINKLER SUPPLY Sprinkler riser number SPRINKLER RISER NO. Sprinkler branch SPRINKLER BRANCH Standpipe piping STANDPIPE Piping shall be labeled and arrowed in accordance with the following: 2.13 • Each point of entry and exit through walls • Each change in direction • In congested or hidden areas, at each point required to clarify service or indicate hazard • In long straight runs, labels shall be located at a distance visible to each other, but in no case shall the distance between labels exceed 12.2 meter . • Label lettering shall be 50 millimeter high. Where the size of pipes is 65 millimeter outside diameter and smaller, • Labels shall be attached to 1.6 millimeter aluminum sheet which shall be attached to the pipe with 2.7 millimeter galvanized wire. Labels shall be legible from the primary service and operating area. • Labels shall be made of self-sticking plastic film designed for permanent installation. Labels shall have red letters on white background. • Label and valve tag schedule above shall not be construed as defining or limiting the work. All piping systems shall be labelled. PAINTING Equipment of the manufacturer's standard product shall be furnished with the manufacturer's standard finish coat. Other mechanical equipment shall be furnished with a shop-applied prime paint. 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 22 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL Installation of system materials and equipment shall be in accordance with the recommendations and provisions of NFPA 13, NFPA 13E, NFPA 14, and NFPA 24, and UAE Fire and Life Safety code of Practice .Work shall be performed in the presence of PGC Engineer who shall be notified by the Contractor 48 hours in advance of the start of work. All installation work shall be performed by licensed fire protection sprinkler contractors, Licensed by Civil Defence. 3.2 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION Installation of piping materials shall conform to the written or published instructions of the manufacturer. Pipes passing through walls below grade and ground-floor slab shall pass through pipe sleeves one size larger than pipe and shall be calked watertight with lead and oakum or mechanically expandable chloroprene inserts with bitumen sealed metal components. In fill areas, pipe passing under or through building grade beams shall have a minimum clearance of 100 millimeter in all directions. Rubber- or elastomer-jointed piping embedded in concrete walls shall have a joint within 150 millimeter of the face of the wall, capable of absorbing movement without leakage. Piping penetrating earth or concrete grade shall be extended-joint or flange-bolt height plus 150 millimeter above the grade. Underground piping below supported or suspended slabs shall be supported from the slab with a minimum of two supports per length of pipe. Supports shall be protected with a coating of bitumen. On excavations near and below building footings, the backfilling material shall consist of 13.8 Megapascal cured-strength concrete poured or pressure-grouted up to the level of the footing. After piping has been inspected, and not less than 48 hours prior to being lowered into a trench, external surfaces of the piping, valves, valve operators, and valve boxes shall be coated with a compatible bituminous coating suitable for protection against brackish ground water. Application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to a dry-film thickness of not less than 0.305 millimeter. 3.2.1 Construction Tolerances for Types CIWP and DIWP Maximum deviation from design elevation at any point along piping shall not exceed 65 millimeter for all sizes of piping. Maximum deviation from line at the end of an 5.5 meter length of piping shall be 65 millimeter and cumulatively shall not exceed 150 millimeter. Corrections from line within preceding tolerances shall be made at a rate not to exceed 65 millimeter for any one length of piping. Maximum deflection for curves for 5.5 meter lengths of cast ferrous pipe shall be in accordance with NFPA 24. 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 23 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 When the alignment requires deflections in excess of the above limitations, special bends or a sufficient number of shorter lengths of pipe shall be furnished to provide angular deflections within established limits, as approved. 3.2.2 Fire Hydrants Hydrant outlets shall be 600 millimeter, minimum, to 900 millimeter, maximum, above grade. The DN115 outlet shall face the road or area of access. 3.2.3 Valve Boxes Valves and valve boxes and shall be set plumb. Valve boxes shall be centered on the valves. Where feasible, valves shall be located outside traffic areas. Soil shall be carefully tamped around each valve box to a distance of 1.2 meter on all sides of the box or to the undisturbed trench face when less than 1.2 meter. Class 3000A concrete slabs 600 millimeter square by 100 millimeter thick shall be provided to protect valve boxes. 3.2.4 Thrust Blocks Thrust blocks shall be provided to absorb hydraulic thrust at caps, plugs, and at system change-of- direction fittings. Thrust block shall be 20 Megapascal cured-strength concrete placed against undisturbed soil, with an area sufficient to provide load transmittal. 3.3 ABOVEGROUND PIPING-SYSTEMS INSTALLATION Piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building. Piping and components shall be spaced and installed so that a threaded pipe fitting may be removed between adjacent pipes and so that there will be not less than 13 millimeter of clear space between the finished surface and other work and between the finished surface of parallel adjacent piping. Hangers on different adjacent service lines running parallel shall be arranged to be in line with each other and parallel to the lines of the building. Load rating for pipe-hanger supports shall be based on all lines filled with water. Deflection per span shall not exceed slope gradient of pipe. Schedule 40 and heavier ferrous pipe supports shall be in accordance with the following minimum rod size and maximum allowable hanger spacing. For concentrated loads such as valves, allowable span shall be reduced proportionately. PIPE SIZE (DN) (mm) ROD SIZE (mm) HANGER SPACING FOR STEEL PIPE (mm) Up to 25 10 2400 32 40 65 to 90 125 10 10 10 15 3600 4500 4500 4500 100 150 15 15 4500 4500 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 24 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 Vertical risers shall be supported at the base where possible and at intervals specified. Piping shall be guided for lateral stability as necessary. Clamps shall be placed under fittings wherever possible. Carbon- steel pipe shall be supported at each floor at not more than 4.5 meter intervals for pipe DN50 and smaller, and at not more than 6.1 meter intervals for pipe DN65 and larger. Piping shall be securely supported with allowance for thrust forces and thermal expansion and contraction and shall not be subject to mechanical, chemical, vibrational, or other damage, in conformance with ASME B31.1. 3.4 SOUND STOPPING Effective sound stopping and adequate operating clearance shall be provided to prevent structure contact where piping penetrates walls, floors, or ceilings; into occupied spaces adjacent to equipment rooms; where similar penetrations occur between occupied spaces; and where penetrations occur from pipe chases into occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include space above ceiling where no special acoustic treatment of ceiling is provided. Penetrations shall be finished to be compatible with surface being penetrated. Sound stopping and vapor-barrier sealing of pipe shafts, and large floor and wall openings may be accomplished by packing with properly supported mineral fiber insulation or by foaming-in-place with self- extinguishing, 0.9 kilogram density polyurethane foam to a depth not less than 150 millimeter. Foam shall be finished with a rasp. Vapor barrier shall be not less than 3 millimeter thickness of vinyl mastic applied to visible and accessible surfaces. Where fire stopping is a consideration, only mineral fiber shall be used, and, in addition, openings shall be covered with 1.6 millimeter sheet metal. 3.5 SLEEVES Sleeves shall be provided where piping passes through roofs, masonry or concrete walls, or floors. Sleeves passing through steel decks shall be continuously welded or brazed to the deck. Sleeves extending through floors, roofs, or load-bearing walls, and sleeves through fire barriers shall be continuous and fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded anchor lugs. Other sleeves shall be formed by molded linear polyethylene liners or similar materials that are removable. Diameter of sleeves shall be large enough to accommodate pipe, insulation, and jacketing without touching the sleeve, and additionally shall provide a minimum 10 millimeter clearance. Sleeve shall accommodate mechanical and thermal motion of pipe to preclude transmission of vibration to walls and generation of noise. Space between a pipe and the inside of a pipe sleeve or a construction surface penetration shall be packed solid with mineral fiber conforming to ASTM C 592 wherever the piping passes through firewalls, equipment-room walls, floors, and ceilings connected to occupied spaces, and other locations where sleeves or construction-surface penetrations occur between occupied spaces. Where sleeves or construction-surface penetrations occur between conditioned and unconditioned spaces, the space between a pipe, bare or insulated, and the inside of a pipe sleeve or construction-surface penetration shall be filled with an elastomer calk to a depth of 15 millimeter. Surfaces to be calked shall be oil- and grease-free. 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 25 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 Exterior wall sleeves shall be calked watertight with lead and oakum or mechanically expandable chloroprene inserts with mastic-sealed components. 3.6 ESCUTCHEONS Escutcheons shall be provided at penetrations of piping into finished areas. Where finished areas are separated by partitions through which piping passes, escutcheons shall be provided on both sides of the partition. Where suspended ceilings are installed, plates shall be provided at the underside only of such ceilings. Escutcheons shall be chrome plated in occupied spaces and shall conceal openings in building construction. Escutcheons shall be firmly attached. 3.7 FLASHINGS Flashings at systems penetrations of building boundaries shall be provided as indicated. 3.8 BRANCH-LINE TESTERS Branch-line testers shall permit testing and flushing lines without shutdown of system or loss of fire- protection capability. Line testers shall be fitted with chain-attached caps. Line testers shall be installed where indicated and on most remote branch lines being served by cross mains, so that testing may be accomplished at the dead corners of each sprinkler system. 3.9 PAINTING Manufacturer's standard-finish equipment surfaces damaged during construction shall be brought to as- new condition by touchup or repainting to the satisfaction of PGC Engineer, or replaced with new undamaged equipment at no additional cost to PGC. Pipe hangers, supports, and other iron work in concealed spaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with one coat of primer paint. All fire piping, valves, and appurtenances, including hose racks and reels, but excluding hoses, hose nozzles and siamese connections, shall receive two coats of enamel, color No. 11105 (red) in accordance with MIL-STD-101 and FED-STD-595. 3.10 ELECTRICAL WORK Electrical work is specified in Division 16, "Electrical," except for control and fire alarm wiring which shall be provided under this section in accordance with NFPA 70. Rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit shall be used, except that electrical metallic tubing may be used in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage. Motors, controllers, contactors, and disconnects shall be furnished with their respective pieces of equipment, except that controllers indicated as part of the motor control centers shall be provided under Section 26 24 19.00 40 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS. Motors, controllers, contactors, and disconnects shall conform to and shall have electrical connections provided under Section 26 05 00.00 40 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. Controllers and contactors shall have maximum 120-volt control circuits, and auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors and equipment are furnished larger than sizes indicated, the cost of providing additional electrical service and related work shall be included under this section. 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 26 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.11 SYSTEM TESTING Prior to acceptance of the work, completed systems shall be tested in the presence of PGC Engineer. Upon approval, certificates of testing shall be provided. Tests shall be hydrostatic, unless otherwise specified. Only potable water shall be used for testing. Air Tests, Valve-Operating Tests, and Drainage Tests shall be performed for dry-pipe systems. Full-flow System Operating Tests shall be performed for standpipe systems. Contractor will supply testing water , the Contractor shall be responsible for approved disposal of contaminated water. Contractor shall prepare and maintain test records of piping-system tests. Records shall show personnel responsibilities, dates, test-gage identification numbers, ambient and test- water temperatures, pressure ranges, rates of pressure drops, and leakage rates. Each test acceptance shall require the signature of the Contracting Officer. 3.11.1 Test Gages Test gages, to be acceptable, shall have 115 millimeter dials or larger with accuracy of plus or minus 1/2 of 1 percent of full-scale range and dial graduations and pointer width compatible with readability to within one-half of the accuracy extremes. Maximum permissible scale range for a given test shall be such that the pointer during a test shall have a starting position at midpoint of the dial or within the middle third of the scale range. Certification of accuracy and correction table shall bear a date within 90 calendar days prior to the test, test gage number, and the project number. 3.11.2 Pneumatic Testing Pressure Tests shall be pneumatic when freezing conditions may occur and upon prior approval by PGC Engineer. Compressed air used for testing shall be oil-free. Pneumatic testing shall include swabbing all joints under a test pressure of 34 kilopascal with a standard high film strength soap solution and observing for bubbles. Duration of the test will be determined by PGC Engineer and will be for 2 hours, minimum, to 24 hours, maximum. Test may be terminated by direction of PGC Engineer at any point during this period after it has been determined that the permissible leakage rate has not been exceeded. 3.11.3 Test and Acceptable Criteria Aboveground systems shall have Pressure Tests at 1380 kilopascal and the applied pressure shall be maintained without further addition of test media for not less than 2 hours. Maximum allowable pressure drop shall be 14 kilopascal. Underground rubber-jointed ferrous-pipe water systems shall be tested at 1380 kilopascal, and the applied test pressure shall be maintained for not less than 2 hours. Maximum allowable pressure drop shall be 14 kilopascal. After satisfactory hydrostatic testing, piping shall be tested for leakage as follows: 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 27 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 • • Duration of each leakage test shall be not less than 2 hours; during the test, the main shall be subjected to 200 psi pressure based on the elevation of the lowest section under test and corrected to the elevation of the test gage. Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water supplied into the laid pipe, or any valved section thereof, necessary to maintain the specified leakage test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water and the air expelled. • No piping installation will be accepted if the leakage in gallons per hour exceeds 2.04 times the number of joints in the length of the pipe line tested times the nominal diameter of the pipe in inches times the square root of the average test pressure expressed as psig. Amount of leakage at the joints shall not exceed 1.89 litre per 100 joints regardless of pipe diameter. • Hydrostatic tests shall be applied to piping with concrete thrust blocking only after the concrete has cured for more than 7 calendar days. Backflow prevention into connected potable-water systems and system devices shall be tested for proper functioning under conditions normal to their application. Dripping or weeping joints shall be repaired. 3.12 DISINFECTION Water piping, including valves, fittings, and other devices, shall be disinfected with a solution of chlorine and water. Solution shall contain not less than 50 parts per million (ppm) of available chlorine. Solution shall be held for a period of not less than 8 hours, at which time the solution shall contain a minimum residue of 2 ppm of available chlorine or the system shall be re-disinfected. After successful disinfection the piping shall be thoroughly flushed before placing into service. Water for disinfection, and flushing will be furnished by the Government. 3.13 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING At the completion of the work, all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned. Equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge that may have accumulated from the installation and testing of the system. Automatic control devices shall be adjusted for proper operation. END OF SECTION 21 13 00 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SRINKLER SYSTEM PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 28 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIRCRAFT HANGERS CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 6 1.1 REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................6 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................7 1.2.1 Design Requirements ................................................................................................................7 1.2.1.1 Calculations .............................................................................................................................8 1.2.1.2 AFFF Containment and Disposal Plan ................................................................................8 1.2.2 System Operation ......................................................................................................................8 1.2.2.1 Overhead Systems .................................................................................................................8 1.2.2.2 Monitor System .......................................................................................................................9 1.2.2.3 Hose System ...........................................................................................................................9 1.3 SUBMITTALS ...............................................................................................................................9 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................................... 11 1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist ....................................................................................................... 12 1.4.2 Qualifications of Welders ....................................................................................................... 12 1.4.3 Qualifications of Installer ........................................................................................................ 12 1.4.4 Preliminary Test Certification ................................................................................................ 12 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING............................................................................ 12 PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................... 13 DESIGN OF FOAM SYSTEMS ....................................................................................... 13 2.1.1 Sprinkler Heads ....................................................................................................................... 13 2.1.2 Cabinet ..................................................................................................................................... 13 2.1.3 [Deluge] and /or [Pre-Action] Valves .................................................................................... 13 2.1.4 AFFF Solution Distribution ..................................................................................................... 13 2.1.4.1 For pre-action systems........................................................................................................ 13 2.1.4.2 For deluge systems ............................................................................................................. 14 2.1.5 AFFF Solution Application Density ....................................................................................... 14 21 13 20. 00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.1.6 Sprinkler Discharge Area ....................................................................................................... 14 2.1.6.1 For pre-action systems........................................................................................................ 14 2.1.6.2 For deluge systems ............................................................................................................. 14 2.1.7 Friction Losses ........................................................................................................................ 14 2.1.8 Location of Sprinkler Heads .................................................................................................. 14 2.1.9 Duration of Discharge............................................................................................................ 14 2.2 ELECTRIC DETECTION DEVICES ....................................................................................... 14 2.2.1 Control Panel ........................................................................................................................... 15 2.2.1.1 Main Annunciator ................................................................................................................. 16 2.2.1.2 Initiating Zones ..................................................................................................................... 16 2.2.1.3 Remote Annunciator Panel ................................................................................................ 16 2.2.2 Auxiliary Power Supply .......................................................................................................... 16 2.2.2.1 Storage Batteries ................................................................................................................. 16 2.2.2.2 Battery Charger .................................................................................................................... 17 2.3 PNEUMATIC DETECTION SYSTEM .................................................................................... 17 2.3.1 Air Compressor ....................................................................................................................... 17 2.3.2 Piping and Control Panel ....................................................................................................... 17 2.4 PIPING SUPERVISION ........................................................................................................... 17 2.5 MANUAL RELEASE STATIONS ............................................................................................ 18 2.6 HEAT DETECTORS ................................................................................................................. 18 2.6.1 Combination Fixed Temperature Rate-of-Rise Detectors ................................................ 18 2.6.2 Rate Compensating Detector ................................................................................................ 18 2.7 OPEN-AREA (SPOT-TYPE) SMOKE DETECTORS .......................................................... 18 2.7.1 Ionization Detectors ................................................................................................................ 19 2.7.2 Photoelectric Detectors .......................................................................................................... 19 2.7.3 Detector Spacing and Location ............................................................................................. 19 2.8 COMBINATION ULTRAVIOLET-INFRARED FLAME DETECTORS ............................... 19 2.9 ELECTRICAL WORK ............................................................................................................... 20 2.9.1 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ 20 2.9.2 Operating Power ..................................................................................................................... 20 2.9.3 Conductor Identification ......................................................................................................... 21 2.10 SYSTEM ACTIVATION ............................................................................................................ 21 21 13 20. 00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.10.1 Overhead System Activation ............................................................................................... 21 2.10.2 Monitor System Activation ................................................................................................... 21 2.10.3 Hose System Activation ....................................................................................................... 21 2.11 ALARMS ..................................................................................................................................... 21 2.11.1 Water Motor Alarms.............................................................................................................. 21 2.11.2 Local Alarm ............................................................................................................................ 22 2.11.3 Fire Alarm............................................................................................................................... 22 2.11.3.1 Pressure Switch ................................................................................................................. 22 2.11.4 Trouble Alarm ........................................................................................................................ 22 2.12 TANK MOUNTED AIR COMPRESSOR ................................................................................ 22 2.13 AFFF CONCENTRATE ............................................................................................................ 22 2.13.1 Concentrate Fill Pump.......................................................................................................... 22 2.14 DIAPHRAGM PRESSURE PROPORTIONING EQUIPMENT........................................... 23 2.14.1 Diaphragm Pressure Proportioning Tanks ........................................................................ 23 2.14.2 Concentrate Ratio Controller .............................................................................................. 23 2.15 BALANCED PRESSURE PROPORTIONING SYSTEM..................................................... 23 2.15.1 Skid-Mounted Balanced Pressure Proportioning System ............................................... 23 2.15.2 In-Line Balanced Pressure Proportioning System ........................................................... 24 2.15.3 AFFF Concentrate Storage Tanks ..................................................................................... 24 2.16 OSCILLATING MONITOR NOZZLES.................................................................................... 24 2.17 HAND HOSE LINES ................................................................................................................. 24 2.18 WALL FOAM HYDRANTS ....................................................................................................... 25 2.19 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS ................................................................................... 25 2.19.1 Pipe, Fittings, and Mechanical Couplings ......................................................................... 25 2.19.2 Jointing Material .................................................................................................................... 25 2.19.3 Duplex Basket Strainers ...................................................................................................... 25 2.19.4 Pipe Hangers and Supports ................................................................................................ 25 2.19.5 Valves ..................................................................................................................................... 25 2.19.6 Identification Signs................................................................................................................ 26 2.19.7 Inspector's Test Connection ................................................................................................ 26 2.19.8 Main Drains ............................................................................................................................ 26 2.19.9 Pipe Sleeves.......................................................................................................................... 26 21 13 20. 00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.19.9.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, Roofs ............................................. 26 2.19.9.2 Sleeves in Partitions .......................................................................................................... 26 2.19.10 Escutcheon Plates .............................................................................................................. 26 2.19.11 Fire Department breaching Connections ........................................................................ 27 2.19.12 Backflow Preventers .......................................................................................................... 27 2.20 BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS ................................................................................................... 27 2.20.1 Pipe and Fittings ................................................................................................................... 27 2.20.2 Valves ..................................................................................................................................... 27 2.20.3 Post Indicator Valves............................................................................................................ 27 2.20.4 Valve Boxes ........................................................................................................................... 27 2.20.5 Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape ................................................................. 27 PART 3 EXECUTION................................................................................................................ 28 3.1 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING ......................................................... 28 3.2 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS ......................................... 28 3.3 AFFF SYSTEM INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 28 3.4 DISINFECTION ......................................................................................................................... 28 3.5 FIELD PAINTING ...................................................................................................................... 29 3.5.1 Foam Systems in Unfinished Areas ..................................................................................... 29 3.5.2 Foam Systems in All Other Areas ........................................................................................ 29 3.5.3 Piping Labels ........................................................................................................................... 29 3.5.4 Field Touch-Up ........................................................................................................................ 29 3.6 ELECTRICAL WORK ............................................................................................................... 29 3.6.1 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ 30 3.7 FLUSHING ................................................................................................................................. 30 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................................... 30 3.8.1 Preliminary Tests .................................................................................................................... 30 3.8.2 Formal Inspection and Tests (Acceptance Tests) ............................................................. 30 3.8.2.1 Systems and Device Testing ............................................................................................. 31 3.8.2.2 AFFF Discharge and Concentration Testing ................................................................... 31 3.8.2.3 Flushing and Rinsing ........................................................................................................... 31 3.8.3 Environmental Protection....................................................................................................... 32 3.8.4 Additional Tests ....................................................................................................................... 32 21 13 20. 00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.8.5 AFFF Concentrate Storage Tanks Fill-Up ........................................................................... 32 3.8.6 Manufacturer's Representative ............................................................................................. 32 3.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................... 32 3.10 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 32 3.11 SCHEDULE ............................................................................................................................... 33 21 13 20. 00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) a. AWWA C500 (2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service b. AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains 2. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a. ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless 3. FM GLOBAL (FM) a. FM P7825 (2009) Approval Guide 4. FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR) a. FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies 5. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) a. NFPA 11 (2005; Amendment 1 2006; Amendment 2 2007) Low-, Medium- and High- Expansion Foam Systems b. NFPA 13 (2010) Installation of Sprinkler Systems c. NFPA 14 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrants and Hose Systems d. NFPA 15 (2006) Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection e. NFPA 16 (2006) Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray Systems f. NFPA 24 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances g. NFPA 30 (2007; Errata 2008) Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code h. NFPA 409 (2004; TIA 2005; TIA 2006) Standard on Aircraft Hangers i. NFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code - 2008 Edition j. NFPA 72 (2010) National Fire Alarm Code 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 6. THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC) a. SSPC Paint 22 (1982; E 2004) Paint Specification No. 22 EpoxyPolyamide Paints (Primer, Intermediate, and Topcoat) b. SSPC Paint 25 (1997; E 2004) Paint Specification No. 25 Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel Type I and Type II c. SSPC SP 11 (1987; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal d. SSPC SP 3 (2004; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning e. SSPC SP 6 (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning 7. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD) a. MIL-DTL-24441 (Rev D) Paint, Epoxy-Polyamide b. MIL-F-24385 (Rev F; Am 1) Fire Extinguishing Agent, Aqueous Film Forming Foam (AFFF) Liquid Concentrate, for Fresh and Seawater 8. U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA) a. FS A-A-2962 (Rev J) Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss, Low VOC Content b. FS A-A-58092 (Basic) Tape, Antiseize, Polytetrafluoroethylene c. FS WW-S-2739 (Basic) Strainers, Sediment: Pipeline, Water, Air, Gas, Oil, or Steam 9. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) a. UL 262 (2004) Standard for Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service b. UL 789 (2004; Rev thru Aug 2008) Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection Service c. UL Fire Prot Dir (2009) Fire Protection Equipment Directory 10. UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 Design Requirements Design, provide new, install and commission automatic aqueous film forming foam (AFFF) deluge pre- action sprinkler system and under-wing supplemental protection system. System shall provide uniform distribution of AFFF solution to provide complete coverage throughout the areas indicated. The design, equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 11, NFPA 13, NFPA 14, NFPA 15, NFPA 16, NFPA 24, NFPA 30, NFPA 70, NFPA 72, and NFPA 409,( whichever applicable for the specific project), Each system [shall be 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 designed for earthquakes and] shall include all materials, accessories and equipment necessary to provide each system complete and ready for use. Design and install each system to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ductwork, and all other construction and equipment to provide complete coverage in accordance with the drawings to be submitted for approval. Devices and equipment for fire protection service shall be of a make and type listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. in the UL Fire Prot Dir, or approved by the Factory Mutual System and listed in FM P7825. In the publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears; reference to the "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean the PGC and its clients. 1.2.1.1 Calculations Submit design calculations for the system. a. Hydraulic calculations showing basis for design in accordance with NFPA 11 and NFPA 13. b. Pressure discharge graphs or tables showing pressure discharge relationship for sprinkler heads and discharge nozzles. c. Substantiating battery standby power requirements calculations showing battery capacity, supervisory and alarm power requirements. c. System surge analysis showing surge pressure occurring throughout the system at both design flow and nonflow conditions. 1.2.1.2 AFFF Containment and Disposal Plan Submit AFFF containment and disposal plan as required under paragraph entitled "Environmental Protection." 1.2.2 System Operation Flow of water and AFFF shall be controlled by deluge pre-action valves. Foam proportioning equipment shall activate automatically upon tripping of the valve(s) for the corresponding foam system(s). [Deluge], [Pre-action] valves shall be tripped by independent detection systems. No valve will be operated by the building fire evacuation alarm system. Use of motor-operated valves is prohibited. Once activated, system(s) shall operate until shut down manually. Provide separate circuits from the control panel to each zone of initiating devices. Transmission of signals from more than one zone over a common circuit is prohibited. 1.2.2.1 Overhead Systems Overhead systems shall be controlled by [deluge], [pre-action] valves operated by automatic detection systems and by remote manual release stations. 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.2.2.2 Monitor System Monitor nozzles shall be controlled by deluge valves operated by flow of AFFF solution in the overhead system. 1.2.2.3 Hose System Hose reels shall be controlled by deluge valves operated by remote manual release stations, separate from those used for overhead systems and monitor nozzles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: A. SD-02 Shop Drawings 1. Installation Requirements Prepare shop drawings for fire extinguishing system in accordance with the requirements for "Plans" as specified in NFPA 11 and "Working Plans" as specified in NFPA 13. Do not commence work until the design of each system and the various components have been approved. Show: a. Room, space or area layout and include data essential to the proper installation of each system b. Sprinkler heads, discharge nozzles and system piping layout annotated with reference points for design calculations c. Field wiring diagrams showing locations of devices and points of connection and terminals used for all electrical field connections in the system, with wiring color code scheme 2. As-Built Drawings As-built drawings, as specified. 3. Piping Layout and Sensing piping Arrangement 4. Pump Room B. SD-03 Product Data 1. Equipment data • • • • • • • Pipe, fittings, and mechanical couplings [Deluge] and/or [Pre-action] valves Valves, including gate, check, and globe Water motor alarms Sprinkler heads Monitor nozzles Hose and nozzles 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Pipe hangers and supports Pressure switch Fire department inlet connections Tank mounted air compressor Air pressure regulating device Air compressor pneumatic detection system Low air pressure trouble alarm Detection devices Storage batteries Alarm bells Alarm horns Annunciator panel Foam hydrants AFFF concentrate storage tanks Proportioning equipment AFFF concentrate Strainers Manual release stations Backflow preventers Control panel Battery charger Data which describe more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to indicate which type the Contractor intends to provide. Submit only originals. Photocopies will not be accepted. Partial submittals will not be accepted. 2. Spare Parts Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified. C. SD-05 Design Data • • • • Hydraulic calculations Pressure discharge graphs or tables Battery standby power requirements calculation System surge analysis D. SD-06 Test Reports 1. Preliminary Tests Three copies of the completed Preliminary Tests Reports, no later than 5 days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests. The Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed by the Fire Protection Specialist and by the Manufacturer's Representative. 2. Final Test Three copies of the completed final test Reports , no later than 5 days after the completion of 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 the tests. All items in the reports shall be signed by the Fire Protection Specialist and the Manufacturer's Representative. Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests and measurements taken during the preliminary and final testing, and documentation that proves compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion of the installation and final testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of the controls and pressure switches. The test reports shall include the description of the hydrostatic test conducted on the piping and flushing of the suction and discharge piping. A copy of the manufacturer's certified pump curve for each fire pump shall be included in the report. E. SD-07 Certificates 1. Fire Protection Specialist Concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification by the Fire Protection Specialist that the fire fighting installation is in accordance with the contract requirements, including signed approval of the Preliminary and Final Acceptance Test Reports. 2. Qualifications of Welders 3. Qualifications of Installer Certificates of qualifications, as specified. 4. Preliminary and Final Test Certification Request for formal inspection and tests, as specified 5. Certificate of origin 6. Certificate of unconditioned 5 years warranty F. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data • • • • • • • [Deluge]and/or [Pre-action] valves Tank mounted air compressor Proportioning equipment Control panel AFFF concentrate storage tanks Monitor nozzles Instructions for operating the fire extinguishing system Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Furnish one complete set of data prior to the time that final acceptance tests are performed, and furnish the remaining sets before the contract is completed.(total of four copies of each data package) 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist Work specified in this section shall be performed under the supervision of and certified by the Fire Protection Specialist. The Fire Protection Specialist shall be specialized subcontractor who is certified by UAE Civil Defence in the Automatic Sprinkler System design, studies, erection, installation, operating, maintaining, testing and commissioning. The Fire Protection Specialist shall be regularly engaged in the design and installation of the type and complexity of system specified in the Contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for at least five systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months.[ Submit data for approval showing the name and certification of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings.] 1.4.2 Qualifications of Welders Submit certificates of each welder's qualifications prior to site welding; certifications shall not be more than one year old. 1.4.3 Qualifications of Installer Prior to installation, submit data for approval showing that the Contractor has successfully installed automatic foam fire extinguishing sprinkler systems and associated equipment of the same type and design as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having such required experience. The data shall include the names and locations of at least three installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate the type and design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less than 18 months. 1.4.4 Preliminary Test Certification When preliminary tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed and dated certificate with a request for a formal inspection and tests. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, excessive humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes shall be either capped or plugged until installed. 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 12 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS DESIGN OF FOAM SYSTEMS Design of [deluge] and/or [pre-action] fire extinguishing foam systems shall be by hydraulic calculations for uniform distribution of AFFF solution over the protected area and shall conform to the NFPA standards listed above and to the requirements as specified herein. 2.1.1 Sprinkler Heads Heads shall have 15 or 13.50 mm orifice. No o-rings will be permitted in sprinkler heads. [For deluge systems, provide open heads. [For pre-action systems, the release element of each head shall be of the "high" temperature rating or higher as suitable for the individual location installed.] Provide chromium plated ceiling plates and pendent sprinklers below suspended ceilings. Provide corrosion resistant sprinkler heads and sprinkler head guards as required by NFPA 13. 2.1.2 Cabinet Provide extra sprinkler heads and sprinkler head wrench in a metal cabinet adjacent to the pre-action valve within each building. The number and types of extra sprinkler heads shall be as specified in NFPA 13. 2.1.3 [Deluge] and /or [Pre-Action] Valves Valves shall be operated by a detection system listed for releasing service and independent of the building fire alarm system. [[Deluge] [Pre-action] valve clappers shall incorporate a latching mechanism that will not be affected by changes of pressure in the water system.] If 150 mm valves are used in 200 mm risers, provide smoothly tapered connections. In addition to automatic operation, arrange each valve for manual release at the valve. Provide pressure gages and other appurtenances at the [deluge] [pre-action] valves as required by NFPA 13. Provide a detection device at the end of each actuation circuit to test the circuit and mount the device between 1.80 and 2.40 meters above the finish floor. Label each testing device to indicate the valve it activates 2.1.4 AFFF Solution Distribution 2.1.4.1 For pre-action systems Distribution shall be essentially uniform throughout the area in which it is assumed the sprinkler heads will open. Variation in discharge from individual heads in the hydraulically most remote area shall be between 100 and 115 percent of the specified density. 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 13 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.1.4.2 For deluge systems Distribution shall be essentially uniform throughout the area. Variation in discharge from individual heads shall be between 100 and 115 percent of the specified density. 2.1.5 AFFF Solution Application Density Size system to provide the specified density when the system is discharging the specified total maximum required flow. Application to horizontal surfaces below the ceiling sprinklers shall be 110 mL/sec per sq meter with simultaneous operation of foam monitor nozzles, and foam hose lines as instructed. 2.1.6 Sprinkler Discharge Area 2.1.6.1 For pre-action systems Area shall be as defined by NFPA 13 2.1.6.2 For deluge systems Area shall be as determined in accordance with NFPA 409 for Type I aircraft hangars 2.1.7 Friction Losses Calculate losses in pipe in accordance with the Hazen-Williams Formula with 'C' value of 100 for steel pipe [except 120 for steel pipe used in deluge systems], 150 for copper tube, and 140 for cement lined ductile iron pipe. 2.1.8 Location of Sprinkler Heads Location of heads in relation to the ceiling and spacing of sprinkler heads shall conform to NFPA 13 for extra hazard occupancy. The spacing of sprinklers on the branch lines shall be essentially uniform. 2.1.9 Duration of Discharge System shall apply foam solution over the sprinkler discharge area for a minimum of [10] minutes while simultaneously discharging foam solution through monitors for a minimum of [10] minutes. Hose station discharge time shall be a minimum of [20minutes. Reduction of the discharge duration based on a discharge rate higher than the specified minimum is not permitted. 2.2 ELECTRIC DETECTION DEVICES Provide electric heat detectors, and smoke detectors, and combination ultraviolet-infrared detectors. All wiring shall be supervised and installed in protective metal conduit or tubing. 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 14 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.2.1 Control Panel Modular type panel installed in a surface mounted steel cabinet with hinged door and cylinder lock. Switches and other controls shall not be accessible without the use of a key. The control panel shall be a neat, compact, factory-wired assembly containing all parts and equipment required to provide specified operating and supervisory functions of the system. Panel cabinet shall be finished on the inside and outside with factory-applied enamel finish. Provide main annunciator located on the exterior of the cabinet door or visible through the cabinet door. Provide audible trouble signal. Provide prominent engraved rigid plastic or metal identification plates, or silk-screened labels attached to the rear face of the panel viewing window, for all lamps and switches. System power shall be 120 volts AC service, transformed through a two winding isolation transformer and rectified to 24 volts DC for operation of all system initiating, actuating, signal sounding, trouble signal and fire alarm tripping circuits. System shall be electrically supervised on all circuits. A single open or ground fault condition in any detection (initiating) or signaling circuit shall not result in any loss of system function, but shall cause the actuation of system trouble signals. A ground fault condition or single break in any other circuit shall result in the activation of the system trouble signals. Loss of AC power, a break in the standby battery power circuits, or abnormal AC power or low battery voltage shall result in the operation of the system trouble signals. The abnormal position of any system switch in the control panel shall result in the operation of the system trouble signals. Trouble signals shall operate continuously until the system has been restored to normal at the control panel. System trouble shall also be annunciated on the appropriate zone of the building fire alarm panel. Provide a 100 mm remote system trouble bell [or buzzer], installed in a constantly attended area, arranged to operate in conjunction with the integral trouble signals of the panel. Provide remote bell [or buzzer] with a rigid plastic or metal identification sign which reads in English and Arabic "Foam System Trouble." Lettering on identification sign shall be a minimum of 25 mm high. Control panel, batteries, and battery charger shall be weatherproof type or located in an area not subject to water damage. System control panel shall be UL listed or FM approved for extinguishing system control (releasing device service). Permanently label all switches. Provide panel with the following switches: a. Trouble silencing switch which transfers audible trouble signals (including remote trouble devices, if provided) to an indicating lamp. Upon correction of the trouble condition, audible signals will again sound until the switch is returned to its normal position, or the trouble signal circuit shall be automatically restored to normal upon correction of the trouble condition. The silencing switch may be a momentary action, self-resetting type. b. Alarm silencing switch which when activated will silence all associated alarm devices without resetting the panel, and cause operation of system trouble signals. c. Individual zone disconnect switches which when operated will disable only their respective initiating circuit and cause operation of the system and zone trouble signals. d. Reset switch which when activated will restore the system to normal standby status after the cause of the alarm has been corrected, and all activated initiating devices reset. [Operation of reset switch shall restore activated smoke detectors to normal standby status.] e. Lamp test switch. 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 15 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 f. City disconnect switch which when activated will disconnect the coded device and cause operation of the system trouble signal. 2.2.1.1 Main Annunciator Provide integral with the main control panel. Provide separate alarm and trouble lamps for each zone alarm initiating circuit as indicated below, located on the exterior of the cabinet door or visible through the cabinet door. Lamps shall be LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Supervision will not be required provided a fault in the annunciator circuits results only in loss of annunciation and will not affect the normal functional operation of the remainder of the system. Each lamp shall provide specific identification of the [zone] [area] [device] by means of a permanent label. In no case shall zone identification consist of the words "Zone 1," "Zone 2," etc., but shall consist of the description of the [zone] [area] [device]. 2.2.1.2 Initiating Zones List zones from 1 to x, with a brief description of each zone; e.g. "Zone 1: Hangar Bay No. 1". Expand this list as necessary to identify all the zones required for the building. Initiating Zones shall be arranged as follows: Zone 1: [ Zone 2: [ Zone 3: [ Zone x: [ _] _] _] ] 2.2.1.3 Remote Annunciator Panel Locate as shown. Panel shall duplicate all requirements specified for the main control panel annunciator, except that in lieu of individual zone trouble lamps a single common system trouble lamp may be provided. Lamps shall be LED (Light Emitting Diode) type, except lamps used in backlit panels shall be LED or neon type. Panel shall have a lamp test switch. Zone identification shall be by means of silk-screened labels attached to the reverse face of backlighted viewing window(s). Panel shall be of the weatherproof type, surface mounted. 2.2.2 Auxiliary Power Supply 2.2.2.1 Storage Batteries Provide [sealed lead calcium,] [or] [sealed lead acid,] [or] [vented wet cell nickel cadmium,] batteries and charger. Drycell batteries are not acceptable. House batteries in the control panel or in a well constructed vented steel cabinet with cylinder lock, noncorrosive base, and louvered vents. Provide batteries of adequate ampere-hour rating to operate the system under supervisory conditions for 60 hours, at the end of which time batteries shall be capable of operating the entire system in a full alarm condition for not 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 16 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 less than [30] minutes. Provide calculations substantiating the battery capacity. Provide reliable separation between cells to prevent contact between terminals of adjacent cells and between battery terminals and other metal parts. Provide batteries with post-and-nut, "L"-blade, or similar terminals. Slip-on tab type terminals are not acceptable. When a separate battery cabinet is used, provide a fuse block for battery leads within the cabinets. Finish the cabinet on the inside and outside with enamel paint. Locate the top of the battery cabinet not more than 1.20 meters above floor level. 2.2.2.2 Battery Charger Provide completely automatic high/low charging rate type charger capable of recovery of the batteries from full discharge to full charge in 24 hours or less. Provide an ammeter for recording rate of charge and a voltmeter to indicate the state of battery charge under load. Meters shall be factory installed, or factory-supplied plug-in modules. Field installation of meters other than the panel manufacturer's plug- in modules is prohibited. Provide a trouble light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high-rate switch is provided. House charger in the control panel or battery cabinet. 2.3 PNEUMATIC DETECTION SYSTEM Provide pneumatic single acting rate-of-rise heat detectors. All tubing shall be supervised and installed in protective metal conduit or tubing. 2.3.1 Air Compressor Shall be automatic, electric motor driven and include piping, pressure switch, regulator, and tank if required. Provide compressor with a minimum capacity capable of charging the pneumatic detection system to normal system pressure in 15 minutes and shall include all controls necessary to maintain the system fully charged. 2.3.2 Piping and Control Panel Provide copper piping. Provide a control panel or equivalent device(s) to automatically maintain the required pneumatic pressure in the detection system, and limit the quantity of air that enters the detection/release system. Provide supply air and system air pressure gages. 2.4 PIPING SUPERVISION [Pre-action sprinkler piping] [and] [pneumatic detection system] shall be supervised. A break in the piping or tubing systems resulting in loss of pneumatic pressure shall result in the activation of a trouble signal. Provide a silencing switch which transfers trouble signals to an indicating lamp and arrange so that correction of the trouble condition will automatically transfer the trouble signal from 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 17 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 the indicating lamp back to the trouble signal until the switch is restored to normal position. 2.5 MANUAL RELEASE STATIONS Provide [combined] overhead system, and monitor nozzle release stations where shown, and separate hose station release stations at each hose station. Stations shall be of a type not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall have a dual action release configuration to prevent accidental system discharge. Break-glass-front stations are not permitted; however a pull lever break-glass-rod type is acceptable. Station color shall be red. Station shall provide positive visible indication of operation. Restoration shall require use of a key or special tool. Place warning signs at each station indicating that operation of the station will cause immediate AFFF discharge. Where a building fire alarm pull station is also mounted in the vicinity of a foam release station, separate the stations by at least one meter horizontally. Provided permanent engraved rigid plastic or metal labels to clearly distinguish foam release stations from building fire alarm stations, and to indicate the function of each foam release station. Stations shall be weatherproof type. 2.6 HEAT DETECTORS Designed for detection of fire by [combination fixed temperature rate-of-rise] or [rate compensating] principle. Locate detectors in accordance with their listing by UL or FM and the requirements of NFPA 72, except provide at least two detectors in all rooms of 56 square meters or larger in area. Temperature rating of detectors shall be in accordance with NFPA 72. Reduce heat detector spacing in areas with ceiling heights exceeding 3 meters , in accordance with NFPA 72. No detector shall be located closer than 305 mm to any part of any lighting fixture nor closer than 610 mm to any part of an air supply diffuser. Detectors, located in hazardous locations as defined by NFPA 70, shall be types approved for such locations. Provide with terminal screw type connections. Removal of detector head from its base shall cause activation of system trouble signal. Detectors shall be weatherproof type. 2.6.1 Combination Fixed Temperature Rate-of-Rise Detectors Designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported independently of conduit, tubing or wiring connections. Contacts shall be self-resetting after response to rate-of-rise actuation. Operation under fixed temperature actuation shall result in an external indication. Detector units located in areas subject to abnormal temperature changes shall operate on fixed temperature principle only. 2.6.2 Rate Compensating Detector Designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported independently of conduit, tubing or wiring connections. Detectors shall be hermetically sealed and automatically resetting type which will operate when ambient air temperature reaches detector setting regardless of rate of temperature rise. Detector operation shall not be subject to thermal time lag. 2.7 OPEN-AREA (SPOT-TYPE) SMOKE DETECTORS Designed for detection of abnormal smoke densities by the [ionization] [or] [photoelectric] principle. Provide necessary control and power modules required for operation integral with 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 18 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 the main control panel. Provide detectors and associated modules which are compatible with the main control panel and suitable for use in a supervised circuit. Detector circuits shall be of the 4 wire type whereby the detector operating power is transmitted over conductors separate from the initiating circuit. Provide a separate, fused, power circuit for each smoke detection initiating circuit (zone). Failure of the power circuit shall be indicated as a trouble condition on the corresponding initiating circuit. Malfunction of the electrical circuits to the detector or its control or power units shall result in the operation of the system trouble signals. Equip each detector with a visible indicator lamp that flashes when the detector is in the normal standby mode and glows continuously when the detector is activated. Provide plug-in type detectors with tab-lock or twist-lock, quick disconnect head and separate base in which the detector base contains screw terminals for making all wiring connections. Detector head shall be removable from its base without disconnecting any wires. Removal of detector head from its base shall cause activation of system trouble signals. Provide each detector with an integral screen to prevent entrance of insects into the detection chamber(s). 2.7.1 Ionization Detectors Multiple chamber type which is responsive to both visible and invisible particles of combustion. Detectors shall not be susceptible to operation by changes in relative humidity. 2.7.2 Photoelectric Detectors Operate on a multiple cell concept using an infra-red light-emitting diode (LED) light source. 2.7.3 Detector Spacing and Location Should be as per NFPA 72, the manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements stated herein, however, in no case shall spacing exceed 9 by 9 meters per detector, and 9 lineal meter per detector along corridors. Detectors shall not be placed closer than [1.50] meter from any air discharge or return grille, nor closer than 305 mm to any part of any lighting fixture. 2.8 COMBINATION ULTRAVIOLET-INFRARED FLAME DETECTORS Flame detectors shall operate on the dual spectrum ultraviolet-infrared (UV-IR) principle. Detector shall employ a solar-blind UV sensor with a high signal-to-noise ratio, and a narrow band IR sensor. Detector logic shall require UV and IR signals to be present, in the proper ratio or signature as emitted by a hydrocarbon fire, before the detector initiates an alarm. Detectors shall respond within 5 seconds to a JP-4 fire 3 meters square, 46 meters from the detector. Detector shall not be activated by non-fire sources such as continuous or intermittent direct or reflected solar radiation, arc-welding, lightning, radiant heat, x-rays, artificial lighting, radio transmissions, and normal jet engine functions. Detector shall have an automatic through-the-lens self-testing feature. 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 19 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 Malfunction of the detector circuitry, or degradation of the sensors' lens cleanliness to the point where the detector will not detect the design fire signature, shall cause operation of the system trouble signals. Logic circuits necessary for operation of the detector shall be integral to the detector or located in separate flame detector control panel(s) located adjacent to the foam system control panel(s). Each detector in alarm shall be individually annunciated by an LED on the detector or at the detector control panel. Primary and auxiliary power supply shall be taken from the foam system control panel(s). Detectors, and associated control panels if required, shall be compatible with the foam system control panel(s). Detectors and associated control panels shall be weatherproof, or housed in weatherproof enclosure(s) when in an area subject to system discharge and shall also be explosion-proof when located in hazardous areas as defined by NFPA 70. Detector spacing and location shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, their UL listing or FM approval, and the manufacturer's recommendations. The detector manufacturer shall determine or approve the detector layout. Detector layout drawings shall include horizontal and vertical angles for correct aiming. Locate detectors so that every portion of the protected area is within the field of view of at least three detectors, taking into account fixed obstructions. Provide detectors with manufacturer's swivel mounting bracket. Provide a permanent engraved rigid plastic or metal label at each detector location with detector aiming information (degrees horizontal and vertical) for the corresponding detector. 2.9 ELECTRICAL WORK Electrical work is specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except for control wiring. Fire alarm system is specified in Section [28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM. 2.9.1 Wiring Provide control wiring and connections to fire alarm systems, under this section and conforming to NFPA 70 and NFPA 72. Wire for 120 volt circuits shall be No. 12 AWG minimum solid conductor. Wire for low voltage DC circuits shall be No. [14] [16] AWG minimum solid conductor [, except wire to remote annunciators, if provided, may be 18 AWG minimum solid conductor]. All wiring shall be color coded. Wiring, conduit and devices exposed to water or foam discharge shall be weatherproof. Wiring, conduit and devices located in hazardous atmospheres, as defined by NFPA 70, shall be explosion proof. All conduit shall be minimum 20 mm. 2.9.2 Operating Power Power shall be 120 volts AC service, transformed through a two winding isolation type transformer and rectified to 24 volts DC for operation of all signal initiating, signal sounding, trouble signal, and actuating (releasing) circuits. Provide secondary DC power supply for operation of system in the event of failure of the AC supply. Transfer from normal to emergency power or restoration from emergency to normal power shall be fully automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm. Obtain AC operating power for control 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 20 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 panel, [and] battery charger [, and air compressor] from the line side of the incoming building power source ahead of all building services. Provide independent properly fused safety switch, with provisions for locking the cover and operating handle in the "POWER ON" position for these connections and locate adjacent to the main distribution panel. Paint switch box red and suitably identify by a lettered designation. 2.9.3 Conductor Identification Identify circuit conductors within each enclosure where a tap, splice or termination is made. Identify conductors by plastic coated self sticking printed markers or by heat-shrink type sleeves. Attach the markers in a manner that will not permit accidental detachment. Properly identify control circuit terminations. 2.10 SYSTEM ACTIVATION 2.10.1 Overhead System Activation Provide one or more risers per hangar bay as required by NFPA 409 based on size of bay. Overhead systems, monitor systems and hose systems shall be served by separate risers. Each zone shall encompass of one hangarbay. Upon activation of the detection system or overhead system manual release station(s), the corresponding overhead system protecting that area shall activate. 2.10.2 Monitor System Activation Overhead systems, monitor systems and hose systems shall be served by separate risers. Each zone shall encompass one hangar bay. Upon activation of detectors and /or two UVIR detectors for more than 5 seconds or activation of a manual release station, all monitors in that zone shall be activated. 2.10.3 Hose System Activation Each zone shall encompass the hose stations indicated . Hose stations shall be activated upon activation of a hose station manual release station. Provide a manual release station at each hose station. 2.11 ALARMS 2.11.1 Water Motor Alarms Provide weatherproof and guarded type alarm for each group of deluge and pre-action valve(s). Alarms shall sound locally on the flow of foam solution in each system to which it is connected. Mount alarms on the outside of the outer walls of each building, at locations indicated. When more than one alarm gong is provided, provide permanent engraved rigid plastic or metal signs indicating to which system each gong is connected. 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 21 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.11.2 Local Alarm Provide electric [alarm bells] to sound locally on operation of any system, regardless of whether water flows or not. When more than one alarm is provided, provide permanent engraved rigid plastic or metal signs indicating to which system each alarm is connected. 2.11.3 Fire Alarm Provide equipment for the automatic transmittal of an alarm over the building fire alarm system. Arrange so that the detection system and the flow of solution in each system will actuate the alarm. [Activation of a single UV-IR detector shall not cause activation of the foam system but shall cause activation of the fire alarm system]. 2.11.3.1 Pressure Switch Provide switch with SPDT contacts to automatically transmit alarms upon flow of water or AFFF. Alarm actuating device shall have mechanical diaphragm controlled retard device adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds and shall instantly recycle. 2.11.4 Trouble Alarm Provide local electric alarm to indicate trouble or failure of the detection system or pre-action sprinkler piping system. Also connect trouble alarm into the building fire alarm control panel to indicate "trouble" on a separate zone labeled "Foam System Trouble". 2.12 TANK MOUNTED AIR COMPRESSOR Include for projects involving pre-action sprinkler piping systems only. Provide an approved automatic type electric motor driven air compressor including pressure switch, air piping, and 38 liter minimum capacity tank. Compressor shall have a minimum capacity capable of charging the complete sprinkler system to normal system air pressure within 30 minutes. Provide each system with an approved automatic air pressure regulating device. 2.13 AFFF CONCENTRATE To be as per MIL-F-24385, 2.13.1 Concentrate Fill Pump Provide one pump to fill foam system tank. Pump shall have a minimum flow rate of 27 L/m . Pump shall be complete with 115 VAC motor, fused switch, power cord with plug and 3 meters 10 foot minimum suction and clear discharge hoses. 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 22 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.14 DIAPHRAGM PRESSURE PROPORTIONING EQUIPMENT Foam solution shall be produced by introducing AFFF concentrate into the water stream by the balanced pressure proportioning method using a diaphragm pressure tank and ratio controller. 2.14.1 Diaphragm Pressure Proportioning Tanks Tanks shall be cylindrical steel ASME pressure vessels with a full Buna-N impregnated nylon inner tank or bladder designed to contain AFFF concentrate and to be used in conjunction with the concentrate ratio controller. Tanks shall be designed for working pressure of 1206 kPa(gage) and hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times the working pressure in accordance with ASME standards at the factory. Tanks shall have UL or FM label and ASME stamp affixed to the vessel. Size tank to provide sufficient AFFF concentrate for the time specified when the system is discharging foam solution at total maximum system flow. Also provide connected reserve tanks(s) of equal capacity. Permanently label each tank with its capacity, type and percentage of concentrate, which system(s) it serves, and whether it is a main or reserve tank. Conspicuously post filling instructions near each group of tanks. Provide a gage or unbreakable sight glass to permit visual determination of level of tank contents. Prior to shop painting, abrasive blast clean tank exterior surface in accordance with SSPC SP 6 to a surface profile not to exceed 0.05 mm and provide a MILDTL-24441 or SSPC coating system to the tank exterior. Prime tank exterior with one coat of MIL-DTL-24441/1, Formula 150 or SSPC Paint 22 primer applied to a dry film thickness of 0.076 mm and topcoat with one coat of MIL-DTL-24441/7 Formula 156 (red) or SSPC Paint 22 topcoat (red) applied to a dry film thickness of 0.076 mm . 2.14.2 Concentrate Ratio Controller Ratio controller shall be a modified venturi device with AFFF concentrate feed line from diaphragm tank(s), and integral concentrate metering orifice. Size for specified flow rate(s). 2.15 BALANCED PRESSURE PROPORTIONING SYSTEM Foam solution shall be produced by introducing AFFF concentrate into the water stream by the balanced pressure proportioning method using a pump and proportioner. 2.15.1 Skid-Mounted Balanced Pressure Proportioning System Self-contained, skid-mounted system, fully assembled at the factory and delivered complete and ready for use. Field connections shall be limited to water, electrical, and AFFF concentrate inputs, foam solution output, and foam concentrate return line to storage tank. Size system for required flow rate(s). The concentrate pump and all piping, valves, and fittings in contact with foam concentrate shall be of materials resistant to the corrosive effects of the AFFF concentrate. Concentrate pump shall be electric motor driven, drip proof, 240/480 volts, 60 Hz AC. Activation and operation of system shall be fully automatic, with manual over-ride and manual shut-down. Provide permanent engraved rigid plastic or corrosion resistant metal instruction plate for emergency manual operation, along with a similarly constructed label for each control device. 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 23 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.15.2 In-Line Balanced Pressure Proportioning System Size system for required flow rates. AFFF concentrate pump shall be positive displacement, electric motor driven, drip proof, 240/480 volts, 60 Hz AC. System operation shall be fully automatic, with manual over-ride and manual shut-down. Provide a pressure regulating device in the AFFF concentrate pump return line to maintain constant pressure on the concentrate piping system at all AFFF solution flow rates. Provide an in-line balanced pressure proportioning device at each system riser to automatically balance the AFFF concentrate pressure with the water pressure at the riser to provide correct proportioning over the range of flow rates calculated for that riser. The pump and all piping, valves, and fittings in contact with the foam concentrate shall be of materials resistant to the corrosive effects of the AFFF concentrate. Provide permanent engraved rigid plastic or corrosionresistant metal instruction plate for emergency manual operation, along with a similarly constructed label for each control device. 2.15.3 AFFF Concentrate Storage Tanks Tank shall be designed for storage of AFFF concentrate at atmospheric pressure, and shall be [horizontal] [or] [vertical] cylindrical, fiberglass or polyethylene construction. Tank shall have the following: Drain valve located at the lowest point in the tank, connections for concentrate supply and return lines to the proportioners, top-mounted fill connections and inspection hatch, and a pressure/vacuum relief vent. All openings and tank connections shall be installed at the factory, no holes shall be made in the tank shell in the field. Tank shall include all necessary supports for free- standing installation. Provide a gage or unbreakable sight glass to permit visual determination of level of tank contents, unless liquid level is clearly visible through shell of tank. Size tank to provide sufficient AFFF concentrate for the time specified when the system is discharging foam solution at total maximum system flow. Also provide connected reserve tank(s) of equal capacity. Permanently label each tank with its capacity, type and percentage of concentrate, which system it serves, and whether it is a main or reserve tank. 2.16 OSCILLATING MONITOR NOZZLES Fixed, water motor operated, with override to allow manual aiming. Oscillation arc shall be adjustable from at least 0 to 2.88 radian 165 degrees. Oscillation speed shall be adjustable from 0 to 0.52 radian 30 degrees per second. Nozzle shall be adjustable while in operation from 0.52 radian 30 degrees below to 1.40 radian 80 degrees above horizontal, with lock or latching mechanism. Nozzle shall be air aspirating type, adjustable while in operation from straight stream to fan-spray. Nozzle shall be capable of retaining the adjusted setting once the desired pattern has been set. [Nozzle shall produce a straight stream of 46 meters at 1920 L/m and [690 kPa (gage)] Nozzles shall provide a minimum application rate of 4.2L/m per sq meter over the entire floor area underneath the aircraft wings and fuselage. Provide normally open 0S&Y gate valve in supply line at each monitor location. 2.17 HAND HOSE LINES Provide each hose station with flow-through reel and 30 meter of 40 mm hard rubber hose and nozzles. Nozzle shall have pistol-grip ball shutoff valve. Nozzle shall be air aspirating type. Provide normally closed quarter-turn ball valve in supply line at each hose station. 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 24 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 Nozzle flow rate shall be 228 L/m minimum. 2.18 WALL FOAM HYDRANTS Provide dual outlet connections with integral gate valves and locate about one meter above grade. Provide each outlet with 65 mm male National Standard hose threads with cap and chain. Hydrant shall be controlled by 0S&Y gate valve located inside foam room. Provide wall escutcheon plate with "FOAM HYDRANT" in raised letters cast in plate. [Hydrant shall permit testing of each pre-action system riser at full design flow without charging the system supplied by the riser.] 2.19 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS 2.19.1 Pipe, Fittings, and Mechanical Couplings To be as per NFPA 13, except steel piping shall be Schedule 40 for sizes smaller than 200 mm , and Schedule 30 or 40 for sizes 200 mm and larger. Pipe nipples 150 mm long and shorter shall be Schedule 80 steel pipe. Water motor alarm piping shall be zinc-coated steel pipe and fittings. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings shall only be permitted in pipe sizes 40 mm and larger. Rubber gaskets shall be UL listed for use in dry-pipe sprinkler systems. Use of restriction orifices, reducing flanges, and plainend fittings with mechanical couplings (which utilize steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe when pressure is applied) are not permitted. Pipe and fittings in contact with AFFF concentrate shall be material resistant to the corrosive effects of AFFF concentrate as approved by the manufacturer of the proportioning system Fittings on concentrate lines shall be flanged or welded only. Screwed or mechanical fittings will not be permitted. 2.19.2 Jointing Material To be as per FS A-A-58092, Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) tape. Pipe joint compound (pipe dope) is not acceptable. 2.19.3 Duplex Basket Strainers Include for deluge systems with high volume flow, and for untreated water supply. FS WW-S-2739, Style Y (Y pattern). Provide duplex basket strainers with removable screens having standard perforations, 3 mm in diameter in the riser beneath the deluge valves. 2.19.4 Pipe Hangers and Supports To be as per NFPA 13. 2.19.5 Valves Provide valves as required by NFPA 13 and of types approved for fire service. Gate valves 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 25 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 shall open by counterclockwise rotation. Check valves shall be flanged clear opening swing check type with flanged inspection and access cover plate for sizes 100 mm and larger. Provide an OS&Y valve beneath each [deluge] or [pre-action] valve in each riser, when more than one valve is supplied from the same water supplypipe. Butterfly valves are not acceptable. 2.19.6 Identification Signs Attach properly lettered approved metal signs conforming to NFPA 13 to each valve and alarm device. Permanently affix design data nameplates to the riser of each system. 2.19.7 Inspector's Test Connection Include for pre-action systems. Provide test connections about 2 meters above the floor for each sprinkler system and locate at the hydraulically most remote part of each system. Provide test connection piping to a location where the discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged without damage. 2.19.8 Main Drains Provide drain piping to discharge at safe points outside each building or to sight cones attached to drains of adequate size to readily receive the full flow from each drain under maximum pressure. Provide auxiliary drains as required by NFPA 13. 2.19.9 Pipe Sleeves Provide where piping passes through walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. Secure sleeves in proper position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. Provide not less than 6 mm space between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve. Firmly pack space with insulation and calk at both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof cement. 2.19.9.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, Roofs ASTM A 53/A 53M, schedule 40 or standard weight, zinc-coated steel pipe sleeves. Extend sleeves in floor slabs 80 mm above the finished floor. 2.19.9.2 Sleeves in Partitions Provide zinc-coated steel sheet having a nominal weight of not less than 4.40 kg per sq meter. 2.19.10 Escutcheon Plates Provide one piece or split hinge type plates for piping passing through floors, walls and ceilings, in both exposed and concealed areas. Provide chromium plated metal plates 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 26 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 where pipe passes through finished ceilings. Provide other plates of steel or cast iron with aluminum paint finish. Securely anchor plates in place. 2.19.11 Fire Department breaching Connections Two way type with 65 mm National Standard female hose threads with plug, chain, and identifying fire department connection escutcheon plate. 2.19.12 Backflow Preventers Reduced pressure principle type. Proof shall be furnished that each make, model/design, and size of backflow preventer being furnished for the project is approved by and has a current "Certificate of Approval" from the FCCCHR List. Listing of the particular make, model/design, and size in the current FCCCHR List will be acceptable as the required proof. 2.20 BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS 2.20.1 Pipe and Fittings To be as per NFPA 24, and Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION 2.20.2 Valves Provide as required by NFPA 24 and 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION, for fire service. Gate valves shall conform to AWWA C500 or UL 262 with cast iron body and bronze trim, and shall open by counterclockwise rotation. 2.20.3 Post Indicator Valves To be as Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION. 2.20.4 Valve Boxes To be as Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION 2.20.5 Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape Provide detectable aluminum foil plastic-backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Provide tape in rolls, 76 mm 3 minimum width, color coded for the utility involved, with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning and identification shall be CAUTION BURIED WATER PIPING BELOW or similar. Use permanent code and letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill material. Bury tape with the printed side up at a depth of 305 mm below the top surface of earth or the top surface of the subgrade under pavements. 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 27 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING To be as per specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. 3.2 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS Use tapping or drilling machine valve and mechanical joint type sleeves for connections to be made under pressure. Bolt sleeves around the mains; bolt valve conforming to AWWA C500 or UL 262 to the branch. Open valve, attach drilling machine, make tap, close valve, and remove drilling machine, all without interruption of service. Notify PGC Engineer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior to the date the connections are required; approval shall be received before any service is interrupted. Furnish all material required to make connections into the existing water supply systems, and perform all excavating, backfilling, and other incidental labor as required. Furnish the labor and the tapping or drilling machine for making the actual connections to the existing systems. 3.3 AFFF SYSTEM INSTALLATION Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with the NFPA standards and UAE SAFETY AND FIRE PROTECTION CODE OF PRACTICE referenced herein. Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Conceal piping to the maximum extent possible. Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for all connections. Make changes in piping sizes through standard reducing pipe fittings; do not use bushings. Cut pipe accurately and work into place without springing or forcing. Ream pipe ends and free pipe and fittings from burrs. Clean with solvent to remove all varnish and cutting oil prior to assembly. Make screw joints with PTFE tape applied to male thread only. 3.4 DISINFECTION Disinfect new water piping from the system control valve to the point of connection at the water main and existing water piping affected by the Contractor's operation in accordance with AWWA C651. Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 mg/kg parts per million (ppm) of free available chlorine and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from systems with clean water until maximum residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 mg/kg ppm. 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 28 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.5 FIELD PAINTING Clean, prime, and paint new foam systems including valves, piping, conduit, hangers, miscellaneous metal work, and accessories. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces using clean brushes. Clean the surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 11. Immediately after cleaning, prime the metal surfaces with one coat of SSPC Paint 25 or SSPC Paint 25primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.04 mm. Exercise care to avoid the painting of sprinkler heads and operating devices. Upon completion of painting, remove materials which were used to protect sprinkler heads and operating devices while painting is in process. Remove sprinkler heads and operating devices which have been inadvertently painted and provide new clean sprinkler heads and operating devices of the proper type. Finish primed surfaces as follows: 3.5.1 Foam Systems in Unfinished Areas Unfinished areas are defined as attic spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl spaces, foam rooms, pump rooms, pipe chases, and other spaces where ceilings are not painted or not constructed of a prefinished material. Paint primed surfaces with two coats of FS A-A-2962 red enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.04 mm. 3.5.2 Foam Systems in All Other Areas Paint primed surfaces with two coats of paint to match adjacent surfaces, except paint valves and operating accessories with two coats of FS A-A-2962 red enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.04 mm. Provide piping with 50 mm wide red bands spaced at maximum 6 meters intervals throughout the piping systems. Bands shall be red enamel or self-adhering red plastic tape. 3.5.3 Piping Labels Provide permanent labels in foam rooms, spaced at 6 meters maximum intervals along pipe, indicating "WATER", "FOAM CONCENTRATE", and "FOAM SOLUTION" on corresponding piping. 3.5.4 Field Touch-Up Clean damaged areas of shop coated tanks in accordance with SSPC SP 11 and coat cleaned areas with the same materials used for the shop applied coating system. 3.6 ELECTRICAL WORK Electrical work is specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except for control and fire alarm wiring. Fire alarm system is specified in Section 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 29 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.6.1 Wiring Provide control wiring, and connections to fire alarm systems, under this section in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 72. Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit, except electrical metallic tubing may be used in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage. Do not run low voltage DC circuits in the same conduit with AC circuits. [Run wiring to UV-IR detectors alone in separate conduit if required by the detector manufacturer.] 3.7 FLUSHING Flush the piping system with potable water in accordance with NFPA 13. Continue flushing operation until water is clear, but for not less than 10 minutes. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Prior to initial operation, inspect equipment and piping systems for compliance with drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's submittals. Perform tests in the presence of PGC Engineer to determine conformance with the specified requirements. 3.8.1 Preliminary Tests Each piping system shall be hydrostatically tested at 1379 kPa (gage) in accordance with NFPA 13 and shall show no leakage or reduction in gage pressure after 2 hours. The Contractor shall conduct complete preliminary tests, which shall encompass all aspects of system operation. Individually test all detectors, manual actuation stations, alarms, control panels, and all other components and accessories to demonstrate proper functioning. Test water flow alarms by flowing water through the inspector's test connection. When tests have been completed and all necessary corrections made, submit to PGC Engineer a signed and dated certificate, similar to that specified in NFPA 13, attesting to the satisfactory completion of all testing and stating that the system is in operating condition. Also include a written request for a formal inspection and test. 3.8.2 Formal Inspection and Tests (Acceptance Tests) PGC Engineer (s) will witness formal tests and approve all systems before they are accepted. The system shall be considered ready for such testing only after all necessary preliminary tests have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected to the satisfaction of the equipment manufacturer's technical representative and written certification to this effect is received by the Fire Protection Engineer. Submit the request for formal inspection at least 15 working days prior to the date the inspection is to take place. The control panel(s) and detection system(s) shall be in continuous service for a "break-in" period of at least 15 consecutive days prior to the formal inspection. Experienced technicians regularly employed by the Contractor in the installation of both the mechanical and electrical portions of such systems shall be present during the inspection and shall conduct the testing. All AFFF concentrate, instruments, [including UV-IR detector test lamp and function test kit,] personnel, appliances and equipment for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor. All necessary tests encompassing all aspects of system operation shall be 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 30 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 made including the following, and any deficiency found shall be corrected and the system retested at no cost to the Government. 3.8.2.1 Systems and Device Testing The entire initiating, alarm, actuation systems shall be operated. As a minimum, operation and supervision of the following functions and devices shall be demonstrated: a. All operational and supervisory functions of the control and annunciator panels. b. Each manual actuation station and associated circuit(s). c. All detectors and associated circuits. d. All alarms and associated circuits. e. All actuator circuits and system control valve(s) (without foam discharge). f. Activation of the building fire evacuation alarm system. g. Activation of the Base fire alarm system (receipt of fire alarm at alarm office). h. All of the above tests shall then be repeated with the system on battery power only. 3.8.2.2 AFFF Discharge and Concentration Testing When all of the initiating, alarm, actuation, and supervisory functions of the system operate to the satisfaction of the system manufacturer's technical representative and the PGC Fire Protection Engineer, a complete discharge test of each system shall be performed to demonstrate satisfactory performance, proper AFFF concentration, mechanical operation and operation of valves, release devices, alarms, and interlocks which control the protected areas. These tests shall be conducted by experienced personnel according to the equipment and AFFF manufacturers' recommendations. a. Test each deluge system by full flow of foam solution from the individual systems or combination of systems to achieve maximum design flow rate for at least 60 seconds. b. Test each pre-action system at their design flow rate for at least 60 seconds with temporary hose lines and nozzles connected to a test header. Furnish hose and nozzles required for tests. c. Test all hose lines and monitor nozzles by full flow of foam solution for at least 60 seconds. The manufacturer's representative shall test samples of foam solution taken from each system to ensure proper AFFF concentration. Provide protection for all electrical fixtures and equipment exposed to possible damage during tests and protect doors and other openings leading from the protected area(s), to prevent migration of foam solution into other areas or spaces. 3.8.2.3 Flushing and Rinsing After completion of tests flush all piping carrying AFFF concentrate and solution with fresh water. Piping normally containing AFFF concentrate when the system is in standby 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 31 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 mode need not be flushed. Rinse with fresh water all equipment and building surfaces exposed to AFFF discharge. 3.8.3 Environmental Protection Provide temporary measures to prevent AFFF from entering storm drains, sanitary sewers, drainage ditches, streams and water courses. Collect all discharged AFFF and rinse and flushing water and dispose of it in an EPA - approved waste-water treatment facility which provides secondary (biological) treatment. At least 15 days prior to the date flow testing is to take place, submit written plan for AFFF containment and disposal methods(s) to PGC Engineer for approval. 3.8.4 Additional Tests When deficiencies, defects or malfunctions develop during the tests required, all further testing of the system shall be suspended until proper adjustments, corrections or revisions have been made to assure proper performance of the system. If these revisions require more than a nominal delay, PGC Engineer shall be notified when the additional work has been completed, to arrange a new inspection and test of the system. All tests required shall be repeated prior to final acceptance, unless directed otherwise. 3.8.5 AFFF Concentrate Storage Tanks Fill-Up Fill storage tanks including reserve tanks and piping normally containing concentrate when the system is in standby mode with Contractor furnished AFFF concentrate after acceptance of the system. 3.8.6 Manufacturer's Representative Provide the services of representatives or technicians from the manufacturers of the foam system, and control panel , and UV-IR detectors, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system being provided, to supervise installation, adjustment, preliminary testing, and final testing of the system and to provide instruction to Government personnel. 3.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Provide operating instructions at control equipment and at each remote control station. Instructions shall clearly indicate all necessary steps for the operation of the system. Submit the proposed legend for operating instructions for approval prior to installation. Instructions shall be in engraved white letters on red rigid plastic or red enameled steel backgrounds and shall be of adequate size to permit them to be easily read. 3.10 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide operation and maintenance training to the Base Fire Department and final user personnel, training session shall include emergency procedures, and unique maintenance and safety requirements. The training conducted shall use operation and maintenance manuals specified in paragraph entitled 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 32 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 "Operations and Maintenance Manuals". Dates and times of the training period shall be coordinated through PGC Engineer and the final user 3.11 SCHEDULE Some metric measurements in this section are based on mathematical conversion of inchpound measurement, and not on metric measurement commonly agreed to by the manufacturers or other parties. The inch-pound and metric measurements shown are as follows: Products a. Air Compressor Tank Capacity b. Concentrate Fill Pump Flow Rate c. Diaphragm Pressure Proportioning Tanks Working Pressure Inch-Pound = 10 gallons Metric = 38 liters = 7 gpm = 27 L/m = 175 psig = 1206 kPa (gage) END OF SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 21 13 20.00 20 FIRE FOAM EXTINGUISHING FOR AIR CRAFT HANGERS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 33 OF 33 PGC-230033-C-P8 SECTION 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL............................................................................................................. 3 1.1 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 3 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................. 6 1.3 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 6 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 10 1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist .......................................................................................... 10 1.4.2 Qualifications of Welders .......................................................................................... 10 1.4.3 Qualifications of Installer ........................................................................................... 10 1.4.4 Preliminary Test Certification .................................................................................... 10 1.4.5 Manufacturer's Representative ................................................................................. 10 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................................................. 10 PART 2 PRODUCTS........................................................................................................ 11 2.2 FIRE PUMP ............................................................................................................... 11 2.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE ............................................ 11 2.3.1 General Requirements .............................................................................................. 11 2.3.2 Alarms ...................................................................................................................... 11 2.4 PIPING COMPONENTS ............................................................................................ 12 2.4.1 Pipe Sizes 65 mm and Larger ................................................................................... 12 2.4.1.1 Pipe ........................................................................................................................ 12 2.4.1.2 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings ................................................................... 12 2.4.1.3 Flanges................................................................................................................... 12 2.4.1.4 Gaskets .................................................................................................................. 12 2.4.1.5 Bolts ....................................................................................................................... 12 2.4.1.6 Nuts........................................................................................................................ 12 2.4.1.7 Washers ................................................................................................................. 12 2.4.2 Piping Sizes 50 mm and Smaller .............................................................................. 12 2.4.2.1 Steel Pipe ............................................................................................................... 12 2.4.2.2 Copper Tubing ........................................................................................................ 13 2.4.3 Pipe Hangers and Supports ...................................................................................... 13 2.4.4 Valves....................................................................................................................... 13 2.4.4.1 Gate Valves and Control Valves .............................................................................. 13 2.4.4.2 Tamper Switch ........................................................................................................ 13 2.4.4.3 Check Valve............................................................................................................ 13 2.4.4.4 Relief Valve ............................................................................................................ 13 2.4.4.5 Circulating Relief Valve............................................................................................ 13 2.4.4.6 Suction Pressure Regulating Valve .......................................................................... 13 2.4.5 Hose Valve Manifold Test Header............................................................................. 14 2.4.6 Pipe Sleeves ............................................................................................................. 14 2.4.7 Escutcheon Plates .................................................................................................... 14 2.5 DISINFECTING MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 14 2.5.1 Liquid Chlorine .......................................................................................................... 14 2.5.2 Hypochlorites ............................................................................................................ 14 2.6 ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVER ..................................................................................... 14 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.7 DIESEL ENGINE DRIVER ......................................................................................... 15 2.7.1 Engine Capacity........................................................................................................ 15 2.7.2 Exhaust System External to Engine .......................................................................... 15 2.7.2.1 Steel Pipe and Fittings............................................................................................. 15 2.7.2.2 Flanges................................................................................................................... 15 2.7.2.3 Piping Insulation ...................................................................................................... 15 2.8 FIRE PUMP CONTROLLER ...................................................................................... 16 2.8.1 Controller for Electric Motor Driven Fire Pump .......................................................... 16 2.8.2 Controller for Diesel Engine Driven Fire Pump .......................................................... 16 2.9 BATTERIES ............................................................................................................... 17 2.10 PRESSURE SENSING LINE ..................................................................................... 17 2.11 DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM EXTERNAL TO ENGINE ..................................................... 17 2.11.1 Steel pipe ................................................................................................................ 18 2.11.2 Copper Tubing ........................................................................................................ 18 2.11.3 Diesel Fuel Tanks ................................................................................................... 18 2.11.4 Valves ..................................................................................................................... 18 2.12 JOINTS AND FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBE .......................................................... 18 2.13 PUMP BASE PLATE AND PAD ................................................................................. 19 2.14 FLOW METER ........................................................................................................... 19 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................................................................... 20 3.1 EXAMINATION .......................................................................................................... 20 3.2 FIRE PUMP INSTALLATION RELATED SUBMITTALS ............................................. 20 3.3 INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST ................................................. 20 3.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 20 3.5 PIPE AND FITTINGS ................................................................................................. 20 3.5.1 Cleaning of Piping ..................................................................................................... 20 3.5.2 Threaded Connections.............................................................................................. 21 3.5.3 Pipe Hangers and Supports ...................................................................................... 21 3.5.3.1 Vertical Piping ......................................................................................................... 21 3.5.3.2 Horizontal Piping ..................................................................................................... 21 3.5.4 Underground Piping .................................................................................................. 21 3.5.5 Grooved Mechanical Joint......................................................................................... 21 3.6 ELECTRICAL WORK ................................................................................................. 21 3.7 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING ................................................................................ 22 3.8 FLUSHING................................................................................................................. 22 3.9 FIELD TESTS ............................................................................................................ 22 3.9.1 Hydrostatic Test ........................................................................................................ 22 3.9.2 Preliminary Tests ...................................................................................................... 22 3.9.3 Final Acceptance Test .............................................................................................. 23 3.9.3.1 Flow Tests .............................................................................................................. 23 3.9.3.2 Starting Tests.......................................................................................................... 23 3.9.3.3 Battery Changeover ................................................................................................ 23 3.9.3.4 Alarms .................................................................................................................... 23 3.9.3.5 Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................... 24 3.9.3.6 Correction of Deficiencies ........................................................................................ 24 3.9.3.8 Test Documentation ................................................................................................ 24 3.9.4 Test Equipment......................................................................................................... 24 3.10 DISINFECTION.......................................................................................................... 24 3.10.1 Chlorination ............................................................................................................ 24 3.10.2 Flushing .................................................................................................................. 25 3.10.3 Sample Testing ....................................................................................................... 25 3.11 FIELD TRAINING....................................................................................................... 25 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) a. AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater b. AWWA B300 (2004) Hypochlorites c. AWWA B301 (2004) Liquid Chlorine d. AWWA C104/A21.4 (2008) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water e. AWWA C110/A21.10 (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water f. AWWA C111/A21.11 (2000) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings g. AWWA C151/A21.51 (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water h. AWWA C500 (2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service i. AWWA C606 (2006) Grooved and Shouldered Joints 2. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) a. ASME B16.11 (2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded b. ASME B16.18 (2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings c. ASME B16.21 (2005) Non-metallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges d. ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings e. ASME B16.26 (2006) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes f. ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300 g. ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300 h. ASME B16.5 (2009) Standard for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 i. ASME B16.9 (2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 j. ASME B31.1 (2007; Addenda 2008; Addenda 2009) Power Piping 3. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a. ASTM A 183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts b. ASTM A 193/A 193M (2009) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service c. ASTM A 194/A 194M (2009) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or Both d. ASTM A 449 (2007b) Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use e. ASTM A 47/A 47M (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for f. Aluminium-Coated, by the Hot-Dip Process Steel Sheet, g. ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless h. ASTM A 536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings i. ASTM A 563 (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts j. ASTM A 563M (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric) k. ASTM A 795/A 795M (2008) Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use l. ASTM B 135 (2008a) Standard Specification for Seamless Brass Tube m. ASTM B 135M (2008a) Standard Specification for Seamless Brass Tube (Metric) n. ASTM B 42 (2002e1) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes o. ASTM B 62 (2009) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings Copper Tube p. ASTM B 75M (1999; R 2005) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube (Metric) q. ASTM B 88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube r. ASTM B 88M (2005) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric) s. ASTM C 533 (2009) Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation t. ASTM D 2000 (2008) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 u. ASTM D 3308 (2006) PTFE Resin Skived Tape v. ASTM F 436 (2009) Hardened Steel Washers w. ASTM F 436M (2009) Hardened Steel Washers (Metric) 4. FM GLOBAL (FM) a. FM P7825a (2005) Approval Guide Fire Protection b. FM P7825b (2005) Approval Guide Electrical Equipment 5. MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS) a. MSS SP-58 (2009) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture b. MSS SP-69 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application c. MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves 6. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) a. NEMA MG 1 (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and Generators 7. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) a. NFPA 1963 (2009) Standard for Fire Hose Connections b. NFPA 20 (2010) Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection c. NFPA 24 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances d. NFPA 37 (2010) Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines e. NFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code - 2008 Edition f. NFPA 72 (2010) National Fire Alarm Code 8. NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES (NICET) a. NICET 1014-7 (2003) Program Detail Manual for Certification in the Field of Fire Protection Engineering Technology (Field Code 003) Subfield of Automatic Sprinkler System Layout 9. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) a. UL 1247 (200; Rev thru Sep 2008) Diesel Engines for Driving Centrifugal Fire Pumps b. UL 142 (2006; Rev thru Dec 2007) Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 c. Combustible Liquids d. UL 262 (2004) Standard for Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service e. UL 448 (2007) Pumps for Fire-Protection Service f. UL 80 (2007; Rev thru Aug 2009) Steel Tanks for Oil-Burner Fuel g. UL Fire Prot Dir (2009) Fire Protection Equipment Directory 10. UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Install fire pumps in conformance with NFPA 20, NFPA 70, and NFPA 72, including all recommendations and advisory portions, which shall be considered mandatory; this includes advisory provisions listed in the appendices of such standards, Devices and equipment for fire protection service shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825a approved. B. Tank supports, piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories required shall be furnished as specified to provide a complete installation and to eliminate interference with other construction. C. Show detail plan view of the pump room including elevations and sections showing the fire pumps, associated equipment, and piping. Show piping schematic of pumps, devices, valves, pipe, and fittings. Provide an isometric drawing of the fire pump and all associated piping. Show point to point electrical wiring diagrams. Show piping layout and sensing piping arrangement. Show engine fuel and cooling system. Include: (1) Pumps, drivers, and controllers (2) Hose valve manifold test header (3) Circuit diagrams for pumps (4) Wiring diagrams of each controller D. Post operating instructions for pumps, drivers, controllers, and flow meters. E. Fully enclose or properly guard coupling, rotating parts, gears, projecting equipment, etc. so as to prevent possible injury to persons that come in close proximity of the equipment. Conduct testing of the fire pumps in a safe manner and ensure that all equipment is safely secured. Hoses and nozzles used to conduct flow tests shall be in excellent condition and shall be safely anchored and secured to prevent any misdirection of the hose streams. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: A. SD-02 Shop Drawings 1. Installation Requirements Three copies of the Fire Pump Installation Drawings consisting of a detailed plan view, detailed elevations and sections of the pump room, equipment and piping, 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 drawn to a scale of not less than 1:20 . Drawings shall indicate equipment, piping, and associated pump equipment to scale. All clearance, such as those between piping and equipment; between equipment and walls, ceiling and floors; and for electrical working distance clearance around all electrical equipment shall be indicated. Drawings shall include a legend identifying all symbols, nomenclatures, and abbreviations. Drawings shall indicate a complete piping and equipment layout including elevations and/or section views of the following: a. Fire pumps, controllers, piping, valves, and associated equipment. b. Sensing line for each pump including the pressure maintenance pump. c. Engine fuel system for diesel driven pumps. d. Engine cooling system for diesel driven pumps. e. Pipe hangers and sway bracing including support for diesel muffler and exhaust piping. f. Restraint of underground water main at entry-and exit-points to the building including details of pipe clamps, tie rods, mechanical retainer glands, and thrust blocks. g. A one-line schematic diagram indicating layout and sizes of all piping, devices, valves and fittings. h. A complete point-to-point connection drawing of the pump power, control and alarm systems, as well as interior wiring schematics of each controller. 2. As-Built Drawings As-built drawings, as specified. 3. Piping Layout and Sensing piping Arrangement 4. Pump Room B. SD-03 Product Data 1. Fire Pump Installation Related Submittals A list of the Fire Pump Installation Related Submittals. 2. Installation Requirements Manufacturer's catalog data included with the Fire Pump Installation Drawings for each separate piece of equipment proposed for use in the system. Catalog data shall indicate the name of the manufacturer of each item of equipment, with data annotated to indicate model to be provided. In addition, a complete equipment list that includes equipment description, model number and quantity shall be provided. Catalog data for material and equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Fire pumps, drivers and controllers including manufacturer's certified shop test characteristic curve for each pump. Shop test curve may be submitted after approval of catalog data but shall be submitted prior to the final tests. 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 b. Pressure maintenance pump and controller. c. Piping components. d. Valves, including gate, check, globe and relief valves. e. Gauges. f. Hose valve manifold test header and hose valves. g. Flow meter. h. Restrictive orifice union. i. Associated devices and equipment. 3. Spare Parts Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified. 4. Preliminary Tests Proposed procedures for Preliminary Tests, at least 14 days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and time to begin Preliminary Tests, submitted with the Preliminary Tests Procedures. 5. Field Tests Proposed diagrams, at least 2 weeks prior to start of related testing. 6. Fire Protection Specialist The name and documentation of certification of the proposed Fire Protection Specialists, prior to the submittal of the fire pump installation drawings. 7. Manufacturer's Representative The name and documentation of certification of the proposed Manufacturer's Representative, concurrent with submittal of the Fire Protection Specialist Qualifications. C. SD-06 Test Reports 1. Preliminary Tests Three copies of the completed Preliminary Tests Reports, no later than 5 days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests. The Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed by the Fire Protection Specialist and by the Manufacturer's Representative. 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 2. Final Test Three copies of the completed final test Reports , no later than 5 days after the completion of the tests. All items in the reports shall be signed by the Fire Protection Specialist and the Manufacturer's Representative. Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests and measurements taken during the preliminary and final testing, and documentation that proves compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion of the installation and final testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of the controls and pressure switches. The test reports shall include the description of the hydrostatic test conducted on the piping and flushing of the suction and discharge piping. A copy of the manufacturer's certified pump curve for each fire pump shall be included in the report. D. SD-07 Certificates 1. Fire Protection Specialist Concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification by the Fire Protection Specialist that the fire pump installation is in accordance with the contract requirements, including signed approval of the Preliminary and Final Acceptance Test Reports. 2. Qualifications of Welders 3. Qualifications of Installer Certificates of qualifications, as specified. 4. Preliminary Test Certification Request for formal inspection and tests, as specified 5. Certificate of origin 6. Certificate of unconditioned 5 years warranty E. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Fire Pumps 4 manuals listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 14 days prior to field training. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine maintenance including the name of a local supplier, simplified wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and recommended service organization (including address and telephone number) for each item of equipment. Data Package shall be submitted for fire pumps and drivers in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist Work specified in this section shall be performed under the supervision of and certified by the Fire Protection Specialist. The Fire Protection Specialist shall be specialized subcontractor who is certified by UAE Civil Defence in the Automatic Sprinkler System design, studies, erection, installation, operating, maintaining, testing and commissioning. The Fire Protection Specialist shall be regularly engaged in the design and installation of the type and complexity of system specified in the Contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for at least five systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months.[ Submit data for approval showing the name and certification of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings.] 1.4.2 Qualifications of Welders Submit certificates of each welder's qualifications prior to site welding; certifications shall not be more than one year old. 1.4.3 Qualifications of Installer Prior to installation, submit data for approval showing that the Contractor has successfully installed fire pumps and associated equipment of the same type and design as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having such required experience. The data shall include the names and locations of at least three installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate the type and design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less than 18 months. 1.4.4 Preliminary Test Certification When preliminary tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed and dated certificate with a request for a formal inspection and tests. 1.4.5 Manufacturer's Representative Work specified in this section shall be performed under the supervision of and certified by a representative of the fire pump manufacturer. The Manufacturer's Representative shall be regularly engaged in the installation of the type and complexity of fire pump(s) specified in the Contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for at least five systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, excessive humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes shall be either capped or plugged until installed. 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 2.1 2.2 PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT a. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 5 years prior to bid opening. b. All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, ; capacity or size; system in which installed and system which it controls and catalog number. Pumps and motors shall have standard nameplates securely affixed in a conspicuous place and easy to read. Fire pump shall have nameplates and markings in accordance with UL 448. Diesel driver shall have nameplate and markings in accordance with UL 1247. Electric motor nameplates shall provide the minimum information required by NFPA 70, Section 430-7. FIRE PUMP Fire pump set shall be one electric motor driven and one diesel engine driven. Each pump capacity and pressure of shall be as indicated on plans. Fire pump shall furnish not less than 150 percent of rated flow capacity at not less than 65 percent of rated net pressure. Pump shall be centrifugal [horizontal split case] or [water lubricated, vertical shaft turbine] end suction fire pump as indicated on plans. Horizontal pump shall be equipped with automatic air release devices. The maximum rated pump speed shall be 2100 rpm when driving the pump at rated capacity. Pump shall be automatic start and manual stop [automatic start and automatic stop]. Pump shall conform to the requirements of UL 448. 2.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE 2.3.1 General Requirements Materials and Equipment shall have been tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by Factory Mutual and listed in FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, such shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b. 2.3.2 Alarms Provide audible and visual alarms as required by NFPA 20 on the controller. Provide remote supervision as required by NFPA 20, in accordance with NFPA 72 Provide remote alarm devices located where shown. Alarm signal shall be activated upon the following conditions. Exterior alarm devices shall be weatherproof type. Provide alarm silencing switch and red signal lamp, with signal lamp arranged to come on when switch is placed in OFF position. 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4 PIPING COMPONENTS 2.4.1 Pipe Sizes 65 mm and Larger 2.4.1.1 Pipe Piping shall be [ASTM A 53/A 53M][ASTM A 795/A 795M], Weight Class STD (Standard), Schedule 40 (except for Schedule 30 for pipe sizes 200 mm greater in diameter), Type E or Type S, Grade A; black steel pipe. Steel pipe shall be joined by means of flanges welded to the pipe or mechanical grooved joints only. Piping shall not be jointed by welding or weld fittings. Suction piping shall be galvanized on the inside in accordance with NFPA 20. 2.4.1.2 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 1200 kPa service and shall be the product of the same manufacturer. Fitting and coupling houses shall be malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket shall be the flush type that fills the entire cavity between the fitting and the pipe. Nuts and bolts shall be heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM A 183 and shall be cadmium plated or zinc electroplated. 2.4.1.3 Flanges Flanges shall be ASME B16.5, Class 150 flanges. Flanges shall be provided at valves, connections to equipment, and where indicated. 2.4.1.4 Gaskets Gaskets shall be AWWA C111/A21.11, cloth inserted red rubber gaskets. 2.4.1.5 Bolts Bolts shall be [ASTM A 449, Type [1][2]][ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B7]. Bolts shall extend no less than three full threads beyond the nut with bolts tightened to the required torque. 2.4.1.6 Nuts Nuts shall be [ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade 7][ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade 5][ ASTM A 563M ASTM A 563, Grade [C3][DH3]]. 2.4.1.7 Washers Washers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 436M ASTM F 436. Flat circular washers shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts. 2.4.2 Piping Sizes 50 mm and Smaller 2.4.2.1 Steel Pipe Steel piping shall be [ASTM A 795/A 795M, Weight Class STD (Standard), Schedule 40, Type E or Type S, Grade A][ASTM A 53/A 53M, Weight Class XS (Extra Strong)], zinc-coated steel pipe with threaded end connections. Fittings shall be [ASME 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 12 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 B16.3][ASME B16.39], Class 150, zinc-coated threaded fittings. Unions shall be ASME B16.39, Class 150, zinc-coated unions. 2.4.2.2 Copper Tubing Copper tubing shall be ASTM B 88M ASTM B 88, Type L or K, soft annealed. Fittings shall be ASME B16.26, flared joint fittings. Pipe nipples shall be ASTM B 42 copper pipe with threaded end connections. 2.4.3 Pipe Hangers and Supports Pipe hangers and support shall be [MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69][UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b] and shall be the adjustable type. Finish of rods, nuts, washers, hangers, and supports shall be zinc-plated after fabrication. 2.4.4 Valves Valves shall be UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b for fire protection service. Valves shall have flange or threaded end connections. 2.4.4.1 Gate Valves and Control Valves Gate valves and control valves shall be outside screw and yoke (O.S.&Y.) type which open by counterclockwise rotation. Butterfly-type control valves are not permitted. 2.4.4.2 Tamper Switch The suction control valves, the discharge control valves, valves to test header and flow meter, and the by-pass control valves shall be equipped with valve tamper switches for monitoring by the fire alarm system. 2.4.4.3 Check Valve Check valve shall be clear open, swing type check valve with flange or threaded inspection plate. 2.4.4.4 Relief Valve Relief valve shall be [pilot operated][ or][ spring operated] type conforming to NFPA 20. A means of detecting water motion in the relief lines shall be provided where the discharge is not visible within the pump house. 2.4.4.5 Circulating Relief Valve An adjustable circulating relief valve shall be provided for each fire pump in accordance with NFPA 20. 2.4.4.6 Suction Pressure Regulating Valve Suction pressure regulating valve shall be FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Suction pressure shall be monitored through a pressure line to the controlling 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 13 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 mechanism of the regulating valve. Valve shall be arranged in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.4.5 Hose Valve Manifold Test Header Construct header of steel pipe. Provide ASME B16.5, Class 150 flanged inlet connection to hose valve manifold assembly. Provide approved bronze hose gate valve with 65 mm National Standard male hose threads with cap and chain; locate one meter above grade in the horizontal position for each test header outlet. Welding shall be metallic arc process in accordance with ASME B31.1. 2.4.6 Pipe Sleeves A pipe sleeve shall be provided at each location where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors, including pipe entering buildings from the exterior. Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, ceilings, and floors. Provide 25 mm minimum clearance between exterior of piping or pipe insulation, and interior of sleeve or core-drilled hole. Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. Seal space at both ends of the sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or provide a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomeric seal. In fire walls and fire floors, a fire seal shall be provided between the pipe and the sleeve in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. 2.4.7 Escutcheon Plates Provide one-piece or split-hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed areas. Provide polished stainless steel or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces. Plates shall be secured in place. 2.5 DISINFECTING MATERIALS 2.5.1 Liquid Chlorine Liquid chlorine shall conform to AWWA B301. 2.5.2 Hypochlorites Calcium hypochlorite and sodium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA B300. 2.6 ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVER Motors, controllers, contactors, and disconnects shall be provided with their respective pieces of equipment, as specified herein and shall have electrical connections provided under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Controllers and contactors shall have a maximum of 120-volt control circuits, and auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. Motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1 Design B type. Integral size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Motor wattage, horsepower shall be of sufficient size so that the nameplate wattage horsepower rating will not be exceeded throughout the entire published pump characteristic curve. The motor and fire pump controller shall be fully compatible. 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 14 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.7 DIESEL ENGINE DRIVER Diesel engine driver shall conform to the requirements of UL 1247 and shall be UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b for fire pump service. Driver shall be of the make recommended by the pump manufacturer. The engine shall be closed circuit, liquid-cooled [with raw water heat exchanger] or [with radiator and enginedriven fan]as indicated. Diesel engine shall be electric start type taking current from 2 battery units. Engine shall be equipped with a fuel in-line filter- water separator. Engine conditions shall be monitored with engine instrumentation panel that has a tachometer, hour meter, fuel pressure gauge, lubricating oil pressure gauge, water temperature gauge, and ammeter gauge. Engine shall be connected to horizontal-shaft pump by flexible couplings. For connections to vertical-shaft fire pumps, right-angle gear drives and universal joints shall be used. An engine jacket water heater shall be provided to maintain a temperature of 49 degrees C in accordance with NFPA 20. 2.7.1 Engine Capacity Engine shall have adequate wattage horsepower to drive the pump at all conditions of speed and load over the full range of the pump performance curve. The wattage horsepower rating of the engine driver shall be as recommended by the pump manufacturer and shall be derated for temperature and elevation in accordance with NFPA 20. 2.7.2 Exhaust System External to Engine Exhaust system shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 20 and NFPA 37. An exhaust muffler shall be provided for each diesel engine driver to reduce noise levels less than [85] dBA. A flexible connector with flange connections shall be provided at the engine. Flexible sections shall be stainless steel suitable for diesel-engines exhaust gas at 538 degrees C 2.7.2.1 Steel Pipe and Fittings ASTM A 53/A 53M, [Schedule 40 black steel, welding end connections. ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11 welding fittings shall be of the same material and weight as the piping. 2.7.2.2 Flanges ASME B16.5, Class [300]or [150]. Flanges shall be provided at connections to diesel engines, exhaust mufflers, and flexible connections. Gaskets shall be ASME B16.21, composition ring, 1.5875 mm. ASTM A 193/A 193M,Grade [B8] or [B7] bolts and ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade [8][7] nuts shall be provided. 2.7.2.3 Piping Insulation Products containing asbestos will not be permitted. Exhaust piping system including the muffler shall be insulated with ASTM C 533 calcium silicate insulation, minimum of 75 mm. Insulation shall be secured with not less than 9.525 mm width fibrous glass reinforced waterproof tape or Type 304 stainless steel bands spaced not more than 200 mm on center. An aluminum jacket encasing the insulation shall be provided. The aluminum jacket shall have a minimum thickness of 0.406 mm, a factory-applied polyethylene and Kraft paper moisture barrier on the inside surface. The jacket shall be secured with not less than 13 mm 0 wide stainless steel bands, spaced not less than 200 mm on centers. Longitudinal and circumferential 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 15 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 seams of the jacket shall be lapped not less than 75 mm Jackets on horizontal line shall be installed so that the longitudinal seams are on the bottom side of the pipe. The seams of the jacket for the vertical lines shall be placed on the off-weather side of the pipe. On vertical lines, the circumferential seams of the jacket shall overlap so the lower edge of each jacket overlaps the upper edge of the jacket below. 2.8 FIRE PUMP CONTROLLER Controller shall be the automatic type and UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b for fire pump service. Pump shall be arranged for automatic start and stop, and manual push-button stop. Automatic stopping shall be accomplished only after all starting causes have returned to normal and after a minimum pump run time has elapsed. Controllers shall be completely terminally wired, ready for field connections, and mounted in a NEMA Type 4 watertight and dust tight enclosure arranged so that controller current carrying parts will not be less than 300 mm above the floor. Controller shall be provided with voltage surge arresters installed in accordance with NFPA 20. Controller shall be equipped with a bourdon tube pressure switch or a solid state pressure switch with independent high and low adjustments, automatic starting relay actuated from normally closed contacts, visual alarm lamps and supervisory power light. 2.8.1 Controller for Electric Motor Driven Fire Pump Controller shall be [electronic soft start], [across the line], [auto-transformer], [wye-delta, open circuit transition], [wye-delta, closed circuit transition] starting type as indicated. Controller shall be designed for voltage and horsepower as indicated. Controller shall have a short circuit rating as indicated. Controller shall monitor pump running, loss of a phase or line power, phase reversal. Alarms shall be individually displayed in front of panel by lighting of visual lamps. Each lamp shall be labeled with rigid etched plastic labels. Controller shall be equipped with terminals for remote monitoring of pump running, pump power supply trouble (loss of power or phase and phase reversal) Limited service fire pump controllers are not permitted, except for fire pumps driven by electric motors rated less than 11 kW 15 hp. Controller shall be equipped with a 7-day electric pressure recorder with 24-hour spring wound back-up. The pressure recorder shall provide a readout of the system pressure from 0 to 207 Pa, time, and date. Controller shall require the pumps to run for ten minutes for pumps with driver motors under 149 kW and for 15 minutes for pumps with motors 149 kW and greater, prior to automatic shutdown. The controller shall be equipped with an externally operable isolating switch which manually operates the motor circuit. Means shall be provided in the controller for measuring current for all motor circuit conductors. 2.8.2 Controller for Diesel Engine Driven Fire Pump Controller shall require the pump to run for 30 minutes prior to automatic shutdown. Controller shall be equipped with two battery chargers; two ammeters; two voltmeters, one for each set of batteries. Controller shall automatically alternate the battery sets for starting the pumps. Controller shall be equipped with the following supervisory alarm functions: a. Engine Trouble (individually monitored) 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 16 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Engine overspeed Low Oil Pressure High Water Temperature Engine Failure to Start Battery Battery Charger/AC Power Failure b. Main Switch Mis-set c. Pump Running Alarms shall be individually displayed in front of panel by lighting of visual lamps, except that individual lamps are not required for pump running and main switch mis-set. Controller shall be equipped with a 7-day electric pressure recorder with 24-hour back-up mounted inside the controller. The pressure recorder shall provide a readout of the system pressure from 0 to 207 Pa, time, and date. The controller shall be equipped with an audible alarm which will activate upon any engine trouble or pump room trouble alarm condition and alarm silence switch. Controller shall be equipped with terminals for field connection of a remote alarm for main switch mis-set, pump running, engine trouble and pump room trouble When engine emergency overspeed device operates, the controller shall cause the engine to shut down without time delay and lock out until manually reset. 2.9 BATTERIES Batteries for diesel engine driver shall be sealed lead calcium batteries. Batteries shall be mounted in a steel rack with non-corrosive, non-conductive base, not less than 300 mm above the floor. 2.10 PRESSURE SENSING LINE A completely separate pressure sensing line shall be provided for each fire pump and for the jockey pump. The sensing line shall be arranged in accordance with Figure A-7-5.2.1. of NFPA 20. The sensing line shall be 13 mm H58 brass tubing complying with ASTM B 135M ASTM B 135. The sensing line shall be equipped with two restrictive orifice unions each. Restricted orifice unions shall be ground-face unions with brass restricted diaphragms drilled for a 2.4 mm. Restricted orifice unions shall be mounted in the horizontal position, not less than 1.5 m apart on the sensing line. Two test connections shall be provided for each sensing line. Test connections shall consist of two brass 13 mm globe valves and 8 mm gauge connection tee arranged in accordance with NFPA 20. One of the test connections shall be equipped with a 0 to 2100 kPa water oil-filled gauge. Sensing line shall be connected to the pump discharge piping between the discharge piping control valve and the check valve. 2.11 DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM EXTERNAL TO ENGINE Fuel system shall be provided that meets all requirements and advisory provisions of NFPA 20 and NFPA 37. The fuel tank vent piping shall be equipped with screened weatherproof vent cap. Vents shall be extended to the outside. Each tank shall be equipped with a fuel level gauge. Flexible bronze or stainless steel piping connectors with single braid shall be provided at each piping connection to the diesel engine. Supply, return, and fill piping shall be steel piping, except supply and return piping may be copper tubing. Fuel lines shall be protected 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 17 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 against mechanical damage. Fill line shall be equipped with 16 mesh removable wire screen. Fill lines shall be extended to the exterior. A weatherproof tank gauge shall be mounted on the exterior wall near each fill line for each tank. The fill cap shall be able to be locked by padlock. The engine supply (suction) connection shall be located on the side of the fuel tank so that 5 percent of the tank volume provides a sump volume not useable by the engine. The elevation of the fuel tank shall be such that the inlet of the fuel supply line is located so that its opening is no lower than the level of the engine fuel transfer pump. The bottom of the tank shall be pitched 21 mm/m to the side opposite the suction inlet connection, and to an accessible 25 mm plugged globe drain valve. 2.11.1 Steel pipe ASTM A 53/A 53M, hot-dipped zinc-coated, Schedule 40, threaded connections. Fittings shall be ASME B16.3, zinc-coated, threaded malleable iron fittings. Unions shall be ASME B16.39 zinc-coated, threaded unions. 2.11.2 Copper Tubing ASTM B 88M ASTM B 88, Type K, soft annealed, with ASME B16.26 flared fittings. 2.11.3 Diesel Fuel Tanks UL 80 or UL 142 for aboveground tanks. 2.11.4 Valves An indicating and lockable ball valve shall be provided in the supply line adjacent to the tank suction inlet connection. A check valve shall be provided in fuel return line. Valves shall be suitable for oil service. Valves shall have union end connections or threaded end connections. a. b. c. 2.12 Globe valve: MSS SP-80 Class 125 Check valve: MSS SP-80, Class 125, swing check Ball valve: Full port design, copper alloy body, 2-position lever handle. JOINTS AND FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBE Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B 75M ASTM B 75. Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to ASME B16.18. Cast copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26 and ASTM B 62. Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment. Extracted brazed tee joints produced with an acceptable tool and installed as recommended by the manufacturer may be used. Grooved mechanical joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 862 kPa service and shall be the product of the same manufacturer. Grooved fitting and mechanical coupling housing shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. Gaskets for use in grooved joints shall be molded synthetic polymer of pressure responsive design and shall conform to ASTM D 2000 for circulating medium up to 110 degrees C Grooved joints shall conform to AWWA C606 Coupling nuts and bolts for use in grooved joints shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A 183. 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 18 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.13 PUMP BASE PLATE AND PAD A common base plate shall be provided for each horizontal-shaft fire pump for mounting pump and driver unit. The base plate shall be constructed of cast iron with raised lip tapped for drainage or welded steel shapes with suitable drainage. Each base plate for the horizontal fire pumps shall be provided with a 25 mm galvanized steel drain line piped to the nearest floor drain. For vertical shaft pumps, pump head shall be provided with a cast-iron base plate and shall serve as the sole plate for mounting the discharge head assembly. Pump units and bases shall be mounted on a raised 150 mm reinforced concrete pad that is an integral part of the reinforced concrete floor. 2.14 FLOW METER Meter shall be UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b as flow meters for fire pump installation with direct flow readout device. Flow meter shall be capable of metering any waterflow quantities between 50 percent and 150 percent of the rated flow of the pumps. The flow meter shall be arranged in accordance with Figure A-2-14.2.1 of NFPA 20. The meter throttle valve and the meter control valves shall be O.S.&Y. valves. Automatic air release shall be provided if flow meter test discharge is piped to the pump suction and forms a closed-loop meter arrangement as defined in Figure A-2-14.2.1 of NFPA 20. 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 19 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXAMINATION After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the PGC site engineer of any discrepancy before performing any work. 3.2 FIRE PUMP INSTALLATION RELATED SUBMITTALS The Fire Protection Specialist shall prepare a list of the submittals, from the Contract Submittal Register, that relate to the successful installation of the fire pump(s). The submittals identified on this list shall be accompanied by a letter of approval signed and dated by the Fire Protection Specialist when submitted to PGC. 3.3 INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST The Fire Protection Specialist shall periodically perform a thorough inspection of the fire pump installation, including visual observation of the pump while running, to assure that the installation conforms to the contract requirements. There shall be no excessive vibration, leaks (oil or water), unusual noises, overheating, or other potential problems. Inspection shall include piping and equipment clearance, access, supports, and guards. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of PGC Engineer in writing, no later than three working days after the discrepancy is discovered. The Fire Protection Specialist shall witness the preliminary and final acceptance tests and, after completion of the inspections and a successful final acceptance test, shall sign test results and certify in writing that the installation the fire pump installation is in accordance with the contract requirements. 3.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Carefully remove materials so as not to damage material which is to remain. Replace existing work damaged by the Contractor's operations with new work of the same construction. Equipment, materials, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, installation, examination, inspection and testing shall be in accordance NFPA 20, except as modified herein. In addition, the fire pump and engine shall be installed in accordance with the written instructions of the manufacturer. 3.5 PIPE AND FITTINGS Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before burying, covering, or concealing. Fittings shall be provided for changes in direction of piping and for all connections. Changes in piping sizes shall be made using tapered reducing pipe fittings. Bushings shall not be used 3.5.1 Cleaning of Piping Interior and ends of piping shall be clean and free of any water or foreign material. Piping shall be kept clean during installation by means of plugs or other approved methods. When work is not in progress, open ends of the piping shall be securely closed so that no water or foreign matter will enter the pipes or fittings. Piping shall be inspected before placing in position. 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 20 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.5.2 Threaded Connections Jointing compound for pipe threads shall be as per manufacturer instruction and shall be applied to male threads only. Exposed ferrous pipe threads shall be provided with one coat of zinc molybdate primer applied to a minimum of dry film thickness of 0.025 mm. 3.5.3 Pipe Hangers and Supports Additional hangers and supports shall be provided for concentrated loads in aboveground piping, such as for valves and risers. 3.5.3.1 Vertical Piping Piping shall be supported at each floor, at not more than 3 meters intervals. 3.5.3.2 Horizontal Piping Horizontal piping supports shall be spaced as follows: Maximum Spacing (Meters) Nominal Pipe Size (mm) Coper Tube Steel Pipe 25 and under 1.8 2.0 32 40 50 65 80 90 100 120 150+ 2.0 2.4 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9 4.2 4.8 5.0 3.5.4 Underground Piping Installation of underground piping and fittings shall conform to NFPA 24. Joints shall be anchored in accordance with NFPA 24. Concrete thrust block shall be provided at elbow where pipe turns up towards floor, and the pipe riser shall be restrained with steel rods from the elbow to the flange above the floor. After installation in accordance with NFPA 24, rods and nuts shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with asphalt or other corrosion-retard material approved by PGC Engineer. Minimum depth of cover shall be 900 mm. 3.5.5 Grooved Mechanical Joint Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions. Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow- land micrometer, or other method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint. 3.6 ELECTRICAL WORK Electric motor and controls shall be in accordance with NFPA 20, NFPA 72 and NFPA 70, unless more stringent requirements are specified herein or are indicated on the drawings. Electrical wiring and associated equipment shall be provided in accordance 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 21 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 with NFPA 20 and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit, except electrical metallic tubing conduit may be provided in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage. 3.7 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. 3.8 FLUSHING The fire pump suction and discharge piping shall be flushed at 150 percent of rated capacity of each pump. Where the pump installation consists of more than one pump, the flushing shall be the total quantity of water flowing when all pumps are discharging at 150 percent of their rated capacities. The new pumps may be used to attain the required flushing volume. No underground piping shall be flushed by using the fire pumps. Flushing operations shall continue until water is clear, but not less than 10 minutes. Submit a signed and dated flushing certificate before requesting field testing. 3.9 FIELD TESTS Submit, at least 2 weeks before starting field tests, system diagrams that show the layout of equipment, piping, and storage units, and typed condensed sequence of operation, wiring and control diagrams, and operation manuals explaining preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal, safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be framed under glass or laminated plastic. After approval, these items shall be posted where directed. 3.9.1 Hydrostatic Test Piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 1551 kPa for a period of 2-hours, or at least 345 kPa in excess of the maximum pressure, when the maximum pressure in the system is in excess of 1379 kPa in accordance with NFPA 20. 3.9.2 Preliminary Tests The Fire Protection Specialist shall take all readings and measurements. The Manufacturer's Representative, a representative of the fire pump controller manufacturer, and a representative of the diesel engine manufacturer shall witness the complete operational testing of the fire pump and drivers. The fire pump controller manufacturer's representative and the diesel engine manufacturer's representative shall each be an experienced technician employed by the respective manufacturers and capable of demonstrating operation of all features of respective components including trouble alarms and operating features. Fire pumps, drivers and equipment shall be thoroughly inspected and tested to insure that the system is correct, complete, and ready for operation. Tests shall ensure that pumps are operating at rated capacity, pressure and speed. Tests shall include manual starting and running to ensure proper operation and to detect leakage or other abnormal conditions, flow testing, automatic start testing, testing of automatic settings, sequence of operation check, test of required accessories; test of pump alarms devices and supervisory signals, test of pump cooling, operational test of relief valves, Pumps shall run without abnormal noise, vibration or heating. If any 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 22 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 component or system was found to be defective, inoperative, or not in compliance with PGC Engineer during the tests and inspection, the corrections shall be made and the entire preliminary test shall be repeated. 3.9.3 Final Acceptance Test The Fire Protection Specialist shall take all readings and measurements. The Manufacturer's Representative, the fire pump controller manufacturer's representative, and the diesel engine manufacturer's representative shall also witness for the final tests. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing any damage caused by hose streams or other aspects of the test. The final acceptance test shall include the following: 3.9.3.1 Flow Tests Flow tests using the test header, hoses and playpipe nozzles shall be conducted. Flow tests shall be performed at churn (no flow), 75, 100, 125 and 150 percent capacity for each pump and at full capacity of the pump installation. Flow readings shall be taken from each nozzle by means of a calibrated pitot tube with gauge or other approved measuring equipment. Rpm, suction pressure and discharge pressure reading shall be taken as part of each flow test. Voltage and ampere readings shall taken on each phase as part of each flow test for electric-motor driven pumps. 3.9.3.2 Starting Tests Pumps shall be tested for automatic starting and sequential starting. Setting of the pressure switches shall be tested when pumps are operated by pressure drop. Tests may be performed by operating the test connection on the pressure sensing lines. As a minimum, each pump shall be started automatically 10 times and manually 10 times, in accordance with NFPA 20. Tests of engine-driven pumps shall be divided equally between both set of batteries. The fire pumps shall be operated for a period of a least 10 minutes for each of the starts; except that electric motors over 149 kW shall be operated for at least 15 minutes and shall not be started more than 2 times in 10 hours. Pressure settings that include automatic starting and stopping of the fire pump(s) shall be indicated on an etched plastic placard, attached to the corresponding pump controller. 3.9.3.3 Battery Changeover Diesel driven fire pumps shall be tested for automatic battery changeover in event of failure of initial battery units. 3.9.3.4 Alarms All pump alarms, both local and remote, shall be tested. Supervisory alarms for diesel drivers shall be electrically tested for low oil pressure, high engine jacket coolant temperature, shutdown from overspeed, battery failure and battery charger failure. 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 23 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.9.3.5 Miscellaneous Valve tamper switches shall be tested. Pressure recorder operation relief valve settings, valve operations, operation and accuracy of meters and gauges, and other accessory devices shall be verified. 3.9.3.6 Correction of Deficiencies If equipment was found to be defective or non-compliant with contract requirements, perform corrective actions and repeat the tests. Tests shall be conducted and repeated if necessary until the system has been demonstrated to comply with all contract requirements. 3.9.3.8 Test Documentation The Manufacturer's Representative shall supply a copy of the manufacturer's certified curve for each fire pump at the time of the test. The Fire Protection Specialist shall record all test results and plot curve of each pump performance during the test. Complete pump acceptance test data of each fire pump shall be recorded. The pump acceptance test data shall be on forms that give the detail pump information such as that which is indicated in Figure A-11-2.6.3(f) of NFPA 20. All test data records shall be submitted in a three ring binder. 3.9.4 Test Equipment Provide all equipment and instruments necessary to conduct a complete final test, including 65 mm diameter hoses, playpipe nozzles, pitot tube gauges, portable digital tachometer, voltage and ampere meters, and calibrated oil filled water pressure gauges. Provide all necessary supports to safely secure hoses and nozzles during the test. The Contractor shall furnish water for the tests. 3.10 DISINFECTION After all system components are installed including pumps, piping, and other associated work, and all hydrostatic tests are successfully completed, thoroughly flush the pumps and all piping to be disinfected with potable water until there is no visible sign of dirt or other residue. and hydrostatic test are successfully completed, each portion of the piping specified in this Section system to be disinfected shall be thoroughly flushed with potable water until all entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed before introducing chlorinating material. 3.10.1 Chlorination The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The chlorinating material shall be fed into the sprinkler piping at a constant rate of 50 parts per million (ppm). A properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the system with a hypochlorinator, or liquid chlorine injected into the system through a solution-fed chlorinator and booster pump shall be used. Chlorination application shall continue until the entire system if filled. The water shall remain in the system for a minimum of 24 hours. Each valve in the system shall be opened and closed several times to ensure its proper disinfection. Following the 24-hour period, no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual shall remain in the system. 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 24 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.10.2 Flushing The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than one part per million. Samples of water in disinfected containers for bacterial examination will be taken from several system locations which are approved by PGC Engineer. 3.10.3 Sample Testing Samples shall be tested for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with AWWA 10084. The testing method shall be either the multiple- tube fermentation technique or the membrane-filter technique. The disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained. 3.11 FIELD TRAINING The Fire Protection Specialist and the Manufacturer's Representative shall conduct a training course for operating and maintenance personnel as designated by PGC and Final user. The field instruction shall cover all of the items contained in the approved Operating and Maintenance Instructions. END OF SECTION 21 30 00 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 25 OF 25 PGC-230033-C-P8 SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE CONTENTS PART 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 6 REFERENCES......................................................................................................... 6 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................ 15 STANDARD PRODUCTS ....................................................................................... 17 1.3.1 Alternative Qualifications ........................................................................................ 17 1.3.2 Service Support...................................................................................................... 17 1.3.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate...................................................................................... 17 1.3.4 Modification of References ..................................................................................... 17 1.4 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ............................................................... 18 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 18 1.5.1 Welding .................................................................................................................. 18 1.5.2 Cathodic Protection and Pipe Joint Bonding ........................................................... 18 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... 18 1.6.1 Sustainable Design Requirements ........................................................................... 18 1.7 1.8 1.9 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS ............................................................................... 18 TRAINING TO USER OPERATORS ....................................................................... 19 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT .......................................................................... 19 PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................... 20 MATERIALS .......................................................................................................... 20 2.1.1 Pipe Joint Materials ................................................................................................ 20 2.1.2 Miscellaneous Materials ......................................................................................... 21 2.1.3 Pipe Insulation Material .......................................................................................... 22 2.2 2.3 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS ....................................................... 22 VALVES ................................................................................................................ 22 2.3.1 Backwater Valves ................................................................................................... 23 2.3.2 Wall Faucets .......................................................................................................... 23 2.3.3 Lawn Faucets ......................................................................................................... 23 2.3.4 Relief Valves .......................................................................................................... 23 2.3.5 Thermostatic Mixing Valves .................................................................................... 23 2.4 FIXTURES ............................................................................................................. 24 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4.1 Lavatories .............................................................................................................. 24 2.4.2 Automatic Controls ................................................................................................. 24 2.4.3 Flush Valve Water Closets ..................................................................................... 24 2.4.4 Flush Valve Urinals ................................................................................................ 25 2.4.5 Wheelchair Flush Valve Type Urinals ..................................................................... 25 2.4.6 Flush Tank Water Closets ...................................................................................... 25 2.4.7 Wall Hung Lavatories ............................................................................................. 25 2.4.8 Countertop Lavatories ............................................................................................ 26 2.4.9 Kitchen Sinks ......................................................................................................... 26 2.4.10 Service Sinks ....................................................................................................... 26 2.4.11 Drinking-Water Coolers ........................................................................................ 26 2.4.12 Wheelchair Drinking Water cooler ........................................................................ 26 2.4.13 Plastic Bathtub/Shower Units ............................................................................... 27 2.4.14 Plastic Bathtubs.................................................................................................... 27 2.4.15 Plastic Shower Stalls ............................................................................................ 27 2.4.16 Plastic Bathtub Liners ........................................................................................... 27 2.4.17 Plastic Bathtub Wall Surrounds ............................................................................ 28 2.4.18 Precast Terrazzo Shower Floors .......................................................................... 28 2.4.19 Precast Terrazzo Mop Sinks ................................................................................. 28 2.4.20 Bathtubs, Cast Iron ............................................................................................... 28 2.4.21 Bathtubs, Porcelain .............................................................................................. 28 2.4.22 Emergency Eyewash and Shower ........................................................................ 28 2.4.23 Emergency Eye and Face Wash .......................................................................... 29 2.5 2.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ................................................................................... 29 DRAINS ................................................................................................................. 29 2.6.1 Floor and Shower Drains ........................................................................................ 29 2.6.2 Bathtub and Shower Faucets and Drain Fittings ..................................................... 30 2.6.3 Area Drains ............................................................................................................ 30 2.6.4 Floor Sinks ............................................................................................................. 30 2.6.5 Pit Drains ............................................................................................................... 30 2.6.6 Sight Drains............................................................................................................ 30 2.6.7 Roof Drains and Expansion Joints .......................................................................... 31 2.6.8 Swimming Pool [and Spa ]Suction Fittings ............................................................. 31 2.7 SHOWER PAN ...................................................................................................... 31 2.7.1 Plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Shower Pan Material ............................................... 32 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.7.2 Nonplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Shower Pan Material ............................... 32 2.8 2.9 TRAPS .................................................................................................................. 32 INTERCEPTORS ................................................................................................... 33 2.9.1 Grease Interceptor ................................................................................................. 33 2.9.2 Oil Interceptor......................................................................................................... 33 2.9.3 Sand Interceptors ................................................................................................... 33 2.10 WATER HEATERS ................................................................................................ 33 2.10.1 Automatic Storage Type ....................................................................................... 33 2.11 2.12 HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS ........................................................................... 34 PUMPS .................................................................................................................. 34 2.12.1 Sump Pumps ........................................................................................................ 34 2.12.2 Circulating Pumps ................................................................................................ 34 2.12.3 Booster Pumps ..................................................................................................... 35 2.12.4 Flexible Connectors.............................................................................................. 35 2.12.5 Sewage Pumps .................................................................................................... 35 2.13 WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM ............................................................. 35 2.13.1 Constant Speed Pumping System ........................................................................ 35 2.13.2 Hydro-Pneumatic Water Pressure System............................................................ 36 2.13.3 Variable Speed Pumping System ......................................................................... 36 2.14 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM ................................................................................ 36 2.14.1 Air Compressors................................................................................................... 36 2.14.2 Lubricated Compressors ...................................................................................... 37 2.14.3 Air Receivers ........................................................................................................ 37 2.14.4 Intake Air Supply Filter ......................................................................................... 37 2.14.5 Pressure Regulators............................................................................................. 37 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER .................................................................. 38 POOL WATER PUMP SAFETY VACUUM RELEASE SYSTEM (SVRS) .................. 38 ELECTRICAL WORK ............................................................................................. 38 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS ......................................................................... 39 2.18.1 Escutcheon Plates................................................................................................ 39 2.18.2 Pipe Sleeves ........................................................................................................ 39 2.18.3 Pipe Hangers (Supports) ...................................................................................... 39 2.18.4 Nameplates .......................................................................................................... 39 2.18.5 Labels .................................................................................................................. 40 PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION ................................................................................................... 41 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 41 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.1.1 Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections .................................................................... 41 3.1.2 Compressed Air Piping (Non-Oil Free) ................................................................... 43 3.1.3 Joints...................................................................................................................... 43 3.1.4 Dissimilar Pipe Materials ........................................................................................ 45 3.1.5 Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings ................................................... 45 3.1.6 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing ..................................................................................... 45 3.1.7 Fire Seal................................................................................................................. 47 3.1.8 Supports................................................................................................................. 48 3.1.9 Welded Installation ................................................................................................. 50 3.1.10 Pipe Cleanouts ..................................................................................................... 50 3.2 WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS ..................................... 50 3.2.1 Relief Valves .......................................................................................................... 50 3.2.2 Installation of Gas- and Oil-Fired Water Heater ...................................................... 51 3.2.3 Heat Traps ............................................................................................................. 51 3.2.4 Connections to Water Heaters................................................................................ 51 3.2.5 Expansion Tank...................................................................................................... 51 3.2.6 Direct Fired and Domestic Water Heaters .............................................................. 51 3.3 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS ................................................................. 51 3.3.1 Fixture Connections ............................................................................................... 51 3.3.2 Flushometer Valves................................................................................................ 52 3.3.3 Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor ........................................................................ 52 3.3.4 Shower Bath Outfits ............................................................................................... 52 3.3.5 Fixture Supports ..................................................................................................... 52 3.3.6 Backflow Prevention Devices ................................................................................. 53 3.3.7 Access Panels........................................................................................................ 53 3.3.8 Sight Drains............................................................................................................ 53 3.3.9 Traps ...................................................................................................................... 53 3.3.10 Shower Pans ........................................................................................................ 54 3.4 3.5 3.6 VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES ................................................................... 55 WATER METER REMOTE READOUT REGISTER ................................................. 55 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS.................................................................................. 55 3.6.1 Identification Tags .................................................................................................. 55 3.6.2 Pipe Color Code Marking ....................................................................................... 55 3.6.3 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components .............................. 56 3.7 ESCUTCHEONS .................................................................................................... 56 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.8 PAINTING .............................................................................................................. 56 3.8.1 Painting of New Equipment .................................................................................... 56 3.9 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION ............................................................... 57 3.9.1 Plumbing System ................................................................................................... 57 3.9.2 Defective Work ....................................................................................................... 58 3.9.3 System Flushing ..................................................................................................... 58 3.9.4 Operational Test ..................................................................................................... 59 3.9.5 Disinfection ............................................................................................................ 59 3.9.6 [OPTIONAL DISINFECTION METHOD .................................................................. 60 3.10 3.11 3.12 WASTE MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................ 60 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................................... 60 PERFORMANCE OF WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT ........................................... 60 3.12.1 Storage Water Heaters ......................................................................................... 61 3.12.2 Unfired Hot Water Storage ................................................................................... 61 3.12.3 Instantaneous Water Heater ................................................................................. 61 3.12.4 Pool Heaters ........................................................................................................ 62 3.13 TABLES ................................................................................................................. 62 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)AHRI1010 (2002) Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers 2. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3(2011) Gas Water Heaters Vol.III, Storage Water Heaters With Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu Per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R 2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems 3. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE) AND AIR- ASHRAE 146 (2011) Method of Testing and Rating Pool Heaters ASHRAE 90.1 - SI(2010; Errata 2011; INT 2-12 2011; Errata 2011, Addenda A, B, C, G, H, J, K, O, P, S, Y, Z, BZ, CG, CI, AND DS 2012, INT 13 2012; Errata 2012, Errata 2012, Errata 2012, Errata 2012) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings 4. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE) ASSE 1001 (2008) Performance Requirements Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2009) for Atmospheric Type ASSE 1003 (2009) Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems - (ANSI approved 2010) ASSE 1010 (2004) Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters (ANSI approved 2004) ASSE 1011 (2004; Errata 2004) Performance Connection Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2004) Requirements ASSE 1012 (2009) Performance Requirements for Backflow an Intermediate Atmospheric Vent - (ANSI approved 2009) for Preventer Hose with ASSE 1013 (2009) Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers - (ANSI approved 2010) ASSE 1018 (2001) Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer Valves – Potable Water Supplied (ANSI Approved 2002) ASSE 1020 (2004; Errata 2004; Errata 2004) Performance Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly (ANSI Approved 2004) 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS Requirements PAGE 6 OF 70 for PGC-230033-C-P8 ASSE 1037 (1990) Performance Requirements Devices (Flushometers) for Plumbing Fixtures for Pressurized Flushing 5. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater AWWA B300 (2010; Addenda 2011) Hypochlorites AWWA B301 (2010) Liquid Chlorine AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - HotApplied AWWA C606 (2011) Grooved and Shouldered Joints AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains AWWA C652 (2011) Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities AWWA C700 (2009) Standard for Cold Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case AWWA C701 (2007) Standard for Cold-Water Meters - Turbine Type for Customer Service AWWA D100 (2011) Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage 6. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding AWS B2.2/B2.2M (2010) Specification for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification 7. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME A112.1.2 (2012) Standard for Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems (For Plumbing Fixtures and Water-Connected Receptors) ASME A112.14.1 (2003; R 2008) Backwater Valves ASME A112.19.1/CSA B45.2 (2008; Update 1 2008; Update 2 2011) Enameled Cast Iron and Enameled Steel Plumbing Fixtures ASME A112.19.17 (2010) Manufactured Safety Vacuum Release Systems (SVRS) for Residential and Commercial Swimming Pool, Spa, Hot Tub, and Wading Pool Suction Systems ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 (2008; Update 1 2009; Update 2 2011) Standard for Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 (2008; Update 1 2009; Update 2 2011) Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures ASME A112.19.5 (2011) Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals ASME A112.19.8 (2007; Addenda A 2008; Addenda B 2009) Suction Fittings for Use in Swimming Pools, Wading Pools, Spas, And Hot Tubs 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 ASME A112.36.2M (1991; R 2008) Cleanouts ASME A112.6.1M (1997; R 2008) Floor Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use ASME A112.6.3 (2001; R 2007) Standard for Floor and Trench Drains ASME A112.6.4 (2003: R 2008) Roof, Deck and Balcony Drains ASME B1.20.1 (1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpos (Inch) ASME B16.12 (2009) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings ASME B16.15 (2011) Cast Bronze Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250 ASME B16.18 (2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings ASME B16.21 (2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2010) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings ASME B16.23 (2011) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV ASME B16.24 (2011) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500 ASME B16.29 (2007) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV ASME B16.3 (2011) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300 ASME B16.34 (2009; Supp 2010) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300 ASME B16.4 250 (2011) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 125 and ASME B16.5 (2009) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard ASME B16.50 (2001; R 2008) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Braze-Joint Pressure Fittings ASME B31.1 (2010) Power Piping ASME B31.5 (2010) Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments ASME BPVC SEC IV (2010) BPVC Section IV-Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers ASME BPVC SEC IX (2010) BPVC Section IX-Welding and Brazing Qualifications ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1 ASME CSD-1 (2012) Control and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 8. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A105/A105M (2011a) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications ASTM A183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts ASTM A193/A193M (2012) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service and Other Special Purpose Applications ASTM A47/A47M (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings ASTM A515/A515M (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service ASTM A516/A516M (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service ASTM A518/A518M (1999; R 2008) Standard Specification for CorrosionResistant High-Silicon Iron Castings ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and HotDipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A733 (2003; R 2009e1) Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples ASTM A74 (2009) Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A888 (2011) Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications ASTM B117 (2011) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus ASTM B152/B152M (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar ASTM B306 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV) ASTM B32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder Metal ASTM B370 (2011e1) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction ASTM B42 Sizes (2010) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard ASTM B43 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes ASTM B584 (2011) Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 ASTM B75M (1999; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube (Metric) ASTM B813 (2010) Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube ASTM B828 (2002; R 2010) Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings ASTM B88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube ASTM B88M (2005; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric) ASTM C1053 (2000; R 2010) Standard Specification for Borosilicate Glass Pipe and Fittings for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Applications ASTM C564 (2011) Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM C920 (2011) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM D1004 (2009) Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting ASTM D1248 (2012) Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable ASTM D1785 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D2000 (2012) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications ASTM D2235 (2004; R 2011) Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2239 (2012) Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR- PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter ASTM D2241 (2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure- Rated Pipe (SDR Series) ASTM D2464 (2006) Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM D2466 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 ASTM D2467 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM D2564 (2004; R 2009e1) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems ASTM D2657 (2007) Heat Fusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2661 (2011) Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40, Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 ASTM D2665 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2672 (1996a; R 2009) Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement ASTM D2683 (2010) Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing ASTM D2737 (2012) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing ASTM D2822/D2822M (2005e1; R 2011) Asphalt Roof Cement ASTM D2846/D2846M (2009be1) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems ASTM D2855 (1996; R 2010) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2996 (2001; R 2007e1) Filament-Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass-FiberReinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe ASTM D3035 (2010) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter ASTM D3122 (1995; R 2009) Solvent Cements for Styrene-Rubber (SR) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3138 (2004; R 2011) Solvent Cements for Transition Joints Between Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non- Pressure Piping Components ASTM D3139 (1998; R 2011) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals ASTM D3212 (2007) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals ASTM D3261 (2010a) Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing ASTM D3311 (2011) Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns ASTM D4101 (2011) Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials ASTM D4551 (1996; R 2008e1) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Flexible Concealed Water-Containment Membrane ASTM D638 (2010) Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics ASTM E1 (2007) Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers ASTM E96/E96M (2010) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 ASTM F1290 (1998a; R 2011) Electrofusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings ASTM F1760 (2001; R 2011) Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) NonPressure Plastic Pipe Having Reprocessed-Recycled Content ASTM F2387 (2004) Standard Specification for Manufactured Safety Vacuum Release Systems (SVRS) for Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs ASTM F2389 (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure-rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping Systems ASTM F409 (2002; R 2008) Thermoplastic Accessible and Replaceable Plastic Tube and Tubular Fittings ASTM F437 (2009) Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM F438 (2009) Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 ASTM F439 (2011) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM F441/F441M (2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 ASTM F442/F442M (2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) ASTM F477 (2010) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe ASTM F493 (2010) Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM F628 (2008) Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe with a Cellular Core ASTM F877 (2011a) Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and ColdWater Distribution Systems ASTM F891 (2010) Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe with a Cellular Core 9. CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI) CISPI 301 (2009) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications CISPI 310 (2011) Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications 10. COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA) CDA A4015 1995) Copper Tube Handbook 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS (1994; PAGE 12 OF 70 R PGC-230033-C-P8 11. INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION MECHANICAL OFFICIALS (IAPMO) OF PLUMBING AND IAPMO PS 117 (2005b) Press Type Or Plain End Rub Gasketed W/ Nail CU & CU Alloy Fittings 4 Install On CU Tubing IAPMO UPC (2003) Uniform Plumbing Code IAPMO Z124.1.2 (2005) Plastic Bathtub and Shower Units IAPMO Z124.8 (1990) Plastic Bathtub Liners 12. INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC) ICC A117.1 (2009) Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities ICC IPC (2009) International Plumbing Code 13. INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA) ANSI/ISEA Z358.1 (2009) American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment 14. MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS) MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends MSS SP-25 Unions (2008) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and MSS SP-44 (2010; Errata 2011) Steel Pipeline Flanges MSS SP-58 (2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation MSS SP-67 (2011) Butterfly Valves MSS SP-69 (2003) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application (ANSI Approved American National Standard) MSS SP-70 (2011) Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends MSS SP-71 (2011) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends MSS SP-72 (2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service 15. MSS SP-78 (2011) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves MSS SP-83 (2006) Class 3000 Steel Pipe Unions Socket Welding and Threaded MSS SP-85 Ends (2011) Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE) 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 13 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 NACE SP0169 (1992; R 2007) Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems 16. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) NEMA MG 1 (2011) Motors and Generators NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors 17. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 31 (2011) Standard for the Installation of Oil-Burning Equipment NFPA 54 (2012) National Fuel Gas Code NFPA 90A (2012) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 18. NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF) NSF/ANSI 14 (2012) Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials NSF/ANSI 61 (2011; Addenda 2012) Drinking Water System Components Health Effects 19. PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA) PPFA Fire Man (2010) Firestopping: Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive Construction 20. PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI) PDI G 101 (2010) Testing and Rating Procedure for Hydro Grease Interceptors with Appendix of Installation and Maintenance Mechanical PDI WH 201 (2010) Water Hammer Arresters Standard 21. SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE) SAE J1508 (2009) Hose Clamp Specifications 22. U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA) EPA SM 9223 (2004) Enzyme Substrate Coliform Test Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System PL 93-523 (1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act 23. U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED NC (2009) Leadership in Energy and Design(tm) New Construction Rating System 24. Environmental U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 10 CFR 430 Energy Conservation Program for Consumer Products 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 14 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 40 CFR 141.80 National Primary Drinking Water Regulations; Control of Lead and Copper; General Requirements PL 109-58 Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct05) 25. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 174 (2004; Reprint Jul 2011) Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters UL 1951 (2011) Electric Plumbing Accessories UL 430 (2009; Reprint Mar 2011) Standard for Waste Disposers 1.2 26. UNIFIED PLUMBING CODE OF ABU DHABI (PCAD) 27. ESTIDAMA BY URBAN PLANNING COUNCIL OF ABU DHABI (UPC) SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: A. SD-02 Shop Drawings 1. Plumbing System; Detail drawings consisting of schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams, and other information to illustrate the requirements and operations of systems that are not covered by the Plumbing Code. Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system including piping layouts and locations of connections; dimensions for roughing-in, foundation, and support points; schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection diagrams. Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for maintenance and operation. Where piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated, details shall include loadings and proposed support methods. Mechanical drawing plans, elevations, views, and details, shall be drawn to scale. B. SD-03 Product Data 1. Fixtures; (LEED NC) List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow rate. ▪ Flush valve water closets ▪ Flush valve urinals ▪ Flush tank water closets ▪ Wall hung lavatories ▪ Countertop lavatories ▪ Kitchen sinks ▪ Service sinks ▪ Drinking-water coolers ▪ Plastic bathtubs 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 15 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 ▪ Plastic shower stalls ▪ Plastic bathtub liners ▪ Plastic bathtub wall surrounds ▪ Water heaters ▪ Pumps ▪ Backflow prevention assemblies ▪ [Shower mixers ▪ Swimming Pool [and Spa ]Suction Fittings ▪ Pool Water Pump safety vacuum release system 2. Welding A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators. 3. Vibration-Absorbing Features Details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement, foundation plan, dimensions and specifications. 4. Plumbing System Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting. Manufacturer's recommendations for the installation of bell and spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe. C. SD-06 Test Reports 1. Tests, Flushing and Disinfection Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls. 2. Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies. Certification of proper operation shall be as accomplished in accordance with concern authority regulations by an individual certified by the concern Authority to perform such tests. If no concern Authority requirement exists, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer's representative test the device, to ensure the unit is properly installed and performing as intended. The Contractor shall provide written documentation of the tests performed and signed by the individual performing the tests. D. SD-07 Certificates 1. Materials and Equipment Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, the design, fabrication, and installation shall conform to the code. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 16 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2. Bolts Written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply with the specified requirements. E. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Plumbing System Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. 1.3 STANDARD PRODUCTS Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period. 1.3.1 Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown. 1.3.2 Service Support The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. 1.3.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. 1.3.4 Modification of References In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the PGC representative . 1.3.4.1 Definitions For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the " PGC representative ." 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 17 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.3.4.2 Administrative Interpretations For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable PGC Regulations included in this contract and by the authority granted to the PGC representative to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by PGC site engineer as authorized by PGC Headquarter . 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by PGC site engineer . Replace damaged or defective items. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.5.1 Welding [Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using performancequalified welders and welding operators. Procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer, may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. PGC site engineer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of tests, and the tests shall be performed at the work site if practicable. Welders or welding operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they make as a permanent record. [Welding and nondestructive testing procedures are specified in Section 40 05 13.96 WELDING PROCESS PIPING.] Structural members shall be welded in accordance with Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL. 1.5.2 Cathodic Protection and Pipe Joint Bonding Cathodic protection and pipe joint bonding systems shall be in accordance with [Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)] [and] [Section 26 42 17.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (IMPRESSED CURRENT)] [Section 26 42 13.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY GALVANIC ANODES] [and] [Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED CURRENT] Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE) and Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED CURRENT. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with ICC IPC. Energy consuming products and systems shall be in accordance with PL 109-58 and ASHRAE 90.1 – SI 1.6.1 Sustainable Design Requirements Follow and comply with sustainability requirement program (ESTIDAMA) issued by Abu Dhabi planning Council (UPC). Nevertheless applying for Pearl rating is not required 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise PGC site engineer of any discrepancy before performing any work. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 18 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.8 TRAINING TO USER OPERATORS When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated user personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the user for regular operation. Instructor to coordinate with user to designate the most convenient time to deliver the training When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications. 1.9 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 19 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and II. Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service requirements. Pipe fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet NSF/ANSI 14 and shall be NSF listed for the service intended. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement used for potable hot and cold water service shall bear the NSF seal "NSF-PW." Polypropylene pipe and fittings shall conform to dimensional requirements of Schedule 40, Iron Pipe size and shall comply with NSF/ANSI 14, NSF/ANSI 61 and ASTM F2389. Polypropylene piping that will be exposed to UV light shall be provided with a Factory applied UV resistant coating. Pipe threads (except dry seal) shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Grooved pipe couplings and fittings shall be from the same manufacturer. Material or equipment containing lead shall not be used in any potable water system. In line devices such as water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops, valves, fittings and back flow preventers shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSF/ANSI 61, Section 8. End point devices such as drinking water fountains, lavatory faucets, kitchen and bar faucets, residential ice makers, supply stops and end point control valves used to dispense water for drinking must meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be installed underground, under concrete floor slabs, or in crawl spaces below kitchen floors. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in air plenums. 2.1.1 Pipe Joint Materials Grooved pipe and hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used under ground. Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Institute. Joints and gasket materials shall conform to the following: a. Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A74, AWWA C606. For hubless type: CISPI 310 b. Coupling for Steel Pipe: AWWA C606. c. Couplings for Grooved Pipe: [Ductile Iron ASTM A536 (Grade 65-45-12)] [Malleable Iron ASTM A47/A47M, Grade 32510]. [Copper ASTM A536]. d. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in accordance with ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1.6 mm thick, and contain Aramid fibers bonded with Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) or Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall be the full face or self centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service shall be bonded with NBR. e. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP-5. f. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents; contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides. g. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B32. h. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and conform to ASTM B813, Standard Test 1. i. PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 20 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 j. Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot type and hubless type): ASTM C564. k. Rubber Gaskets for Grooved Pipe: ASTM D2000, maximum temperature 110 degrees C. l. Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D3139, ASTM D3212 or ASTM F477. m. Bolts and Nuts for Grooved Pipe Couplings: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A183. n. Solvent Cement for Transition Joints between ABS and PVC Nonpressure Piping Components: ASTM D3138. o. Plastic Solvent Cement for ABS Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2235. p. Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855. q. Plastic Solvent Cement for CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F493. r. Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc., shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange material shall conform to ASTM A105/A105M. Blind flange material shall conform to ASTM A516/A516M cold service and ASTM A515/A515M for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength with material conforming to ASTM A193/A193M. s. Plastic Solvent Cement for Styrene Rubber Plastic Pipe: ASTM D3122. t. Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube: Copper press fittings shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22 and performance criteria of IAPMO PS 117. Sealing elements for copper press fittings shall be EPDM, FKM or HNBR. Sealing elements shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied fitting manufacturer. Sealing element shall be selected based on manufacturer's approved application guidelines. u. Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B88M, Type K, L or M. v. Heat-fusion joints for polypropylene piping: ASTM F2389. 2.1.2 Miscellaneous Materials Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following: a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201. b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B370. c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D2822/D2822M. d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508. e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M. f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M. g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide watertight, gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties. h. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines: AWWA C203. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 21 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 i. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300. j. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301. k. Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element: ASME B40.100. l. Thermometers: ASTM E1. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers. 2.1.3 Pipe Insulation Material Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. 2.2 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. 2.3 VALVES Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves 65 mm and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 80 mm and larger shall have flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based upon the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable MSS standard. Valves shall conform to the following standards: Description Butterfly Valves Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends for General Service Ball Valves Threaded, SocketWelding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends Vacuum Relief Valves Water Pressure Reducing Valves Water Heater Drain Valves Trap Seal Primer Valves Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS Standard MSS SP-67 MSS SP-70 MSS SP-71 MSS SP-72 MSS SP-110 MSS SP-78 MSS SP-80 ASME B16.34 MSS SP-85 ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 ASSE 1003 ASME BPVC SEC IV, Part HLW-810: Requirements for Potable-Water Heaters Bottom Drain Valve ASSE 1018 ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 ASME CSD-1 PAGE 22 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 for Automatically Fired Hot Water Boilers Safety Code No., Part CW, Article 5 2.3.1 Backwater Valves Backwater valves shall be either separate from the floor drain or a combination floor drain, P-trap, and backwater valve, as shown. Valves shall have cast-iron bodies with cleanouts large enough to permit removal of interior parts. Valves shall be of the flap type, hinged or pivoted, with revolving disks. Hinge pivots, disks, and seats shall be nonferrous metal. Disks shall be slightly open in a no-flow no- backwater condition. Cleanouts shall extend to finished floor and be fitted with threaded countersunk plugs. 2.3.2 Wall Faucets Wall faucets with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall be brass with 20 mm male inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 20 mm hose connection. Faucet handle shall be securely attached to stem. 2.3.3 Lawn Faucets Lawn faucets shall be brass, with either straight or angle bodies, and shall be of the compression type. Body flange shall be provided with internal pipe thread to suit 20 mm pipe. Body shall be suitable for wrench grip. Faucet spout shall have 20 mm exposed hose threads. Faucet handle shall be securely attached to stem. 2.3.4 Relief Valves Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination pressure and temperature (P&T) relief valve. The pressure relief element of a P&T relief valve shall have adequate capacity to prevent excessive pressure buildup in the system when the system is operating at the maximum rate of heat input. The temperature element of a P&T relief valve shall have a relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input of the heaters when operating at their maximum capacity. Relief valves shall be rated according to ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate of heat input is less than 59 kW shall have 20 mm minimum inlets, and 20 mm outlets. Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate of heat input is greater than 59 kW shall have 25 mm minimum inlets, and 25 mm outlets. The discharge pipe from the relief valve shall be the size of the valve outlet. 2.3.5 Thermostatic Mixing Valves Provide thermostatic mixing valve for lavatory faucets. Mixing valves, thermostatic type, pressure- balanced or combination thermostatic and pressure-balanced shall be line size and shall be constructed with rough or finish bodies either with or without plating. Each valve shall be constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver water at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature changes. The control element shall be of an approved type. The body shall be of heavy cast bronze, and interior parts shall be brass, bronze, corrosion-resisting steel or copper. The valve shall be equipped with necessary stops, check valves, unions, and sediment strainers on the inlets. Mixing valves shall maintain water temperature within 2 degrees C of any setting. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 23 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4 FIXTURES Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC. Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1. [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302 stainless steel] [Vitreous China], nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified throughout the body shall be provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have specially selected, clear [white], acid-resisting enamel coating evenly applied on surfaces. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks, crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system, except grease interceptors, shall be equipped with a trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers. Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves, shower mixing valves, shower head face plates, pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drains, and pop-up stoppers and overflow tees and shoes of bathtub waste drains [may contain acetal resin, fluorocarbon, nylon, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) or other plastic material, if the material has provided satisfactory service under actual commercial or industrial operating conditions for not less than 2 years][shall be copper alloy with all visible surfaces chrome plated].[ Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for 82 degrees C water temperature.] 2.4.1 Lavatories [Vitreous china lavatories shall be provided with two integral molded lugs on the backunderside of the fixture and drilled for bolting to the wall in a manner similar to the hanger plate.] 2.4.2 Automatic Controls Provide automatic, sensor operated faucets and flush valves to comply with ASSE 1037 and UL 1951 for lavatory faucets, urinals, and water closets. Flushing and faucet systems shall consist of solenoid- activated valves with light beam sensors. Flush valve for water closet shall include an override pushbutton. Flushing devices shall be provided as described in paragraph FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS. 2.4.3 Flush Valve Water Closets ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china, [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302 Stainless Steel,] siphon jet, elongated bowl, [floor-mounted, floor outlet]. Top of toilet seat height above floor shall be 356 to 381 mm, except 432 to 483 mm for wheelchair water closets. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic sleeve. Provide [white] solid plastic elongated [closed-front seat with cover]. Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall not exceed [6.1][3.8] liters per flush. [Provide a dual-flush water closet and flush valve combination that will also provide a second flushing water volume not to exceed 4.1 liters per flush.] Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 279 mm above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 24 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4.4 Flush Valve Urinals ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china, [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302 stainless steel],wall-mounted, wall outlet, siphon jet, integral trap, and extended side shields. Provide urinal with the rim 430 mm above the floor. Provide urinal with the rim 610 mm above the floor. Water flushing volume of the urinal and flush valve combination shall not exceed [1.9][3.8][0.5] liters per flush. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports. Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 279 mm above the fixture. [Provide solenoid-activated flush valves including electrical-operated light-beam-sensor to energize the solenoid.] 2.4.5 Wheelchair Flush Valve Type Urinals ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china, [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302 stainless steel],wall-mounted, wall outlet, blowout action, integral trap, elongated projecting bowl, 508 mm long from wall to front of flare, and ASME A112.19.5 trim. Provide large diaphragm (not less than 66 mm upper chamber inside diameter at the point where the diaphragm is sealed between the upper and lower chambers), nonholdopen flush valve of chrome plated cast brass conforming to ASTM B584, including vacuum breaker and angle (control-stop) valve with back check. The water flushing volume of the flush valve and urinal combination shall not exceed [1.9][3.8][0.5] liters per flush. Furnish urinal manufacturer's certification of conformance. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers. Mount urinal with front rim a maximum of 432 mm above floor and flush valve handle a maximum of 1118 mm above floor for use by handicapped on wheelchair. [Provide solenoid-activated flush valves including electricaloperated light-beam-sensor to energize the solenoid.] 2.4.6 Flush Tank Water Closets ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china, [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302 stainless steel],siphon jet, round bowl, pressure assisted, floor-mounted, floor outlet. Top of toilet seat height above floor shall be 356 to 381 mm, except 432 to 483 mm for wheelchair water closets. [Nonfloat swing type flush tank valves are not acceptable.] [Gravity tank type water closets are not permitted.] Provide wax bowl ring including plastic sleeve. Water flushing volume of the water closet shall not exceed [4.85][3.8] liters per flush. [Provide a dual-flush toilet with a second flushing option that shall not exceed 4.1 liters per flush.] Provide [white] solid plastic round closed-front seat with cover. 2.4.7 Wall Hung Lavatories ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china, [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302 stainless steel],straight back type, minimum dimensions of 483 mm, wide by 432 mm front to rear, with supply openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets, and openings for concealed arm carrier installation. Water flow rate shall not exceed [90] mL per second when measured at a flowing water pressure of 414 kPa. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports and concealed arms for the lavatory. Mount lavatory with the front rim 864 mm above floor and with 737 mm minimum clearance from bottom of the front rim to floor. [Provide top mounted washerless centerset lavatory faucets.] 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 25 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4.8 Countertop Lavatories ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china, [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302 stainless steel],self-rimming, minimum dimensions of 483 mm wide by 432 mm front to rear, with supply openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets. Furnish template and mounting kit by lavatory manufacturer. Water flow rate shall not exceed [90] mL per second when measured at a flowing water pressure of 414 kPa. Mount counter with the top surface 864 mm above floor and with 737 mm minimum clearance from bottom of the counter face to floor. 2.4.9 Kitchen Sinks ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4, 20 gage stainless steel with integral mounting rim for flush installation, minimum dimensions of 838 mm wide by 533 mm front to rear, two compartments, with undersides fully sound deadened, with supply openings for use with top mounted washerless sink faucets with hose spray, and with 89 mm drain outlet. Water flow rate shall not exceed [90] mL per second when measured at a flowing water pressure of 414 kPa. Provide stainless steel drain outlets and stainless steel cup strainers. Provide separate 38 mm P-trap and drain piping to vertical vent piping from each compartment. Provide top mounted washerless sink faucets with hose spray. [Provide filters for chlorine in supply piping to faucets.] [Provide UL 430 waste disposer in right compartment.] [Provide pedal valve for foot-operated flow control.] [Provide secondary kitchen sink that drains to graywater system.] [Provide sink with disposal chute to compost bucket under sink.] 2.4.10 Service Sinks ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, [white] vitreous china [ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302 stainless steel] with integral back and wall hanger supports, minimum dimensions of 559 mm wide by 508 mm front to rear, with two supply openings in 254 mm high back. Provide floor supported wall outlet cast iron P- trap and stainless steel rim guards as recommended by service sink manufacturer. Provide back mounted washerless service sink faucets with vacuum breaker and 19 mm external hose threads. 2.4.11 Drinking-Water Coolers AHRI 1010 with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable water and the refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style, air-cooled condensing unit, 5 ml per second minimum capacity, stainless steel splash receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Bubblers shall be controlled by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side mounted near the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum of 914 mm above floor and at front of unit basin. Spouts shall direct water flow at least 102 mm above unit basin and trajectory parallel or nearly parallel to the front of unit. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed steel pipe chair carriers. 2.4.12 Wheelchair Drinking Water cooler AHRI 1010, wall-mounted bubbler style with ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carrier, air-cooled condensing unit, 5 mL per second minimum capacity, stainless steel splash receptor, and all stainless steel cabinet, with 686 mm minimum knee clearance from front bottom of unit to floor and 914 mm maximum spout height above floor. Bubblers shall also be controlled by push levers, by push bars, or touch pads one on each side or one on front and both sides of the cabinet. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 26 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4.13 Plastic Bathtub/Shower Units IAPMO Z124.1.2 four piece [white] solid acrylic pressure molded fiberglass reinforced plastic bathtub/shower units. Units shall be scratch resistant, waterproof, and reinforced. Showerhead water flow rate shall not exceed [126] mL per second when measured at a flowing water pressure of 552 kPa. Provide recessed type units approximately 1524 mm wide, 762 mm front to rear, 1829 mm high with 381 mm high rim for through-the-floor drain installation with unit bottom or feet firmly supported by a smooth level floor. Provide left or right drain outlet units as required. Units shall have built-in soap dish and minimum of 305 mm long stainless steel horizontal grab bar located on back wall for standing use. Units shall meet performance requirements of IAPMO Z124.1.2 and shall be labeled by NAHB Research Foundation, Inc. for compliance. Install unit in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Finish installation by covering unit attachment flanges with wall board in accordance with unit manufacturer's recommendation. Provide smooth 100 percent silicone rubber [white] bathtub caulk between the unit and the adjacent walls and floor surfaces. 2.4.14 Plastic Bathtubs IAPMO Z124.1.2 one piece [white] solid acrylic pressure molded fiberglass reinforced plastic bathtubs. Bathtubs shall be scratch resistant, waterproof, and reinforced. Provide recessed type bathtubs approximately 1524 mm wide, 762 mm front to rear, 381 mm high rim for through-the-floor drain installation with bathtub bottom or feet firmly supported by a smooth level floor. Provide left or right drain outlet bathtub as required. Bathtubs shall meet performance requirements of IAPMO Z124.1.2 and shall be labeled by NAHB Research Foundation, Inc. for compliance. Install bathtub in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Finish installation by covering bathtub attachment flanges with dry-wall in accordance with bathtub manufacturer's recommendation. Provide smooth 100 percent silicone rubber [white] bathtub caulk between the bathtub and the adjacent walls and floor surfaces. 2.4.15 Plastic Shower Stalls IAPMO Z124.1.2 four piece [white] solid acrylic pressure molded fiberglass reinforced plastic shower stalls. Shower stalls shall be scratch resistant, waterproof, and reinforced. Showerhead water flow rate shall not exceed [126] mL per second when measured at a flowing water pressure of 552 kPa. Provide recessed type shower stalls approximately 914 mm wide, 914 mm front to rear, 1829 mm high, and 125 high mm high curb with shower stall bottom or feet firmly supported by a smooth level floor. Provide PVC shower floor drains and stainless steel strainers. Shower stalls shall meet performance requirements of IAPMO Z124.1.2 and shall be labeled by NAHB Research Foundation, Inc. for compliance. Install shower stall in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Finish installation by covering shower stall attachment flanges with dry-wall in accordance with shower stall manufacturer's recommendation. Provide smooth 100 percent silicone rubber [white] bathtub caulk between the top, sides, and bottom of shower stalls and bathroom walls and floors. 2.4.16 Plastic Bathtub Liners IAPMO Z124.8 one piece [white] plastic bathtub liners. Existing bathtubs shall be identified and measured to insure proper identification in order that each new bathtub liner shall be custom molded to fit the exact contours of the existing bathtubs. Provide left or right drain outlet bathtub liners as required. Bathtub liners shall be inserted over and into the existing bathtubs without disturbing the existing ceramic tile wainscot walls and 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 27 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 existing floor material. Prepare the existing cast-iron bathtubs, ceramic tile wainscots, and floor to receive the new bathtub liners in accordance with the bathtub liner manufacturer's written instructions. Installation personnel shall be trained by the bathtub liner manufacturer. Seal the bathtub liner to existing bathtub with waterproof adhesive as required to keep moisture out from behind the bathtub liner. Provide smooth [white] waterproof bathtub sealant between bathtub drains, bathtub, and bathtub liners. Provide replacement chromium-plated overflow cover plates and push-pull bathtub drain stopper assembly. Provide smooth 100 percent silicone rubber [white] bathtub caulk between the bathtub liner and the adjacent walls and floor surfaces in accordance with the bathtub liners manufacturer's written instructions. 2.4.17 Plastic Bathtub Wall Surrounds IAPMO Z124.1.2 three piece [white] sectional pressure molded fiberglass plastic bathtub wall surrounds suitable for installation with existing bathtubs which are approximately 1524 mm wide by 762 mm front to rear. Wall surrounds shall have built-in soap dish and minimum of 305 mm long stainless steel horizontal grab bar located on back wall for standing use. Bathtub wall surrounds shall meet performance requirements of IAPMO Z124.1.2 and shall be labeled by NAHB Research Foundation, Inc. for compliance. Install bathtub wall surrounds in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions. Finish installation by covering bathtub wall surround attachment flanges with dry-wall in accordance with bathtub wall surround manufacturer's recommendations. Provide smooth 100 percent silicone rubber [white] bathtub caulk between the bathtubs and the adjacent walls and floor surfaces. 2.4.18 Precast Terrazzo Shower Floors Terrazzo shall be made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to produce 25 mPa minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Provide floor or wall outlet copper alloy body drain cast integral with terrazzo, with polished stainless steel strainers. 2.4.19 Precast Terrazzo Mop Sinks Terrazzo shall be made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to produce 25 mPa minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Provide floor or wall outlet copper alloy body drain cast integral with terrazzo, with polished stainless steel strainers. 2.4.20 Bathtubs, Cast Iron ASME A112.19.1/CSA B45.2, [white] enameled cast iron, recessed type, minimum dimensions of 1524 mm wide by 762 mm front to rear by 406 mm high with drain outlet for above-the-floor drain installation. Provide left or right drain outlet bathtub as indicated. 2.4.21 Bathtubs, Porcelain ASME A112.19.1/CSA B45.2, [white] porcelain bonded to enameling grade metal, bonded to a structural composite, recessed type, minimum dimensions of 1524 mm wide by 762 mm front to rear by 406 mm high with drain outlet for above-the-floor drain installation. Provide left or right drain outlet bathtub as indicated. 2.4.22 Emergency Eyewash and Shower ANSI/ISEA Z358.1, floor supported free standing unit. Provide deluge shower head, stayopen ball valve operated by pull rod and ring or triangular handle. Provide eyewash and stay-open ball valve operated by foot treadle or push handle. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 28 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4.23 Emergency Eye and Face Wash ANSI/ISEA Z358.1, wall-mounted self-cleaning, nonclogging eye and face wash with quick opening, full-flow valves, stainless steel eye and face wash receptor. Unit shall deliver 0.19 L/s of aerated water at 207 kPa (gage) flow pressure, with eye and face wash nozzles 838 to 1143 mm above finished floor. Provide copper alloy control valves. Provide an air-gap with the lowest potable eye and face wash water outlet located above the overflow rim by not less than the International Plumbing Code minimum. [Provide packaged, UL listed, alarm system; including an amber strobe lamp, horn with externally adjustable loudness and horn silencing switch, mounting hardware, and waterflow service within NEMA Type 3 or 4 enclosures[and for explosion proof service within NEMA Type 7 or 9 enclosures]. 2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Backflow prevention devices must be approved by PGC site engineer . the backflow prevention devices must be listed by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control & Hydraulic Research, or any other approved testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and field evaluation of backflow prevention devices and assemblies. Reduced pressure principle assemblies, double check valve assemblies, atmospheric (nonpressure) type vacuum breakers, and pressure type vacuum breakers shall be meet the above requirements. Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to ASSE 1012. Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform to ASSE 1013. Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011. Pipe applied atmospheric type vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1001. Pressure vacuum breaker assembly shall conform to ASSE 1020. Air gaps in plumbing systems shall conform to ASME A112.1.2. 2.6 DRAINS 2.6.1 Floor and Shower Drains Floor and shower drains shall consist of a galvanized body, integral seepage pan, and adjustable perforated or slotted chromium-plated bronze, nickel-bronze, or nickel-brass strainer, consisting of grate and threaded collar. Floor drains shall be cast iron except where metallic waterproofing membrane is installed. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern for embedding in the floor construction. The seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. The strainer shall be adjustable to floor thickness. A clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane shall be provided when required. Drains shall be provided with threaded connection. Between the drain outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Floor and shower drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3.] 2.6.1.1 Metallic Shower Pan Drains Where metallic shower pan membrane is installed, polyethylene drain with corrosionresistant screws securing the clamping device shall be provided. Polyethylene drains shall have fittings to adapt drain to waste piping. Polyethylene for floor drains shall 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 29 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 conform to ASTM D1248. Drains shall have separate cast-iron "P" trap, circular body, seepage pan, and strainer, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6.1.2 Drains and Backwater Valves Drains and backwater valves installed in connection with waterproofed floors or shower pans shall be equipped with bolted-type device to securely clamp flashing. 2.6.2 Bathtub and Shower Faucets and Drain Fittings Provide single control pressure equalizing bathtub and shower faucets with body mounted from behind the wall with threaded connections. Provide ball joint self-cleaning shower heads. Provide shower heads which deliver a maximum of 0.139 l/s at 551 kPa per Energy Star requirements. Provide tubing mounted from behind the wall between bathtub faucets and shower heads and bathtub diverter spouts. Provide separate globe valves or angle valves with union connections in each supply to faucet. Provide trip-lever pop-up drain fittings for above-the-floor drain installations. The top of drain pop-ups, drain outlets, tub overflow outlet, and; control handle for pop-up drain shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Linkage between drain pop-up and popup control handle at bathtub overflow outlet shall be copper alloy or stainless steel. Provide 40 mm copper alloy adjustable tubing with slip nuts and gaskets between bathtub overflow and drain outlet; chromium-plated finish is not required. 2.6.3 Area Drains Area drains shall be plain pattern with polished stainless steel perforated or slotted grate and bottom outlet. The drain shall be circular or square with a 300 mm nominal overall width or diameter and 250 mm nominal overall depth. Drains shall be cast iron with manufacturer's standard coating. Grate shall be easily lifted out for cleaning. Outlet shall be suitable for inside caulked connection to drain pipe. Drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. 2.6.4 Floor Sinks Floor sinks shall be [square], with 300 mm nominal overall width or diameter and 250 mm nominal overall depth. Floor sink shall have an acid-resistant enamel interior finish with cast-iron body, aluminum sediment bucket, and perforated grate of cast iron in industrial areas and stainless steel in finished areas. The outlet pipe size shall be as indicated or of the same size as the connecting pipe. 2.6.5 Pit Drains Pit drains shall consist of a body, integral seepage pan, and nontilting perforated or slotted grate. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern suitable for embedding in the floor construction. The seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels for drainage to the drain pipe. Membrane or flashing clamping device shall be provided when required. Drains shall be cast iron with manufacturer's standard coating. Drains shall be circular and provided with bottom outlet suitable for inside caulked connection, unless otherwise indicated. Drains shall be provided with separate cast-iron "P" traps, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6.6 Sight Drains Sight drains shall consist of body, integral seepage pan, and adjustable strainer with perforated or slotted grate and funnel extension. The strainer shall have a threaded collar 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 30 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 to permit adjustment to floor thickness. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern suitable for embedding in the floor construction. A clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or membrane shall be provided for other than concrete construction. Drains shall have a galvanized heavy cast-iron body and seepage pan and chromium-plated bronze, nickelbronze, or nickel-brass strainer and funnel combination. Drains shall be provided with threaded connection and with a separate cast-iron "P" trap, unless otherwise indicated. Drains shall be circular, unless otherwise indicated. The funnel shall be securely mounted over an opening in the center of the strainer. Minimum dimensions shall be as follows: Area of strainer and collar: 0.023 square meters Height of funnel: 95 mm Diameter of lower portion: 50 mm of funnel Diameter of upper portion: 100 mm of funnel 2.6.7 Roof Drains and Expansion Joints Roof drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.4, with dome and integral flange, and shall have a device for making a watertight connection between roofing and flashing. The whole assembly shall be galvanized heavy pattern cast iron. For aggregate surface roofing, the drain shall be provided with a gravel stop. On roofs other than concrete construction, roof drains shall be complete with underdeck clamp, sump receiver, and an extension for the insulation thickness where applicable. A clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or membrane shall be provided when required to suit the building construction. Strainer openings shall have a combined area equal to twice that of the drain outlet. The outlet shall be equipped to make a proper connection to threaded pipe of the same size as the downspout. An expansion joint of proper size to receive the conductor pipe shall be provided. The expansion joint shall consist of a heavy cast-iron housing, brass or bronze sleeve, brass or bronze fastening bolts and nuts, and gaskets or packing. The sleeve shall have a nominal thickness of not less than 3.416 mm. Gaskets and packing shall be close-cell neoprene, O-ring packing shall be close-cell neoprene of 70 durometer. Packing shall be held in place by a packing gland secured with bolts. 2.6.8 Swimming Pool [and Spa ]Suction Fittings Pool water suction fittings in swimming pools [and spas ]shall comply with ASME A112.19.8 and addenda A112.19.8a. The compliance of the fitting shall include of the associated drain cover, sump, and hardware. The fitting shall be permanently marked to indicate compliance with the ASME standard, or permanently marked with the symbol "VGB 2008". 2.7 SHOWER PAN Shower pan may be copper, or nonmetallic material. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 31 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.7.1 Plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Shower Pan Material Material shall be sheet form. The material shall be 1.016 mm minimum thickness of plasticized polyvinyl chloride or chlorinated polyethylene and shall be in accordance with ASTM D4551. 2.7.2 Nonplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Shower Pan Material Material shall consist of a plastic waterproofing membrane in sheet form. The material shall be 1.016 mm minimum thickness of nonplasticized PVC and shall have the following minimum properties: a. or ASTM D638: Ultimate Tensile Strength: 1.79 MPa Ultimate Elongation: 398 percent 100 Percent Modulus: 3.07 MPa b. ASTM D1004: Tear Strength: 53 kilonewtons per meter c. ASTM E96/E96M: Permeance: 0.46 ng per Pa per second per sq meter d. Other Properties: Specific Gravity: 1.29 PVC Solvent: Weldable Cold Crack: minus 47 degrees C Dimensional stability 100 degrees C Hardness, Shore A: 89 2.8 TRAPS Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be [plastic per ASTM F409] [or] [copper-alloy adjustable tube type with slip joint inlet and swivel]. Traps shall be without a cleanout. [Provide traps with removable access panels for easy clean-out at sinks and lavatories. ]Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than 0.813 mm thick within commercial tolerances, except on the outside of bends where the thickness may be reduced slightly in manufacture by usual commercial methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper alloy nuts for slip joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall be below the discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic type as required for the application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip. Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except that when required for the application, the outlets shall have sockets for solderjoint connections. The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 50 mm. The interior diameter shall be not more than 3.2 mm over or under the nominal size, and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper alloy "P" trap assembly consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded trap wall nipple with cast brass wall flange shall be provided for lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit and may have a rubber-gasketed swivel joint. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 32 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.9 INTERCEPTORS 2.9.1 Grease Interceptor Grease interceptor of the size indicated shall be of reinforced concrete, [or precast concrete construction] with removable three-section, 9.5 mm checker-plate cover, and shall be installed outside the building. Interceptors shall be tested and rated in accordance with PDI G 101. Concrete shall have 21 MPa minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Provide flow control fitting. 2.9.2 Oil Interceptor Cast iron or welded steel, coated inside and outside with white acid resistant epoxy, with internal air relief bypass, bronze cleanout plug, double wall trap seal, removable combination pressure equalizing and flow diffusing baffle and sediment bucket, horizontal baffle, adjustable oil draw-off and vent connections on either side, gas and watertight gasketed nonskid cover, and flow control fitting. 2.9.3 Sand Interceptors Sand interceptor of the size indicated shall be of reinforced concrete, [or precast concrete construction] with manufacturer's standard checker-plate cover, and shall be installed [outside the building][top flush with the floor]. [ Concrete shall have 21 MPa minimum compressive strength at 28 days.] 2.10 WATER HEATERS Water heater types and capacities shall be as indicated. Each water heater shall have replaceable anodes. C. Hot water systems utilizing recirculation systems shall be tied into building off-hour controls. The thermal efficiencies and standby heat losses shall conform to TABLE III for each type of water heater specified. The only exception is that storage water heaters and hot water storage tanks having more than 2000 liters storage capacity need not meet the standard loss requirement if the tank surface area is insulated to R-12.5 and if a standing light is not used. Plastic materials polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone (PES) are forbidden to be used for vent piping of combustion gases. A factory pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply to each water heater. Expansion tanks shall be specifically designed for use on potable water systems and shall be rated for 93 degrees C water temperature and 1034 kPa working pressure. The expansion tank size and acceptance volume shall be [as indicated]. 2.10.1 Automatic Storage Type Heaters shall be complete with [control system, temperature gauge, and pressure gauge,] and shall have ASME rated combination pressure and temperature relief valve. 2.10.1.1 Electric Type Electric type water heaters shall conform to UL 174 with dual heating elements. Each element shall be 4.5 KW. The elements shall be wired so that only one element can operate at a time. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 33 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.11 HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS Hot-water storage tanks shall be constructed by one manufacturer, ASME stamped for the working pressure, and shall have the National Board (ASME) registration. The tank shall be glass-lined steel type in accordance with AWWA D100. The heat loss shall conform to TABLE III as determined by the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - SI. Each tank shall be equipped with a thermometer, conforming to ASTM E1, Type I, Class 3, Range C, style and form as required for the installation, and with 175 mm scale. Thermometer shall have a separable socket suitable for a 20 mm tapped opening. Tanks shall be equipped with a pressure gauge 155 mm minimum diameter face. Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Storage tank capacity shall be as shown. 2.12 PUMPS 2.12.1 Sump Pumps Sump pumps shall be of capacities indicated. The pumps shall be of the automatic, electric motor- driven, submerged type, complete with necessary control equipment and with a split or solid cast-iron or steel cover plate. The pumps shall be direct-connected by an approved flexible coupling to a vertical electric motor having a continuous oiling device or packed bearings sealed against dirt and moisture. Motors shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled of sizes as indicated and shall be equipped with an across- the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type [1] [4] enclosure. Integral size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Each pump shall be fitted with a high-grade thrust bearing mounted above the floor. Each shaft shall have an alignment bearing at each end, and the suction inlet shall be between 75 and 150 mm above the sump bottom. The suction side of each pump shall have a strainer of ample capacity. A float switch assembly, with the switch completely enclosed in a NEMA 250, Type [1] [4] enclosure, shall start and stop each motor at predetermined water levels. Duplex pumps shall be equipped with an automatic alternator to change the lead operation from one pump to the other, and for starting the second pump if the flow exceeds the capacity of the first pump. The discharge line from each pump shall be provided with a union or flange, a nonclog swing check valve, and a stop valve in an accessible location near the pump. 2.12.2 Circulating Pumps Domestic hot water circulating pumps shall be electrically driven, single-stage, centrifugal, with mechanical seals, suitable for the intended service. Pump and motor shall be [integrally mounted on a cast-iron or steel subbase,] . The shaft shall be one-piece, heattreated, corrosion-resisting steel with impeller and smooth-surfaced housing of bronze. Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled and shall have sufficient wattage for the service required. Each pump motor shall be equipped with an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with "START-STOP" switch in cover. Integral size motors shall be premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Pump motors smaller than 746 W shall have integral thermal overload protection in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Guards shall shield exposed moving parts. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 34 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.12.3 Booster Pumps 2.12.3.1 Centrifugal Pumps Horizontal split-case centrifugal-type booster pumps shall be furnished. The capacities shall be as shown, and the speed shall not exceed 1800 rpm. Pumps shall have a casing of close-grained iron or steel with smooth water passages. A gasket shall be provided between the upper and lower halves of the casing. Suction and discharge connections shall be flanged. Impellers shall be nonoverloading, bronze, balanced to eliminate vibration, and shall be keyed to corrosion-resisting steel shafts. The casings shall be fitted with bronze wearing or sealing rings. Bearings shall be cartridge type, enabling the entire rotating element to be removed without disturbing alignment or exposing the bearings to dirt, water, and other foreign matter. Pumps shall be provided with mechanical seals. Seal boxes shall be machined in the pump casing and at both sides of the pump, and shall be of sufficient depth to include a conventional bronze seal ring and rows of shaft packing. Bedplates shall be close-grain cast iron or steel with ribs and lugs, complete with foundation bolts, and shall have a drip lip with drain hole. Each pump shall be tested at the manufacturer's plant for operating characteristics at the rated capacity and under specified operating conditions. Test curves shall be furnished showing capacity in liters per second, head in meters, efficiency, brake wattage, and operation in parallel with similar pumps. Multiple pump installations shall have pump characteristics compatible for operation in parallel with similar pumps. The electric motor shall be sized for non-overload when operating at any point along the characteristic curve of the pump. Guards shall shield exposed belts and moving parts. 2.12.3.2 Controls Each pump motor shall be provided with enclosed across-the-line-type magnetic controller complete in a NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with three position, "HAND-OFFAUTOMATIC," selector switch in cover. Pumps shall be automatically started and stopped by float or pressure switches, as indicated. The pumps shall start and stop at the levels and pressures indicated. A multiposition sequence selector switch shall be provided so that any two pumps may be operated simultaneously beeping a third pump as a standby. 2.12.4 Flexible Connectors Flexible connectors shall be provided at the suction and discharge of each pump that is 1 hp or larger. Connectors shall be constructed of neoprene, rubber, or braided bronze, with Class 150 standard flanges. Flexible connectors shall be line size and suitable for the pressure and temperature of the intended service. 2.12.5 Sewage Pumps Provide single type duplex type with automatic controls to alternate the operation from one pump to the other pump and to start the second pump in the event the first pump cannot handle the incoming flow. Provide high water alarm and check valve. 2.13 WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM 2.13.1 Constant Speed Pumping System Constant speed pumping system with pressure-regulating valves shall employ one lead pump for low flows, and one or more lag pumps for higher flows. Pressure-regulating 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 35 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 valves shall be provided with nonslam check feature. The factory prepiped and prewired assembly shall be mounted on a steel frame, complete with pumps, motors, and automatic controls. The system capacity and capacity of individual pumps shall be as indicated. Current sensing relays shall provide staging of the pumps. The pumps shall be protected from thermal buildup, when running at no-flow, by a common thermal relief valve. Pressure gauges shall be mounted on the suction and discharge headers. The control panel shall bear the UL listing label for industrial control panels and shall be in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. The control panel shall include the following: No-flow shutdown; 7-day time clock; audiovisual alarm; external resets; manual alternation; magnetic motor controllers; time delays; transformer; current relays; "HAND-OFFAUTOMATIC" switches for each pump; minimum run timers; low suction pressure cutout; and indicating lights for power on, individual motor overload, and low suction pressure. The control circuit shall be interlocked so that the failure of any controller shall energize the succeeding controller. 2.13.2 Hydro-Pneumatic Water Pressure System An ASME code constructed tank stamped for 862 kPa water working pressure shall be provided. The tank shall have a flexible diaphragm made of material conforming to FDA requirements for use with potable water and shall be factory precharged to meet required system pressure. 2.13.3 Variable Speed Pumping System Variable speed pumping system shall provide system pressure by varying speed and number of operating pumps. The factory prepiped and prewired assembly shall be mounted on a steel frame complete with pumps, variable speed drives, motors, and controls. The variable speed drives shall be the oil-filled type capable of power transmission throughout their complete speed range without vibration, noise, or shock loading. Each variable speed drive shall be run-tested by the manufacturer for rated performance, and the manufacturer shall furnish written performance certification. System shall have suppressors to prevent noise transmission over electric feed lines. Required electrical control circuitry and system function sensors shall be supplied by the variable speed drive manufacturer. The primary power controls and magnetic motor controllers shall be installed in [the controls supplied by the drive manufacturer] . The sensors shall be located in the system to control drive speed as a function of [constant system pressure at location indicated]. Connection between the sensors and the variable speed drive controls shall be accomplished with [telemetry]. Controls shall be in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures. 2.14 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 2.14.1 Air Compressors Air compressor unit shall be a factory-packaged assembly, including [ ] phase, [ ] volt motor controls, switches, wiring, accessories, and motor controllers, in a NEMA 250, Type [1] [4] enclosure. Tank-mounted air compressors shall be manufactured to comply with UL listing requirements. Air compressors shall have manufacturer's name and address, together with trade name, and catalog number on a nameplate securely attached to the equipment. Each compressor shall [start and stop automatically at upper and lower pressure limits of the system] [regulate pressure by constant speed compressor loading and unloading] [have a manual-off-automatic switch that when in the manual position, the compressor loads and unloads to meet the demand and, in the automatic position, a time delay relay shall allow the compressor to operate for an adjustable length of time unloaded, then stop the unit]. Guards shall shield exposed 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 36 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 moving parts. Each duplex compressor system shall be provided with [automatic] [manual] alternation system. Each compressor motor shall be provided with an acrossthe-line-type magnetic controller, complete with low-voltage release. An intake air filter and silencer shall be provided with each compressor. Aftercooler and moisture separator shall be installed between compressors and air receiver to remove moisture and oil condensate before the air enters the receiver. Aftercoolers shall be either air- or watercooled, as indicated. The air shall pass through a sufficient number of tubes to affect cooling. Tubes shall be sized to give maximum heat transfer. Water to unit shall be controlled by a solenoid or pneumatic valve, which opens when the compressors start and closes when the compressors shut down. Cooling capacity of the aftercooler shall be sized for the total capacity of the compressors. Means shall be provided for draining condensed moisture from the receiver by an automatic float type trap. Capacities of air compressors and receivers shall be as indicated. 2.14.2 Lubricated Compressors Compressors shall be two-stage, V-belt drive, capable of operating continuously against their designed discharge pressure, and shall operate at a speed not in excess of 1800 rpm. Compressors shall have the capacity and discharge pressure indicated. Compressors shall be assembled complete on a common subbase. The compressor main bearings shall be either roller or ball. The discharge passage of the high pressure air shall be piped to the air receiver with a copper pipe or tubing. A pressure gauge calibrated to 1.03 MPa and equipped with a gauge cock and pulsation dampener shall be furnished for installation adjacent to pressure switches. 2.14.3 Air Receivers Receivers shall be designed for 1.38 MPa working pressure. Receivers shall be factory air tested to 1- 1/2 times the working pressure. Receivers shall be equipped with safety relief valves and accessories, including pressure gauges and automatic and manual drains. The outside of air receivers may be galvanized or supplied with commercial enamel finish. Receivers shall be designed and constructed in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 and shall have the design working pressures specified herein. A display of the ASME seal on the receiver or a certified test report from an approved independent testing laboratory indicating conformance to the ASME Code shall be provided. 2.14.4 Intake Air Supply Filter Dry type air filter shall be provided having a collection efficiency of 99 percent of particles larger than 10 microns. Filter body and media shall withstand a maximum 862 kPa, capacity as indicated. 2.14.5 Pressure Regulators The air system shall be provided with the necessary regulator valves to maintain the desired pressure for the installed equipment. Regulators shall be designed for a maximum inlet pressure of 862 kPa and a maximum temperature of 93 degrees C. Regulators shall be single-seated, pilot-operated with valve plug, bronze body and trim or equal, and threaded connections. The regulator valve shall include a pressure gauge and shall be provided with an adjustment screw for adjusting the pressure differential from 0 kPa to 862 kPa. Regulator shall be sized as indicated. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 37 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.15 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER Cold water meters 50 mm and smaller shall be positive displacement type conforming to AWWA C700. Cold water meters 64 mm and larger shall be turbine type conforming to AWWA C701. Meter register may be round or straight reading type, [as provided by the local utility]. Meter shall be provided with a pulse generator, remote readout register and all necessary wiring and accessories. 2.16 POOL WATER PUMP SAFETY VACUUM RELEASE SYSTEM (SVRS) Safety vacuum release system (SVRS) shall meet the requirements specified in ASME A112.19.17, or ASTM F2387, as modified and supplemented by this specification. System shall include: Vacuum monitoring at least 60 times per second. Power supply monitoring at least 50 times per second. Capable of integration with existing timer box. Low vacuum sensing and alarm. Maintenance override. Power back-up. Display of error readout. Turns off power to pump in milliseconds upon detecting sudden vacuum change. Multiple audible alarm capabilities for multiple harmful situations. 2.17 ELECTRICAL WORK Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors, motor starters, and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide [high efficiency type, ]single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, corresponding to the applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. [In addition to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, provide polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings, including motors that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1.] Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure. Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls provided. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 38 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers, including the required monitors and timed restart. Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 2.18 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS 2.18.1 Escutcheon Plates Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces. 2.18.2 Pipe Sleeves Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors. Sleeves are not required where [supply] drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade, except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor. 2.18.2.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves. Sleeves are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core- drilled hole are completely grouted smooth. 2.18.2.2 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves. 2.18.3 Pipe Hangers (Supports) Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods, except as specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide Type 40 insulation protection shield for insulated piping. 2.18.4 Name plates Provide 3.2 mm thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte finish with white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates. Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 6.4 mm high normal block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 25 by 63 mm. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system. Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 39 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.18.5 Labels Provide labels for sensor operators at flush valves and faucets. Include the following information on each label: a. Identification of the sensor and its operation with [graphic] [written] [Braille] description. b. Range of the sensor. c. Battery replacement schedule. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 40 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. Piping located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air ducts shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A. Installation of plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance with PPFA Fire Man. The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and accessories. Water and drainage piping shall be extended 1.5 m outside the building, unless otherwise indicated. A [gate valve] [full port ball valve] [ball valve] and drain shall be installed on the water service line inside the building approximately 150 mm above the floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in place. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 300 mm below the [average local frost depth] [finish grade] or as indicated on the drawings. If trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines, the location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means. Valves shall be installed with control no lower than the valve body. 3.1.1 Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections 3.1.1.1 Utilities The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The hot-water and coldwater piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture, except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures, faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to prevent movement. 3.1.1.2 Cutting and Repairing The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of construction shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved. 3.1.1.3 Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating equipment. 3.1.1.4 Mains, Branches, and Runouts Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions. Supply 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 41 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 12 mm between finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 100 mm and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are formed. The center-line radius of bends shall be not less than six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be acceptable. 3.1.1.5 Pipe Drains Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 20 mm hose bibb with renewable seat and [gate] [full port ball] [ball] valve ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 20 mm brass plugs or caps shall be provided. Disconnection of the supply piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain. 3.1.1.6 Expansion and Contraction of Piping Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water pipe. Each hot-water and hot-water circulation riser shall have expansion loops or other provisions such as offsets, changes in direction, etc., where indicated and/or required. Risers shall be securely anchored as required or where indicated to force expansion to loops. Branch connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe over 15 m in length shall be anchored to the wall or the supporting construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch runouts from mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in the line so that piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without straining. If mechanical grooved pipe coupling systems are provided, the deviation from design requirements for expansion and contraction may be allowed pending approval of Contracting Officer. 3.1.1.7 Thrust Restraint Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more, either vertically or horizontally, in waterlines 100 mm in diameter or larger shall be provided with thrust blocks, where indicated, to prevent movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1 cement, 2-1/2 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less than 14 MPa after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not subject to thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as shown. Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity thrust blocks. 3.1.1.8 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and cold-water supplies and shall be located as generally indicated, with precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201. Water hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 42 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 hammer arresters shall conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted. 3.1.2 Compressed Air Piping (Non-Oil Free) Compressed air piping shall be installed as specified for water piping and suitable for 862 kPa working pressure. Compressed air piping shall have supply lines and discharge terminals legibly and permanently marked at both ends with the name of the system and the direction of flow. 3.1.3 Joints Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended. 3.1.3.1 Threaded Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or with an approved graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied. 3.1.3.2 Mechanical Couplings Mechanical couplings may be used in conjunction with grooved pipe for aboveground, ferrous or non- ferrous, domestic hot and cold water systems, in lieu of unions, brazed, soldered, welded, flanged, or threaded joints. Mechanical couplings are permitted in accessible locations including behind access plates. Flexible grooved joints will not be permitted, except as vibration isolators adjacent to mechanical equipment. Rigid grooved joints shall incorporate an angle bolt pad design which maintains metal-to-metal contact with equal amount of pad offset of housings upon installation to ensure positive rigid clamping of the pipe. Designs which can only clamp on the bottom of the groove or which utilize gripping teeth or jaws, or which use misaligned housing bolt holes, or which require a torque wrench or torque specifications will not be permitted. Rigid grooved pipe couplings shall be for use with grooved end pipes, fittings, valves and strainers. Rigid couplings shall be designed for not less than 862 kPa service and appropriate for static head plus the pumping head, and shall provide a watertight joint. Grooved fittings and couplings, and grooving tools shall be provided from the same manufacturer. Segmentally welded elbows shall not be used. Grooves shall be prepared in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's latest published standards. Grooving shall be performed by qualified grooving operators having demonstrated proper grooving procedures in accordance with the tool manufacturer's recommendations. The Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of test to demonstrate operator's capability, and the test shall be performed at the work site, if practical, or at a site agreed upon. The operator shall demonstrate the ability to properly adjust the grooving tool, groove the pipe, and to verify the groove dimensions in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's specifications. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 43 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.1.3.3 Unions and Flanges Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 65 mm and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 80 mm and larger. 3.1.3.4 Grooved Mechanical Joints Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions. Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow- land micrometer, or other method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations. 3.1.3.5 Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipe Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil, waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.1.3.6 Copper Tube and Pipe a. Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2/B2.2M, ASME B16.50, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of flux with either a copper- phosphorus, copper-phosphorussilver or a silver brazing filler metal. b. Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only acceptable for piping 50 mm and smaller. Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. Soldered joints shall not be used in compressed air piping between the air compressor and the receiver. c. Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall be made in accordance with ICC IPC. d. Press connection. Copper press connections shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions for manufactured rated size. The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s) approved by the manufacturer of that joint. Minimum distance between fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 3.1.3.7 Plastic Pipe Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement. PVC and CPVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement elastomeric, threading, (threading of Schedule 80 Pipe is allowed only where required for disconnection and inspection; threading of Schedule 40 Pipe is not allowed), or mated flanged. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 44 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.1.3.8 Glass Pipe Joints for corrosive waste glass pipe and fittings shall be made with corrosion-resisting steel compression-type couplings with acrylonitrile rubber gaskets lined with polytetrafluoroethylene. 3.1.3.9 Corrosive Waste Plastic Pipe Joints for polyolefin pipe and fittings shall be made by mechanical joint or electrical fusion coil method in accordance with ASTM D2657 and ASTM F1290. Joints for filamentwound reinforced thermosetting resin pipe shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Unions or flanges shall be used where required for disconnection and inspection. 3.1.3.10 Polypropylene Pipe Joints for polypropylene pipe and fittings shall be made by heat fusion welding sockettype or butt- fusion type fittings and shall comply with ASTM F2389. 3.1.3.11 Other Joint Methods 3.1.4 Dissimilar Pipe Materials Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made with dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with transition fitting for the specific purpose. 3.1.5 Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a protective coating. Additionally, ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pressure pipe shall have a cathodic protection system and joint bonding. The cathodic protection system, protective coating system, and joint bonding for cathodically protected pipe shall be in accordance with [Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)] [and] [Section 26 42 17.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (IMPRESSED CURRENT)] [Section 26 42 13.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY GALVANIC ANODES] [and] [Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED CURRENT] [Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)][Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED CURRENT]. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with NACE SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the coating system applied prior to pipe tightness testing. Joints and fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape manufacturer. 3.1.6 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent location. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 45 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.1.6.1 Sleeve Requirements Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following requirements: Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors. A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where indicated or approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special circumstances. Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas shall extend a minimum of 100 mm above the finished floor. Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of [ 6 mm ][ 25 mm ] clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe, cast-iron pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or plastic. Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve, or between jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated with sealants conforming to ASTM C920 and with a primer, backstop material and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. The annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for interior walls which are not designated as fire rated. Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed 12 mm from wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint between the pipe and [concrete] [masonry] wall as specified above. Sealant selected for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the requirements in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. 3.1.6.2 Flashing Requirements Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 4.9 kg per square meter copper flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 200 mm from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a minimum of 250 mm. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through pitched roofs shall 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 46 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 200 mm from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 250 mm in diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs, flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing shield shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed. 3.1.6.3 Waterproofing Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by forming a flashing guard from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of the sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 40 mm to fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of the flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately 40 mm; then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level between the flashing guard and drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet copper shall extend not less than 200 mm from the drainpipe and shall be lapped between the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. If cast-iron water closet floor flanges are used, the space between the pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and the flashing guard shall be upturned approximately 40 mm to fit the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor flange. The upturned portion of the sheet fitted into the floor flange shall be sealed. 3.1.6.4 Optional Counterflashing Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be accomplished by utilizing the following: a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 150 mm in diameter. b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe. 3.1.6.5 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and Waterproofing, a groove 6 to 13 mm wide by 6 to 10 mm deep shall be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. 3.1.6.6 Pipe Penetrations Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin. 3.1.7 Fire Seal Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase walls or floors above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 47 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.1.8 Supports 3.1.8.1 General Hangers used to support piping 50 mm and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent. 3.1.8.2 Pipe Supports and Structural Bracing, Seismic Requirements Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and [Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT] [Section 22 05 48.00 20 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL] [as shown]. Structural steel required for reinforcement to properly support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided. Material used for supports shall be as specified in[ Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL][ Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS][ Section 05 51 33 METAL LADDERS][ Section 05 52 00 METAL RAILINGS][ Section 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS]. 3.1.8.3 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein. a. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used. b. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe. c. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts. d. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and shall have both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer. Field-fabricated Cclamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable. e. Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter. f. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames. g. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the medium is 15 degrees C or higher. Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe. h. Type 40 shields shall: (1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 100 mm. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 48 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 (2) Be used on insulated pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the medium is 15 degrees C or less. (3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density inserts shall have a density of 128 kg per cubic meter or greater. i. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a support shall be installed not over 300 mm from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 1.5 m apart at valves. Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 49 degrees C for PVC and 82 degrees C for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion and contraction. j. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 4.5 m nor more than 2 m from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction. k. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered. Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used: (1) On pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the medium is 15 degrees C or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may freely rest on a steel plate. (2) On pipe less than 100 mm a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate. (3) On pipe 100 mm and larger carrying medium less that 15 degrees C a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate. l. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications. m. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least 100 mm or by an amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater. n. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction. 3.1.8.4 Structural Attachments Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 49 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.1.9 Welded Installation Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not be permitted. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged, flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced against external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld joints shall be entirely removed and rewelded. After filler metal has been removed from its original package, it shall be protected or stored so that its characteristics or welding properties are not affected. Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used. 3.1.10 Pipe Cleanouts Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 100 mm will not be required. A cleanout installed in connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be T- pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs, except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 100 mm. Cleanout tee branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks in single story buildings with slab-ongrade construction or where less than 450 mm of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze, nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be [cast iron] [or] [plastic]. 3.2 WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS 3.2.1 Relief Valves No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or storage tank. The P&T relief valve shall be installed where the valve actuator comes in contact with the hottest water in the heater. Whenever possible, the relief valve shall be installed directly in a tapping in the tank or heater; otherwise, the P&T valve shall be installed in the hotwater outlet piping. A vacuum relief valve shall be provided on the cold water supply line to the hot-water storage tank or water heater and mounted above and within 150 mm above the top of the tank or water heater. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 50 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.2.2 Installation of Gas- and Oil-Fired Water Heater Installation shall conform to NFPA 54 for gas fired and NFPA 31 for oil fired. Storage water heaters that are not equipped with integral heat traps and having vertical pipe risers shall be installed with heat traps directly on both the inlet and outlet. Circulating systems need not have heat traps installed. An acceptable heat trap may be a piping arrangement such as elbows connected so that the inlet and outlet piping make vertically upward runs of not less than 600 mm just before turning downward or directly horizontal into the water heater's inlet and outlet fittings. Commercially available heat traps, specifically designed by the manufacturer for the purpose of effectively restricting the natural tendency of hot water to rise through vertical inlet and outlet piping during standby periods may also be approved. 3.2.3 Heat Traps Piping to and from each water heater and hot water storage tank shall be routed horizontally and downward a minimum of 600 mm before turning in an upward direction. 3.2.4 Connections to Water Heaters Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric unions or flanges. 3.2.5 Expansion Tank A pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply between the water heater inlet and the cold water supply shut-off valve. The Contractor shall adjust the expansion tank air pressure, as recommended by the tank manufacturer, to match incoming water pressure. 3.2.6 Direct Fired and Domestic Water Heaters Notify the Contracting Officer when any direct fired domestic water heater over 117,124.2 Watts is operational and ready to be inspected and certified. 3.3 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops for supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing and faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting. Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be connected to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise specified under the item. Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as specified. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish. Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown. 3.3.1 Fixture Connections Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the cast-iron floor flange, special short-radius fittings shall be provided. Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be made gastight and watertight with a closetsetting compound or neoprene gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance from 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 51 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting compound or gasket and fixture used. 3.3.2 Flushometer Valves Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the long finished top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with approved metal bracket. [Flushometer valves for water closets shall be installed 1 m above the floor, except at water closets intended for use by the physically handicapped where flushometer valves shall be mounted at approximately 760 mm above the floor and arranged to avoid interference with grab bars. In addition, for water closets intended for handicap use, the flush valve handle shall be installed on the wide side of the enclosure.] [Bumpers for water closet seats shall be installed on the [wall] [flushometer stop] [flushometer spud].] 3.3.3 Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor Lavatories shall be mounted with rim 775 mm above finished floor. Wall-hung drinking fountains and water coolers shall be installed with rim 1020 mm above floor. Wall-hung service sinks shall be mounted with rim 700 mm above the floor. Installation of fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1. 3.3.4 Shower Bath Outfits The area around the water supply piping to the mixing valves and behind the escutcheon plate shall be made watertight by caulking or gasketing. 3.3.5 Fixture Supports Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and other fixtures of similar size, design, and use, shall be of the chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary means of mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the desired height and in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu of chair carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab. 3.3.5.1 Support for Solid Masonry Construction Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in the masonry wall. 3.3.5.2 Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to the concrete wall using through bolts and a back-up plate. 3.3.5.3 Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be of the heavy duty design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to a square or rectangular steel tube upright. Wall plates, in lieu of floor-anchored chair carriers, shall be used only if adjoining steel partition studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to these studs. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 52 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.3.5.4 Support for Wood Stud Construction Where floor is a concrete slab, a floor-anchored chair carrier shall be used. Where entire construction is wood, wood crosspieces shall be installed. Fixture hanger plates, supports, brackets, or mounting lugs shall be fastened with not less than No. 10 wood screws, 6 mm thick minimum steel hanger, or toggle bolts with nut. The wood crosspieces shall extend the full width of the fixture and shall be securely supported. 3.3.5.5 Wall-Mounted Water Closet Gaskets Where wall-mounted water closets are provided, reinforced wax, treated felt, or neoprene gaskets shall be provided. The type of gasket furnished shall be as recommended by the chair-carrier manufacturer. 3.3.6 Backflow Prevention Devices Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable water. Backflow preventers shall be installed where indicated and in accordance with [ICC IPC] [ICC IPC] [IAPMO UPC] at all other locations necessary to preclude a cross-connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any nonpotable substance. In addition backflow preventers shall be installed at all locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of the equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be located below the level of the nonpotable substance. Backflow preventers shall be located so that no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers shall be of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment, and preclude the backflow of any nonpotable substance into the potable water system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow preventers. Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing. Each device shall be a standard commercial unit. 3.3.7 Access Panels Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any item requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced, maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in[ Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS][ Section 05 51 33 METAL LADDERS][ Section 05 52 00 METAL RAILINGS][ Section 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS]. 3.3.8 Sight Drains Sight drains shall be installed so that the indirect waste will terminate 50 mm above the flood rim of the funnel to provide an acceptable air gap. 3.3.9 Traps Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture shall be doubletrapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps installed on plastic pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D3311. Traps for acidresisting waste shall be of the same material as the pipe. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 53 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.3.10 Shower Pans Before installing shower pan, subfloor shall be free of projections such as nail heads or rough edges of aggregate. Drain shall be a bolt-down, clamping-ring type with weepholes, installed so the lip of the subdrain is flush with subfloor. 3.3.10.1 General The floor of each individual shower, the shower-area portion of combination shower and drying room, and the entire shower and drying room where the two are not separated by curb or partition, shall be made watertight with a shower pan fabricated in place. The shower pan material shall be cut to size and shape of the area indicated, in one piece to the maximum extent practicable, allowing a minimum of 150 mm for turnup on walls or partitions, and shall be folded over the curb with an approximate return of 1/4 of curb height. The upstands shall be placed behind any wall or partition finish. Subflooring shall be smooth and clean, with nailheads driven flush with surface, and shall be sloped to drain. Shower pans shall be clamped to drains with the drain clamping ring. 3.3.10.2 Metal Shower Pans When a shower pan of required size cannot be furnished in one piece, metal pieces shall be joined with a flintlock seam and soldered or burned. The corners shall be folded, not cut, and the corner seam shall be soldered or burned. Pans, including upstands, shall be coated on all surfaces with one brush coat of asphalt. Asphalt shall be applied evenly at not less than 1 liter per square meter. A layer of felt covered with building paper shall be placed between shower pans and wood floors. The joining surfaces of metal pan and drain shall be given a brush coat of asphalt after the pan is connected to the drain. 3.3.10.3 Nonplasticized Chlorinated Polyethylene Shower Pans Corners of nonplasticized chlorinated polyethylene shower pans shall be folded against the upstand by making a pig-ear fold. Hot-air gun or heat lamp shall be used in making corner folds. Each pig-ear corner fold shall be nailed or stapled 12 mm from the upper edge to hold it in place. Nails shall be galvanized large-head roofing nails. On metal framing or studs, approved duct tape shall be used to secure pig-ear fold and membrane. Where no backing is provided between the studs, the membrane slack shall be taken up by pleating and stapling or nailing to studding 12 mm from upper edge. To adhere the membrane to vertical surfaces, the back of the membrane and the surface to which it will be applied shall be coated with adhesive that becomes dry to the touch in 5 to 10 minutes, after which the membrane shall be pressed into place. Surfaces to be solventwelded shall be clean. Surfaces to be joined with xylene shall be initially sprayed and vigorously cleaned with a cotton cloth, followed by final coating of xylene and the joining of the surfaces by roller or equivalent means. If ambient or membrane temperatures are below 4 degrees C the membrane and the joint shall be heated prior to application of xylene. Heat may be applied with hot-air gun or heat lamp, taking precautions not to scorch the membrane. Adequate ventilation and wearing of gloves are required when working with xylene. Membrane shall be pressed into position on the drain body, and shall be cut and fit to match so that membrane can be properly clamped and an effective gasket-type seal provided. On wood subflooring, two layers of 0.73 kg per square meter dry felt shall be installed prior to installation of shower pan to ensure a smooth surface for installation. 3.3.10.4 Non plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Shower Pans Nonplasticized PVC shall be turned up behind walls or wall surfaces a distance of not less than 150 mm in room areas and 75 mm above curb level in curbed spaces with 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 54 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 sufficient material to fold over and fasten to outside face of curb. Corners shall be pig-ear type and folded between pan and studs. Only top 25 mm of upstand shall be nailed to hold in place. Nails shall be galvanized large-head roofing type. Approved duct tape shall be used on metal framing or studs to secure pig-ear fold and membrane. Where no backing is provided between studs, the membrane slack shall be taken up by pleating and stapling or nailing to studding at top inch of upstand. To adhere the membrane to vertical surfaces, the back of the membrane and the surface to which it is to be applied shall be coated with adhesive that becomes dry to the touch in 5 to 10 minutes, after which the membrane shall be pressed into place. Trim for drain shall be exactly the size of drain opening. Bolt holes shall be pierced to accommodate bolts with a tight fit. Adhesive shall be used between pan and subdrain. Clamping ring shall be bolted firmly. A small amount of gravel or porous materials shall be placed at weepholes so that holes remain clear when setting bed is poured. Membrane shall be solvent welded with PVC solvent cement. Surfaces to be solvent welded shall be clean (free of grease and grime). Sheets shall be laid on a flat surface with an overlap of about 50 mm. Top edge shall be folded back and surface primed with a PVC primer. PVC cement shall be applied and surfaces immediately placed together, while still wet. Joint shall be lightly rolled with a paint roller, then as the joint sets shall be rolled firmly but not so hard as to distort the material. In long lengths, about 600 or 900 mm at a time shall be welded. On wood subflooring, two layers of 0.73 kg per square meter felt shall be installed prior to installation of shower pan to ensure a smooth surface installation. 3.4 VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES Mechanical equipment, including compressors and pumps, shall be isolated from the building structure by approved vibration-absorbing features, unless otherwise shown. Each foundation shall include an adequate number of standard isolation units. Each unit shall consist of machine and floor or foundation fastening, together with intermediate isolation material, and shall be a standard product with printed load rating. Piping connected to mechanical equipment shall be provided with flexible connectors. Isolation unit installation shall limit vibration to [ ] percent of the lowest equipment rpm. 3.5 WATER METER REMOTE READOUT REGISTER The remote readout register shall be mounted at the location indicated or as directed by the PGC engineer. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS 3.6.1 Identification Tags Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved anodized aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed on valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures. Tags shall be 35 mm minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose. 3.6.2 Pipe Color Code Marking Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 55 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.6.3 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The color coding scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and operation of operable components which are not visible from the finished space and installed in the space directly above the suspended grid ceiling. The operable components shall include valves, dampers, switches, linkages and thermostats. The color coding scheme shall consist of a color code board and colored metal disks. Each colored metal disk shall be approximately 12 mm in diameter and secured to removable ceiling panels with fasteners. The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling panels so that the fasteners will be concealed from view. The fasteners shall be manually removable without tools and shall not separate from the ceiling panels when panels are dropped from ceiling height. Installation of colored metal disks shall follow completion of the finished surface on which the disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the approximate dimensions of 1 m width, 750 mm height, and 12 mm thickness. The board shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under glass or 1.6 mm transparent plastic cover. Unless otherwise directed, the color code symbols shall be approximately 20 mm in diameter and the related lettering in 12 mm high capital letters. The color code board shall be mounted and located in the mechanical or equipment room. The color code system shall be as indicated below: Color [ 3.7 System ] [ ] Item [ Location ] [ ] ESCUTCHEONS Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated piping, exposed to view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin-finish, corrosion-resisting steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or splitpattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew. 3.8 PAINTING Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in concealed spaces or exposed spaces, is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. 3.8.1 Painting of New Equipment New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section. 3.8.1.1 Factory Painting Systems Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 3 mm on either side of the scratch mark. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 56 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 50 degrees C, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service. 3.8.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 50 degrees C shall be cleaned to bare metal. Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray. a. Temperatures Less Than 50 Degrees C: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 50 degrees C shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0076 mm, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0255 mm; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0255 mm per coat. b. Temperatures Between 50 and 205 Degrees C: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 50 and 205 degrees C shall receive two coats of 205 degrees C heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 0.05 mm. c. Temperatures Greater Than 205 Degrees C: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than 205 degrees C shall receive two coats of 315 degrees C heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm. 3.9 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION 3.9.1 Plumbing System The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance with [ICC IPC] [ICC IPC] [IAPMO UPC], except that the drainage and vent system final test shall include the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform a peppermint test in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen, the Contractor must submit a testing procedure to the Contracting Officer for approval. A. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke test. B. Building Sewers Tests. C. Water Supply Systems Tests. 3.9.1.1 Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies Backflow prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically designed for the testing of backflow prevention assemblies. Backflow prevention assembly test gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in accordance with the requirements of State or local regulatory agencies. If there is no State or local regulatory agency requirements, gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in accordance with the requirements of University of Southern California's Foundation of Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the American Water Works Association Manual of Cross Connection (Manual M-14), or any other approved testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and field evaluation of 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 57 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 backflow prevention assembly test gauges. Report form for each assembly shall include, as a minimum, the following: Data on Device Type of Assembly Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number Size Location Test Pressure Readings Data on Testing Firm Name Address Certified Tester Certified Tester No. Date of Test Serial Number and Test Data of Gauges If the unit fails to meet specified requirements, the unit shall be repaired and retested. 3.9.1.2 Shower Pans After installation of the pan and finished floor, the drain shall be temporarily plugged below the weep holes. The floor area shall be flooded with water to a minimum depth of 25 mm for a period of 24 hours. Any drop in the water level during test, except for evaporation, will be reason for rejection, repair, and retest. 3.9.1.3 Compressed Air Piping (Nonoil-Free) Piping systems shall be filled with oil-free dry air or gaseous nitrogen to 1.03 MPa and hold this pressure for 2 hours with no drop in pressure. 3.9.2 Defective Work If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable. 3.9.3 System Flushing 3.9.3.1 During Flushing Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall be flushed with [hot] potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris in all portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous operation of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a flushing velocity of approximately 1.2 meters per second through all portions of the piping system. In the event that this is impossible due to size of system, the Contracting Officer (or the designated representative) shall specify the number of fixturesto be operated during flushing. Contractor shall provide adequate personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no discoloration. All faucets and drinking water fountains, to include any device considered as an end point device by NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9, shall be flushed a minimum of 1 L per 24 hour period, ten times over a 14 day period. 3.9.3.2 After Flushing System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed, cleaned, and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh potable water. Any stoppage, 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 58 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 discoloration, or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of the building due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the Contractor. When the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions. Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 - SI for minimum efficiency requirements. Unless more stringent local requirements exist, lead levels shall not exceed limits established by 40 CFR 141.80 (c)(1). The water supply to the building shall be tested separately to ensure that any lead contamination found during potable water system testing is due to work being performed inside the building. 3.9.4 Operational Test Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Time, date, and duration of test. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim. Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet. Pump suction and discharge pressures. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply. Operation of each floor and roof drain by flooding with water. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer. Complete operation of each water pressure booster system, including pump start pressure and stop pressure. Compressed air readings at each compressor and at each outlet. Each indicating instrument shall be read at 1/2 hour intervals. The report of the test shall be submitted in quadruplicate. The Contractor shall furnish instruments, equipment, and personnel required for the tests; the Government will furnish the necessary water and electricity. 3.9.5 Disinfection After all system components are provided and operational tests are complete, the entire domestic hot- and cold-water distribution system shall be disinfected. Before introducing disinfecting chlorination material, entire system shall be flushed with potable water until any entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed. Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and AWWA C652 as modified and supplemented by this specification. The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per million (ppm). Feed a properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the system with a hypochlorinator, or inject liquid chlorine into the system through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump until the entire system is completely filled. Test the chlorine residual level in the water at 6 hour intervals for a continuous period of 24 hours. If at the end of a 6 hour interval, the chlorine residual has dropped to less than 25 ppm, flush the piping including tanks with potable water, and repeat the above chlorination procedures. During the chlorination period, each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 59 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 After the second 24 hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the treated system. The 24 hour chlorination procedure must be repeated until no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual remains in the treated system. Upon the specified verification, the system including tanks shall then be flushed with potable water until the residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million. During the flushing period, each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times. Take addition samples of water in disinfected containers, for bacterial examination, at locations specified by the Contracting Officer Test these samples for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with [EPA SM 9223] [AWWA 10084]. The testing method used shall be EPA approved for drinking water systems and shall comply with applicable local and state requirements. Disinfection shall be repeated until bacterial tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained. 3.9.6 [OPTIONAL DISINFECTION METHOD Disinfect new potable water piping and affected portions of existing potable water piping with geothermal water. Geothermal water shall be not less than 90 degrees C and contact time shall be not less than 30 minutes. After disinfection, thoroughly flush new portable water piping and affected portions of existing potable water piping with the chlorinated base water supply for a minimum of two hours.] 3.10 WASTE MANAGEMENT Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and place in designated areas for reuse. 3.11 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system, shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams. The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems. 3.12 PERFORMANCE OF WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT Standard rating condition terms are as follows: EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency. ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 21 degrees C delta T. 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 60 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 SL = Standby loss is maximum (Btu/h) based on a 38.9 degree C temperature difference between stored water and ambient requirements. V = Rated volume in gallons Q = Nameplate input rate in kW (Btu/h) 3.12.1 Storage Water Heaters 3.12.1.1 Electric a. Storage capacity of 227 liters shall have a minimum energy factor (EF) of 0.93 or higher per FEMP requirements. b. Storage capacity of 227 liters or more shall have a minimum energy factor (EF) of 0.91 or higher per FEMP requirements. 3.12.1.2 Gas a. Storage capacity of 189 liters or less shall have a minimum energy factor (EF) of 0.62 or higher per FEMP requirements. b. Storage capacity of 75.7 liters - or more and input rating of 22980 W or less: minimum EF shall be 0.62 - 0.0019V per 10 CFR 430. c. Rating of less than 22980 W: (75,000 Btu/h) ET shall be 80 percent; maximum SL shall be (0/800+100x(V^^1/2)), per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 3.12.1.3 Oil a. Storage capacity of 75.7 liters or more and input rating of 30773 W or less: minimum EF shall be 0.59-0.0019V per 10 CFR 430. b. Rating of less than 309.75 W/L or input rating more than 30773 W: ET shall be 78 percent; maximum SL shall be (Q/800+100x(V^^1/2)), per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3. 3.12.2 Unfired Hot Water Storage All volumes and inputs: shall meet or exceed R-12.5. 3.12.3 Instantaneous Water Heater 3.12.3.1 Gas a. Rating of 309.75 W/L and greater and less than 7.57 L with an input greater than 14.66 kW and less than 58.62 kW shall have a minimum energy factor (EF) of 0.62-0.0019V per 10 CFR 430. b. Rating of 309.75 W/L and greater and less than 37.85 L with an input of 58.62 kW and greater shall have a minimum thermal efficiency (ET) of 80 percent per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 c. Rating of 309.75 W/L and greater and 37.85 L and greater with an input of 58.62 kW and greater shall have a minimum thermal efficiency (ET) of 80 percent and the maximum SL shall be Q/800+110x(V^^1/2)) per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 61 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.12.3.2 Oil a. Rating of 309.75 W/L and greater and less than 7.57 L with an input of 61.55 kW and less shall have an energy factor (EF) of 0.59-0.0019V per 10 CFR 430 b. Rating of 309.75 W/Ll and greater and less than 37.85 L with an input greater than 61.55 kW shall have a minimum thermal efficiency (ET) of 80 percent per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 c. Rating of 309.75 W/L and 37.85 L and greater with an input of greater than 61.55 kW shall have a minimum thermal efficiency (ET) of 78 percent and the maximum SL shall be Q/800+110x(V^^1/2)) per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 3.12.4 Pool Heaters a. Gas/oil fuel, capacities and inputs: ET shall be 78 percent per ASHRAE 146. b. Heat Pump, All capacities and inputs shall meet a COP of 4.0 per ASHRAE 146 3.13 TABLES TABLE I PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS Ite Pipe and SERVIC SERVI SERVIC SERVIC SERVIC m Fitting EA CEB EC ED EE # Materials 1 Cast iron soil X X X X X pipe and fittings, hub and spigot, ASTM A74 with compression gaskets. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the CISPI trademark. 2 X X X X Cast iron soil pipe and fittings hubless, CISPI 301 and ASTM A888. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the CISPI trademark. 3 X X X Cast iron drainage fittings, threaded, ASME 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 62 OF 70 SERVIC EF PGC-230033-C-P8 4 5 6 7 8 9 B16.12 for use with Item 10 Cast iron screwed fittings (threaded) ASME B16.4 for use with Item 10 Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous and non-ferrous pipe ASTM A536 And ASTM A47/A47M Ductile iron grooved joint fittings for ferrous pipe ASTM A536 and ASTM A47/A47M for use with Item 5 Bronze sand casting grooved joint pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe ASTM B584, for use with Item 5 Wrought copper grooved joint pressure pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe ASTM B75M ASTM B75 C12200, ASTM B152/B152M , C11000, ASME B16.22 ASME B16.22 for use with Item 5 Malleable- 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X PAGE 63 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 iron threaded fittings, galvanized ASME B16.3 for use with Item 10 Steel pipe, seamless galvanized, ASTM A53/A53M, Type S, Grade B Seamless red brass pipe, ASTM B43 Bronzed flanged fittings, ASME B16.24 for use with Items 11 and 14 Cast copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings, ASME B16.18for use with Item 14 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B42 Cast bronze threaded fittings, ASME B16.15 Copper drainage tube, (DWV), ASTM B306 Wrought copper and wrought alloy solder-joint drainage fittings. ASME B16.29 Cast copper alloy solder joint drainage fittings, 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS X X X X X X X X X X X X X* X X* X X X X X X X X X X X X PAGE 64 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 19 20 21 22 23 24 DWV, ASME B16.23 AcrylonitrileButadieneStyrene (ABS) plastic drain, waste, and vent pipe and fittings ASTM D2661, ASTM F628 Polyvinyl Chloride plastic drain, waste and vent pipe and fittings, ASTM D2665, ASTM F891, (Sch 40) ASTM F1760 Process glass pipe and fittings, ASTM C1053 High-silicon content cast iron pipe and fittings (hub and spigot, and mechanical joint), ASTM A518/A518M Polypropylen e (PP) waste pipe and fittings, ASTM D4101 Filamentwound reinforced thermosettin g resin (RTRP) pipe, ASTM D2996 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X SERVICE: A - Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain B - Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings C - Underground Vent D - Aboveground Vent E - Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS X PAGE 65 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 F - Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground * - Hard Temper TABLE II PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS Item # 1 Pipe and Fitting Materials SERVICE A SERVICE B SERVICE C SERVICE D a. Galvanized, ASME B16.3 for use with Item 4a b. Same as "a" but not galvanized for use with Item 4b X X X X 2 Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous pipe ASTM A536 and ASTM A47/A47M, non-ferrous pipe, ASTM A536 and ASTM A47/A47M X X X 3 Ductile iron grooved joint fittings for ferrous pipe ASTM A536 and ASTM A47/A47M, for use with Item 2 X X X 4 Steel pipe: X X X Malleable-iron threaded fittings: a. Seamless, galvanized, ASTM A53/A53M, Type S, Grade B X X X b. Seamless, black, ASTM A53/A53M, Type S, Grade B 5 Seamless red brass pipe, ASTM B43 X X X 6 Bronze flanged fittings, ASME B16.24 for use with Items 5 and 7 X X X 7 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B42 X X X 8 Seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88, ASTM B88M X** X** 9 Cast bronze threaded fittings, ASME B16.15 for use with Items 5 and 7 X X 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS X** X*** X PAGE 66 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 10 11 12 13 Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings, ASME B16.22 for use with Items 5, 7 and 8 Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings, ASME B16.18 for use with Item 8 X X X X X X X X Bronze and sand castings groovedjoint pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe ASTM B584, for use with Item Polyethylene (PE)2 plastic pipe, X X X X X Schedules 40 and 80, based on outside diameter 14 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe (SDR-PR), based on controlled outside diameter, ASTM D3035 X X 15 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe (SIDR-PR), based on controlled inside diameter, ASTM D2239 X X 16 Butt fusion polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe fittings, ASTM D3261 for use with Items 14, 15, and 16 X X 17 Socket-type polyethylene fittings for outside diameter- controlled polyethylene pipe, ASTM D2683 for use with Item 15 Polyethylene (PE) plastic X X X X 18 tubing, ASTM D2737 19 20 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) plastic hot and cold water distribution system, ASTM D2846/D2846M Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X X X X (CPVC) plastic pipe, Schedule 40 and 80, ASTM F441/F441M 21 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe (SDR-PR) ASTM F442/F442M X X X 22 Threaded chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (chloride CPVC) plastic pipe fittings, Schedule 80, ASTM F437, for use with Items 20, and 21 chlorinated Socket-type polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM F438 for use with Items 20, 21, and 22 X X X X X X 23 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 67 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 24 25 Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe fittings Schedule 80, ASTM F439 for use with Items 20,(PVC) 21, and 22 Polyvinyl chloride plastic X X X X X pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120, ASTM D1785 26 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure-rated pipe (SDR Series), ASTM D2241 X X 27 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM D2466 X X 28 Socket-type polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80, ASTM D2467 for use with Items 26 and 27 X X 29 Threaded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80, ASTM D2464 X X 30 Joints for IPS PVC pipe using solvent cement, ASTM D2672 X X 31 Polypropylene (PP) plastic pipe and fittings; ASTM F2389 X X 32 Steel pipeline flanges, MSS SP44 X X 33 Fittings: brass or bronze; ASME B16.15, and ASME B16.18 ASTM B828 X X 34 Carbon steel pipe unions, socket-welding and threaded, MSS SP-83 X X 35 Malleable-iron threaded pipe unions ASME B16.39 X X 36 Nipples, pipe threaded ASTM A733 X X 37 Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Pipe ASTM F877 X X 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS X X X X PAGE 68 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 38 Press Fittings: A - Cold Water Service Aboveground B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 82 degrees C 180 degrees F Maximum Aboveground C - Compressed Air Lubricated D - Cold Water Service Belowground Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses. ** - Type L - Hard *** - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft temper without joints in or under floors **** - In or under slab floors only brazed joints TABLE III STANDARD RATING CONDITIONS AND MINIMUM PERFORMANCE RATINGS FOR WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT FUEL STORAGE CAPACITY LITERS INPUT RATING TEST PROCEDURE REQUIRED PERFORMANCE A. STORAGE WATER HEATERS Elect. 227 max 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.93 Elect. 227 min 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.91 Elect. 75.7 min. 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.93-0.00132V minimum Elect. 75.7 min. OR 12 kW min. ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 (Addenda B) 10 CFR 430 SL = 20+35x(V^^1/2) maximum 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.62-0.0019V min 12 kW max. 24 Amps or less and 250 Volts or less EF = 0.93-0.00132V Elect. Heat Pump Gas 189 max Gas 75.7 min. 22 kW max. 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.80-0.0019V minimum Gas 309.75 W/L max. 22 kW max. ET= 80 percent; SL = 1.3+38/V max. Oil 75.7 min. 30.8 kW max. ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 10 CFR 430 Oil 309.75 W/L max 30.8 kW ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 ET = 78 percent; SL = (Q/800+110x(V^^1/2)) maximum EF = 0.59-0.0019V min B. Unfired Hot Water Storage, R = 2.2 minimum 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 69 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 C. Instantaneous Water Heater Gas 309.75 W/L min. 14.66 kW min. 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.62-0.0019V and 7.57 L max 58.62 kW max. Gas 309.75 W/L min. 58.62 kW min. ET = 80 percent and 37.85 L max 58.62 kW max. Gas 309.75 W/L min. 58.62 kW min. ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 Oil 309.75 W/L min. 61.552 kW max. 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.59-0.0019V and 37.85 L max. Oil 309.75 W/L min. 61.552 kW max. ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 ET = 80 percent and 37.85 L min. SL + (Q/800+110x(V^^1/2) Oil 309.75 W/L min. 61.552 kW max. ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 ET = 78 percent and 37.85 L max SL = (Q800+110x(V^^1/2)) ET = 80 percent and 37.85 L min. SL + (Q/800+110x(V^^1/2) D. Pool Heater Gas or Oil All All ASHRAE 146 ET = 78 percent Heat Pump All TERMS: All All ASHRAE 146 COP = 4.0 EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency. ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 21 degrees C delta T. SL = Standby loss is maximum Watts based on a 38.9 degrees C temperature difference between stored water and ambient requirements. V = Rated storage volume in gallons Q = Nameplate input rate in Watts END OF SECTION 22 00 00 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 70 OF 70 PGC-230033-C-P8 SECTION 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 4 1.1 REFERENCES......................................................................................................... 4 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................ 11 1.2.1 Sustainable Design Requirements ........................................................................... 11 1.2.2 Performance Requirements ................................................................................... 11 1.2.3 Accessibility of Equipment ...................................................................................... 11 1.3 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................ 11 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................... 12 1.4.1 Qualifications ......................................................................................................... 12 1.4.2 Welding .................................................................................................................. 12 1.4.3 Regulatory Requirements ....................................................................................... 13 1.4.4 Alternative Qualifications ........................................................................................ 13 1.4.5 Service Support...................................................................................................... 13 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ............................................................... 13 PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................... 14 2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS ....................................................................................... 14 2.2 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE ......................................................................... 14 2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................. 14 2.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS ............................................................................................. 14 2.4.1 Domestic Water Piping ........................................................................................... 14 2.4.2 Deionized Water Piping .......................................................................................... 15 2.4.3 Drainage Piping (Soil, Waste, Vent, Indirect, and Storm) ........................................ 16 2.4.4 Drainage Piping (Corrosive Waste) ........................................................................ 16 2.4.5 Pressure Drainage Piping....................................................................................... 16 2.4.6 Exposed Piping in Finished Areas .......................................................................... 17 2.4.7 Trap Primer Pipe Between Primer Device and Drain .............................................. 17 2.5 PIPE JOINT MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 17 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ............................................................................. 18 2.7 PIPE INSULATION MATERIAL ............................................................................... 18 2.8 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS ....................................................... 18 2.9 VALVES ................................................................................................................ 18 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES .......................................................................................... 19 2.10.1 General ................................................................................................................ 19 2.10.2 Flushometer Valves.............................................................................................. 20 2.10.3 Automatic Controls ............................................................................................... 20 2.10.4 Service Sinks ....................................................................................................... 20 2.10.5 Fixture Descriptions ............................................................................................. 20 2.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ................................................................................... 27 2.12 DRAINS AND BACKWATER VALVES .................................................................... 28 2.12.1 Area Drains .......................................................................................................... 28 2.12.2 Floor and Shower Drains ...................................................................................... 28 2.12.3 Floor Sinks ........................................................................................................... 28 2.12.4 Roof Drains and Expansion Joints ........................................................................ 29 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.12.5 Sight Drains ......................................................................................................... 29 2.12.6 Backwater Valves ................................................................................................. 30 2.13 CLEANOUTS ......................................................................................................... 30 2.14 TRAPS .................................................................................................................. 31 2.14.1 Fixture Traps ........................................................................................................ 31 2.14.2 Drain Traps .......................................................................................................... 31 2.15 TRAP PRIMER ASSEMBLIES ................................................................................ 31 2.16 INTERCEPTORS ................................................................................................... 31 2.16.1 Grease Interceptor ............................................................................................... 31 2.16.2 Oil Interceptor ...................................................................................................... 32 2.17 WATER HEATERS ................................................................................................ 32 2.17.1 Performance of Water Heating Equipment ........................................................... 32 2.17.2 Automatic Storage Type ....................................................................................... 33 2.17.3 Instantaneous Water Heater ................................................................................. 34 2.17.4 Electric Instantaneous Water Heaters (Tankless) ................................................. 34 2.17.5 Relief Valves ........................................................................................................ 34 2.18 HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS ........................................................................... 34 2.19 PUMPS .................................................................................................................. 35 2.19.1 Sump Pumps........................................................................................................ 35 2.19.2 Hydraulic Elevator Sump Pumps .......................................................................... 35 2.19.3 Circulating Pumps ................................................................................................ 35 2.19.4 Booster Pumps..................................................................................................... 36 2.19.5 Flexible Connectors ............................................................................................. 36 2.19.6 Sewage Pumps .................................................................................................... 36 2.20 WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM ............................................................. 36 2.20.1 Constant Speed Pumping System ........................................................................ 36 2.20.2 Variable Speed Pumping System ......................................................................... 37 2.21 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER .................................................................. 37 2.22 COPPER-SILVER IONIZATION SYSTEM ............................................................... 37 2.23 ELECTRICAL WORK ............................................................................................. 38 2.24 FACTORY PAINTING............................................................................................. 38 PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................... 40 3.1 EXAMINATION ...................................................................................................... 40 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 40 3.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS ................................................................. 41 3.3.1 General .................................................................................................................. 41 3.3.2 Service Entrance .................................................................................................... 41 3.3.3 Pipe Drains............................................................................................................. 41 3.3.4 Valves .................................................................................................................... 41 3.3.5 Expansion and Contraction of Piping ...................................................................... 41 3.3.6 Thrust Restraint ...................................................................................................... 42 3.3.7 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters ........................................................... 42 3.3.8 Water Meter Remote Readout Register .................................................................. 42 3.3.9 Backflow Prevention Devices ................................................................................. 42 3.3.10 Copper-Silver Ionization Systems ......................................................................... 43 3.4 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS ............................................................ 43 3.4.1 General .................................................................................................................. 43 3.4.2 Pipe Cleanouts ....................................................................................................... 44 3.4.3 Sight Drains............................................................................................................ 44 3.4.4 Traps ...................................................................................................................... 44 3.5 JOINTS.................................................................................................................. 44 3.5.1 Threaded................................................................................................................ 44 3.5.2 Mechanical Couplings ............................................................................................ 45 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.5.3 Unions and Flanges ............................................................................................... 45 3.5.4 Grooved Mechanical Joints .................................................................................... 45 3.5.5 Cast Iron Soil Pipe .................................................................................................. 45 3.5.6 Copper Tube and Pipe ........................................................................................... 45 3.5.7 Glass Pipe .............................................................................................................. 46 3.5.8 Corrosive Waste Plastic Pipe ................................................................................. 46 3.5.9 Other Joint Methods ............................................................................................... 46 3.6 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR BURIED PIPE AND FITTINGS .......................... 46 3.7 PIPE SLEEVES AND FLASHING ........................................................................... 46 3.7.1 Sleeve Requirements ............................................................................................. 46 3.7.2 Flashing Requirements .......................................................................................... 47 3.7.3 Optional Counterflashing ........................................................................................ 47 3.7.4 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors ............................................................. 48 3.7.5 Pipe Penetrations ................................................................................................... 48 3.7.6 Fire Seal................................................................................................................. 48 3.8 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS ....................................................... 48 3.8.1 Seismic Requirements ........................................................................................... 49 3.8.2 Structural Attachments ........................................................................................... 50 3.9 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS ................................................................. 50 3.9.1 Fixture Connections ............................................................................................... 50 3.9.2 Flushometer Valves................................................................................................ 50 3.9.3 Height of Fixture Rims above Floor ........................................................................ 50 3.9.4 Shower Bath Outfits ............................................................................................... 50 3.9.5 Fixture Supports ..................................................................................................... 51 3.9.6 Access Panels........................................................................................................ 51 3.9.7 Shower Pans .......................................................................................................... 51 3.9.8 Escutcheons .......................................................................................................... 52 3.10 WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS ..................................... 52 3.10.1 Relief Valves ........................................................................................................ 52 3.10.2 Connections to Water Heaters .............................................................................. 52 3.10.3 Expansion Tank.................................................................................................... 52 3.11 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS .................................................................................. 53 3.11.1 Identification Tags ................................................................................................ 53 3.11.2 Nameplates .......................................................................................................... 53 3.11.3 Labels .................................................................................................................. 53 3.11.4 Pipe Color Code Marking ..................................................................................... 53 3.11.5 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components ............................ 53 3.12 PAINTING .............................................................................................................. 54 3.12.1 General ................................................................................................................ 54 3.12.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces ........................................................... 54 3.13 VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES ................................................................... 54 3.14 TRAINING ............................................................................................................. 54 3.15 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................................... 55 3.16 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION ............................................................... 55 3.16.1 Plumbing System ................................................................................................. 55 3.16.2 Defective Work ..................................................................................................... 56 3.16.3 System Flushing ................................................................................................... 57 3.16.4 Operational Test ................................................................................................... 57 3.16.5 Disinfection........................................................................................................... 58 3.17 WASTE MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................ 58 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) a. ANSI Z21.10.1/CSA 4.1 (2009; Addenda A 2009; Addenda B 2011) Gas Water Heaters Vol. I, Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings of 75,000 Btu per Hour or Less b. ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 (2011) Gas Water Heaters Vol.III, Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous c. ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R 2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems 2. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE) REFRIGERATING AND AIR- a. ASHRAE 90.1 - SI(2010; Errata 2011; INT 2-12 2011; Errata 2011, Addenda A, B, C, G, H, J, K, O, P, S, Y, Z, BZ, CG, CI, AND DS 2012, INT 13 2012; Errata 2012, Errata 2012, Errata 2012, Errata 2012) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings 3. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE) a. ASSE 1001 (2008) Performance Requirements for Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2009) b. ASSE 1003 (2009) Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems - (ANSI approved 2010) c. ASSE 1010 (2004) Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters (ANSI approved 2004) d. ASSE 1011 (2004; Errata 2004) Performance Requirements Connection Vacuum Breakers (ANSI approved 2004) for Hose e. ASSE 1012 (2009) Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with an Intermediate Atmospheric Vent - (ANSI approved 2009) f. ASSE 1013 (2009) Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers - (ANSI approved 2010) g. ASSE 1018 (2001) Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer Valves Potable Water Supplied (ANSI Approved 2002 h. ASSE 1020 (2004; Errata 2004; Errata 2004) Performance Requirements for Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly (ANSI Approved 2004) i. ASSE 1037 (1990) Performance Requirements Devices (Flushometers) for Plumbing Fixtures 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS for Pressurized Flushing PAGE 4 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 4. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) a. AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater b. AWWA B300 (2010; Addenda 2011) Hypochlorites c. Liquid Chlorine AWWA B301 (2010) d. AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot-Applied e. AWWA C606 (2011) Grooved and Shouldered Joints f. AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains g. AWWA C652 (2011) Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities h. AWWA C700 (2009) Standard for Cold Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case i. AWWA C701 (2007) Standard for Cold-Water Meters - Turbine Type for Customer Service j. AWWA D100 (2011) Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage 5. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) a. AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding b. AWS B2.1/B2.1M (2009) Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification c. AWS B2.2/B2.2M (2010) Specification for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification 6. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) a. ASME A112.1.2 (2012) Standard for Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems (For Plumbing Fixtures and Water-Connected Receptors) b. ASME A112.14.1 (2003; R 2008) Backwater Valves c. ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 (2008; Update 1 2009; Update 2 2011) Standard for Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals d. ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 (2008; Update 1 2009; Update 2 2011) Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures e. ASME A112.36.2M f. (1991; R 2008) Cleanouts ASME A112.6.1M (1997; R 2008) Floor Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use g. ASME A112.6.3 (2001; R 2007) Standard for Floor and Trench Drains h. ASME A112.6.4 (2003: R 2008) Roof, Deck and Balcony Drains 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 i. ASME B1.20.2M (2006; R 2011) Pipe Threads, 60 Deg. General Purpose (Metric) j. ASME B16.18 (2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings k. ASME B16.21 (2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges l. ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2010) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings m. ASME B16.23 (2011) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV n. ASME B16.29 (2007) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings – DWV o. ASME B16.34 (2009; Supp 2010) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End p. ASME B16.5 (2009) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard q. ASME B31.1 (2010) Power Piping r. ASME B31.5 (2010) Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components s. ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments t. ASME BPVC SEC IV (2010) BPVC Section IV-Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers u. ASME BPVC SEC IX (2010) Qualifications v. BPVC Section IX-Welding and Brazing ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1(2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1 w. ASME CSD-1 (2012) Control and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers 7. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a. ASTM A105/A105M (2011a) Standard Forgings for Piping Applications Specification for Carbon Steel b. ASTM A183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts c. ASTM A193/A193M (2012) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service and Other Special Purpose Applications d. ASTM A47/A47M (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings e. ASTM A515/A515M (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service f. ASTM A516/A516M (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 g. ASTM A518/A518M (1999; R 2008) Standard Corrosion- Resistant High-Silicon Iron Castings h. ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless i. ASTM A536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings j. ASTM A74 (2009) Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings k. ASTM A861 (2004; R 2008) Standard Specification for High-Silicon Iron Pipe and Fittings l. ASTM A888 (2011) Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications m. ASTM B111/B111M (2011) Standard Specification for Copper- Alloy Seamless Condenser Tubes and Ferrule Stock Copper and n. ASTM B117 (2011) (Fog) Apparatus Salt Spray o. ASTM B152/B152M (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar Standard Practice for Specification Operating for p. ASTM B306 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV) q. ASTM B32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder Metal r. ASTM B36/B36M (2008a) Standard Specification for Brass Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar s. ASTM B370 (2011e1) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction t. ASTM B584 (2011) Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications u. ASTM B75 (2002; R 2010) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube v. ASTM B75M (1999; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube (Metric) w. ASTM B813 (2010) Standard Specification for Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube Liquid and Paste x. ASTM B88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube y. ASTM B88M (2005; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric) z. ASTM C1053 (2000; R 2010) Standard Specification for Borosilicate Glass Pipe and Fittings for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Applications aa. ASTM C564 (2011) Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 bb. ASTM C920 (2011) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants cc. ASTM D2000 (2012) Standard Products in Automotive Applications Classification System for Rubber dd. ASTM D2657 (2007) Heat Fusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings ee. ASTM D2822/D2822M (2005e1; R 2011) Asphalt Roof Cement ff. ASTM D2846/D2846M (2009be1) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems gg. ASTM D3139 (1998; R 2011) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals hh. ASTM D3212 (2007) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals ii. ASTM D3311 (2011) Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns jj. ASTM D4101 (2011) Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials kk. ASTM D635 (2010) Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position ll. ASTM E1 (2007) Standard Glass Thermometers mm. ASTM F1290 and Fittings Specification for ASTM Liquid-in- (1998a; R 2011) Electrofusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe nn. ASTM F1412 (2009) Standard Specification for Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings for Corrosive Waste Drainage Systems oo. ASTM F2618 (2009) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Fittings for Chemical Waste Drainage Systems pp. ASTM F477 (2010) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe 8. 9. CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI) a. CISPI 301 (2009) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications b. CISPI 310 (2011) Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA) a. CDA A4015 (1994; R 1995) Copper Tube Handbook 10. FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR) 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 a. FCCCHR Manual (1988e9) Manual of Cross-Connection Control 11. INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OFFICIALS (IAPMO) OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL a. IAPMO Z124.1.2 (2005) Plastic Bathtub and Shower Units b. IAPMO Z124.5 (2006) Plastic Toilet (Water Closet) Seats 12. INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC) a. ICC A117.1 (2009) Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities b. ICC IPC 13. (2009) International Plumbing Code INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA) a. ANSI/ISEA Z358.1 (2009) American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment 14. MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS) a. MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends b. MSS SP-25 (2008) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions c. MSS SP-58 (2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation d. MSS SP-67 (2011) Butterfly Valves e. MSS SP-69 (2003) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application (ANSI Approved American National Standard) f. MSS SP-70 (2011) Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends g. MSS SP-71 (2011) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends h. MSS SP-72 (2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service i. MSS SP-78 (2011) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends j. MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves k. MSS SP-85 (2011) Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends 15. NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE) a. NACE SP0169 (1992; R 2007) Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems 16. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) a. NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 b. NEMA MG 1 (2011) Motors and Generators c. NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors 17. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) a. NFPA 90A(2012) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 18. NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF) a. NSF/ANSI 14 (2012) Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials b. NSF/ANSI 61 (2011; Addenda 2012) Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects 19. PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA) a. PPFA Fire Man (2010) Construction 20. Firestopping: Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI) a. PDI G 101 (2010) Testing and Rating Procedure for Hydro Mechanical Grease Interceptors with Appendix of Installation and Maintenance b. PDI WH 201 (2010) Water Hammer Arresters Standard 21. SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE) a. SAE J1508 (2009) Hose Clamp Specifications 22. U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA) a. PL 93-523 (1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act 23. U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) a. 10 CFR 430 Energy Conservation Program for Consumer Products b. 40 CFR 143 National Secondary Drinking Water Regulations c. PL 102-486 (1992) Residential Energy Efficiency Ratings 24. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) a. UL 174 (2004; Reprint Jul 2011) Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters b. UL 1951 (2011) Electric Plumbing Accessories c. UL 499 (2005; Reprint Apr 2012) Electric Heating Appliances d. UL 508 (1999; Reprint Apr 2010) Industrial Control Equipment e. UL 732 (1995; Reprint Apr 2010) Oil-Fired Storage Tank Water Heaters f. 25. UL 778 (2010; Reprint May 2012) Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps UNIFIED PLUMBING CODE OF ABU DHABI (PCAD) 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 26. 1.2 ESTIDAMA BY URBAN PLANNING COUNCIL OF ABU DHABI (UPC) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide complete and operable plumbing systems including sanitary and storm drainage, domestic water, plumbing fixtures, valves, pumps, water heaters, supports, and all associated appurtenances. 1.2.1 Sustainable Design Requirements Follow and comply with sustainability requirement program (ESTIDAMA) issued by Abu Dhabi planning Council (UPC). Nevertheless applying for Pearl rating is not required 1.2.2 Performance Requirements 1.2.2.1 Cathodic Protection and Pipe Joint Bonding Provide cathodic protection and pipe joint bonding systems in accordance with [Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)] [and] [Section 26 42 17.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (IMPRESSED CURRENT)] [Section 26 42 13.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY GALVANIC ANODE] [and] [Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED CURRENT] and Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED CURRENT). 1.2.2.2 Plumbing Fixtures Water flow and consumption rates shall, at a minimum, comply with requirements Uniform Plumbing Code of Abu Dhabi, CMW standards, and in PL 102-486. 1.2.3 Accessibility of Equipment Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: A. SD-02 Shop Drawings 1. Plumbing System; B. SD-03 Product Data 1. Pipe and Fittings 2. Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports 3. Valves 4. Plumbing Fixtures 5. Backflow Preventers 6. Drains and Backwater Valves 7. Cleanouts 8. Interceptors 9. Water Heaters 10. Storage Tanks 11. Pumps 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 12. Water Pressure Booster System 13. Water Service Meter 14. Copper-silver Ionization System 15. Vibration-Absorbing Features 16. Plumbing System C. SD-06 Test Reports 1. Tests, Flushing and Disinfection 2.Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies. D. SD-07 Certificates 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Materials and Equipment Welding Bolts EPA registration for Copper-Silver Ionization NSF certification for Copper-Silver Ionization E. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Plumbing System 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Qualifications a. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturers shall be regularly engaging in the manufacturing, supplying, and servicing of specified products and equipment, as well as, providing engineering and/or start-up services as specified. Provide evidence demonstrating compliance for a minimum of 5 years, and on 5 projects of similar complexity. b. Installer qualifications: Installer shall be licensed, and shall provide evidence of the successful completion of at least five projects of equal or greater size and complexity. Provide tradesmen skilled in the appropriate trade. Installation of the following items/systems shall be done by authorized representatives of respective manufacturers: 1. Water Pressure Booster Pump System. 2. Copper-silver Ionization System. 1.4.2 Welding Weld piping in accordance with qualified procedures using performance-qualified welders and welding operators. Submit a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators. Provide documentation that welders, and welding operators are certified in accordance with American Welding Society Standard AWS B2.1/B2.1M. Qualify procedures and welders in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer, may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. Notify PGC site engineer 24 hours in advance of tests, and perform the tests at the work site if practicable. Welders or welding operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they make as a permanent record.] [Welding and nondestructive testing procedures are specified in Section 40 05 13.96 WELDING PROCESS PIPING.] [Weld structural members in accordance with Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL.] 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 12 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.4.3 Regulatory Requirements 1.4.3.1 UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE OF ABU DHABI1.4.3.1 Sub Title Uniform Plumbing Code of Abu Dhabi shall be considered the primary ruling Code, plumbing works shall comply with this code. 1.4.3.2 International Code Council (ICC) Codes Unless otherwise required herein, perform plumbing work in accordance with the ICC IPC. a. For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean PGC site engineer. b. For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. . References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1 shall be applied appropriately by PGC site engineer . 1.4.3.3 Referenced Publications In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean PGC. 1.4.4 Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown. 1.4.5 Service Support The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by PGC site engineer. Replace damaged or defective items. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 13 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS STANDARD PRODUCTS Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Provide standard products that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period. 2.2 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. See also paragraph "Nameplates" in PART 3. 2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Submit manufacturer's catalog data with highlighting to show model, size, options, etc., that are intended for consideration. Provide adequate data to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements. Submit certificate stating that the design, fabrication, and installation conform to the code, a. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet NSF/ANSI 14 and shall be NSF listed for the service intended. ." Polypropylene pipe and fittings shall conform to dimensional requirements of Schedule 40, Iron Pipe size. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in air plenums. . b. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be installed underground, under concrete floor slabs, or in crawl spaces below kitchen floors. d. Select steel pipe schedules based on service requirements. Pipe fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Pipe threads (except dry seal) shall conform to ASME B1.20.2M. Grooved pipe couplings and fittings shall be from the same manufacturer. e. Material or equipment containing lead shall not be used in any potable water system. In line devices such as water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops, valves, fittings and back flow preventers shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSF/ANSI 61, Section 8. End point devices such as water coolers, lavatory faucets, kitchen and bar faucets, ice makers, supply stops and end point control valves used to dispense water for drinking shall meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9. 2.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.4.1 Domestic Water Piping Domestic water piping at service entrance (from 300 mm inside building to 1525 mm outside): Same as indicated for outside utilities. a. 50 mm and smaller after service entrance above grade: 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 14 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 (1) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type L, with soldered joints and wrought copper ASME B16.22 or cast brass ASME B16.18 fittings. (2) Copper tube extracted branch taps with brazed joints are acceptable where the tapped pipe is at least 25 mm diameter and where branch is at least 2 pipe sizes smaller. (3) Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube: Copper press fittings shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. Sealing elements for copper press fittings shall be EPDM, FKM or HNBR. Sealing elements shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied fitting manufacturer. Sealing element shall be selected based on manufacturer's approved application guidelines. b. Below grade: (1) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type K soft, with brazed joints and wrought copper ASME B16.22 fittings. (2) Where below-grade run of piping is shorter than 15 m, below-grade joints are not acceptable. c. 65 to 100 mm after service entrance: (1) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type L, with soldered joints and wrought copper ASME B16.22 or cast brass ASME B16.18 fittings. (2) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type L, with roll-groove joints and manufactured grooved fittings conforming to ASTM B75 C12200 or ASTM B152/B152M C1100 and ASME B16.22 for wrought copper, or per ASTM B584 copper alloy CDA 836 (85-5-5-5) per ASME B16.18. d. 125 mm and larger after service entrance: (1) Seamless or welded, hot-dipped galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM B36/B36M with roll grooved joints and galvanized, malleable-iron, grooved fittings and couplings. (2) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type L, with soldered joints and wrought copper ASME B16.22 fittings. (3) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type L, with roll-groove joints and manufactured grooved fittings conforming to ASTM B75 C12200 or ASTM B152/B152M C1100 and ASME B16.22 for wrought copper, or per ASTM B584 copper alloy CDA 836 (85-5-5-5) per ASME B16.18. (4) [Connections to existing galvanized piping: mechanical plain-end, or flanged.] Threaded, mechanical groove, 2.4.2 Deionized Water Piping CPVC Plastic Pipe, Fittings, and Solvent Cement: ASTM D2846/D2846M, Schedule 40 CPVC. Provide transition union connections or threaded gate valve between copper tubing and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) piping. Provide male threaded adapters with PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene) pipe thread paste for threaded connections to valves, strainers, and equipment. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 15 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4.3 Drainage Piping (Soil, Waste, Vent, Indirect, and Storm) a. Above grade: (1) Cast-iron conforming to ASTM A74, hubbed pipe and fittings with ASTM C564 elastomeric push joints. (2) Cast-iron conforming to CISPI 301 or ASTM A888, hubless pipe, fittings, and CISPI 310 elastomeric sealing sleeves with stainless-steel or cast iron clamps. (3) Copper tube conforming to ASTM B306, type DWV or heavier, with soldered joints and wrought copper ASME B16.29 or cast brass ASME B16.23 drainage and vent fittings. Piping within MRI shielding shall be copper. (4) Seamless or welded, hot-dipped galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM B36/B36M, cast iron drainage type fittings, galvanized malleable vent fittings and threaded joints. b. Below grade: Cast-iron conforming to ASTM A74, hubbed pipe and fittings with ASTM C564 elastomeric push joints. 2.4.4 Drainage Piping (Corrosive Waste) a. Above grade: (1) Corrosive waste borosilicate glass conforming to ASTM C1053, with mechanical joints and borosilicate glass fittings. (2) Corrosive waste cast iron (14 percent silica) pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM A518/A518M and ASTM A861. Mechanical joints, and bell and spigot joints are acceptable in exposed (accessible) locations. Bell and spigot joints only are acceptable in concealed (non-accessible) locations. (3) Corrosive waste Schedule 40 fire retardant polypropylene DWV pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D4101, ASTM F1412, ASTM D635, and ASTM D3311. Mechanical joints, and fused joints are acceptable in exposed (accessible) locations. Fused joints only are acceptable in concealed (non-accessible) locations.] (4) Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Chemical DWV piping system complying with ASTM F2618 and socket (solvent cement) joints. b. Below grade: (1) Corrosive waste cast iron (14 percent silica) pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM A518/A518M and ASTM A861, with bell and spigot joints. (2) Corrosive waste Schedule 80 polypropylene DWV pipe and fittings conforming with ASTM D4101 and ASTM D3311 with fused joints.] (3) Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Chemical DWV piping system complying with ASTM F2618 and socket (solvent cement) joints. 2.4.5 Pressure Drainage Piping a. Cast iron pressure pipe and fittings, with mechanical joints. b. Galvanized steel, cast iron drainage fittings with threaded joints. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 16 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4.6 Exposed Piping in Finished Areas a. Chrome or nickel plated brass to wall or floor. b. Piping 50 mm and larger may be provided with chrome or nickel plated brass sleeves to cover pipe and fittings in lieu of plating. 2.4.7 Trap Primer Pipe Between Primer Device and Drain a. Above grade: Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type K or L, with soldered joints and wrought copper ASME B16.22 or cast brass ASME B16.18 fittings. b. Below grade: Copper tube conforming to ASTM B88M, type K soft, with soldered joints and wrought copper ASME B16.22 or cast brass ASME B16.18 fittings. 2.5 PIPE JOINT MATERIALS Grooved pipe and hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used underground. Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Mark cast iron soil pipe and fittings with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Joints and gasket materials shall conform to the following: a. Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A74, AWWA C606. For hubless type: CISPI 310 b. Coupling for Steel Pipe: AWWA C606. c. Couplings for Grooved Pipe: [Ductile Iron ASTM A536 (Grade 65-45-12)] [Malleable Iron ASTM A47/A47M, Grade 32510]. [Copper ASTM A536]. d. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in accordance with ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1.6 mm thick, and contain Aramid fibers bonded with Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) or Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall be the full face or self centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service shall be bonded with NBR. e. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP-5. f. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents; contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides. g. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B32 and be Code approved "Lead Free" having a chemical composition equal to or less than 0.2 percent lead. h. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, Code approved "Lead Free" and conforms to ASTM B813, Standard Test 1. i. PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe. j. Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot type and hubless type): ASTM C564. k. Rubber Gaskets for Grooved Pipe: ASTM D2000, maximum temperature 110 degreesC. l. Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D3139, ASTM D3212 or ASTM F477. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 17 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 m. Bolts and Nuts for Grooved Pipe Couplings: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A183. n. Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc., shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange material shall conform to ASTM A105/A105M. Blind flange material shall conform to ASTM A516/A516M cold service and ASTM A515/A515M for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength with material conforming to ASTM A193/A193M. Submit written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply with the specified requirements. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following: a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201. [Water hammer arrester shall be [diaphragm] ] b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B370. c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D2822/D2822M. d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508. e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M. f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M. g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide watertight, gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties. h. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines: AWWA C203. i. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300. j. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301. k. Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element: ASME B40.100. l. Thermometers: ASTM E1. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers. 2.7 PIPE INSULATION MATERIAL Provide insulation as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. 2.8 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS Provide pipe hangers, inserts, and supports conforming to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Hangers in MRI Suite shall be non-ferrous (copper, aluminum, stainless steel). 2.9 VALVES Provide valves on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves 65 mm and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 80 mm and larger shall have flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based upon the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 18 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable MSS standard. Valves shall conform to the following standards: Description Standard Butterfly Valves MSS SP-67 Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends MSS SP-70 Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends MSS SP-71 Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends for General Service MSS SP-72 Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends MSS SP-110 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves MSS SP-80 Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends ASME B16.34 Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends MSS SP-85 Backwater Valves ASME A112.14.1 Vacuum Relief Valves ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 ASSE 1003 Water Pressure Reducing Valves MSS SP-78 Water Heater Drain Valves ASME BPVC SEC IV, Part HLW-810 Trap Seal Primer Valves ASSE 1018 Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves for Automatically Fired Hot Water Boilers ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 ASME CSD-1 Safety Code, Part CW, Article 5 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES 2.10.1 General Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC. Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1. Provide vitreous china fixtures that are nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified throughout the body. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks, crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Equip fixtures with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system shall be equipped with a trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers. Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves, shower mixing valves, shower head face plates, ] [shall be copper alloy with all visible surfaces chrome plated].[ Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for 82 degrees C water temperature.] Maximum allowable lead content in wetted surfaces of pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings and fixtures, as determined by a weighted average shall not exceed 0.25 percent. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 19 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.10.2 Flushometer Valves Provide flushometer valves with an ADA compliant, metal oscillating, non-hold-open handle, backcheck angle control stop, and vacuum breaker. Flushometer valves shall be either a large diaphragm, or fixed volume piston type with filtered metering bypass. Valve shall not be able to be converted externally or internally to exceed a low consumption flush. Handle packing, main seat, stop seat and vacuum breaker shall be molded from a chloramine resistant rubber compound. Provide valve body, cover, tailpiece and control stop in conformance with ASTM Alloy Classification for semi-red brass. All exposed surfaces shall be chrome plated. Handle shall have factory applied antimicrobial coating. Flushometer valves shall conform to ASSE 1037. 2.10.3 Automatic Controls Where specified with a fixture, provide automatic, sensor operated faucets complying with ASSE 1037 and UL 1951. Faucet systems shall consist of solenoid-activated valves with light beam sensors. 2.10.4 Service Sinks ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china with integral back and wall hanger supports, minimum dimensions of 559 mm wide by 508 mm front to rear, with two supply openings in 254 mm high back. Provide floor supported wall outlet cast iron P-trap and stainless steel rim guards as recommended by service sink manufacturer. Provide back mounted washerless service sink faucets with vacuum breaker and 19 mm external hose threads. 2.10.5 Fixture Descriptions 2.10.5.1 Electric Water Coolers Provide self-contained, mechanically refrigerated electric water coolers with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable water and the refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style, air-cooled condensing unit, stainless steel splash receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Provide 8.4 mL/s minimum capacity of 10 degrees C water when supplied with 27 degrees C inlet water and a 32 degrees C room temperature. Control bubblers by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side mounted near the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum of 914 mm above floor and at front of unit basin with 686 mm minimum knee clearance from bottom of unit to finished floor. Spouts shall direct water flow at least 102 mm above unit basin and trajectory parallel or nearly parallel to the front of unit. Provide chrome plated 10 mm OD soft-copper tube supplies with set-screw escutcheons, and loose key stops. Provide chrome plated 32 x 40 mm semi-cast Ptrap with cleanout with 1.1 x 38 mm chrome plated copper tube trap arm with set-screw escutcheon. Provide filters for chlorine in supply piping to faucets. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed steel pipe chair carriers. a. EWC-1 (JSN R2201): Accessible (forward facing), dual-level, recessed, brushed stainless steel, recessed refrigeration unit, dual level extensions with oval receptors, access panel cover, rounded corners, rounded edges, designed to eliminate splashing and standing waste water. Provide self- closing, semi-circular push bars with full 180 degree activation. b. EWC-2 (Similar to JSN R2202): refrigerated. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS Self-contained, wall hung, mechanically PAGE 20 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.10.5.2 Emergency Fixtures Provide copper alloy control valves. Provide an air-gap with the lowest potable eye and face wash water outlet located above the overflow rim by not less than the International Plumbing Code minimum. [Provide a pressure-compensated tempering valve, with leaving water temperature setpoint adjustable throughout the range 16 to 35 degrees C.] [Provide packaged, UL listed, alarm system; including an amber strobe lamp, horn with externally adjustable loudness and horn silencing switch, mounting hardware, and waterflow service within NEMA Type 3 or 4 enclosures[ and for explosion proof service within NEMA Type 7 or 9 enclosures].] a. EW-1 (Similar to JSN P1960): Eye/face wash, ANSI/ISEA Z358.1, deck-mounted, swing down, self- cleaning, non-clogging eye and face wash with quick opening, full-flow valve. Spray heads swing down from storage to operational position activating water flow. Coordinate configuration with sink faucet location. Unit shall deliver 0.19 L/s of aerated water at 207 kPa flow pressure. b. EW-2 (JSN P2000): Eye/face wash, ANSI/ISEA Z358.1, wall-mounted selfcleaning, non-clogging eye and face wash with quick opening, full-flow valves, corrosion-resisting steel eye and face wash receptor. Unit shall deliver 0.19 L/s of aerated water at 207 kPa flow pressure, with eye and face wash nozzles 838 to 1143 mm above finished floor. Provide 32 mm standard chrome drain fitting. c. ES-1 (Similar to JSN P5210): Combination drench shower and eye/face wash, ANSI/ISEA Z358.1. All exposed surfaces shall be stainless steel. Recessed eye/face wash and shower actuator assembly. Eye/face wash, swing down, selfcleaning, non-clogging eye and face wash with quick opening, full- flow valve. Spray heads swing down from storage to operational position activating water flow. Eye/face wash shall deliver 0.19 L/s of aerated water at 207 kPa 30 psi flow pressure. Shower head shall be a minimum of 203 mm diameter Shower valve shall be 25 mm IPS brass stay-open valve with stainless steel "panic bar" actuator. Shower shall deliver 1.89 L/s flow and 508 mm pattern at 1524 mm above floor. Eye/face wash and shower actuator shall be mounted in [combined] stainless steel fully recessed cabinet with flanged rim and suitable for mounting in 92 mm stud wall. [This unit shall be suitable for and installed for handicap access.] d. ES-2 (JSN P5210): Combination drench shower and eye/face wash, ANSI/ISEA Z358.1. Components shall be mounted on a minimum 32 mm diameter [stainless steel] [ pipe stanchion with floor flange. Provide chrome plated split ring support to adjacent wall surface 305 mm below shower arm connection. Eye/face wash, swing down, self-cleaning, non-clogging eye and face wash with quick opening, 13 mm IPS chrome-plated brass full-flow push to activate stay-open valve. Eye/face wash shall deliver 0.19 L/s of aerated water at 207 kPa flow pressure. Shower head shall be a minimum of 203 mm diameter. Shower valve shall be 25 mm IPS chrome-plated brass stay-open valve with stainless steel actuating arm and pull rod. Shower shall deliver 1.89 L/s flow and 508 mm pattern at 1524 mm above floor. [This unit shall be suitable for and installed for handicap access.] 2.10.5.3 Lavatories a. Provide ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, integral back type wall hung lavatories with supply openings for use with top mounted faucet, and openings for concealed arm carrier installation. Provide chrome plated 10 mm OD soft-copper tube supplies with set-screw escutcheons, and loose key stops. Provide chrome plated 32 x 40 mm semi-cast P-trap with cleanout with 1.1 x 38 mm chrome plated copper tube trap arm with set-screw escutcheon. Provide 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 21 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports and concealed arms for the lavatory. Mount lavatory with the front rim 787 mm above the floor, except 864 mm above floor and with 737 mm minimum clearance from bottom of the front rim to floor for accessible lavatories. (1) L-1 (Similar to JSN P3200): 508 x 457 mm. Fixture shall be equipped with, electronic infrared operated 100 mm centerset combination faucet with aerator, drain fitting with grid strainer, "P" trap, and angle or straight stop valves. Automatic water flow starts electronically by proximity of individual. Provide wiring box, 120/24 volt solenoid remote mounted transformer. Transformer may be sized for multiple adjacent lavatories.] Flow shall be limited to 0.03 L/s at a flowing pressure of 549 kPa. (2) L-2: Same as L-1 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1. Provide accessible protection on exposed water supplies and "P" trap and drain piping. (3) L-3 (Similar to JSN P3100): 508 x 610 mm. Fixture shall be equipped with combination faucet, elevated gooseneck spout with laminar flow outlet, 100 mm wrist action handles, drain fitting with grid strainer, "P" trap, and angle or straight stop valves. Faucet body shall not have a pop-up drain rod hole. Plugged holes are not acceptable. The flow shall be limited to 0.09 L/s at a flowing water pressure of 549 kPa. (4) L-4: Same as L-3 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1. Provide accessible protection on exposed water supplies and "P" trap and drain piping. (5) L-5 (Similar to JSN P3100): 508 x 610 mm. Fixture shall be equipped with combination faucet, elevated gooseneck spout with laminar flow outlet, 100 mm wrist action handles, drain fitting with grid strainer, "P" trap, and angle or straight stop valves. Faucet body shall not have a pop-up drain rod hole. Plugged holes are not acceptable. The flow shall be limited to 0.09 L/s at a flowing water pressure of 549 kPa. Accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1. Provide accessible protection on exposed water supplies and "P" trap and drain piping. b. ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, self-rimming counter-mounted lavatories with supply openings for use with top mounted faucet. Furnish template and mounting kit by lavatory manufacturer. Provide chrome plated 10 mm OD softcopper tube supplies with set-screw escutcheons, and loose key stops. Provide chrome plated 32 x 40 mm semi-cast P-trap with cleanout with 1.1 x 38 mm chrome plated copper tube trap arm with set-screw escutcheon. (1) L-6 (Similar to JSN P3070): 508 x 457 mm. Fixture shall be equipped with, electronic infrared operated 100 mm centerset combination faucet with aerator, drain fitting with grid strainer, "P" trap, and angle or straight stop valves. Automatic water flow starts electronically by proximity of individual. Provide wiring box, 120/24 volt solenoid remote mounted transformer. Transformer may be sized for multiple adjacent lavatories. [Provide either a battery operated unit or a solar powered unit with battery backup.] Flow shall be limited to 0.03 L/s at a flowing pressure of 549 kPa 80 psi. (2) L-7: Same as L-6 except provide accessible protection on exposed water supplies and "P" trap and drain piping. (3) L-8 (Similar to JSN P3070): 508 x 457 mm. Fixture shall be equipped with 100 mm centerset combination faucet with laminar flow outlet, elevated gooseneck spout with laminar flow outlet, 100 mm wrist action handles, drain fitting with 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 22 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 grid strainer, "P" trap, and angle or straight stop valves. Faucet body shall not have a pop-up drain rod hole. Plugged holes are not acceptable. Flow shall be limited to 0.09 L/s at a flowing pressure of 549 kPa. Accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1. Provide accessible protection on exposed water supplies and "P" trap and drain piping. 2.10.5.4 Mop Service Basin a. [Provide terrazzo mop sinks made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to produce 25 MPa minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Provide floor or wall outlet copper alloy body drain cast integral with terrazzo, with polished stainless steel strainers.] b. MS-1 (JSN P4700): 914 x 610 x 254 mm, [molded polyester/fiberglass product, built under heat and pressure, resulting in a one-piece, homogeneous product] [precast terrazzo] with service faucet, hose, hose racket, and mop hanger. 2.10.5.5 Plaster Traps a. PT-1 (JSN P7600): Large, 406 mm high by 356 mm wide by 356 mm long; shall have heavy gray cast-iron body, white porcelain-enamel inside and outside; clamps, cage of heavy galvanized material, and brass screens; with 50 mm long inlet and 50 mm high outlet fitted with hood seal. b. PT-2 (JSN P7650): Small, 254 mm high by 152 mm wide by 152 mm long; shall be cast aluminum, rectangular with solid top and hinged bottom having integral baffles and 6 mm drain plug; bolted bottom shall provide easy access for removal of screens for cleaning and recovery of items in sediment bucket. 2.10.5.6 Showers Provide single control pressure equalizing shower valves with body mounted from behind the wall with threaded connections. Provide tubing mounted from behind the wall between faucets and shower assembly. Provide separate globe valves or angle valves with union connections in each supply to faucet. The top of drain outlets shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. [ ] [ ] a. SH-1 (JSN P5040): Wall mounted detachable spray assembly, 600 mm wall bar, elevated vacuum breaker, supply elbow and flange and valve. All external trim, chrome plated metal. Plastic shower head with flow control to limit discharge to 0.110 L/s, 1500 mm length of rubber lined corrosion resistant steel, chrome plated metal flexible, or white vinyl reinforced hose and supply wall elbow. Design showerhead to fit in palm of hand. Provide corrosion resistant steel or chrome plated metal wall bar with an adjustable swivel hanger for showerhead. Fasten wall bar securely to wall for hand support. Combination thermostatic and pressure antiscald balancing valve, with chrome plated metal lever type operating handle adjustable for rough-in variations and chrome plated metal or corrosion resistant steel face plate. Valve body shall be any suitable copper alloy. Internal parts shall be copper, nickel alloy, corrosion resistant steel or thermoplastic material. Valve inlet and outlet shall be 13 mm IPS. Provide external screwdriver check stops, vacuum breaker and temperature limit stops. Set stops for a maximum temperature of 40 degrees C. All exposed fasteners shall be vandal resistant. Valve shall provide a minimum of 0.379 L/s at 310 kPa pressure drop. b. SH-2 (Similar to JSN P5040): Wall mounted, shower head connected to shower arm. All external trim shall be chrome plated metal. Chrome plated metal head, adjustable ball joint, self cleaning with automatic flow control device to limit 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 23 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 discharge to not more than 0.110 L/s. Body, internal parts of shower head and flow control fittings shall be copper alloy or corrosion resistant steel. Install showerhead 1800 mm above finished floor. Combination thermostatic and pressure anti-scald balancing valve, with chrome plated metal lever with adjustment for rough-in variations, type operating handle and chrome plated brass or corrosion resistant steel face plate. Valve body shall be any suitable copper alloy. Internal parts shall be copper, nickel alloy, corrosion resistant steel or thermoplastic material. Valve inlet and outlet shall be 13 mm IPS. Provide external screwdriver check stops, and temperature limit stops. Set stops for a maximum temperature of 40 degrees C. Install valve 1370 mm from bottom of shower receptor. All exposed fasteners shall be vandal resistant. Valve shall provide a minimum of 0.379 L/s at 310 kPa pressure drop. c. SH-3 (JSN P5350): Psychiatric patient, vandal-resistant with thermostatic valve in cabinet; shower head shall be designed for prison use. Fixture shall have smooth surfaces with no projection that can be used as a catch or hook; shall have flat back arranged for bolting directly to the wall; shall be tapped for 13 mm pipe connection to tempered water line; the head shall have a tamperproof removable face not less than 90 mm diameter; and the shower head shall be installed not less than 1829 mm above the floor and shall deliver the spray within a 900 mm circle. Flow shall be limited to 0.16 L/s at a flowing water pressure of 549 kPa. d. Shower enclosures Cabinet shall be reinforced acrylic conforming to IAPMO Z124.1.2. e. Shower Pan: Sheet copper shall be 4.9 kg per square meter weight. 2.10.5.7 Sinks Provide ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4, Type 302(18-8) or 304(18-8) stainless steel sinks with integral mounting rim for flush installation, with undersides fully sound deadened, with supply openings for use with top mounted faucet, and with 89 mm drain outlet. Sink depth less than or equal to 250 mm shall be 18 gage. Sink depth greater than 250 mm shall be 16 gage. Provide aerator with faucet. Water flow rate shall not exceed 90 mL per second when measured at a flowing water pressure of 414 kPa. Provide chrome plated 10 mm OD soft-copper tube supplied with set-screw escutcheons, and loose key stops. Provide chrome plated 40 mm semi-cast P-trap with cleanout with 1.1 x 38 mm chrome plated copper tube trap arm with set-screw escutcheon. Provide separate 38 mm P-trap and drain piping to vertical vent piping from each compartment. Coordinate hole quantities, locations, and centerings with faucet types indicated in fixture descriptions. Provide exact numbers of holes necessary. Use of faucet hole covers is not acceptable. Dimensions given are overall, and bowl in the following order: front to back, left to right, depth. ] Sinks located in casework designated as handicap accessible shall be same as specified except the basin depth shall not be greater than 165 mm and the drain outlet shall be located to the rear of the basin. a. S-1 (JSN CS010): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 460 x 380 x 165 mm, bowl 305 x 305 x 165 mm. Drain outlet shall be located to the rear of the basin. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout. b. S-2 (JSN CS080): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 508 x 560 x 190 mm, bowl 355 x 457 x 190 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 24 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 c. S-3 (JSN CS090): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 560 x 560 x 190 mm, bowl 406 x 480 x 190 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout. d. S-4 (JSN CS140): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 560 x 430 x 254 mm, bowl 400 x 355 x 254 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout. e. S-5 (JSN CS150): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 560 x 560 x 254 mm, bowl 406 x 408 x 254 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout. f. S-6 (JSN CS180): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 560 x 635 x 305 mm, bowl 400 x 560 x 305 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout. g. S-7 (JSN CS200): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 560 x 787 x 305 mm, bowl 400 x 711 x 305 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout. h. S-8 (JSN CS230): Double bowl, counter-mounted, 560 x 840 x 254 mm, each bowl 400 x 355 x 254 mm. Faucet shall be 200 mm spread, single handle, swing spout. i. S-9 (JSN CS250): Single bowl, counter-mounted, 380 x 380 x 150 mm, bowl 230 x 305 x 150 mm. Faucet shall be 100 mm centerset with two 100 mm wristblades and 125 mm diameter fixed gooseneck spout. j. S-10 (JSN P3520): Sink, plaster, 560 x 760 x 241 mm; vitreous china; faucet with 51 mm spray, 150 mm handles, screwdriver stops, grid drain 40 mm tailpieces, 51 mm O.D. drain connection to trap and wall; plaster-interceptor trap (PT-1), space shall be left above for removal of screens. Provide with floor-mounted heavy-duty type sink carrier with acid-resisting white coated exposed arms and hanger support plate. 2.10.5.8 Sink, Flushing Rim SF-1 (JSN P6350): 760 x 510 x 460 mm; vitreous china with an integral flushing rim to include faucet with fork brace 150 mm handles, 260 mm wall to spout outlet, and plain end spout with bucket hook; stainless steel spring type front and side rim guards and 100 mm outlet. Provide flushometer valve. Provide 254 mm high terrazzo base. 2.10.5.9 Sink, Surgeons Scrub a. SSS-1 (JSN P6980): Three station, wall-mounted, gooseneck spouts, knee push controls. Construction shall be of seamless welded 16 gauge, Type 304, stainless steel. Cabinet shall be sound-deadened with a fire-resistant material. Unit shall be wall mounted using a mounting carrier. Front panels shall be easily removed for access to the water control valves, waste connections, stops and strainers. Sink bottoms shall be sloping to minimize splashing and a 40 mm OD tailpiece with an 80 mm flat strainer drain. Provide each compartment (station) with a gooseneck assembly with a 40 mm sprayhead that can be removed for sterilization. Provide adjustable thermostatic mixing valve with anti-scald feature for each compartment and controlled from the top mounted control panel. Provide mechanical pilot type water control valves for each compartment actuated by one push of a kneeoperated front panel and turned off by a second push. Plastic splash shield shall be provided between compartments. Provide knee-controlled soap dispensers at each compartment. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 25 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 b. SSS-2 (Similar to JSN P6990): Three station, wall-mounted, gooseneck spouts, electronically timed with long (10 minute) and short (3, 4, 5 minute) cycles. Construction shall be of seamless welded 16 gauge, Type 304, stainless steel. Cabinet shall be sound-deadened with a fire-resistant material. Unit shall be wall mounted using a mounting carrier. Front panels shall be easily removed for access to the water control valves, waste connections, stops and strainers. Sink bottoms shall be sloping to minimize splashing and a 40 mm OD tailpiece with an 80 mm flat strainer drain. Provide each compartment (station) with a gooseneck assembly with a 40 mm sprayhead that can be removed for sterilization. Provide adjustable thermostatic mixing valve with anti-scald feature for each compartment and controlled from the top mounted control panel. Control shall be watertight and top mounted. Timing device shall be internal to reduce tampering. Plastic splash shield shall be provided between compartments. Provide foot-controlled soap dispensers at each compartment. Sink shall include 120 volt, 2 ampere power to an internal junction box.] 2.10.5.10 Urinals a. Provide ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, wall-mounted, wall outlet, urinals with integral trap, drain line connection, and extended side shields. The trap design shall comply with the IPC. Install urinal rim 610 mm above the floor at non-accessible locations. Urinals installed in compliance with ADA requirements shall be mounted with the rim 430 mm above the floor. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers. Urinals equipped with flush valves shall have a flushing volume of the urinal and flush valve combination not exceeding the fixture design rating. Mount flush valves not less than 279 mm above the fixture. (1) U-1 (Similar to JSN P8100): High efficiency washout for solenoid valve. The maximum water use allowed shall be 0.47 L per flush at a flowing water pressure of 549 kPa. Flushing cycle shall be activated by an electronic infrared sensor operated by proximity of individual. [Provide wiring box, 120/24 volt solenoid, and transformer.] [ ] (2) U-2: Same as U-1 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1. (3) U-3: (Similar to JSN P8100): High efficiency washout for solenoid valve. The maximum water use allowed shall be 1.9 L per flush at a flowing water pressure of 549 kPa. Flushing cycle shall be activated by an electronic infrared sensor operated by proximity of individual. [Provide wiring box, 120/24 volt solenoid, and transformer.] (4) U-4: Same as U-3 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1. (5) U-5 (Similar to JSN P8150): Waterless. Sealed replaceable cartridge or integral liquid seal trap shall use a biodegradable liquid to provide the seal and maintain a sanitary and odor- free environment. Mechanical seal trap not permitted. Slope the sanitary sewer branch line a minimum of 6 mm per 300 mm. Drain lines that connect to the urinal outlet shall not be made of copper. Manufacturer shall provide an operating manual and onsite training for the proper care and maintenance of the urinal. (6) U-6: Same as U-5 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1. 2.10.5.11 Water Closets 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 26 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 a. Provide ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, elongated bowl, wallhung water closets. The trap design shall comply with the IPC. Install top of toilet seat 356 to 381 mm, above the floor at non-accessible locations. Water closets installed in compliance with ADA requirements shall be mounted with rim of seat 432 to 483 mm above the floor. Water closets equipped with flush valves shall have a flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination not exceeding the fixture design rating. Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall not exceed 6 liters per flush. Seat shall conform to IAPMO Z124.5. Mount flush valves not less than 279 mm above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls. Provide ASME A112.6.1M heavy duty 227 kg capacity chair carriers. (1) WC-1 (Similar to JSN P9050): Siphon-jet for direct flushometer valve. Flushometer valve shall be dual-flush type. Flushing cycle shall be activated by an electronic infrared sensor operated by proximity of individual. [Provide wiring box 120/24 volt solenoid and transformer.] The maximum water use allowed shall be 6 liters per flush when sensor indicates user has been in proximity for approximately a minute or more and 4 liters per flush when user is in proximity for less than a minute. (2) WC-2 (Similar to JSN P9050): Same as WC-1 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1 Provide riser with grab bar offset. (3) WC-3 (Similar to JSN P9000): High efficiency (HET), siphon-jet for flushometer valve. High efficiency washout for solenoid valve. The maximum water use allowed shall be 4.8 L per flush at a flowing water pressure of 549 kPa. Flushing cycle shall be activated by an electronic infrared sensor operated by proximity of individual. Provide wiring box, 120/24 volt solenoid, and transformer (4) WC-4 (Similar to JSN P9050): Same as WC-3 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1. Provide riser with grab bar offset. (5) WC-5 (Similar to JSN P9050): Siphon jet with bowl provided with lugs or slots for holding bedpan. Bedpan cleaner (P1150) shall be for mounting on water closet having exposed flush valve; provided with wall support bracket; and brass valve body having a taper machined type leakproof, raise and lower spray arm; and using one-third of flush water volume to rinse pan, balance to flush waste. (6) WC-6 (Similar to JSN P9050): Same as WC-5 except accessible mounting height per ICC A117.1. Provide riser with grab bar offset. 2.10.5.12 Hose Bibbs and Hydrants a. HB-1: Hose bibb with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer, brass construction with 19 mm male inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 19 mm hose connection. Handle shall be securely attached to stem. 2.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Backflow preventers shall be approved and listed by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control & Hydraulic Research. Reduced-pressure principle assemblies, double check valve assemblies, atmospheric (nonpressure) type vacuum breakers, and pressure type vacuum breakers shall be tested, approved, and listed in accordance with FCCCHR Manual. Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to ASSE 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 27 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 1012. Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform to ASSE 1013. Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011. Pipe applied atmospheric type vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1001. Pressure vacuum breaker assembly shall conform to ASSE 1020. Air gaps in plumbing systems shall conform to ASME A112.1.2. 2.12 DRAINS AND BACKWATER VALVES Drains and backwater valves installed in connection with waterproofed floors or shower pans shall be equipped with bolted-type device to securely clamp flashing. 2.12.1 Area Drains a. Provide area drains with coated [galvanized] cast iron bodies for embedding in the floor construction. The grate/strainer shall be plain pattern perforated or slotted. Provide with threaded outlet connection. Between the outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Drain shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. Grate/strainer weight loading classification is based on ASME A112.6.3. Dimensions are nominal. b. AD-1: 300 mm overall [width], 200 mm diameter grate, 150 mm depth, with [removable] , light-duty cast iron grate with minimal free area of 2 times free area of outlet pipe size. Provide with backwater valve. 2.12.2 Floor and Shower Drains Provide floor and shower drains with coated [galvanized] cast iron bodies, double drainage pattern for embedding in the floor construction, and seepage pan having weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. The grate/strainer shall be adjustable to floor thickness. Provide an integral clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane when required. Provide with threaded outlet connection. Between the outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Floor and shower drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. Grate/strainer weight loading classification is based on ASME A112.6.3. Dimensions are nominal. Provide drain with trap primer connection, trap primer, and connection piping. a. FD-1: 300 mm diameter flashing collar, 100 mm deep body and 200 mm diameter removable, non- tilt heavy-duty cast iron grate with minimal free area of 1.5 times free area of outlet pipe size. b. FD-2: 250 mm diameter invertible flashing collar, 50 mm deep body, and minimum 150 mm [square] [ ] removable, secured, light-duty nickel bronze strainer with minimum free area of 1.5 times free area of outlet pipe size. [c. FD-3: 300 mm diameter flashing collar, 50 mm deep body, and 200 mm diameter non-tilt heavy- duty cast iron grate with minimal free area of 1.5 times free area of outlet pipe size. Provide with 400 mm diameter isolation floor drain body with flange, integral clamping collar, and standpipe.] 2.12.3 Floor Sinks Provide floor sinks with coated [galvanized] cast iron bodies, with acid-resisting interior, and double drainage pattern for embedding in the floor construction, and seepage pan having weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. Provide an integral clamping 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 28 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane when required. Provide with threaded outlet connection. Between the outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Floor sinks shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. Provide aluminum sediment bucket. Grate/strainer weight loading classification is based on ASME A112.6.3. Dimensions are nominal. Full grate free area shall be a minimum of 1.5 times the free area of the outlet pipe size. [Provide drain with trap primer connection, trap primer, and connection piping.] a. FS-1: 300 mm square top, 250 mm deep with 3/4 light-duty nickel bronze grate. b. FS-2: 300 mm diameter top, 250 mm deep with 3/4 light-duty nickel bronz grate. c. FS-3: 300 mm square top, 250 mm deep [with] [3/4] [light-duty acid-resisting] ] [grate]. d. FS-4: 300 mm diameter top, 250 mm deep [with] [3/4] [light-duty acid-resisting] [grate]. e. FS-5: 300 mm square top, 250 mm deep with stainless steel rim and [3/4] [light-duty stainless steel] [grate]. 2.12.4 Roof Drains and Expansion Joints Roof drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.4, with dome and integral flange, and shall have a device for making a watertight connection between roofing and flashing. Provide roof drains designated as secondary (emergency) overflow drains with 50 mm high dam. The whole assembly shall be [galvanized] heavy pattern cast iron including the dome strainer. Provide drain with a gravel stop. On roofs other than concrete construction, drains shall be complete with underdeck clamp, sump receiver, and an extension for the insulation thickness where applicable. Provide a clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or membrane when present. Strainer openings shall have a combined area equal to twice that of the drain outlet. The outlet shall be equipped to make a proper connection to threaded pipe of the same size as the rain leader. An expansion joint of proper size to receive the rain leader shall be provided. The expansion joint shall consist of a heavy cast-iron housing, brass or bronze sleeve, brass or bronze fastening bolts and nuts, and gaskets or packing. The sleeve shall have a nominal thickness of not less than 3.416 mm. Gaskets and packing shall be close-cell neoprene, O-ring packing shall be close- cell neoprene of 70 durometer. Packing shall be held in place by a packing gland secured with bolts. a. RD-1: 400 to 500 mm diameter flashing clamp, 280 to 350 mm diameter by 125 mm high dome strainer. b. RD-2: 400 to 500 mm diameter flashing clamp, 280 to 350 mm diameter by 125 mm high dome strainer. Provide minimum 50 mm high internal or external water dam. 2.12.5 Sight Drains a. Provide sight drains with coated [galvanized] cast iron bodies, double drainage pattern for embedding in the floor construction, and seepage pan having weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. The grate/strainer shall be adjustable to floor thickness. Provide an integral clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane when required. Provide with threaded outlet connection. Between the outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 29 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Floor and shower drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. Grate/strainer weight loading classification is based on ASME A112.6.3. Dimensions are nominal. [Provide drain with trap primer connection, trap primer, and connection piping.] b. SD-1: 250 mm diameter invertible flashing collar, 50 mm deep body, and minimum 150 mm [square] [diameter] removable, secured, light-duty nickel bronze strainer with minimum free area of 1.5 times free area of outlet pipe size with funnel extension. Provide minimum funnel dimensions as follows: (1) Height of funnel 95 mm. (2) Diameter of lower portion of funnel 50 mm. (3) Diameter of upper portion of funnel 100 mm. 2.12.6 Backwater Valves Backwater valves shall be either separate from the floor drain or a combination floor drain, P-trap, and backwater valve, as shown. Valves shall have cast-iron bodies with cleanouts large enough to permit removal of interior parts. Valves shall be of the flap type, hinged or pivoted, with revolving disks. Hinge pivots, disks, and seats shall be nonferrous metal. Disks shall be slightly open in a no-flow no- backwater condition. Cleanouts shall extend to finished floor and be fitted with threaded countersunk plugs. 2.13 CLEANOUTS a. Provide cleanouts with coated cast-iron bodies (unless otherwise noted) with extra-heavy, threaded, tapered, brass plug with solid hexagonal nut and American Standard pipe threads. Provide flashing collars and clamps for cleanout bodies being installed in floors with finishes installed over waterproofing. Cleanouts on piping completely accessible from within pipe chases do not require covers. Cleanouts in exposed piping in equipment rooms do not require covers. b. Provide interior floor-mounted cleanouts with a two-piece, threaded, adjustable housing. Provide top and cover based on floor finish: (1) Resilient tile and sheet finish: Round flange top with scoriated cover. (2) Ceramic tile finish: Square flange top with scoriated cover. (3) Poured finish: Round, wide-flange top with scoriated cover. (4) Carpet finish: Round top with standard top tapped for carpet-marker bolt. (5) Terrazzo finish: Round top with recessed-for-terrazzo cover. (6) Quarry tile finish: Square, heavy-duty top with heavy-duty scoriated cover. (7) Concrete finish (unfinished areas): Heavy, round frame; satin-bronze, scoriated tractor top, ANSI heavy duty load class. c. Provide isolation cleanouts with a lower and an upper flashing collar, flashing clamps with seepage openings, and adjustable ferrule with 100 mm diameter bronze top. Ferrule shall be tapped for cleanout plug. Seal ferrule to lower clamping collar with press-fit neoprene gasket. Seal cleanout plug with neoprene gasket.] 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 30 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.14 TRAPS 2.14.1 Fixture Traps Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be copper-alloy adjustable tube type with slip joint inlet and swivel. . [Provide traps with removable access panels for easy clean-out at sinks and lavatories.] Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than 0.813 mm thick within commercial tolerances, except on the outside of bends where the thickness may be reduced slightly in manufacture by usual commercial methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper alloy nuts for slip joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall be below the discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal type as required for the application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip. Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except that when required for the application, the outlets shall have sockets for solder-joint connections. The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 50 mm and not more than 100 mm. The interior diameter shall be not more than 3.2 mm over or under the nominal size, and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper alloy "P" trap assembly consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded trap wall nipple with cast brass wall flange shall be provided for lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit and may have a rubber-gasketed swivel joint. 2.14.2 Drain Traps Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be cast iron, one piece pattern, deep seal with depth of water seal of 100 mm. The interior diameter shall be not more than 3.2 mm over or under the nominal size, and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. The trap assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit. Traps for drains located in fan and plenum housings shall maintain seal against the static pressure. 2.15 TRAP PRIMER ASSEMBLIES Provide fully automatic trap primer assemblies, factory assembled and prepiped and including 19 mm NPT female inlet, bronze body 19 mm female NPT ball valve, 19 mm water hammer arrester, ASSE 1001 atmospheric vacuum breaker, and ASTM B88 19 mm Type L copper tubing distribution manifold. Distribution manifold shall be calibrated to provide equal water distribution to each trap. Provide minimum supply of 60 mL of water to each trap. Provide manifold with 16 mm x 15 mm compression fitting outlets. All solder joints shall be made with lead free solder. Provide electronic assembly tested and certified per UL 73 and including circuit breaker, 5 second dwell function, manual override, 24 hour geared timer, and solenoid valve. Provide single point water supply and power supply connections. . 2.16 INTERCEPTORS 2.16.1 Grease Interceptor Grease interceptor of the size indicated shall be of reinforced concrete, [or precast concrete construction] [ with removable three-section, 9.5 mm checker-plate cover, and shall be installed outside the building. Steel grease interceptor shall be installed in a concrete pit and shall be epoxy- coated to resist corrosion as recommended by the manufacturer. Interceptors shall be tested and rated in accordance with PDI G 101. Concrete shall have 21 MPa minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Provide flow control fitting. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 31 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.16.2 Oil Interceptor Cast iron or welded steel, coated inside and outside with white acid resistant epoxy, with internal air relief bypass, bronze cleanout plug, double wall trap seal, removable combination pressure equalizing and flow diffusing baffle and sediment bucket, horizontal baffle, adjustable oil draw-off and vent connections on either side, gas and watertight gasketed nonskid cover, and flow control fitting. 2.17 WATER HEATERS Provide water heaters with replaceable anodes. Each primary water heater shall have controls with an adjustable range that includes 32 to 71 degrees C. Each gas-fired water heater and booster water heater shall have controls with an adjustable range that includes 49 to 82 degrees C. Hot water systems utilizing recirculation systems shall be tied into building off-hour controls. The thermal efficiencies and standby heat losses shall conform to or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - SI, or 10 CFR 430 whichever is the most stringent for each type of water heater specified. The only exception is that storage water heaters and hot water storage tanks having more than 2000 liters storage capacity need not meet the standard loss requirement if the tank surface area is insulated to R-12.5 and if a standing light is not used. Plastic materials, polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone (PES), are forbidden to be used for vent piping of combustion gases. A factory precharged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply to each water heater. Expansion tanks shall be specifically designed for use on potable water systems and shall be rated for 93 degrees C water temperature and 1034 kPa working pressure. 2.17.1 Performance of Water Heating Equipment Standard rating condition terms are as follows: EF = Energy factor, overall efficiency. ET = Thermal efficiency with 21 degrees C delta T. EC = Combustion efficiency, 100 percent - flue loss when smoke = 0 (trace is permitted). SL = Standby loss in W/0.093 sq. m. based on 27 degrees C delta T, or in percent per hour based on nominal 38 degrees C delta T. HL = Heat loss of tank surface area. V = Storage volume in liters 2.17.1.1 Storage Water Heaters a. Electric: (1) Storage capacity of 454 liters or less, and input rating of 12 kW or less: minimum energy factor (EF) shall be 0.93-0.00132V per 10 CFR 430. (2) Storage capacity of more than 454 liters or input rating more than 12 kW: maximum SL shall be 0.2931(20+35 V), W per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 32 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 b. Gas: (1) Storage capacity of 379 liters or less, and input rating of 21980 W or less: minimum EF shall be 0.62-0.0019V per 10 CFR 430. (2) Storage capacity of more than 379 liters or input rating more than 21980 W: Et shall be 80 percent; maximum SL shall be 0.2931(Q/800+110 V), W per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3. c. Oil: (1) Storage capacity of 189 liters or less and input rating of 30773 W or less: minimum EF shall be 0.59-0.0019V per 10 CFR 430. (2) Storage capacity of more than 189 liters or input rating more than 30773 W: Et shall be 78 percent; maximum SL shall be 0.2931(Q/800+110 V), W per ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3. 2.17.1.2 Unfired Hot Water Storage All volumes and inputs: tank surface shall be thermally insulated to R12.5 per ASHRAE 90.1 - SI. 2.17.2 Automatic Storage Type Provide heaters complete with [ ] [control system, temperature gauge, and pressure gauge,] and ASME rated combination pressure and temperature relief valve. 2.17.2.1 Oil-Fired Type Provide oil-fired type water heaters conforming to UL 732. 2.17.2.2 Gas-Fired Type Provide gas-fired water heaters conforming to ANSI Z21.10.1/CSA 4.1 when input is 22 KW or less, or ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 for heaters with input greater than 22 KW. 2.17.2.3 Electric Type Provide electric type water heaters conforming to UL 174 with dual heating elements. Each element shall be 4.5 KW. The elements shall be wired for non-simultaneous operation so that only one element can operate at a time. 2.17.2.4 Indirect Heater Type Steam and high temperature hot water (HTHW) heaters with storage system shall be the assembled product of one manufacturer, and be ASME tested and "U" stamped to code requirements under ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1. The storage tank shall be as specified in paragraph HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS. The heat exchanger shall be double wall type that separates the potable water from the heat transfer medium with a space vented to the atmosphere in accordance with ICC IPC. a. HTHW Energy Source: The heater element shall have a working pressure of 2758 kPa with water at a temperature of 204 degrees C. The heating surface shall be based on 0.093 square meter of heating surface to heat 76 liters or more of water in 1 hour from 4 to 82 degrees C using hot water at a temperature of 178 degrees C. Carbon steel heads shall be used. Tubing shall conform to ASTM B111/B111M, Copper Alloy No. 706 (90-10 copper-nickel). Heating elements shall 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 33 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 withstand an internal hydrostatic pressure of 4137 kPa for not less than 15 seconds without leaking or any evidence of damage. b. Steam Energy Source: The heater element shall have a working pressure of 1034 kPa with steam at a temperature of 185 degrees C. The heating surface shall be based on 0.093 square meter of heating surface to heat 76 liters or more of water in 1 hour from 4 to 82 degrees C using steam at atmospheric pressure. [ ] [bronze] heads shall be used. Tubing shall be light-drawn copper tubing conforming to ASTM B75M. Heating elements shall withstand an internal hydrostatic pressure of 1551 kPa for not less than 15 seconds without leaking or any evidence of damage. 2.17.3 Instantaneous Water Heater Heater shall be crossflow design with service water in the coil and [hot water] in the shell. An integral internal controller shall be provided, anticipating a change in demand so that the final temperature can be maintained under all normal load conditions when used in conjunction with [ ] [pilot-operated temperature control system]. Normal load conditions shall be as specified by the manufacturer for the heater. Unit shall be manufactured in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1, and shall be certified for 1.03 MPa working pressure in the shell and 1.03 MPa working pressure in the coils. Shell shall be carbon steel with copper lining. Heads shall be ] [bronze] [ ]. Coils shall be ] [copper-nickel]. Shell shall have metal sheathed fiberglass insulation, combination pressure and temperature relief valve, and thermometer. Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. 2.17.4 Electric Instantaneous Water Heaters (Tankless) UL 499 and UL listed flow switch activated, tankless electric instantaneous water heater for wall mounting below sink or lavatory. 2.17.5 Relief Valves Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination pressure and temperature (P&T) relief valve. The pressure relief element of a P&T relief valve shall have adequate capacity to prevent excessive pressure buildup in the system when the system is operating at the maximum rate of heat input. The temperature element of a P&T relief valve shall have a relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input of the heaters when operating at their maximum capacity. Relief valves shall be rated according to ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate of heat input is less than 59 kW shall have 20 mm minimum inlets, and 20 mm outlets. Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate of heat input is greater than 59 kW shall have 25 mm minimum inlets, and 25 mm outlets. The discharge pipe from the relief valve shall be the size of the valve outlet. 2.18 HOT-WATER STORAGE TANKS Hot-water storage tanks shall be constructed by one manufacturer, ASME stamped for the working pressure, and shall have the National Board (ASME) registration. The tank shall be cement-lined or glass-lined steel type in accordance with AWWA D100. The heat loss shall conform to TABLE III as determined by the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - SI. Each tank shall be equipped with a thermometer, conforming to ASTM E1, Type I, Class 3, Range C, style and form as required for the installation, and with 175 mm scale. Thermometer shall have a separable socket suitable for a 19 mm tapped opening. Tanks shall be equipped with a pressure gauge 155 mm minimum diameter face. Insulation shall 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 34 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Storage tank capacity shall be as shown. 2.19 PUMPS 2.19.1 Sump Pumps Provide sump pumps of the automatic, electric motor-driven, submerged type, complete with necessary control equipment and with a split or solid cast-iron or steel cover plate. The pumps shall be direct-connected by an approved flexible coupling to a vertical electric motor having a continuous oiling device or packed bearings sealed against dirt and moisture. Motors shall be totally enclosed, fan- cooled of sizes as indicated and shall be equipped with an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure. Each pump shall be fitted with a high-grade thrust bearing mounted above the floor. Each shaft shall have an alignment bearing at each end, and the suction inlet shall be between 75 and 150 mm above the sump bottom. The suction side of each pump shall have a strainer of ample capacity. A float switch assembly, with the switch completely enclosed in a NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure, shall start and stop each motor at predetermined water levels. Duplex pumps shall be equipped with an automatic alternator to change the lead operation from one pump to the other, and for starting the second pump if the flow exceeds the capacity of the first pump. The discharge line from each pump shall be provided with a union or flange, a nonclog swing check valve, and a stop valve in an accessible location near the pump. 2.19.2 Hydraulic Elevator Sump Pumps Provide sump pump and control system capable of pumping water while containing oil. The system shall function automatically and shall provide for an alarm in the event of the presence of oil in the sump, high liquid in the sump, or high amps or a locked rotor condition. An alarm that sounds only in the event of a high liquid condition shall not be acceptable. Provide submersible type pump. Pump shall be approved to UL 778 standards and shall include thermal and overload protection. Provide motor capable of operating continuously or intermittently. Provide motor housing constructed of 304 stainless steel, and mechanical seals housed in a separate oil-filled compartment. Provide controls approved to UL 508 standards and housed in a NEMA 4X enclosure with stainless steel hinged hardware. The controls shall include dual relays with variable sensitivity settings, magnetic contactor with separate over-current relay, self-cleaning stainless steel sensor probe, high decibel warning horn with illuminated red light and alarm silencing switch, dual floats, clearly marked terminal board and remote monitoring contact. All cables between the pump and control unit shall be a minimum of 4.9 meters long and the cable and plug from the control unit shall be a minimum of 2.5 meters long. The control unit, pump, floats, and sensor probe shall be factory assembled as a complete, ready to use system and shall be tested and approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as ENTELA. 2.19.3 Circulating Pumps Provide electrically driven, single-stage, centrifugal domestic hot water circulating pumps with mechanical seals, suitable for the intended service. Revolutions per minute shall not exceed 3000. Pump and motor shall be integrally mounted on a cast-iron or steel subbaseThe shaft shall be one- piece, heat-treated, corrosion-resisting steel with impeller and smooth-surfaced housing of bronze. Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled and shall have sufficient wattage (horsepower) for the service required. Each pump motor shall be equipped with an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with "START-STOP" switch in cover. Pump motors smaller than 746 watts shall have 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 35 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 integral thermal overload protection in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Guards shall shield exposed moving parts. 2.19.4 Booster Pumps 2.19.4.1 Centrifugal Pumps Provide horizontal split-case centrifugal-type booster pumps. Revolutions per minute shall not exceed 1800. Pumps shall have a casing of close-grained iron or steel with smooth water passages. A gasket shall be provided between the upper and lower halves of the casing. Suction and discharge connections shall be flanged. Impellers shall be nonoverloading, bronze, balanced to eliminate vibration, and shall be keyed to corrosion-resisting steel shafts. The casings shall be fitted with bronze wearing or sealing rings. Bearings shall be cartridge type, enabling the entire rotating element to be removed without disturbing alignment or exposing the bearings to dirt, water, and other foreign matter. Pumps shall be provided with mechanical seals. Seal boxes shall be machined in the pump casing and at both sides of the pump, and shall be of sufficient depth to include a conventional bronze seal ring and rows of shaft packing. Bedplates shall be close-grain cast iron or steel with ribs and lugs, complete with foundation bolts, and shall have a drip lip with drain hole. Each pump shall be tested at the manufacturer's plant for operating characteristics at the rated capacity and under specified operating conditions. Test curves shall be furnished showing capacity in liters per second, head in meters, efficiency, brake wattage, and operation in parallel with similar pumps. Multiple pump installations shall have pump characteristics compatible for operation in parallel with similar pumps. The electric motor shall be sized for nonoverload when operating at any point along the characteristic curve of the pump. Guards shall shield exposed belts and moving parts. 2.19.4.2 Controls Provide each pump motor with enclosed across-the-line-type magnetic controller complete in a NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with three position, "HAND-OFFAUTOMATIC," selector switch in cover. Pumps shall be automatically started and stopped by float or pressure switches. The pumps shall start and stop at the levels and pressures indicated. A multiposition sequence selector switch shall be provided so that any two pumps may be operated simultaneously keeping a third pump as a standby. 2.19.5 Flexible Connectors Provide flexible connectors at the suction and discharge of each pump that is 746 watts or larger. Connectors shall be constructed of neoprene, rubber, or braided bronze, with Class 150 standard flanges. Flexible connectors shall be line size and suitable for the pressure and temperature of the intended service. 2.19.6 Sewage Pumps Provide duplex type with automatic controls to alternate the operation from one pump to the other pump and to start the second pump in the event the first pump cannot handle the incoming flow. Provide high water alarm and check valve. 2.20 WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM 2.20.1 Constant Speed Pumping System Provide constant speed pumping system with pressure-regulating valves employing one lead pump for low flows, and one or more lag pumps for higher flows. Pressure-regulating 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 36 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 valves shall be provided with nonslam check feature. Provide factory prepiped and prewired assembly mounted on a steel frame, complete with pumps, motors, automatic controls, and ASME code constructed hydro- pneumatic tank. Current sensing relays shall provide staging of the pumps. The pumps shall be protected from thermal buildup, when running at no-flow, by a common thermal relief valve. Pressure gauges shall be mounted on the suction and discharge headers. The control panel shall bear the UL listing label for industrial control panels and shall be in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. The control panel shall include the following: no-flow shutdown; 7-day time clock; audiovisual alarm; external resets; manual alternation; magnetic motor controllers; time delays; transformer; current relays; "HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC" switches for each pump; minimum run timers; low suction pressure cutout; and indicating lights for power on, individual motor overload, and low suction pressure. The control circuit shall be interlocked so that the failure of any controller shall energize the succeeding controller. Provide an ASME code constructed hydro-pneumatic tank stamped for 862 kPa water working pressure. The tank shall have a flexible diaphragm made of material conforming to FDA requirements for use with potable water and shall be factory precharged to meet required system pressure. 2.20.2 Variable Speed Pumping System Variable speed pumping system shall provide system pressure by varying speed and number of operating pumps. The factory prepiped and prewired assembly shall be mounted on a steel frame complete with pumps, variable speed drives, motors, automatic controls, and ASME code constructed hydro-pneumatic tank. The variable speed drives shall be the oil-filled type capable of power transmission throughout their complete speed range without vibration, noise, or shock loading. Each variable speed drive shall be runtested by the manufacturer for rated performance, and the manufacturer shall furnish written performance certification. System shall have suppressors to prevent noise transmission over electric feed lines. Required electrical control circuitry and system function sensors shall be supplied by the variable speed drive manufacturer. The primary power controls and magnetic motor controllers shall be installed in [the controls supplied by the drive manufacturer. The sensors shall be located in the system to control drive speed as a function of [constant pump discharge pressure] [ ]. Connection between the sensors and the variable speed drive controls shall be accomplished with [hydraulic sensing lines] [ ]. Controls shall be in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures. Provide an ASME code constructed hydro-pneumatic tank stamped for 862 kPa water working pressure. The tank shall have a flexible diaphragm made of material conforming to FDA requirements for use with potable water and shall be factory precharged to meet required system pressure. 2.21 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER Cold water meters 50 mm and smaller shall be positive displacement type conforming to AWWA C700. Cold water meters 65 mm and larger shall be turbine type conforming to AWWA C701. Meter register may be round or straight reading type, as provided by the local utility. Meter shall be provided with a pulse generator, remote readout register and all necessary wiring and accessories. 2.22 COPPER-SILVER IONIZATION SYSTEM a. Provide a complete copper-silver ionization system consisting of a controller, electrode cell(s), and flow meter. b. Provide a microprocessor-based controller that automatically controls the rate of copper and silver ion release. Controller must be able to generate a minimum concentration of 0.25 mg/L copper on a continuous basis. Controller shall perform under all types of water conditions without limiting its current due to lack of voltage. Controller shall 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 37 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 operate primarily in proportional copper and silver ion level control mode to prevent over or under ionization, and shall be capable of operating in secondary control modes, to include continuous, timer, and flow switch. Controller shall incorporate anti-scaling features. c. Provide on-board and remote alarm connection capabilities. Provide auxiliary contacts for remote monitoring capability. Controller shall conform to UL 508 for Industrial Control Panels. d. Provide electrode cell(s) incorporating reduced scaling features. Housing shall be CPVC, epoxy coated aluminum, or Schedule 40 stainless steel. Provide with electrical quick connections. Provide sacrificial electrodes of an extruded alloy of 99.99 percent pure copper and 99.99 percent pure medical grade silver, with minimum ratio of 30 percent silver to 70 percent copper. e. Provide a flow meter with a transmitter that displays the flow rate and total water usage. Provide clamp on transducers (non pipe invasive) with a flow response time of 0.3 seconds and flow sensitivity of 0.0003 m/s. g. Submit written NSF certification for Copper-Silver Ionization that the system (or components in contact with potable water) are certified. 2.23 ELECTRICAL WORK a. Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors, motor starters, and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide [high efficiency type,] single-phase, fractionalhorsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, corresponding to the applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. [In addition to the requirements of Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, provide polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings, including motors that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1.] Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. b. Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure. c. Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls provided. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers, including the required monitors and timed restart. d. Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 2.24 FACTORY PAINTING a. Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 38 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 3 mm on either side of the scratch mark. b. The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 50 degrees C, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 39 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXAMINATION After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the PGC site engineer of any discrepancy before performing any work. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS a. Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. [ ] Piping located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air ducts shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A. [Installation of plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance with PPFA Fire Man.] The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and accessories. Piping shall be concealed wherever possible. Under no circumstances reduce pipe size on Contract Documents without written consent of Contracting Officer. Extend water and drainage piping 1525 mm outside the building, unless otherwise indicated. A [OS&Y valve] [ ] and drain shall be installed on the water service line inside the building approximately 150 mm above the floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in place. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 500 mm below finish grade . If trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines, the location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means. Valves shall be installed with control no lower than the valve body. b. Provide piping to fixtures, outlets, and equipment requiring drainage, vent, and water utilities. The hot-water and cold-water piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture, except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures, faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to prevent movement. c. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of construction shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved. d. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating equipment. e. Branch sizes to individual fixtures shall be as scheduled. Consult manufacturer's data, Architectural drawings, and/or Plumbing drawings of rooms containing equipment and plumbing fixtures prior to roughing in piping. Stub piping through wall directly behind equipment item, or fixture being served. Connect equipment furnished by Owner or other divisions of the specification in accordance with this section. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 40 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 3.3.1 General Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 13 mm between finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change in direction shall be made with fittings. 3.3.2 Service Entrance Provide service entrance installation through [ ] [slab on grade with reaction anchor at buried elbow where water service pipe turns up below floor. Terminate end of exterior piping material with flange connection and tie flange back to buried elbow with tie rods of same diameter as flange bolts. Provide minimum of one tie rod for each two flange bolt holes. Provide permanent corrosion protection for below-grade tie rods.] 3.3.3 Pipe Drains Pipe drains shall consist of 19 mm hose bibb with renewable seat and [gate] [ ] valve ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 19 mm brass plugs or caps shall be provided. Disconnection of the supply piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain. 3.3.4 Valves Provide manual isolation valves at base of risers, on branch runouts from piping mains, on each branch serving a rest room, on each branch serving an equipment item, and on each branch to hose bibb or wall hydrant. [Wire isolation valves on emergency fixture supply open and tag "Do Not Close".] Balance hot water circulation system. 3.3.5 Expansion and Contraction of Piping Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water pipe. Each hot-water and hot-water circulation riser shall have expansion loops or other provisions such as offsets, changes in direction, or manufactured expansion fittings. Risers shall be securely anchored to force expansion to loops. Branch connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe over 15 m in length shall be anchored to the wall or the supporting construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch runouts from mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in the line so that piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without straining. If mechanical grooved pipe coupling systems are provided, the deviation from design requirements for expansion and contraction may be allowed pending approval of PGC site engineer . 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 41 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.3.6 Thrust Restraint Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more, either vertically or horizontally, in waterlines 100 mm in diameter or larger shall be provided with thrust blocks, to prevent movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1 cement, 2.5 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less than 14 MPa after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not subject to thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as shown. Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity thrust blocks. 3.3.7 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters Provide commercial-type water hammer arresters on hot- and cold-water supplies. Arresters shall be located as generally indicated, with precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201 Sizing and Placement Data. Water hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns (air chambers) shall not be permitted. 3.3.8 Water Meter Remote Readout Register a. Provide true absolute remote readout encoder register providing direct electronic transfer of meter reading information from water meter to automatic meter reading device. The remote register shall be mounted at the location indicated, or as directed by PGC engineer . b. Provide permanently sealed register to exclude dirt and/or moisture infiltration. Provide with a straight reading odometer-type display, and 360 degree test circle with center sweep hand and low flow (leak) detector. Provide tamperproof locking feature to resist tampering with the register. Provide factory potted moisture resistant wire assembly for pit applications. c. Provide registers with full 6-wheel encoding, and a 6-wheel odometer assembly for direct manual reading. The register shall transmit data using open architecture variable length protocol in ASCII format (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). Provide with capacity of remote installation up to 90 meters to an outside wall mounted touch pad. d. The register shall use an absolute encoder to directly read the actual position of the index odometer wheels, when interrogated by a reading device. The reading device shall provide all necessary power. Pulse outputs and/or memory shall not require programming. The register shall not require battery power to operate. When a reading device interrogates the register, the translator encoder shall communicate to the device in ASCII computer language the absolute meter reading, and an eight-digit identification number. Any error or nonread shall be immediately indicated by the meter reading equipment. 3.3.9 Backflow Prevention Devices Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable water. Backflow preventers shall be installed where indicated and in accordance with [ICC IPC] at all other locations 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 42 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 necessary to preclude a cross- connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any nonpotable substance. In addition backflow preventers shall be installed at all locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of the equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be located below the level of the nonpotable substance. Backflow preventers shall be located so that no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers shall be of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment, and preclude the backflow of any nonpotable substance into the potable water system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow preventers. Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing. Each device shall be a standard commercial unit. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention devices shall be installed horizontally and located in an accessible location not more than 1219 mm above finished floor. Pipe drain from reduced pressure principle backflow prevention devices to the exterior, or a floor drain of adequate capacity, or a mop sink. 3.3.10 Copper-Silver Ionization Systems a. System Bypass: Provide 3 valve bypass around system. b. Testing: Provide one year of laboratory testing from [ 3 ] distal sites for copper and silver ion levels to demonstrate appropriate levels for copper and silver. Copper level shall be 0.2 to 0.4 mg/L over baseline not to exceed Safe Drinking Water Act (40 CFR 143) level of 1.0 mg/L (1.3 mg/L is enforceable limit by EPA unless the applicable State has established a lower level). Silver level shall be 0.03 to 0.05 mg/L over baseline not to exceed Safe Drinking Water Act (40 CFR 143) of 0.1 mg/L (no maximum enforceable limit). Provide one test per quarter during the first year following Government acceptance of the facility. Provide factory test certifications attesting unit performance is meeting the requirements of this specification. 3.4 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS 3.4.1 General a. Provide wye fittings and eighth bends, or combination wye and eighth fittings at changes of direction and junctions. Sanitary tee fittings shall only be used in vertical pipe. Sanitary crosses are not permitted. Provide P-trap for each direct waste-pipe connection to equipment. Provide ice makers with an indirect drain consisting of either a floor sink or a dedicated, under-counter P-trap. Provide air gaps at indirect drains. b. Install horizontal soil, waste, and storm piping with the following minimum slopes; 75 mm and smaller pipes shall be 19 mm/m; 100 mm to 150 mm shall be 10 mm/m; 200 mm and larger pipes: 5 mm/m. Slopes indicated on plans override those indicated here. c. Provide vent stacks parallel to soil and waste stacks to receive branch vents from fixtures. Each vent stack shall originate from a soil or waste stack at its base. To permit proper flashing, offset through-the-roof piping away from walls on roof before passing through roof. Carry vent stacks 100 mm and larger full size through roof. Install vent lines so they will drain and not trap water. Where possible combine soil, waste or vent stacks before passing through roof to minimize roof openings. Where minimum vent-throughroof size is larger than vent size, provide increaser a minimum of 305 mm below roof line. d. Provide drip pans under drainage piping installed over critical areas to include but not limited to: operating rooms, recovery rooms, delivery rooms, nurseries, food preparation areas, food serving areas, food storage areas, central service areas, and electronic data processing areas. Provide drain piping from drip pans. Discharge drain piping to drain in exposed area. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 43 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 e. Installed piping shall not be insulated, concealed, or furred around until it has been tested to satisfaction of PGC engineer . If inspection or test indicates defects, replace such defective work or material and repeat inspection and tests. Repairs shall be made with new materials. Peening and chiseling of holes or screwed joints is not allowed. 3.4.2 Pipe Cleanouts Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 100 mm will not be required. A cleanout installed in connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the location shown. An extra-heavy cast-brass or cast- iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe shall be T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs[, except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe]. Plugs shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 100 mm. Cleanout tee branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or where less than 450 mm of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze, nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron. Provide cleanout extensions through floor above where cleanouts are required in piping above critical areas, or to an accessible location outside of critical area. 3.4.3 Sight Drains Sight drains shall be installed so that the indirect waste will terminate 50 mm above the flood rim of the funnel to provide an acceptable air gap. 3.4.4 Traps Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture shall be doubletrapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type.[ Traps installed on plastic pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D3311.] Traps for acid-resisting waste shall be of the same material as the pipe. 3.5 JOINTS Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended. 3.5.1 Threaded Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming to ASME B1.20.2M. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or with an approved 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 44 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied. 3.5.2 Mechanical Couplings Grooved mechanical joints shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, or narrow-land micrometer. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of the pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint. 3.5.3 Unions and Flanges Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 65 mm and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 80 mm and larger. 3.5.4 Grooved Mechanical Joints Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions. Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow- land micrometer, or other method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations. 3.5.5 Cast Iron Soil Pipe Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil, waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5.6 Copper Tube and Pipe a. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2/B2.2M and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of flux with a copperphosphorus, copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing filler metal. b. Soldered joints shall be made with flux. Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. c. Mechanically extracted joints shall be made in accordance with ICC IPC. d. Press connection. Copper press connections shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions for manufactured rated size. The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s) approved by the manufacturer of that joint. Minimum distance between fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 45 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.5.7 Glass Pipe Joints for corrosive waste glass pipe and fittings shall be made with corrosion-resisting steel compression-type couplings with acrylonitrile rubber gaskets lined with polytetrafluoroethylene. 3.5.8 Corrosive Waste Plastic Pipe Joints for polypropylene pipe and fittings shall be made by mechanical joint or electrical fusion coil method in accordance with ASTM D2657 and ASTM F1290. 3.5.9 Other Joint Methods Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made with dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with transition fitting for the specific purpose. 3.6 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR BURIED PIPE AND FITTINGS Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a protective coating. Additionally, ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pressure pipe shall have a cathodic protection system and joint bonding. The cathodic protection system, protective coating system, and joint bonding for cathodically protected pipe shall be in accordance with [Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)] [and] [Section 26 42 17.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (IMPRESSED CURRENT)] . Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with NACE SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the coating system applied prior to pipe tightness testing. Joints and fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape manufacturer. 3.7 PIPE SLEEVES AND FLASHING Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent location. 3.7.1 Sleeve Requirements Pipes passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors or roofs shall be provided with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves are not required for supply, drainage, waste and vent pipe passing through concrete slab on grade, except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor. A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 46 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where indicated or approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special circumstances. Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas shall extend a minimum of 100 mm above the finished floor. Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of 6 mm clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe, cast-iron pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or plastic. Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve, or between jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed with sealants conforming to ASTM C920 and with a primer, backstop material and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. The annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for interior walls which are not designated as fire rated. Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed 13 mm from wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint between the pipe and [concrete] [ ] wall as specified above. Sealant selected for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the requirements in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. 3.7.2 Flashing Requirements Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 4.9 kg per square meter copper flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 200 mm from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a minimum of 250 mm. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 200 mm from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 250 mm in diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs, flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing shield shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed. 3.7.3 Optional Counterflashing Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be accomplished by utilizing the following: a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 150 mm in diameter. b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 47 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.7.4 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and Waterproofing, a groove 6 to 13 mm wide by 6 to 10 mm deep shall be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. 3.7.5 Pipe Penetrations Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin. 3.7.6 Fire Seal Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase walls or floors above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. 3.8 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein. a. Type 1, provide with adjustable type steel support rods. b. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used. c. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe. d. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts. e. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be used for attachment to steel joists and shall be torqued per MSS SP-69. Provide both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer. Field-fabricated C- clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable. f. Type 20 attachments shall be used on steel angles and vertical web steel channels and shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer. g. Type 21, 28, 29, and 30 clamps shall be used for attachment to steel W or S beams. h. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames. i. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the medium is 15 degrees C or higher. Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe. j. Type 40 shields shall: (1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 100 mm. (2) Be used on insulated pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the medium is 15 degrees C or less. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 48 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 (3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density inserts shall have a density of 128 kg per cubic meter or greater. k. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a support shall be installed not over 300 mm from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 1.5 m apart at valves. Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 49 degrees C for PVC and 82 degrees C for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion and contraction. l. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 4.5 m nor more than 2 m from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction. m. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered. Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used: (1) On pipe 100 mm and larger when the temperature of the medium is 15 degrees C or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may freely rest on a steel plate. (2) On pipe less than 100 mm a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate. (3) On pipe 100 mm and larger carrying medium less than 15 degrees C a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate. n. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications. o. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least 100 mm or by an amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater. p. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction. q. Hangers used to support piping 50 mm and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent. 3.8.1 Seismic Requirements Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 49 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 EQUIPMENT and [Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT] [as shown]. Structural steel required for reinforcement to properly support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided. Material used for supports shall be as specified in[ Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL] and [ Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS]. 3.8.2 Structural Attachments Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only. 3.9 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lockshield, and loose-key pattern stops for supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing and faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting. Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be connected to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise specified under the item. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped/accessible fixtures shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish. Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown. 3.9.1 Fixture Connections Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting compound or gasket and fixture used. 3.9.2 Flushometer Valves Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the long finished top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with approved metal bracket. Flushometer valves for water closets shall be arranged to avoid interference with grab bars. In addition, for water closets intended for handicap use, the flush valve handle shall be installed on the wide side of the enclosure. Bumpers for water closet seats shall be installed on the wall. 3.9.3 Height of Fixture Rims above Floor Unless otherwise noted, mounting heights shall be as indicated. Installation of fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1. 3.9.4 Shower Bath Outfits The area around the water supply piping to the mixing valves and behind the escutcheon plate shall be made watertight by caulking or gasketing. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 50 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.9.5 Fixture Supports Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and other fixtures of similar size, design, and use, shall be of the chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary means of mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the desired height and in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu of chair carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab. 3.9.5.1 Support for Solid Masonry Construction Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in the masonry wall. 3.9.5.2 Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to the concrete wall using through bolts and a back-up plate. 3.9.5.3 Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be of the heavy duty design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to a square or rectangular steel tube upright. Wall plates, in lieu of floor-anchored chair carriers, shall be used only if adjoining steel partition studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to these studs. 3.9.5.4 Support for Wood Stud Construction Where floor is a concrete slab, a floor-anchored chair carrier shall be used. Where entire construction is wood, wood crosspieces shall be installed. Fixture hanger plates, supports, brackets, or mounting lugs shall be fastened with not less than No. 10 wood screws, 6 mm thick minimum steel hanger, or toggle bolts with nut. The wood crosspieces shall extend the full width of the fixture and shall be securely supported. 3.9.5.5 Wall-Mounted Water Closet Gaskets Where wall-mounted water closets are provided, reinforced wax, treated felt, or neoprene gaskets shall be provided. The type of gasket furnished shall be as recommended by the chair-carrier manufacturer. 3.9.6 Access Panels Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any item requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced, maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS. 3.9.7 Shower Pans Before installing shower pan, subfloor shall be free of projections such as nail heads or rough edges of aggregate. Drain shall be a bolt-down, clamping-ring type with weepholes, installed so the lip of the subdrain is flush with subfloor. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 51 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.9.7.1 General The floor of each individual shower, the shower-area portion of combination shower and drying room, and the entire shower and drying room where the two are not separated by curb or partition, shall be made watertight with a shower pan fabricated in place. The shower pan material shall be cut to size and shape of the area indicated, in one piece to the maximum extent practicable, allowing a minimum of 150 mm for turnup on walls or partitions, and shall be folded over the curb with an approximate return of 1/4 of curb height. The upstands shall be placed behind any wall or partition finish. Subflooring shall be smooth and clean, with nailheads driven flush with surface, and shall be sloped to drain. Shower pans shall be clamped to drains with the drain clamping ring. 3.9.7.2 Metal Shower Pans When a shower pan of required size cannot be furnished in one piece, metal pieces shall be joined with a flatlock seam and soldered or burned. The corners shall be folded, not cut, and the corner seam shall be soldered or burned. Pans, including upstands, shall be coated on all surfaces with one brush coat of asphalt. Asphalt shall be applied evenly at not less than 1 liter per square meter. A layer of felt covered with building paper shall be placed between shower pans and wood floors. The joining surfaces of metal pan and drain shall be given a brush coat of asphalt after the pan is connected to the drain. 3.9.8 Escutcheons Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated piping, exposed to view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin-finish, corrosion-resisting steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be one-piece held in place by setscrew. 3.10 WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS 3.10.1 Relief Valves No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or storage tank. The pressure and temperature relief valve shall be installed where the valve actuator comes in contact with the hottest water in the heater. Whenever possible, the relief valve shall be installed directly in a tapping in the tank or heater; otherwise, the pressure and temperature valve shall be installed in the hot-water outlet piping. A vacuum relief valve shall be provided on the cold water supply line to the hot-water storage tank or water heater and mounted above and within 150 mm above the top of the tank or water heater. 3.10.2 Connections to Water Heaters Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric unions or flanges. 3.10.3 Expansion Tank A pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply between the water heater inlet and the cold water supply shut-off valve. Adjust the expansion tank air pressure, as recommended by the tank manufacturer, to match incoming water pressure. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 52 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.11 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS 3.11.1 Identification Tags Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved anodized aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed on valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures. Tags shall be 35 mm minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be attached to valves with No.12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose. 3.11.2 Nameplates Provide 3.2 mm thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte finish with white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates. Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 6.4 mm high normal block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 25 by 63 mm. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system. Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule. 3.11.3 Labels Provide labels for sensor operators at flush valves and faucets. Include the following information on each label: a. Identification of the sensor and its operation with graphic description. b. Range of the sensor. c. Battery replacement schedule. 3.11.4 Pipe Color Code Marking Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. 3.11.5 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The color coding scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and operation of operable components which are not visible from the finished space and installed in the space directly above the suspended grid ceiling. The operable components shall include valves. The color coding scheme shall consist of a color code board and colored metal disks. Each colored metal disk shall be approximately 10 mm in diameter and secured to removable ceiling panels with fasteners. The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling panels so that the fasteners will be concealed from view. The fasteners shall be manually removable without tools and shall not separate from the ceiling panels when panels are dropped from ceiling height. Installation of colored metal disks shall follow completion of the finished surface on which the disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the approximate dimensions of 1 m width, 750 mm height, and 13 mm thickness. The board shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under glass or 1.6 mm transparent plastic cover. Unless otherwise directed, the color code symbols shall be approximately 19 mm in diameter and the related lettering in 13 mm high capital letters. The color code board shall be mounted and located in the mechanical or equipment room. The color code system shall be as indicated below: 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 53 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 Col [ or 3.12 System ] [ ] Item [ ] Location [ ] PAINTING 3.12.1 General Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in concealed spaces or exposed spaces, is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein or in PART 2 paragraph FACTORY PAINTING, and provided under each individual section. 3.12.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces a. Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 50 degrees C shall be cleaned to bare metal. b. Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray. (1) Temperatures Less Than 50 Degrees C: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0076 mm, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0255 mm; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0255 mm per coat. (2) Temperatures Between 50 and 205 Degrees C: Metal surfaces shall receive two coats of 205 degrees C heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 0.05 mm. (3) Temperatures Greater Than 205 Degrees C: Metal surfaces shall receive two coats of 315 degrees C heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm. 3.13 VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES Mechanical equipment, including pumps, shall be isolated from the building structure by approved vibration-absorbing features, unless otherwise shown. Each foundation shall include an adequate number of standard isolation units. Each unit shall consist of machine and floor or foundation fastening, together with intermediate isolation material, and shall be a standard product with printed load rating. Piping connected to mechanical equipment shall be provided with flexible connectors. Submit details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement, foundation plan, dimensions and specifications. 3.14 TRAINING a. Provide the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated User personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 54 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. b. Instruction shall be given during the time coordinated and agreed with PGC engineer and User. c. When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications. 3.15 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system, shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams. The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems. 3.16 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION Submit test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls. 3.16.1 Plumbing System The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance with [ICC IPC], except that the drainage and vent system final test shall include the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform a peppermint test in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen, submit a testing procedure to PGC engineer for approval. a. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke test. b. Building Sewers Tests. c. Water Supply Systems Tests. 3.16.1.1 Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies Backflow prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically designed for the testing of backflow prevention assemblies. Certification of proper operation shall be as accomplished in accordance with state regulations by an individual certified by the state to perform such tests. If no state requirement exists, have the manufacturer's representative test the device, to ensure the unit is properly installed and performing as intended. Submit written documentation of the tests performed and signed by the individual performing the tests. Gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in accordance with the University of Southern California's Foundation of Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the American Water Works Association Manual of Cross Connection (Manual M-14). Report form for each assembly shall include, as a minimum, the following: 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 55 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 Data on Device Data on Testing Firm Type of Assembly Name Manufacturer Address Model Number Certified Tester Serial Number Certified Tester No. Size Date of Test Location Test Pressure Readings Serial Number and Test Data of Gauges If the unit fails to meet specified requirements, the unit shall be repaired and retested. 3.16.1.2 Shower Pans After installation of the pan and finished floor, the drain shall be temporarily plugged below the weep holes. The floor area shall be flooded with water to a minimum depth of 25 mm for a period of 24 hours. Any drop in the water level during test, except for evaporation, will be reason for rejection, repair, and retest. 3.16.1.3 Submittal Requirements Submit the following: Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system including piping layouts and locations of connections; dimensions for roughing-in, foundation, and support points; schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection diagrams. Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for maintenance and operation. Where piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated, details shall include loadings and proposed support methods. Plan, elevation, view, and detail drawings, shall be drawn to scale. Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting. Manufacturer's recommendations for the installation of bell and spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe. Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. 3.16.2 Defective Work If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 56 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.16.3 System Flushing 3.16.3.1 During Flushing Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall be flushed with [ ] potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris in all portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous operation of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a flushing velocity of approximately 1.2 meters per second through all portions of the piping system. In the event that this is impossible due to size of system, PGC engineer shall specify the number of fixtures to be operated during flushing. Provide adequate personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor is responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no discoloration. [All faucets and drinking water fountains, to include any device considered as an end point device by NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9, shall be flushed a minimum of 1 L per 24 hour period, ten times over a 14 day period.] 3.16.3.2 After Flushing System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed, cleaned, and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh potable water. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of the building due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired. When the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions. Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 - SI for minimum efficiency requirements. The water supply to the building shall be tested separately to ensure that any lead contamination found during potable water system testing is due to work being performed inside the building.] 3.16.4 Operational Test Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, subject the plumbing system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system: a. Time, date, and duration of test. b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures. c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim. d. Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet. e. Pump suction and discharge pressures. f. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply. g. Operation of each floor and roof drain by flooding with water. h. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer. 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 57 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 i. Complete operation of each water pressure booster system, including pump start pressure and stop pressure. 3.16.5 Disinfection After operational tests are complete, disinfect the entire domestic hot- and cold-water distribution system. Flush the system as specified, before introducing chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. Except as herein specified, water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and AWWA C652. The chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per million (ppm). Use a properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the main with a hypochlorinator, or liquid chlorine injected into the main through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump. If after the 24 hour and 6 hour holding periods, the residual solution contains less than 25 ppm and 50 ppm chlorine respectively, flush the piping and tank with potable water, and repeat the above procedures until the required residual chlorine levels are satisfied. The system, including the tanks, shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million. During the flushing period each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times. Samples of water in disinfected containers shall be obtained from several locations selected by the Contracting Officer. The samples of water shall be tested for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with AWWA 10084. The testing method used shall be either the multiple-tube fermentation technique or the membrane-filter technique. Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained. 3.17 WASTE MANAGEMENT Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and place in designated areas for reuse. END OF SECTION 22 00 70 22 00 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 58 OF 58 PGC-230033-C-P8 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 3 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................. 4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 4 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 5 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................... 5 PART 2 PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 6 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS .......................................................................................... 6 2.1.1 Mineral Fiber Insulation .............................................................................................. 6 2.1.2 Cellular Elastomer Insulation .................................................................................... 6 2.1.3 Cellular Glass Insulation ........................................................................................... 6 2.1.4 Calcium Silicate Insulation ........................................................................................ 6 2.1.5 Fiberglass Insulation ................................................................................................. 7 2.1.6 Polyisocyanurate Pipe Insulation .............................................................................. 7 2.1.7 Pipe Barrel ................................................................................................................ 7 2.1.8 Pipe Fittings .............................................................................................................. 7 2.1.9 Flexible Blankets ....................................................................................................... 7 2.2 ADHESIVES ................................................................................................................ 7 2.2.1 Cloth Adhesives ........................................................................................................ 7 2.2.2 Vapor-Barrier Material Adhesives.............................................................................. 7 2.2.3 Cellular Elastomer Insulation Adhesive ..................................................................... 7 2.3 CAULKING .................................................................................................................. 7 2.4 CORNER ANGLES ...................................................................................................... 8 2.5 JACKETING................................................................................................................. 8 2.6.1 Aluminum Jacket....................................................................................................... 8 2.6.2 Asphalt-Saturated Felt .............................................................................................. 8 2.6.3 Stainless Steel Jacket ............................................................................................... 8 2.6.4 Glass Cloth Jacket .................................................................................................... 8 2.6.5 PVC Jacket ............................................................................................................... 8 2.6 COATINGS .................................................................................................................. 8 2.7.1 Outdoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing ............................................................................... 8 2.7.2 Indoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing .................................................................................. 9 2.7.3 Outdoor and Indoor Nonvapor-Barrier Finishing (NBF) ............................................. 9 2.7.4 Cellular-Elastomer Insulation Coating ....................................................................... 9 2.7.5 Coating Color ............................................................................................................ 9 2.7 TAPE ........................................................................................................................... 9 2.8 DUAL-TEMPERATURE (HOT- AND CHILLED-) WATER PIPING ............................... 9 2.9 HOT-WATER, STEAM, AND CONDENSATE-RETURN PIPING ................................. 9 2.10 COLD-WATER AND CONDENSATE-DRAIN PIPING .................................................. 9 2.11 REFRIGERANT SUCTION PIPING ........................................................................... 10 2.12 COOLING-TOWER CIRCULATING WATER PIPING ................................................ 10 2.13 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING, 2.4 MEGAPASCAL ....................................... 10 2.14 HOT WATER HEATING CONVERTER ..................................................................... 10 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 CHILLED-WATER AND DUAL-TEMPERATURE PUMPS ......................................... 10 LOW-PRESSURE STEAM AND CONDENSATE, WEATHER-EXPOSED ................. 10 STEAM & CONDENSATE, WEATHER-EXPOSED, 861 KILOPASCAL ..................... 10 STEAM & CONDENSATE, WEATHER-EXPOSED, 2.4 MEGAPASCAL ................... 10 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................................................................... 11 3.1 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION SYSTEMS ........................................................... 11 3.2 SYSTEM TYPES ....................................................................................................... 11 3.2.1 Type T-1, Mineral Fiber with Vapor-Barrier Jacket .................................................. 11 3.2.2 Type T-2, Mineral Fiber with Glass Cloth Jacket ..................................................... 12 3.2.3 Type T-3, Cellular Elastomer................................................................................... 12 3.2.4 Type T-4, Cellular Glass with Vapor-Barrier Jacket ................................................. 13 3.2.5 Type T-5, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Piping).................................... 13 3.2.6 Type T-6, Mineral Fiber with Aluminum Jacket ........................................................ 14 3.2.7 Type T-7, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Surfaces) ............................... 15 3.2.8 Type T-9, Cellular Elastomer................................................................................... 15 3.2.9 Type T-10, Mineral-Fiber Fill ................................................................................... 15 3.2.10 Type T-17, Calcium Silicate Weatherproof Jacket ................................................. 15 3.3 ACCEPTANCE .......................................................................................................... 15 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a. ASTM A167 (2011) Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip b. ASTM A240/A240M (2012) Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications c. ASTM B209M (2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum- Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric) d. ASTM C1136 (2010) Standard Specification for Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation e. ASTM C195 (2007) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement f. ASTM C449 (2007) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber HydraulicSetting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement g. ASTM C533 (2011) Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation h. ASTM C534/C534M (2011) Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form i. ASTM C547 (2012) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation j. ASTM C552 (2007) Standard Glass Thermal Insulation k. ASTM C553 (2011) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications l. ASTM C591 (2011) Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation m. ASTM C592 (2010) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type) n. ASTM C795 (2008) Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel o. ASTM C916 (1985; R 2007) Standard Specification for Adhesives for 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS Specification for Flexible, Low Cellular PAGE 3 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 Duct Thermal Insulation 2. p. ASTM C920 (2011) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants q. ASTM C921 (2010) Standard Practice for Determining Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation r. ASTM D226 (2009) Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing s. ASTM D579 (2010) Standard Specification for Greige Woven Glass Fabrics t. ASTM E84 (2012) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials u. ASTM E96/E96M (2010) Standard Water Vapor Transmission of Materials Test Methods for NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) a. NFPA 220 (2012) Standard on Types of Building Construction b. NFPA 255 (2006) Standard Method of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 3. the Test of SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE) a. SAE AMS 3779 (1990; Rev A; R 1994) Tape Adhesive, Pressure Sensitive Thermal Radiation Resistant, Aluminum Foil/Glass Cloth 4. U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA) a. FED-STD-595 (Rev Procurement 5. C; Notice 1) Colors Used in Government U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) a. LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEEDNC) 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS applies to work specified in this section. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Provide noncombustible thermal-insulation system materials, as defined by NFPA 220. Provide adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials, except cellular elastomers, with a flame-spread classification (FSC) of [25 or less] , and a smoke-developed classification (SDC) of [50 or less] . Determine these maximum values in accordance with [ASTM E84] [NFPA 255]. Provide coatings and sealants that are nonflammable in their wet state. 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 Provide adhesives, coatings, and sealants with published or certified temperature ratings suitable for the entire range of working temperatures normal for the surfaces to which they are to be applied. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: A. SD-02 Shop Drawings 1. Installation Drawings B. SD-03 Product Data 1. Adhesives 2. Coatings 3. Insulating Cement 4. Insulation Materials 5. Jacketing 6. Tape C. SD-07 Certificates 1. Recycled Materials D. SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions 1. Installation Manual 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Submit installation drawings for pipe insulation, conforming with the adhesive manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Submit installation manual clearly stating the manufacturer's instructions for insulation materials 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items: a. Adhesives b. Coatings c. Insulating Cement d. Insulation Materials e. Jacketing f. Tape Provide compatible materials which do not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied, in either the wet or dry state. Meet ASTM C795 requirements for materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces. Provide materials that are asbestos free and conform to the following. 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS Provide materials with maximum value conductance as tested at any point, not an average. Replace or augment insulation conductance found by test to exceed the specified maximum by an additional thickness to bring it to the required maximum conductance and a complete finishing system. 2.1.1 Mineral Fiber Insulation Provide mineral fiber insulation conforming to [ASTM C592] [ASTM C553] [ASTM C547] and be suitable for surface temperatures up to 188 degrees C, and not less than [64.1] kilograms per cubic meter density with thermal conductivity not greater than [0.037] watt per meter per degree Kelvin at 66 degrees C mean. Mineral fiber pipe wrap insulation having an insulating efficiency not less than that of the specified thickness of fibrous glass pipe insulation may be provided in lieu of fibrous glass pipe insulation for pipe sizes 250 mm and larger. 2.1.2 Cellular Elastomer Insulation Provide cellular elastomer insulation conforming to ASTM C534/C534M, ensuring the water vapor permeability does not exceed [0.44] nanogram per second per pascal mercury pressure difference for 25 millimeter thickness of cellular elastomer. 2.1.3 Cellular Glass Insulation Conform to ASTM C552, Type II, Grade 2, pipe covering for Cellular Glass. Substitutions for this material are not permitted. Ensure minimum thickness is not less than 38 mm. 2.1.4 Calcium Silicate Insulation Conform to ASTM C533. Ensure the apparent thermal conductivity does not exceed [0.078] watt per meter per degree K at 93 degrees C mean. 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.1.5 Fiberglass Insulation Conform to ASTM C547. Ensure the apparent thermal conductivity does not exceed [0.078] watt per meter per degree K at 93 degrees C mean. Fiber glass pipe insulation having an insulating efficiency not less than that of the specified thickness of mineral fiber pipe insulation may be provided in lieu of mineral fiber pipe insulation for aboveground piping. 2.1.6 Polyisocyanurate Pipe Insulation Conform to ASTM C591 for polyisocyanurate, minimum density of 27.20 kilograms per cubic meter (kg/cu m). 2.1.7 Pipe Barrel Pipe barrel insulation shall be Type II, Molded, Grade A or Type III, Precision V-Groove, Grade A for use at temperatures up to and including 650 degrees C. 2.1.8 Pipe Fittings Provide molding pipe fitting insulation covering for use at temperatures up to and including 650 degrees C. 2.1.9 Flexible Blankets Provide flexible blankets and felts for use at temperatures up to and including 177 degrees C minimum 16 kilogram per cubic meter density. Ensure thermal conductivity is no greater than [0.26] [0.038] watt per meter per degree K at 24 degrees C mean. 2.2 ADHESIVES 2.2.1 Cloth Adhesives Provide adhesives for adhering, sizing, and finishing lagging cloth, canvas, and openweave glass cloth with a pigmented polyvinyl acetate emulsion conforming to the requirements of ASTM C916, Type I. 2.2.2 Vapor-Barrier Material Adhesives Provide adhesives for attaching laps of vapor-barrier materials and presized glass cloth for attaching insulation to itself, to metal, and to various other substrates, of nonflammable solvent-base, synthetic- rubber type conforming to the requirements of ASTM C916, Type I, for attaching fibrous-glass insulation to metal surfaces. 2.2.3 Cellular Elastomer Insulation Adhesive For cellular elastomer insulation adhesive, provide a solvent cutback chloroprene elastomer conforming to ASTM C916, Type I, and be of a type approved by the manufacturer of the cellular elastomer for the intended use. 2.3 CAULKING Provide elastomeric joint sealant for caulking specified insulation materials in accordance with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A. 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4 CORNER ANGLES Provide nominal 0.41 millimeter aluminum 25 by 25 millimeter corner angle piping insulation with factory applied kraft backing. Ensure aluminum conforms to ASTM B209M, Alloy [3105] . 2.5 JACKETING 2.5.1 Aluminum Jacket Provide aluminum jackets conforming to ASTM B209M, Temper H14, minimum thickness of 0.41 mm, with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface. Provide smooth surface jackets for jacket outside diameters less than 200 mm. Provide corrugated surface jackets for jacket outside diameters 200 mm and larger. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 13 mm. Provide factory prefabricated aluminum covers for insulation on fittings, valves, and flanges.[ Provide aboveground jackets and bands with factory-applied baked-on semigloss brown color conforming to Federal Standard FED-STD-595, "Colors," color chip number 20062.] 2.5.2 Asphalt-Saturated Felt Provide asphalt-saturated felt conforming to ASTM D226, without perforations, minimum weight of 0.49 kilograms per square meter. 2.5.3 Stainless Steel Jacket Provide stainless steel jackets conforming to ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M; Type 304, minimum thickness of 0.25 mm, smooth surface with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 13 mm. Provide factory prefabricated stainless steel covers for insulation on fittings, valves, and flanges. 2.5.4 Glass Cloth Jacket Provide plain-weave glass cloth conforming to ASTM D579, Style 141, weighing not less than 0.25 kilogram/square meterbefore sizing. Factory apply cloth wherever possible. Provide leno weave glass reinforcing cloth, 26-end and 12-pick thread conservation, with a warp and fill tensile strength of 7.9 and 5.3 kilonewton per meter of width, respectively, and a weight of not less than 0.51 kilogram per square meter. 2.6.5 PVC Jacket Provide 0.25 millimeter thick, factory-premolded, [pipe-barrel sheeting vapor-barrier jacketing] polyvinylchloride that is self-extinguishing, high-impact strength, moderate chemical resistance with a permeability rating of 0.574 nanogram per pascal per second per square meter of mercury pressure difference, determined in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. Provide manufacturer's standard solvent- weld type vapor-barrier joint adhesive. Conform to ASTM C1136 for, Type I, low-vapor transmission, high-puncture resistance vapor barrier for use on insulation for piping, ducts, and equipment. 2.6 COATINGS 2.7.1 Outdoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing For coatings for outdoor vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces, such as fittings and elbows, provide a nonasphaltic, hydrocarbon polymer, solvent-base mastic containing a 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 blend of nonflammable solvents. Conform to the requirements of ASTM C1136 and ASTM C921 for coatings. 2.7.2 Indoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing Provide pigmented resin and solvent compound coatings for indoor vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces conforming to ASTM C1136, Type II. 2.7.3 Outdoor and Indoor Nonvapor-Barrier Finishing (NBF) Provide pigmented polymer-emulsion type NBF recommended by the insulation material manufacturer for outdoor and indoor NBF coating of insulation surfaces for the surface to be coated and applied to specified dry-film thickness. 2.7.4 Cellular-Elastomer Insulation Coating Provide a polyvinylchloride lacquer approved by the manufacturer of the cellular elastomer finish coating. 2.7.5 Coating Color Provide as specified by PGC engineer for the coating color. 2.7 TAPE Provide a knitted elastic cloth glass lagging specifically suitable for continuous spiral wrapping of insulated pipe bends and fittings and produce a smooth, tight, wrinkle-free surface. Conform to requirements of SAE AMS 3779, SAE AMS 3779, ASTM D579, and ASTM C921 for tape, weighing not less than [0.339] kilogram per square meter. 2.8 DUAL-TEMPERATURE (HOT- AND CHILLED-) WATER PIPING Provide [mineral fiber with vapor barrier jacket, Type T-1 insulation, with a thickness of not less than 25mm Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, and flanges. 2.9 HOT-WATER, STEAM, AND CONDENSATE-RETURN PIPING Provide mineral fiber insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2, with a thickness of not less than 25mm. Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous surfaces. 2.10 COLD-WATER AND CONDENSATE-DRAIN PIPING Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous surfaces. [Provide 10 millimeter mineral fiber insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2, with a thickness of not less than 25mm.] [ Provide cellular-elastomer insulation conforming to ASTM C534/C534M, with watervapor permeability not exceeding 5.74 nanograms per pascal per second per square meter pressure-differential for 25 millimeter thickness.] [ Provide flexible unicellular-elastomeric thermal insulation for cold water piping, Type T3, with a thickness of [15] millimeter per calculation. Use expanded, closed-cell pipe insulation only aboveground, not for underground piping. 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.11 REFRIGERANT SUCTION PIPING Provide cellular-elastomer insulation, Type T-3, with a nominal thickness of20 millimeter. Insulate surfaces, including valve, fittings, unions, and flanges. 2.12 COOLING-TOWER CIRCULATING WATER PIPING Provide cellular-elastomer insulation, Type T-3, with a thickness of not less than 25mm . Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous surfaces. Provide mineral fiber insulation with aluminum jacket, Type T-6, with a thickness of not less than 25mm. Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous surfaces. 2.13 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING, 2.4 MEGAPASCAL Provide calcium silicate insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-5, with a thickness of not less than 25mm which is based on an 27 degrees C ambient temperature in still air with an insulation "K" factor of 0.37 at 93 degrees C mean temperature: 2.14 HOT WATER HEATING CONVERTER Provide calcium silicate insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-7, with a thickness of 40 millimeter. 2.15 CHILLED-WATER AND DUAL-TEMPERATURE PUMPS Provide cellular elastomer insulation, Type T-9, with a thickness of 25 millimeter. Cover surfaces subject to condensation, and provide a vapor-barrier coating. 2.16 LOW-PRESSURE STEAM AND CONDENSATE, WEATHER-EXPOSED Provide calcium silicate insulation with weatherproof jacket, Type T-17, with a thickness of not less than 25mm . Insulate all systems. 2.17 STEAM & CONDENSATE, WEATHER-EXPOSED, 861 KILOPASCAL Provide calcium silicate insulation with weatherproof jacket, Type T-17, with a thickness not less than 25mm. Insulate all system surfaces. 2.18 STEAM & CONDENSATE, WEATHER-EXPOSED, 2.4 MEGAPASCAL Provide calcium silicate insulation with weatherproof jacket, Type T-17, with a thickness not less than 25mm . Insulate all system surfaces 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF INSULATION SYSTEMS Install smooth and continuous contours on exposed work. Smoothly and securely paste down cemented laps, flaps, bands, and tapes. Apply adhesives on a full-coverage basis. Apply insulation only to system or component surfaces that have been tested and approved. Install insulation lengths tightly butted against each other at joints. Where lengths are cut, provide smooth and square and without breakage of end surfaces. Where insulation terminates, neatly taper and effectively seal ends, or finish as specified. Direct longitudinal seams of exposed insulation away from normal view. Apply materials in conformance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Clean surfaces free of oil and grease before insulation adhesives or mastics are applied. Provide solvent cleaning required to bring metal surfaces to such condition. Submit installation drawings for pipe insulation, conforming with the adhesive manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Submit installation manual clearly stating the manufacturer's instructions for insulation materials. 3.2 SYSTEM TYPES 3.2.1 Type T-1, Mineral Fiber with Vapor-Barrier Jacket Cover piping with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-and field-attached vaporbarrier jacket. Maintain vapor seal. Securely cement jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with vapor-barrier adhesive. Provide jacket overlaps not less than [40] millimeter and jacketing bands for butt joints 75 millimeter wide. Cover exposed-to-view fittings and valve bodies with preformed mineral-fiber pipe-fitting insulation of the same thickness as the pipe-barrel insulation. Temporarily secure fitting insulation in place with light cord ties. Apply a 1.52 millimeter coating of white indoor vapor-barrier coating and, while still wet, wrap with glass lagging tape with 50 percent overlap, and smoothly blend into the adjacent jacketing. Apply additional coating as needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillet or contour coating, then allowed to fully cure before the finish coating is applied. On-the-job fabricated insulation for concealed fittings and special configurations, build up from mineral fiber and a special mastic consisting of a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts water. Where standard vapor-barrier jacketing cannot be used, make the surfaces vapor tight by using coating and glass lagging cloth or tape as previously specified. In lieu of materials and methods previously specified, fittings may be wrapped with a twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required thickness and covered with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Make seams vapor tight with a double bead of manufacturer's standard vapor-barrier adhesive applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Hold all jacket ends in place with AISI 300 series corrosionresistant steel straps, [0.381] millimeter thick by [15] millimeter wide. Set pipe insulation into an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of [150] millimeter at maximum [3500]-millimeter spacing and the ends of the insulation sealed to the jacketing with the same material to provide an effective vapor-barrier stop. Do not use staples in applying insulation. Install continuous vapor-barrier materials over all surfaces, including areas inside pipe sleeves, hangers, and other concealments. 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 Provide piping insulation at hangers consisting of 208 kilogram per cubic meter density, fibrous-glass inserts or expanded, rigid, closed-cell, polyvinylchloride. Seal junctions with vapor-barrier jacket where required, glass-cloth mesh tape, and vapor-barrier coating. Expose white-bleached kraft paper side of the jacketing to view. Finish exposed-to-view insulation with not less than a [0.152]-millimeter thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting. dry-film 3.2.2 Type T-2, Mineral Fiber with Glass Cloth Jacket Cover piping with a mineral-fiber, pipe insulation with factory-attached, presized, white, glass cloth. Securely cement jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with vaporbarrier adhesive with jacket overlap not less than 40 millimeter and jacketing bands for butt joints 75 millimeterwide. Cover exposed-to-view fittings with preformed mineral-fiber fitting insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation and temporarily secured in place with light cord ties. Install impregnated glass lagging tape with indoor vapor-barrier on 50 percent overlap basis and the blend tape smoothly into the adjacent jacketing. Apply additional coating as needed, and rubber gloved to a smooth contour. Tape ends of insulation to the pipe at valves DN50 and smaller. Build up on-the-job fabricated insulation for concealed fittings and special configurations from mineral fiber and a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive, diluted with 3 parts water. Finish surfaces with glass cloth or tape lagging. Cover all valves 65 millimeter and larger and all flanges with preformed insulation of the same thickness as the adjacent insulation. Finish exposed-to-view insulation with a minimum [0.152]-millimeter dry-film thickness of nonvapor- barrier coating suitable for painting. In lieu of materials and methods specified above, fittings may be wrapped with a twinesecured, mineral-wool blanket to the required thickness and covered with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Hold all jacket ends in place with AISI 300 series corrosionresistant steel straps, [0.381] millimeter thick by 15 millimeter [ ] wide. Provide fitting insulation, thermally equivalent to pipe-barrel insulation to preclude surface temperatures detrimental to polyvinylchloride. 3.2.3 Type T-3, Cellular Elastomer Cover piping-system surfaces with flexible cellular-elastomer sheet or preformed insulation. Maintain vapor seal. Cement insulation into continuous material with a solvent cutback chloroprene adhesive recommended by the manufacturer for the specific purpose. Apply adhesive to both of the surfaces on a 100-percent coverage basis to a minimum thickness of 0.254 millimeter wet or approximately 4 square meter per liter of undiluted adhesive. Seal insulation on cold water piping to the pipe for a minimum of 150 millimeter at maximum intervals of 3500 millimeter to form an effective vapor barrier. At piping supports, ensure insulation is continuous through using outside-carrying type clevis hangers with insulation shield. Install [Cork] load-bearing inserts between the pipe and insulation shields to prevent insulation compression. Insulate hot-water, cold-water, and condensate drain pipes to the extent shown with nominal [15] millimeter thick, fire retardant (FR), cellular elastomer, preformed pipe insulation. Seal joints with adhesive. At pipe hangers or supports where the insulation rests on the pipe hanger strap, cut the insulation with a brass cork borer and a [No. 3] superior grade cork inserted. Seal 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 12 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 seams with approved adhesive. Insulate sweat fitting with miter-cut pieces of cellular elastomer insulation of the same nominal pipe size and thickness as the insulation on the adjacent piping or tubing. Joint miter-cut pieces with approved adhesive. Slit and snap covers over the fitting, and seal joints with approved adhesive. Insulate screwed fittings with sleeve-type covers formed from miter-cut pieces of cellular elastomer thermal insulation having an inside diameter large enough to overlap adjacent pipe insulation. Butt pipe insulation against fittings, and overlap not less than [25] millimeter. Use adhesive to join cover pieces and cement the cover to the pipe insulation. Finish surfaces exposed to view or ultraviolet light with a [0.051] millimeter minimum dryfilm thickness application of a polyvinylchloride lacquer recommended by the manufacturer, and applied in not less than [two] coats. 3.2.4 Type T-4, Cellular Glass with Vapor-Barrier Jacket Cover piping with cellular glass insulation and factory- and field-attached vapor-barrier jacket. Maintain vapor seal. Securely cement jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with vapor-barrier adhesive, and overlap jacket not less than [40] millimeter. Provide jacket bands for butt joints of not less than [75] millimeter width. Provide insulation continuous through hangers. Bed insulation in an outdoor vapor-barrier coating applied to all piping surfaces. Insulate flanges, unions, valves, anchors, and fittings with factory premolded or prefabricated or field fabricated segments of insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. When segments of insulation are used, provide elbows with not less than three segments. For other fittings and valves, cut segments to the required curvature or nesting size. Secure segments of the insulation in place with twine or copper wire. After the insulation segments are firmly in place, apply a vapor-barrier coating over the insulation in two coats with glass tape imbedded between coats. First coat,tinted, the second, white to ensure application of two coats. Apply coating to a total dry-film thickness of 1.6 millimeter minimum. Overlap glass tape seams not less than [25] millimeter and the tape end not less than [100] millimeter. In lieu of materials and methods specified above, fittings may be wrapped with 10 millimeter thick, vapor-barrier, adhesive-coated strips of cellular elastomer insulation. Insulation shall be under tension, compressed to 25 percent of original thickness, and wrapped until overall thickness is equal to adjacent insulation. Secure cellular elastomer in place with twine and sealed with vapor-barrier coating applied to produce not less than [1.6] millimeterdry-film thickness. Cover fittings with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Make seams vapor-tight with a double bead of manufacturer's standard vapor-barrier adhesive applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Hold jacket ends in place with AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel straps, [0.381] millimeterthick by [15] millimeter wide. Insulate anchors secured directly to piping, to prevent condensation, for not less than [150] millimeter from the surface of the pipe insulation. Install white-bleached kraft paper side of jacket exposed to view. Finish exposed-to-view insulation with not less than a [0.152] millimeter dry-film thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting. 3.2.5 Type T-5, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Piping) Cover piping with a calcium-silicate pipe insulation with factory attached and presized, white, glass cloth. Field apply jackets when required. Securely cement jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with vapor-barrier adhesive. Jacket overlap shall be not 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 13 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 less than [40] millimeter. Jacketing bands for butt joints shall be100 millimeter wide. Fabricate fittings from segmented pipe barrel sections bedded in general purpose insulating cement and wired in place. Fill voids with general purpose insulating cement with not less than [6] millimeter thick, final coating. Impregnate glass lagging tape with lagging adhesive, wrapped with a 50-percent overlap, and be blended smoothly into adjacent jacketing. Apply additional adhesive as needed and rubber-gloved to a smooth contour. 3.2.6 Type T-6, Mineral Fiber with Aluminum Jacket Cover piping with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-attached or field-applied aluminum jacketing. Cover fittings and valve bodies with preformed mineral-fiber pipe-fitting insulation of the same thickness as the pipe-barrel insulation. Temporarily secure fitting insulation in place with light cord ties. Apply a 1.52 millimeter coating of vapor-barrier mastic, and while still tacky, wrapped with glass lagging tape. Apply additional mastic as needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillets or contours. Build up on-the-job fabricated insulation for special configurations from mineral fiber and a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts water. Only where standard aluminum jacketing cannot be used, make the surfaces vapor-tight by using mastic and glass lagging cloth or tape as specified above with an added finish coat of mastic. Set pipe insulation into outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of [150] millimeter at maximum [3500] millimeter spacing. Seal ends of the insulation to the jacketing with the same material to provide effective vapor barrier stops. Install continuous vapor barrier over all surfaces, including areas inside pipe sleeves, hangers, and other concealment. Apply piping insulation to both sides of pipe hangers. Insulate junctions with a special mastic mixture, glass cloth mesh tape, and mastic as previously specified. Securely cement jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with aluminum jacket sealant. Provide 150 millimeter wide minimum jacketing bands for butt joints. Lap joints, wherever possible, against the weather so that the water will run off the lower edge and in accordance with the pipe drainage pitch. Locate longitudinal laps on horizontal lines 45 degrees below the horizontal centerline and alternately staggered 25 millimeter. Lap jacketing material a minimum of [50] millimeter, circumferentially sealed with mastic, and strapped to provide a waterproof covering throughout. Locate straps 200 millimeter on center and pull up tight to hold jacketing securely in place. Use screws in addition to straps when necessary to obtain a waterproof covering. Place extra straps on each side of supporting devices and at openings. Where flanging access occurs, strap a chamfer sheet to the pipe at jacketing. Stiffen exposed longitudinal edges of aluminum jacketing by bending a 25 millimeter hem on one edge. Provide expansion joints for maximum and minimum dimensional fluctuations. To prevent corrosion, do not allow the aluminum jacketing to come in direct contact with other types of metal. At openings in jacket, apply an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for [50] millimeter in all directions. Apply jacketing while waterproofing is tacky. Use screws at each corner of each sheet, at fitting jackets, and as necessary for the service. Place number 7, 10 millimeter long, binding-head aluminum sheet metal screws through the mastic seal. 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 14 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.2.7 Type T-7, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Surfaces) Cover surfaces with insulation block bedded in an insulating cement and covered with glass cloth jacketing. Clean surfaces with a chlorinated solvent. Mix general purpose insulating cement with 3 parts water to 1 part nonvapor-barrier adhesive to bring to application consistency. Set block into bedding and joints and fill spaces with a bedding mix and wrap with galvanized chicken wire mesh well laced into an envelope. Trowel a 10 millimeter thick coating of bedding mix jacket on with nonvapor-barrier adhesive and glass cloth. Finish surfaces with not less than a [0.152] millimeter dry-film thickness of nonvapor- barrier coating. [At the Contractor's option, aluminum sheet jacketing may be used in lieu of glass cloth.] 3.2.8 Type T-9, Cellular Elastomer Clean pump surfaces with solvent. Apply not less than 25 millimeter of general purpose insulating cement, mixed with nonvapor-barrier adhesive diluted with 3 parts water, to achieve smooth surface and configuration contours. After all water has been removed, cover surfaces with 13 millimeter thick cellular elastomer insulation attached and joined into a continuous sheet with an outdoor vapor-barrier coating recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the specific purpose. Apply coating to both of the surfaces on a 100-percent coverage basis with a minimum thickness of [0.254] millimeter wet, or approximately 3.7 square meter per liter of undiluted coating. Blend coating into the adjacent flange insulation and the joint covered with a band of cellular elastomer equal to the flange assembly width. Use same coating to seal insulation to the casing at penetrations and terminations. Insulate pumps in a manner that permits insulation to be removed to repair or replace pumps. Finish insulation with a [0.051] millimeter minimum dry-film application of a polyvinylchloride lacquer coating recommended by the manufacturer and applied in not less than [two] coats. 3.2.9 Type T-10, Mineral-Fiber Fill Pack voids surrounding pipe with mineral-fiber fill. 3.2.10 Type T-17, Calcium Silicate Weatherproof Jacket Cover piping system surfaces with calcium silicate insulation. Cover fittings and valve bodies with preformed insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. 3.3 ACCEPTANCE Final acceptance is dependent upon providing construction (Record Drawings) details to PGC engineer . Include construction details, by building area, the insulation material type, amount, and installation method. An illustration or map of the duct routing locations may serve this purpose. With data, provide a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the system name, date, and the words "Record Drawings insulation/material." Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database." END OF SECTION 22 07 19 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 15 OF 15 PGC-230033-C-P8 22 12 00 WATER STORAGE TANK CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 REFERENCE ............................................................................................................... 2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK........................................................................................... 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................. 2 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................................. 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................. 3 2.1 GRP WATER STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES ................................................ 3 PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................ 5 22 12 00 WATER STORAGE TANK PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 5 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Furnish and install Water Storage Tanks as indicated on drawings. 1.3 1.4 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of specified items with characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Certification, test certificates under specified operating conditions shall be provided by manufacturer. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : instructions. Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation B. Shop Drawings : Submit manufacturer’s assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and methods of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of equipment, control and accessory, including “trouble – shooting” maintenance guide. Include this data, product data and shop drawings in maintenance manual. D. Submit warranty certificate against leakage. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components, replace with new. B. Store equipment and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. 22 12 00 WATER STORAGE TANK PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 5 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GRP WATER STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES A. The manufacture and design of the hot press moulded GRP sectional water storage tanks shall be to the quality standard requirements of BS EN ISO 9001 and shall comply with BS7491 : Part 3 : 1994 glassfibre reinforced plastic cisterns for cold water storage. B. Cisterns shall be manufactured by the hot press moulded method, glass reinforced plastic, moulded at temperatures up to 150 deg.C using isophthalic unsaturated polyester resins, UV stabilized and ‘E’ glassfibre reinforcement, color mid gray. Tank shall be suitable for storage of potable cold water at atmospheric pressure and 50 Cº. C. The cistern design shall incorporate 1.00 x 1.00m pillow panels to walls of non- insulated cisterns with provision for flat panels for connections and fittings. Purpose made cover panels 1.00m x 1.00m and 1.00m x 0.50m flat panels positioned to give free draining channels. Tank shall be equipped with air vents & level indicators. D. All Surfaces of the panels shall be smooth and crevice free to provide hygienic finish and be dimensionally accurate with sharply defined profiles. E. Float valve chambers to be provided with central hinged lockable ABS lid, 1.00m x1.00m in plan, with options of 180mm, 300mm, 500mm depth with provision for type A air gap in compliance with BS6281 : Part1 : 1992. F. Man access 600mm diameter hinged lockable ABS lid. G. All tanks deeper than 1.50m shall be fitted with internal GRP ladders, external standard duty stainless steel access ladders. H. Where partitions are required, they must be of full height using standard panels.Each compartment to be capable of supporting water on either side with one side empty. I. Panels to be rigidly supported by a combination of stainless steel tie rods internally and galvanized box sections externally. All metallic components in contact with water, bolts and nuts used in assembly of tanks shall be stainless steel 316/A4 grade. J. Steelworks designed to BS5950, internally stainless steel 316/A4 grade and externally hot dipped mild steel galvanized to BS729. The cisterns to incorporate external wall bracing on depths greater than 1.50m, and tie rods 2.00m. K. Extruded synthetic rubber sealing strip to be used covering full width of panel flange providing a watertight seal. It shall be non toxic, flexible and resistante to ultraviolet. L. Certificate of WRC (Water Research Centre) approval shall be provided. M. Composite Material Specifications: 22 12 00 WATER STORAGE TANK PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 5 PGC-230033-C-P8 Density Water Absorption Coefficient Thermal Expansion Flexural Strength Flexural Modules Tensile Strength Impact Strength Glass Content Light Transmission 1800 0.18 2.1x105 185 13 90 80 30 0.00 Kg/m3 Mg Deg.C Mpa Gpa Mpa Kj/M2 % ISO 1183 ISO 62 ASTM D696 ISO 178 ISO 178 Iso r 3268 ISO 179 Panel strength shall be fully compliant with BS 7491 : Part 3 : 1994 , giving a factor of safety of tanks in excess of 6 times working pressure against rupture. N. Insulation of Tank shell/panels Insulation shall be at least 40mm thick of expanded polystyrene (density grade 30) or polyurethane foam 25mm thick 40 Kg/M3 insulating material. Insulation shall not be exposed to external weather conditions, it shall be covered with an external permanently fixed cover made of the same materials used in the GRP panels which should be resistant to ultra violet radiation, weather protective and water tight. 22 12 00 WATER STORAGE TANK PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 5 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 All tanks shall be installed strictly in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 3.2 All cisterns to be installed on either flat continuous foundation or close center beams conforming to manufacturer’s specification of flatness and deflection. 3.3 Installation shall be carried out by approved installers. 3.4 Testing shall be carried out on completion of installation and to be completed within ten working days of assembly. 3.5 The testing of panels and sealant shall be as listed by Water Research Center, UK conforming to water fittings Bylaws Scheme. END OF SECTION 22 12 00 22 12 00 WATER STORAGE TANK PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 5 PGC-230033-C-P8 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS CONTENTS PART 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 3 REFERENCES........................................................................................................................ 3 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................................................... 3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ............................................................................... 4 EXTRA MATERIALS ............................................................................................................... 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................... 5 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................. 5 2.1.1 Name plates ................................................................................................................................................. 5 2.1.2 Equipment Guards ..................................................................................................................................... 5 2.1.3 Special Tools ............................................................................................................................................. 5 2.1.4 Electric Motors .......................................................................................................................................... 5 2.1.5 Motor Controls .......................................................................................................................................... 5 2.1.6 Bolts, Nuts, Anchors, and Washers............................................................................................................ 5 2.1.7 Pressure Gauges ......................................................................................................................................... 5 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL SOLIDS HANDLING PUMPS ......................................................................... 5 2.2.1 Pump Casing .............................................................................................................................................. 5 2.2.2 Impeller...................................................................................................................................................... 6 2.2.3 Wearing Rings ........................................................................................................................................... 6 2.2.4 Pump Shaft ................................................................................................................................................ 6 2.2.5 Pump Shaft Sleeve ..................................................................................................................................... 6 2.2.6 Stuffing Box .............................................................................................................................................. 6 2.2.7 Mechanical Seals ....................................................................................................................................... 6 2.2.8 Bearings ..................................................................................................................................................... 6 2.2.9 Lubrication ................................................................................................................................................ 7 2.2.10 Pump Support .......................................................................................................................................... 7 2.2.11 Coupling .................................................................................................................................................. 7 2.3 SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ................................................................................ 7 2.3.1 Pump Casing .............................................................................................................................................. 7 2.3.2 Mating Surfaces ......................................................................................................................................... 7 2.3.3 Coatings ..................................................................................................................................................... 7 2.3.4 Impeller...................................................................................................................................................... 7 2.3.5 Wearing Rings ........................................................................................................................................... 8 2.3.6 Pump Shaft ................................................................................................................................................ 8 2.3.7 Seals........................................................................................................................................................... 8 2.3.8 Bearings ..................................................................................................................................................... 8 2.3.9 Motor ......................................................................................................................................................... 8 2.3.10 Power Cable ............................................................................................................................................. 8 2.3.11 Installation Systems ................................................................................................................................. 8 2.4 SELF-PRIMING CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS ................................................................................ 9 2.4.1 Pump Casing .............................................................................................................................................. 9 2.4.2 Impeller...................................................................................................................................................... 9 2.4.3 Wear Plate.................................................................................................................................................. 9 2.4.4 Pump Shaft ................................................................................................................................................ 9 2.4.5 Pump Shaft Sleeve ..................................................................................................................................... 9 2.4.6 Seals......................................................................................................................................................... 10 2.4.7 Bearings ................................................................................................................................................... 10 2.4.8 Lubrication .............................................................................................................................................. 10 2.4.9 Suction Check Valve ............................................................................................................................... 10 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4.10 Pump Support ........................................................................................................................................ 10 2.4.11 Coupling ................................................................................................................................................ 10 2.5 PLUNGER PUMPS ............................................................................................................... 10 2.5.1 Pump Base ............................................................................................................................................... 10 2.5.2 Pump Body .............................................................................................................................................. 10 2.5.3 Valves ...................................................................................................................................................... 11 2.5.4 Connecting Rod, Eccentric, Eccentric Bearings, and Shaft ..................................................................... 11 2.5.5 Plungers ................................................................................................................................................... 11 2.5.6 Cylinders ................................................................................................................................................. 11 2.5.7 Stuffing Box ............................................................................................................................................ 11 2.5.8 Air Chambers ........................................................................................................................................... 11 2.5.9 Sampling Valve ....................................................................................................................................... 11 2.5.10 Pressure Relief Valve ............................................................................................................................ 11 2.5.11 Lubrication ............................................................................................................................................ 11 2.5.12 Chain Drive............................................................................................................................................ 12 2.5.13 V-Belt and Integral Gear Drive .............................................................................................................. 12 2.5.14 Gear Reducer Drive ............................................................................................................................... 12 2.6 ELECTRICAL WORK ............................................................................................................ 12 PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................. 13 3.1 EXAMINATION ..................................................................................................................... 13 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ............................................................................................... 13 3.2.1 Pump Installation ..................................................................................................................................... 13 3.2.2 Concrete ................................................................................................................................................... 13 3.2.3 Grouting Screw Pump Flow Channel ...................................................................................................... 13 3.3 PAINTING ............................................................................................................................. 13 3.4 FRAMED INSTRUCTIONS .................................................................................................... 13 3.5 FIELD TESTING AND ADJUSTING EQUIPMENT ................................................................. 14 3.5.1 Operational Test....................................................................................................................................... 14 3.5.2 Retesting .................................................................................................................................................. 14 3.5.3 Performance Test Reports ........................................................................................................................ 14 3.6 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES ........................................................................................... 14 3.7 FIELD TRAINING .................................................................................................................. 14 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA) a. ABMA 11 (1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings b. ABMA 9 (1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings 2. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) a. ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments 3. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a. ASTM A153/A153M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 4. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) a. NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements b. NEMA MG 1 (2011) Motors and Generators 5. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) a. 1.2 NFPA 70 (2011; Errata 2 2012) National Electrical Code SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: A. SD-02 Shop Drawings 1. Equipment Installation B. SD-03 Product Data 1. Materials and Equipment 2. Framed Instructions 3. Spare Parts C. SD-06 Test Reports 1. Field Testing and Adjusting Equipment D. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Operating and Maintenance Manuals[; ][; ] 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect from the weather, excessive humidity and excessive temperature variation; and dirt, dust, or other contaminants all equipment delivered and placed in storage. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of the related submittals. Include in the data a complete list of parts and supplies, with source of supply. 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site. Pump casings shall be constructed of cast iron of uniform quality and free from blow holes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects, cracks, and other injurious defects. Impellers shall be cast iron 2.1.1 Name plates Provide each major item of equipment with the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of equipment. 2.1.2 Equipment Guards Enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts so located that any person may come in close proximity thereto. 2.1.3 Special Tools Provide one set of special tools, calibration devices, and instruments required for operation, calibration, and maintenance of the equipment. 2.1.4 Electric Motors Motors shall conform to NEMA MG 1. 2.1.5 Motor Controls Controls shall conform to NEMA ICS 1. 2.1.6 Bolts, Nuts, Anchors, and Washers Bolts, nuts, anchors, and washers shall be steel; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. 2.1.7 Pressure Gauges Compound gauges shall be provided on the suction side of pumps and standard pressure gauges on the discharge side of pumps. Gauges shall comply with ASME B40.100. Gauge ranges shall be as appropriate for the particular installation. 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL SOLIDS HANDLING PUMPS Centrifugal solids handling pumps shall be of the nonclogging centrifugal type designed to pump solids up to 76 mm in diameter and which provide no internal interstices that catch solids and stringy materials to cause clogging. 2.2.1 Pump Casing Pump casing shall be constructed with tapped and plugged holes for venting and draining the pump. The casing shall be capable of withstanding pressures 50 percent greater than 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 the maximum operating pressure. The volute shall have smooth passages. The casing shall be such that the impeller can be removed without disturbing the suction and discharge connections. The casing shall have a handhole to permit inspection and cleaning of the pump interior. Lifting eyes shall be provided to facilitate handling of the pump. 2.2.2 Impeller The impeller shall be designed with smooth passages to prevent clogging and pass stringy or fibrous materials. The impeller shall be statically, dynamically, and hydraulically balanced within the operating range and to the first critical speed at 150 percent of the maximum operating speed. The impeller shall be securely keyed to the shaft with a locking arrangement whereby the impeller cannot be loosened by torque from either forward or reverse direction. 2.2.3 Wearing Rings Renewable wearing rings shall be provided on the impeller and casing and shall have wearing surfaces normal to the axis of rotation. Wearing rings shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall be secured to prevent rotation. Replaceable steel wear plates fastened to casing may be used in lieu of wearing rings on casing and impeller. 2.2.4 Pump Shaft Pump shaft shall be of stainless or high grade alloy steel and shall be of adequate size and strength to transmit the full driver horsepower with a liberal safety factor. 2.2.5 Pump Shaft Sleeve The pump shaft shall be protected from wear by a stainless steel, high grade alloy steel or bronze shaft sleeve. The joint between the shaft and sleeve shall be sealed to prevent leakage. 2.2.6 Stuffing Box The stuffing box shall be of the same material as the casing and shall be [grease] [or] [water] sealed. The stuffing box shall be designed for a minimum of five rings of packing and shall have easily removable split type glands. 2.2.7 Mechanical Seals Single or Double (depends on pressure applications) mechanical seals shall be provided to seal the pump shaft against leakage. Each seal interface shall be held in contact by its own spring system, supplemented by external liquid pressures. The seal system shall be constructed to be readily removable from the shaft. 2.2.8 Bearings Pump bearings shall be ball or roller type designed to handle all thrust loads in either direction. Pumps depending only on hydraulic balance end thrust will not be acceptable. Bearings shall have an ABEMA L-10 life of 50,000 hours minimum, as specified in ABMA 9 or ABMA 11. 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.2.9 Lubrication Bearings shall be [oil bath] [or] [grease] lubricated. [An oil reservoir shall be provided for oil bath lubricated bearings. The reservoir shall have an overflow opening to prevent overfilling and shall have a drain at the lowest point.] [A grease fitting shall be provided for grease-lubricated bearings. The grease fitting shall be of the type that prevents overlubrication and the building up of pressure injurious to the bearings. If the grease fitting is not easily accessible, grease tubing shall be provided to a convenient location.] 2.2.10 Pump Support Horizontal centrifugal pumps shall be provided with a common base plate for the pump and motor. Vertical shaft centrifugal pumps shall be provided with separate bases for the pump and motor. Vertical dry pit centrifugal pumps shall be supported by a heavy cast iron base with adequate legs to provide maximum rigidity and balance. 2.2.11 Coupling Couplings shall be of the heavy-duty flexible type, keyed or locked to the shaft. Disconnecting of the coupling shall be possible without removing the driver half or the pump half of the coupling from the shaft. Couplings for extended shaft vertical centrifugal pumps may be of the universal type. 2.3 SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS Submersible centrifugal pumps shall be centrifugal type pumps designed to pump solids up to 76 mm in diameter and shall be capable of withstanding submergence as required for the particular installation. 2.3.1 Pump Casing The casing shall be capable of withstanding operating pressures 50 percent greater than the maximum operating pressures. The volute shall have smooth passages which provide unobstructed flow through the pump. 2.3.2 Mating Surfaces Mating surfaces where watertight seal is required, including seal between discharge connection elbow and pump, shall be machined and fitted with nitrile rubber O-rings. Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact between mating surfaces, resulting in proper compression of the O-rings without the requirement of specific torque limits. 2.3.3 Coatings Exterior surfaces of the casing in contact with sewage shall be protected by a sewage resistant coal tar epoxy coating. All exposed nuts and bolts shall be stainless steel. 2.3.4 Impeller The impeller shall be of the [single] or [double] shrouded non-clogging design to minimize clogging of solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge, or other materials found in sewage. The impeller shall be statically, dynamically, and hydraulically balanced within the operating range and to the first critical speed at 150 percent of the maximum operating speed. The impeller shall be securely keyed to the shaft with a locking arrangement 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 whereby the impeller cannot be loosened by torque from either forward or reverse direction. 2.3.5 Wearing Rings Wearing rings, when required, shall be renewable type and shall be provided on the impeller and casing and shall have wearing surfaces normal to the axis of rotation. Material for wear rings shall be standard of pump manufacturer. Wearing rings shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall be adequately secured to prevent rotation. 2.3.6 Pump Shaft The pump shaft shall be of high grade alloy steel and shall be of adequate size and strength to transmit the full driver horsepower with a liberal safety factor. 2.3.7 Seals A tandem mechanical shaft seal system running in an oil bath shall be provided. Seals shall each interface held in contact by its own spring system. [Conventional mechanical seals which require a constant pressure differential to effect sealing will not be allowed.] 2.3.8 Bearings Pump bearings shall be ball or roller type designed to handle all thrust loads in either direction. Pumps depending only on hydraulic balance end thrust will not be acceptable. Bearings shall have an ABEMA L-10 life of 50,000 hours minimum, as specified in ABMA 9 or ABMA 11. 2.3.9 Motor The pump motor shall have Class F insulation, NEMA B design, in accordance with NEMA MG 1, and shall be watertight. The motor shall be either oil filled, air filled with a water jacket, or air filled with cooling fins which encircles the stator housing. 2.3.10 Power Cable The power cable shall comply with NFPA 70, Type SO, and shall be of standard construction for submersible pump applications. The power cable shall enter the pump through a heavy duty entry assembly provided with an internal grommet assembly to prevent leakage. The cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be separated by a stator lead sealing gland or terminal board which shall isolate the motor interior from foreign material gaining access through the pump top. [Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems are not acceptable.] 2.3.11 Installation Systems 2.3.11.1 Rail Mounted Systems Rail mounted installation systems shall consist of guide rails, a sliding bracket, and a discharge connection elbow. Guide rails shall be of the size and type standard with the manufacturer and shall not support any portion of the weight of the pump. The sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of the pump unit. The discharge connection elbow shall be permanently installed in the wet well along with the discharge piping. The pump shall be automatically connected to the discharge 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 connection elbow when lowered into place and shall be easily removed for inspection and service without entering the pump well. 2.3.11.2 Bolt Down Systems The pump mount system shall include a base designed to support the weight of the pump. The base shall be capable of withstanding all stresses imposed upon it by vibration, shock, and direct and eccentric loads. 2.3.11.3 Lifting Chain Lifting chain to raise and lower the pump through the limits indicated shall be provided. The chain shall be galvanized stainless steel and shall be capable of supporting the pump. 2.4 SELF-PRIMING CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS Self-priming centrifugal pumps shall be designed to pump solids up to 76 mm in diameter and shall be of the centrifugal type capable of repeated re-prime when handling trashladen sewage. 2.4.1 Pump Casing The casing shall be capable of withstanding pressures 50 percent greater than the maximum operating pressures. The pump casing shall contain no openings of smaller diameter than the specified sphere size. There shall be no internal devices that will inhibit maintenance or interfere with priming and performance. The pump shall be designed to retain sufficient liquid in the casing to ensure unattended operation. The casing shall be such that the impeller can be removed without disturbing the suction and discharge connections. Front access shall be provided to the pump interior to permit inspection and cleaning of the pump interior without removing suction or discharge piping. 2.4.2 Impeller The impeller shall be of the two-vane, semi-open, non-clog type with pump-out vanes cast integrally on its backside. The impeller shall be statically, dynamically, and hydraulically balanced within the operating range and to the first critical speed at 150 percent of the maximum operating speed. The impeller shall be securely keyed to the shaft with a locking arrangement whereby the impeller cannot be loosened by torque from either forward or reverse direction. 2.4.3 Wear Plate A replaceable wear plate constructed of [cast iron] or [alloy steel] shall be provided. 2.4.4 Pump Shaft Pump shaft shall be of high grade alloy steel or stainless steel and shall be of adequate size and strength to transmit the full driver wattage with a liberal safety factor. 2.4.5 Pump Shaft Sleeve The pump shaft shall be protected from wear by a high grade alloy steel or stainless steel shaft sleeve. A seal, if needed, shall be placed between the shaft and sleeve to prevent leakage. 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.4.6 Seals The pump shaft shall be sealed against leakage by [oil lubricated] or [water lubricated] mechanical seal. The stationary sealing member shall be [tungsten carbide] or [silicon carbide] and the rotating member shall be [tungsten carbide] or [silicon carbide]. The seal shall be such that the faces will not lose alignment during shock loads that cause deflection, vibration, and axial or radial movement of the pump shaft. 2.4.7 Bearings Pump bearings shall be ball or roller type designed to handle all thrust loads in either direction. 2.4.8 Lubrication Bearings shall be [oil bath] [or] [grease] lubricated. [An oil reservoir for oil bath lubricated bearings shall be provided. The reservoir shall have an overflow opening to prevent overfilling and shall have a drain at the lowest point.] [A grease fitting shall be provided to add grease for grease-lubricated bearings. The grease fitting shall be of the type that prevents overlubrication and the building up of pressure injurious to the bearings. If the grease fitting is not easily accessible, grease tubing to a convenient location shall be provided.] 2.4.9 Suction Check Valve The pump shall contain a suction check valve to maintain prime. The suction check valve shall be removable without disturbing the suction piping. [The pump shall be capable of prime or re-prime in the event of check valve failure.] 2.4.10 Pump Support A common fabricated steel base plate shall be provided for the pump and motor. 2.4.11 Coupling Power shall be transmitted from the motor to the pump by a [flexible coupling] . [Flexible couplings shall be of the heavy duty type, keyed or locked to the shaft. 2.5 PLUNGER PUMPS Plunger pumps shall be of the positive displacement type designed to pump sewage sludge with a minimum amount of clogging. 2.5.1 Pump Base A common, welded steel, drip-rim base with a 25 mm threaded drain connection shall be provided for the pump and motor. The base shall be of heavy section, fully braced to withstand all shock loads and to resist buckling when properly anchored. 2.5.2 Pump Body The pump body shall be cast iron. The pump shall be of heavy construction, designed to handle its maximum rated capacity and head on a continuous duty basis and shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times the maximum rated head of the pump. The pump body shall be of sectional construction so that the stuffing box, valve bodies, and air chamber adapters are independently removable. The construction shall permit removal of the 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 stuffing box, plunger, and connecting rod without disturbing the body, valve chambers, manifolds, piping, or shaft. 2.5.3 Valves Valve chambers shall be provided on both the inlet and discharge connections of each cylinder. The valve chambers shall be constructed with contoured interiors to minimize clogging. Valves shall be ball type, at least 130 mm in diameter, and constructed of neoprene. Valve seats shall be independent, fully machined plates which may be replaced without disturbing valve bodies or piping. 2.5.4 Connecting Rod, Eccentric, Eccentric Bearings, and Shaft The connecting rod and eccentric strap assembly shall be cast as one piece and shall have a quality hot-poured Babbitt lining. The eccentric, bearings, and shaft shall be designed to handle the stresses and deflections imposed upon it by the specified service. [The shaft shall be offset from the vertical centerline of the cylinder by an amount appropriate to the cylinder diameter to reduce lateral thrust on the cylinder during the discharge stroke.] 2.5.5 Plungers Plungers shall be ductile iron and shall have a plugged drain hole in the bottom which shall be accessible through the top of the plunger. 2.5.6 Cylinders Cylinders shall be machined to a smooth bore to provide a uniform surface throughout the full travel of the plunger. 2.5.7 Stuffing Box The cylinder and plunger shall have an effective packing arrangement to provide lubrication for the plunger and maintain the most effective vacuum. The stuffing box shall be of heavy cast construction and shall be provided with a circular drain lip and 25 mm threaded drain connection. 2.5.8 Air Chambers Air chambers shall be provided on [the discharge side] [both suction and discharge sides] of the pump. Air chambers shall have a minimum capacity of 0.0295 cubic meters and a minimum 76 mm diameter opening. 2.5.9 Sampling Valve A 50 mm sampling valve shall be provided on the discharge side of the pump. 2.5.10 Pressure Relief Valve A pressure relief valve shall be provided with a bypass line from the main suction and discharge manifolds. The valve shall be factory set to prevent motor overload or pump damage. 2.5.11 Lubrication Each pump eccentric shall be provided with a sight-feed oil lubricator. 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.5.12 Chain Drive Capacity variations shall be provided by stroke adjustment accomplished at each eccentric assembly, through the use of eccentric flanges coupled to the eccentric body. Overall drive reduction shall be obtained through the combination of a gearhead motor and silent roller chain. Motor gearhead shall be totally enclosed and running in oil. Chain capacity shall be at least 150 percent of the chain manufacturers published horsepower rating. The entire chain drive assembly shall be completely enclosed in a sealed lip, dust resistant steel guard. 2.5.13 V-Belt and Integral Gear Drive Capacity variations shall be provided by stroke adjustment accomplished at each eccentric assembly, through the use of eccentric flanges coupled to the eccentric body. Overall drive reduction shall be obtained through a combination of gears and V-belts. Gears shall run in an oil bath contained in an oil- tight cast iron or aluminum enclosure. The gear reduction design, gear materials and face widths, shafting, and bearings shall be selected for the specified operating conditions. The entire V-Belt drive assembly shall be covered by a rigid safety guard. 2.5.14 Gear Reducer Drive Capacity variations shall be provided by pump speed change only. The low speed shaft of the reducer shall be directly connected to the main shaft of the pump through a flexible coupling with shear pin protection. The shear pin overload protection shall be designed for release at 150 percent to 175 percent of normal torque. The high speed shaft of the reducer shall be connected to the motor by a heavy duty flexible coupling. The entire gear reduction unit shall be enclosed in a dustproof and oil-tight housing. 2.6 ELECTRICAL WORK Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors, motor starters, controls and wiring in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Electrical characteristics shall be as specified or indicated. Motor starters shall be provided complete with thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified, and any control wiring required for controls and devices but not shown, shall be provided. 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 12 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXAMINATION After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Submit Drawings containing complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Show on the Drawings proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and operation. 3.2.1 Pump Installation Install pumping equipment and appurtenances in the position indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Provide all appurtenances required for a complete and operating pumping system, including such items as piping, conduit, valves, wall sleeves, wall pipes, concrete foundations, anchors, grouting, pumps, drivers, power supply, seal water units, and controls. 3.2.2 Concrete Concrete shall conform to Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 3.2.3 Grouting Screw Pump Flow Channel After installation and adjustment of the screw pump, place grout in the flow channel to the configuration and dimensions indicated and as required to insure a proper fit between the screw pump and flow channel. A radius screed provided by the pump manufacturer shall be temporarily attached to provide proper clearance between the screw and the flow channel. The flow channel shall be grouted in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 PAINTING Pumps and motors shall be thoroughly cleaned, primed, and given two finish coats of paint at the factory in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Field painting required for ferrous surfaces not finished at the factory is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. 3.4 FRAMED INSTRUCTIONS Post, where directed, framed instructions containing wiring and control diagrams under glass or in laminated plastic. Condensed operating instructions, prepared in typed form, shall be framed as specified above and posted beside the diagrams. Post the framed instructions before acceptance testing of the system. Submit pump characteristic curves showing capacity in gpm, net positive suction head (NPSH), head, efficiency, and pumping horsepower from 0 gpm to 110 percent (100 percent for positive displacement pumps) of design capacity. Submit a complete list of equipment and material, including manufacturer's descriptive data and technical literature, performance charts and curves, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting. 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 13 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 3.5 FIELD TESTING AND ADJUSTING EQUIPMENT 3.5.1 Operational Test Prior to acceptance, an operational test of all pumps, drivers, and control systems shall be performed to determine if the installed equipment meets the purpose and intent of the specifications. Tests shall demonstrate that the equipment is not electrically, mechanically, structurally, or otherwise defective; is in safe and satisfactory operating condition; and conforms with the specified operating characteristics. Prior to applying electrical power to any motor driven equipment, the drive train shall be rotated by hand to demonstrate free operation of all mechanical parts. Tests shall include checks for excessive vibration, leaks in all piping and seals, correct operation of control systems and equipment, proper alignment, excessive noise levels, and power consumption. 3.5.2 Retesting If any deficiencies are revealed during any test, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be reconducted. 3.5.3 Performance Test Reports Submit performance test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. In each test report indicate the final position of controls. 3.6 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES Provide the services of a manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment specified. The representative shall supervise the installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment. 3.7 FIELD TRAINING Provide a field training course for designated operating and maintenance staff members. T. Field training shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance manuals. Submit 4 copies of operation and 4 copies of maintenance manuals for the equipment furnished. One complete set prior to performance testing and the remainder upon acceptance. Operation manuals shall detail the step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and shutdown. Include in the operation manuals the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features. List in the maintenance manuals routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. Maintenance manuals shall include piping and equipment layout and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed. Manuals shall be approved prior to the field training course END OF SECTION 22 13 29 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 14 OF 14 PGC-230033-C-P8 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS CONTENTS PART 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 2 REFERENCES......................................................................................................... 2 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................................................. 3 EXTRA MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 5 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 5 2.2 WET-PIT SUMP PUMPS .......................................................................................... 5 2.2.1 Pump Selection ......................................................................................................... 5 2.2.2 Pump Casing ............................................................................................................ 6 2.2.3 Impeller ..................................................................................................................... 6 2.2.4 Strainer ..................................................................................................................... 6 2.2.5 Pump Shaft ............................................................................................................... 6 2.2.6 Bearings and Lubrication .......................................................................................... 6 2.2.7 Flexible Couplings..................................................................................................... 7 2.2.8 Support Pipe ............................................................................................................. 7 2.2.9 Discharge Pipe.......................................................................................................... 7 2.2.10 Liquid-Level Control ................................................................................................ 7 2.2.11 High-Water Alarm ................................................................................................... 8 2.2.12 Sump Tank and Cover plate .................................................................................... 8 2.2.13 Painting ................................................................................................................... 8 2.3 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS........................................................................................... 8 2.3.1 Pump Selection ......................................................................................................... 8 2.3.2 Pump Housing .......................................................................................................... 9 2.3.3 Impeller ..................................................................................................................... 9 2.3.4 Pump Shaft ............................................................................................................... 9 2.3.5 Mechanical Seal........................................................................................................ 9 2.3.6 Bearings and Lubrication .......................................................................................... 9 2.3.7 Motor and Power Cord .............................................................................................. 9 2.3.8 Liquid-Level Control .................................................................................................. 9 2.3.9 High-Water Alarm ................................................................................................... 10 2.3.10 Sump Tank and Cover plate .................................................................................. 10 2.3.11 Painting ................................................................................................................. 10 PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................... 11 3.1 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................... 11 3.1.1 Alignment................................................................................................................ 11 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA) a) ABMA 11 Bearings (1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller b) ABMA 9 (1990; R 2008) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings 2. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a) ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless 3. INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO) a) ISO 1940-1 (2003; Cor 2005) Mechanical Vibration - Balance Quality Requirements for Rotors in a Constant (Rigid) State - Part 1: Specification and Verification of Balance b) ISO 2858 (1975) End Suction Centrifugal Pump (Rating 16 Bar) Designation Nominal Duty Point and Dimensions - International Restrictions c) ISO 5199 (2002) Technical Specifications for Centrifugal Pumps, Class II 4. 1.2 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) a) NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) b) NEMA MG 1 (2011) Motors and Generators SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: A. SD-02 Shop Drawings 1. Connection Diagrams 2. Control Diagrams 3. Fabrication Drawings 4. Installation Drawings B- SD-03 Product Data 1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data 2. Pump Performance Curve 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 3. Pump and Motor Specifications 4. Spare Parts[; G] 5. Special Tools 6. Wet-Pit Sump Pumps 7. Submersible Pumps 8. Accessories C- SD-06 Test Reports 1. Hydrostatic Leak 2. Static Heads 3. Pump Flow Capacity D- SD-07 Certificates 1. Manufacturer's Certification of Bearing Life E- SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions 3. Vibration Specifications 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Inspect the pump for damage or other distress when received at the project site. Store the pump and associated equipment indoors as recommended by the pump manufacturer, protected from construction or weather hazards at the project site. Provide adequate short-term storage for the pump and equipment in a covered, dry, and ventilated location prior to installation. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for extended storage. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Submit manufacturers complete spare parts list showing all parts, spare parts, and bulletins for pumps. Clearly show all details, parts, and adequately describe parts or have proper identification marks. Drawings incorporated in the parts lists may be reduced to one page size provided they are clear and legible, or they may be folded into the bound lists to page size. Photographs or catalog cuts of components may be included for identification. B. a. Furnish the following spare parts: 1. One complete set of bearings and seals. 2. Replacement wearing rings and O-rings. 3. One impeller. 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 C. a. Furnish one set of all special tools required to completely assemble, disassemble, or maintain the pumps. Special tools refers to oversized or specially dimensioned tools, special attachment or fixtures, or any similar items. 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS Provide pump and motor with vibration levels conforming to ISO 1940-1 unless otherwise noted. Ensure motor vibration levels conform to NEMA MG 1, Motors and Generators, Part 7 unless otherwise noted. 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Show details of connection of cables and pump motors on connection diagrams for sump pumps. Submit control diagrams for sump pumps showing motor starters, relays, or any other component necessary for safe operation. Indicate the sump pump size, type, and efficiency rating on fabrication drawings. Ensure installation drawings for sump pumps are in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended instructions. Submit manufacturer's catalog data for sump pumps showing performance data including; performance curves and indicating brake horsepower, head liter per second, and NPSH. Also include equipment foundation data and equipment data. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and vibration specifications. 2.2 WET-PIT SUMP PUMPS This specification covers automatic, electric-motor-driven, centrifugal, suspended, sump pumps and accessories. wet-pit, Construct and furnish pumps in accordance with the applicable requirements of ISO 2858 and ISO 5199 standards and those specified herein. Include with the duplex pump unit two individual, vertical, submerged, volute, centrifugal pumps mounted below a cover plate; vertical, flexible-connected, solid-shaft motors; motor and bearing- support housing attached to the cover plate; pump-support and shaft-housing pipes; discharge pipes; and automatic controls. Design the installation of the unit to permit removal of one pump assembly without disturbing the operation of the other. Ensure requirements for each material designation are in accordance with the applicable definition listed in the centrifugal pump section of ISO 2858and ISO 5199 standards. Materials for components and accessories not covered by these definitions are as specified herein. Avoid contact between dissimilar metals. Where such contact cannot be avoided, protect joints between dissimilar metals against galvanic corrosion by plating, organicinsulation coatings, gaskets, or other suitable means. 2.2.1 Pump Selection Where parallel pump operation is indicated, select pumps with characteristics specifically suited for the service without unstable operation. Select pumps for service within 4 percent of maximum efficiency for a given casing and impeller series. 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 Do not select pumps having impeller diameter larger than 90 percent of the published maximum diameter of the casing or less than 15 percent larger than the published minimum diameter of the casing. Provide a pump with duty conditions as [indicated on drawings.]. a. Provide a pump unit that delivers, at rated speed, not less than the specified litre per second against the specified or indicated discharge head while the liquid level is not more than 300 millimetre above the datum elevation of the pump. Use the level of the entrance eye of the impeller as the datum elevation. Include in the calculations of the discharge head, both the friction head of the system piping external to the pump unit and the static head measured from a point of reference on the sump to the highest point in the system. . b. Provide Pump Performance Curve, and Pump and Motor Specifications. 2.2.2 Pump Casing Provide cast iron pump casing. Provide a volute and discharge nozzle of the pump casing cast as one piece. Construct casing with a bolted plate to permit inspection and removal of the impeller. Design casing to withstand a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 1-1/2 times the design shutoff head of the pump. 2.2.3 Impeller Provide cast iron or bronze impeller, enclosed or semi-open, with vanes on back shroud. Refer to the paragraph entitled, "Bearings and Lubrication," of this section for additional requirements. Ensure impeller is dynamically balanced. 2.2.4 Strainer Protect intake with a large cast-iron, slotted intake strainer with an effective free area sufficient to prevent cavitations and degradation of efficiency. Provide a strainer with a free area of at least four times the cross-sectional area of the suction casing. 2.2.5 Pump Shaft Construct the pump shaft of ground and polished AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosionresistant steel with hardened wearing surfaces at intermediate shaft-bearing locations. Provide mechanical properties and diameter of the shaft to ensure that whip, deflection, or vibration is not of sufficient magnitude to impose greater than design loads on the specified shaft bearings under normal operating conditions. Provide the means for external adjustment of the clearance between the impeller and the inner surfaces of the volute section. 2.2.6 Bearings and Lubrication Furnish one or more antifriction ball- or roller-bearings in the motor and bearing support housing above the cover-plate surface, with full provision for the mechanical and hydraulic radial and thrust loads imposed. Provide sealed and grease lubricated bearings that have an L-10 rating of not less than 80,000 hours in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11. Ensure the shop drawings bear the manufacturer's certification of bearing life. Provide bearings manufactured from vacuum-processed or degassedalloy steels. Furnish bearings with grease and pressure-relief fittings at bottom or opposite side the bearing where discharge may be viewed. 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 Provide sleeve type intermediate shaft bearings. Ensure center distance between any two bearings on the shaft does not exceed 1370 millimeter for pumps operating between 1,700 and 1,800 revolutions per minute (rpm) or 1520 millimeter for pumps operating at 1,200 rpm or less. Provide sleeve bearing not less than 2 times the shaft diameter and locate near the lower extremity of the shaft. Provide heavy-duty bronze or bronze-backed, Babbitt-lined sleeve bearings. Provide appropriate nonferrous piping and fittings to permit individual lubrication of the intermediate and lower bearings from above the sump cover plate. Provide means to prevent the pumped fluid from entering the lower bearing. Include a suitable seal or a system wherein a partial vacuum developed below the bearing by the impeller rotation induces a positive flow of lubricant into the bearing. Fit bearings with a centralized grease lubricator that is manually or electrically operated from a single point. [Provide heavy-duty bronze- or corrosion-resistant steel-backed cutlass-rubber type sleeve bearings with nonferrous piping and fittings provided for individual flushing of intermediate and lower bearings. 2.2.7 Flexible Couplings Connect the pump shaft to the motor shaft through a flexible coupling. Provide a tire shape or a solid-mass serrated-edge disk shape flexible member made of chloroprene material and retained by fixed flanges. Provide flexible coupling that acts as a dielectric connector, that does not transmit vibration or end thrust, and that permits up to 4degree misalignment under normal duty. 2.2.8 Support Pipe Provide a wrought-iron or steel support pipe concentric with the pump shaft that connects the pump to the sump cover plate. Provide support-pipe flanges that are machined and doweled to ensure proper alignment of the pump and shaft whenever the pipe is disassembled and reassembled in the field. 2.2.9 Discharge Pipe Furnish a discharge pipe running from the pump-discharge outlet to the sump cover plate as an integral part of the pump unit. Arrange the discharge pipe to preclude discharge piping beyond the pump assembly from imposing loads which would tend to cause shaft misalignment. Provide black steel or wrought iron pipe, with wall thickness not less than that specified in ASTM A53/A53M for Schedule 40 pipe. Ensure discharge pipe is gastight through the sump cover plate. Ensure discharge end of the pipe terminates in a screwed or flanged connection in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. 2.2.10 Liquid-Level Control Provide a duplex pump unit with the electrical and mechanical devices required to provide automatic operation of the pump unit when the liquid in the sump rises to a predetermined level. Ensure controls automatically transfer the operating cycle from one pump to the other and operates both pumps simultaneously whenever the inflow to the sump exceeds the capacity of the operating pump. Provide a means of adjustment such as float-rod stops to allow for variations in the start and stop level-control points. Provide AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant steel float and rod. For all other parts of the fluid-level-sensing mechanism below the cover plate, provide bronze, brass, or material of equivalent resistance to the corrosive effects of sewage. 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.2.11 High-Water Alarm Provide a high-water alarm switch, complete with actuating mechanism, for operation on an electrical circuit other than the motor circuit. Design the switch to operate indicated alarm device(s) whenever a predetermined high-water level is reached in the sump because of failure of either pump or a fluid inflow that exceeds the combined capacity of both pumps. . 2.2.12 Sump Tank and Cover plate 2.2.12.1 Tank Protect concrete sump-tank interior surfaces by not less than a two-coat, twocomponent system of amine-cured coal-tar epoxy totaling 0.381 millimeter in thickness. 2.2.12.2 Cover plate Provide a cast iron or steel or corrosion-resistant [aluminum sump tank cover plate, of adequate strength to support the pumps without distortion, and of adequate strength to safely support maintenance personnel. Provide gasketed openings through the sump tank cover plate, unless otherwise specified. Provide a DN50 pips or larger threaded outlet to permit installation of a vent pipe. Ensure sump cover plate provides either manhole or hand hole access to the tank. 2.2.13 Painting Treat and paint equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice for the specified duty. 2.3 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Construct and furnish pumps and accessories in accordance with the requirements of ISO 2858 and ISO 5199 standards and those specified herein. Install operating switch such that in case of failure, the operating switch does not require breaking of pump-motor seals for repairs. Provide a duplex unit that includes float level controls for each submersible pump. Ensure requirements for each material designation are in accordance with the applicable definition listed in the centrifugal pump section of ISO 2858and ISO 5199 standards. Ensure materials for components and accessories not covered by these definitions are as specified herein. Avoid contact between dissimilar metals. Where such contact cannot be avoided, protect joints between dissimilar metals against galvanic corrosion by plating, organic insulation coatings, gaskets, or other suitable means. 2.3.1 Pump Selection Select pumps for the service within 4 percent of maximum efficiency for a given casing and impeller series. Provide pump with duty conditions as [indicated on drawings. 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 Ensure pump seals, lubricant, and electrical insulation are suitable for service in liquids up to 60 degrees C. 2.3.2 Pump Housing Provide a pump housing that encloses the pump motor and volute with its integrally cast feet. Provide a cast iron pump housing that is watertight under all heads normal to the service, and constructed to permit inspection and repair. Furnish with a volute designed to withstand a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 1-1/2 times the design shutoff head of the pump. 2.3.3 Impeller Provide a dynamically balanced and totally enclosed bronze impeller. Provide cast-iron nonclogging type impeller with design features to provide maximum freedom from clogging when liquid containing rags and stringy material is handled. Provide impeller that is dynamically balanced and that has a minimum size solid-sphere handling capability of 40 millimeter. 2.3.4 Pump Shaft Provide a pump shaft that is an extension of the motor shaft and constructed of ground and polished AISI Type 300 or 400 series corrosion-resistant steel with hard wearing surfaces (over 300 Brinell). 2.3.5 Mechanical Seal Provide manufacturer's standard mechanical type pump shaft seal specifically constructed for the service duty temperature and resistance to pumped fluid. 2.3.6 Bearings and Lubrication Furnish antifriction ball- or roller-bearings with full provision for the mechanical and hydraulic, radial, and thrust loads imposed. Seal and permanently grease or oil lubricate bearings. 2.3.7 Motor and Power Cord Provide permanently sealed, oil-filled, and watertight motor and that is manufacturer's standard construction for the service. Fit the motor space with watertight expansion provisions to accommodate temperature normal to specified duty. Ensure motor seals remain watertight under any pressure developed in the volute and under a sump-level static head of not less than 9100 millimeter of water. Ensure motor control for three phase motor provides overload protection. Provide waterproof, internally grounded, oil-resistant, Type SO chloroprene power cord, with three- prong plug of indicated length. 2.3.8 Liquid-Level Control Furnish a duplex pump unit with the electrical and mechanical devices required to provide automatic operation of the pump unit when the liquid in the sump rises to predetermined level. Provide controls that automatically transfer the operating cycle from one pump to the other, and that operate both pumps simultaneously whenever the inflow to the sump exceeds the capacity of the operating pump. Provide means of adjustment such as float-rod stops to allow for variations in the start and stop level22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 control points. Provide AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant steel float and rod. Provide bronze, brass, or material of equivalent resistance to the corrosive effects of the pumped fluid for all other wetted parts of the fluid-level sensing mechanism. Pedestal mount controls above the cover plate. Provide Type 1, general purpose enclosures conforming to NEMA 250. 2.3.9 High-Water Alarm Provide a high-water alarm switch complete with actuating mechanism for operation on an electrical circuit other than the motor circuit. Design the switch to operate indicated alarm device(s) whenever a predetermined high-water level is reached in the sump because of failure of either pump or a fluid inflow that exceeds the capacity of both pumps. Provide switch enclosure that is the same as the level-control switch. 2.3.10 Sump Tank and Cover plate 2.3.10.1 Tank Furnish a standard opening for connection to the drainage inflow pipe in the indicated size and location with respect to the top of the tank. Protect the concrete-sump interior surfaces by not less than a two-coat, twocomponent system of amine-cured coal-tar epoxy totaling 0.381 millimeter in thickness. 2.3.10.2 Cover plate Provide cast iron or aluminum sump cover plate, of adequate strength to support not less than 9500 pascal without distortion. Seal all openings through the sump cover to be gastight and watertight. Provide a standard outlet for a vent pipe. Ensure sump cover provides either manhole or handhole access to the interior. 2.3.11 Painting Treat and paint equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice for specified duty. 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.1.1 Alignment Before attempting alignment, demonstrate that the pump does not have any load/force imposed by the piping system. Minimum alignment values (below) are for pump and driver at normal running temperatures. Compensate values for thermal growth. Correct limited movement of the pump or driver to ensure alignment capability. Ensure hold down bolts are not undercut in order to perform adjustment. Ensure shims are commercially die-cut, without seams or folds, and are made of corrosion resistant stainless steel. Do not use more than four shims at any single point. Pump and driver may have an intermediate shaft, spacer, or spool piece (sometimes called a jackshaft) Based on the motor nominal operating speed. Align the pump and driver to the following minimum specifications: Speed(RPM) close- offset (mils) 600 900 1200 1800 3600 7200 6.0 5.0 4.0 3.0 1.5 1.0 close-coupled angle(mils/in.) 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0.4 0.3 spool piece angle (mils/in. @ coupling pt.) 3.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0.4 Provide final alignment settings as part of the final test data. END OF SECTION 22 14 29 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 22 32 00 WATER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................2 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 WORK INCLUDED ........................................................................................................................2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK............................................................................................................2 QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................2 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ..................................................................2 PART 2 PRODUCTS ...............................................................................................................................3 2.1 PACKAGED FILTRATION SYSTEM .............................................................................................3 PART 3 EXECUTION ..............................................................................................................................4 22 32 00 WATER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 4 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Compliance with sections of Division 1, General Requirements and documents referred to therein. B. Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish and install Plumbing Equipment as indicated on drawings. B. This section specifies the requirements for the water filtration equipment 1.3 1.4 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of specified items with characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Certification, test certificates under specified operating conditions shall be provided by manufacturer. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data instructions. : Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation B. Shop Drawings : Submit manufacturer’s assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and methods of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams : Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements for power supply wiring to equipment. Submit manufacturer’s ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory – installed and portions to be field- installed. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of equipment, control and accessory, including “trouble – shooting” maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop drawings and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components, replace with new. B. Store equipment and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. 22 32 00 WATER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 4 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGED FILTRATION SYSTEM A. A packaged multimedia filtration system complete shall be supplied for turbidity odor and smell removal. Capacity shall be as indicated on the drawings. B. Filter tank shall be suitable for a working pressure of 689 KPa (100psi) and tested at 50% in excess of the working pressure. Shell height to allow a minimum free board space of 100% of the mineral bed depth for adequate expansion during backwashing. Tank to be equipped with one manhole located in the top head of the tank. Filter tank to be supported by legs and be painted with a rust inhibiting primer. Filter tank shall be of glass reinforced polyester construction. C. The collector system shall consist of a plate welded to the complete diameter of the tank and centrally supported by a pier. Plate to accommodate collectors spaced to collect and dispense water laterally. Multiple layers of filter media to be furnished to properly distribute the backwash water and support the mineral bed. D. Following media shall consist of four layers as follows: 1. Top layer to consist of light weight chips to retain large flat pieces of debris. 2. Second layer to collect the bulk of course turbidity. 3. Third layer to remove finer particles not collected in the upper layers. 4. Bottom layer of high density material to polish the water removing particulates down to 10 micron size. E. All filter media shall be of good quality possessing characteristics of durability, long life, resistance to attrition and shall not impart taste, odour or colour to the water being treated. Filter media shall be selected for removing particulates down to 10 micron size. F. The filter unit shall be equipped with a fully automatic, self contained control valve using a cartridge design permitting instant service. Timer to automatically control the filter clean-up cycle on a pre set schedule. Duration of backwash and rinse cycles to be factory set to accommodate site conditions. Laboratory test report shall be submitted for Consultant approval. G. The filtration unit shall be suitable for removal of suspended matters, de- chlorination, organic removal, and odour removal. 22 32 00 WATER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 4 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION A. All material shall be installed strictly in compliance with the manufacturers instructions. B. Run all piping as direct as possible, avoiding unnecessary offsets. C. The interconnecting piping for plants shall be UPVC Class E and the valves shall be non-corrosive material. D. The installation shall be carried out and validated by the water treatment plant supplier. E. Ream all pipes to full inside diameter after cutting and thoroughly clean before erection. All material shall have proper identification marks that can be verified prior installation. F. After the plants are installed, thoroughly flush all piping before running pumps sterilizing the potable water system. G. The sterilization works maintenance manual. shall be included in the operation and END OF SECTION 22 32 00 22 32 00 WATER CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 4 PGC-230033-C-P8 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT CONTENTS PART 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3 REFERENCES......................................................................................................... 3 SOLAR ENERGY SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 5 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 5 WELDER QUALIFICATIONS .................................................................................... 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................................................. 6 WARRANTY ............................................................................................................ 6 SPARE PARTS ........................................................................................................ 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................ 7 2.1 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 7 2.1.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................7 2.1.2 NAMEPLATES ..........................................................................................................................7 2.1.3 IDENTICAL ITEMS ..................................................................................................................7 2.1.4 EQUIPMENT GUARDS [AND ACCESS] ................................................................................7 2.1.5 SPECIAL TOOLS ......................................................................................................................7 2.2 PIPING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................ 7 2.2.1 COPPER TUBING .....................................................................................................................7 2.2.2 SOLDER .....................................................................................................................................7 2.2.3 JOINTS AND FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING ..................................................................7 2.2.4 FLANGES ..................................................................................................................................8 2.2.5 DIELECTRIC WATERWAYS AND FLANGES ......................................................................8 2.2.6 BRONZE GATE, GLOBE, ANGLE, AND CHECK VALVES ................................................8 2.2.7 BALL VALVES .........................................................................................................................8 2.2.8 RELIEF VALVES, PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE .........................................................8 2.2.9 CALIBRATING BALANCING VALVES ................................................................................8 2.2.10 AIR VENTS..............................................................................................................................9 2.2.11 STRAINERS ............................................................................................................................9 2.2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES .............................................................................................................9 2.2.13 THERMOMETERS..................................................................................................................9 2.2.14 PIPE THREADS .......................................................................................................................9 2.2.15 PIPE SUPPORTS .....................................................................................................................9 2.2.16 ALUMINUM SHEETS ............................................................................................................9 2.2.17 COPPER SHEETS COPPER ALLOY 110 ..............................................................................9 2.3 ELECTRICAL WORK ............................................................................................... 9 2.4 COLLECTOR SUBSYSTEM ........................................................................................ 9 2.4.1 SOLAR COLLECTOR CONSTRUCTION ...............................................................................9 2.4.2 ABSORBER PLATE AND FLOW TUBES.............................................................................10 2.4.3 COVER GLAZING ..................................................................................................................10 2.4.4 INSULATION ..........................................................................................................................10 2.4.5 CASING ...................................................................................................................................10 2.4.6 MOUNTING AND ASSEMBLY HARDWARE .....................................................................10 2.4.7 SOLAR COLLECTOR PERFORMANCE ..............................................................................10 2.5 SOLAR COLLECTOR ARRAY ................................................................................ 11 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.5.1 NET ABSORBER AREA AND ARRAY LAYOUT ...............................................................11 2.5.2 PIPING .....................................................................................................................................11 2.5.3 SUPPORTS FOR SOLAR COLLECTOR ARRAY .................................................................11 2.6 STORAGE TANK ................................................................................................... 11 2.6.1 ELECTRIC BACKUP BOOSTER ...........................................................................................12 2.7 TRANSPORT SUBSYSTEM ................................................................................... 12 2.7.1 HEAT EXCHANGER ..............................................................................................................12 2.7.2 PUMPS .....................................................................................................................................12 2.7.3 PIPE INSULATION .................................................................................................................13 2.7.4 EXPANSION TANK ................................................................................................................13 2.7.5 HEAT TRANSFER FLUID......................................................................................................13 2.8 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SUBSYSTEM .............................................. 13 2.8.1 DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT .............................................13 2.8.2 THERMISTOR TEMPERATURE SENSORS.........................................................................13 2.8.3 SENSOR AND CONTROL WIRING ......................................................................................14 2.8.4 FLOWMETERS .......................................................................................................................14 2.8.5 SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS .................................................................................................14 2.9 PAINTING AND FINISHING ...................................................................................... 14 PART 3 EXECUTION ..................................................................................................... 15 3.1 EXAMINATION ......................................................................................................... 15 3.2 INSTALLATION......................................................................................................... 15 3.2.1 COLLECTOR SUBSYSTEM ....................................................................................................15 3.2.2 STORAGE SUBSYSTEM.........................................................................................................15 3.2.3 TRANSPORT SUBSYSTEM .....................................................................................................15 3.2.4 CONTROL SUBSYSTEM ........................................................................................................17 3.3 INSPECTION AND TESTING .................................................................................... 17 3.3.1 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................................17 3.3.2 TESTING PRIOR TO CONCEALMENT .................................................................................17 3.3.3 POSTING FRAMED INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................18 3.3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND FINAL INSPECTION ..........................................................18 3.4 FIELD TRAINING ...................................................................................................... 19 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) a) ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R 2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems 2. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE) a) ASHRAE 93 (2010) Methods of Testing to Determine the Thermal Performance of Solar Collectors 3. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) a) AWWA C606 (2011) Grooved and Shouldered Joints 4. AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) a) AWS B2.1/B2.1M (2009) Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification b) AWS D1.2/D1.2M (2008) Structural Welding Code - Aluminum 5. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) a) ASME B1.20.2M (Metric) (2006; R 2011) Pipe Threads, 60 Deg. General Purpose b) ASME B16.15 (2011) Cast Bronze Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250 c) ASME B16.18 (2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings d) ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2010) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings e) ASME B16.24 (2011) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500 f) ASME B16.26 Copper Tubes (2011) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared g) ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300 h) ASME B31.1 (2010) Power Piping i) ASME B40.100 (2005; R 2010) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments j) ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1 k) ASME PTC 19.3 (1974; R 2004; Errata 2012) Temperature Measurement 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 6. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a) ASTM A183 (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts b) ASTM A536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings c) ASTM B152/B152M (2009) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar d) ASTM B209M (2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and Plate (Metric) e) ASTM B32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder Metal f) ASTM B62 (2009) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings g) ASTM B75M (1999; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube (Metric) h) ASTM B828 (2002; R 2010) Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings i) ASTM B88M (2005; R 2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric) j) ASTM C1048 (2004) Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass k) ASTM D2000(2012) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications l) ASTM F1199 (1988; R 2010) Cast (All Temperatures and Pressures) and Welded Pipe Line Strainers (150 psig and 150 degrees F Maximum) 7. MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS) a) MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends b) MSS SP-58 (2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation c) MSS SP-69 (2003) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application (ANSI Approved American National Standard) d) MSS SP-72 (2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service e) MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves 8. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) a) NEMA MG 1 (2011) Motors and Generators 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 9. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD) a) UFC 3-310-04 (2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for Buildings 10. UNIFIED PLUMBING CODE OF ABU DHABI (PCAD) a) Chapter 5 water heater, solar thermal energy and chillers 1.2 SOLAR ENERGY SYSTEM A. Provide a solar energy system arranged for preheating of service (domestic and/or process) water using flat plate liquid solar collectors. Include in the system components a solar collector array, storage tank, pump[s], automatic controls, instrumentation, interconnecting piping and fittings, heat exchanger, expansion tank, electrical backup system and accessories required for the operation of the system. B. Submit manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature; performance chart and curves; catalog cuts; and installation instructions. Proposed diagrams, instructions, and other sheets, prior to posting. A copy of the posted instructions proposed to be used, including a system schematic, wiring and control diagrams, and a complete layout of the entire system. Include with the instructions, in typed form, condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system, methods of balancing and testing flow in the system, and methods of testing for control failure and proper system operation. C. Submit drawings containing a system schematic; a collector layout and roof plan noting reverse-return piping for the collector array; a system elevation; an equipment room layout; a schedule of operation and installation instructions; and a schedule of design information including collector height and width, recommended flow rate and pressure drop at that flow rate, and number of collectors to be grouped per bank. D. Include on the drawings complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work, including clearances for maintenance and operation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: A. SD-02 Shop Drawings 1. Solar Energy System 2. As Built Drawings B. SD-03 Product Data 1. Spare Parts 2. Solar Energy System 3. Welder Qualifications 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 C. SD-06 Test Reports 1. Inspection and Testing D. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Operation and Maintenance Procedures 1.4 WELDER QUALIFICATIONS Qualify procedures and welders in accordance with the code under which the welding is specified to be accomplished. Submit, prior to welding operations, 3 copies of qualified procedures and lists of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, excessive humidity and excessive temperature variation, and dirt and dust or other contaminants. 1.6 WARRANTY Provide a minimum 10-year warranty against the following: failure of manifold or riser tubing, joints or fittings; degradation of absorber plate selective surface; rusting or discoloration of collector hardware; and embrittlement of header manifold seals. Include in the warranty full repair or replacement of defective materials or equipment. 1.7 SPARE PARTS Submit data for each different item of material and equipment listed, including a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply; a list of parts and supplies that are either normally furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of equipment, or specified to be furnished as part of the contract; and a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to ensure efficient operation for a period of 120 days. 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS 2.1.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site. Solar system parts and components shall be TUV, UL listed. 2.1.2 NAMEPLATES Each major item of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of equipment. 2.1.3 IDENTICAL ITEMS Items of the same classification shall be identical, including equipment, assemblies, parts, and components. 2.1.4 EQUIPMENT GUARDS [AND ACCESS] Fully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting set-screws, keys, and other rotating parts so located that any person may come in close proximity. High-temperature equipment and piping so located as to endanger personnel or where it creates a potential fire hazard shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation of a type specified. [Provide catwalk, ladder, and guard rails where shown and in accordance with Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.] 2.1.5 SPECIAL TOOLS Provide one set of special tools, calibration devices, and instruments required for operation, calibration, and maintenance of the equipment. 2.2 PIPING SYSTEM Piping system shall be complete with pipe, pipe fittings, valves, strainers, expansion loops, hangers, inserts, supports, anchors, guides, sleeves, and accessories. System materials shall conform to the following: 2.2.1 COPPER TUBING ASTM B88M, Type K where buried, Type L otherwise. Collector risers Type L or M. 2.2.2 SOLDER ASTM B32, Type Sb5, Sn94, Sn95, or Sn96. 2.2.3 JOINTS AND FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B75M. Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 to ASME B16.18 and ASTM B828. Cast copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26 and ASTM B62. Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment. Cast bronze threaded fittings shall conform to ASME B16.15. Extracted brazed tee joints produced with an acceptable tool and installed as recommended by the manufacturer may be used. Grooved mechanical joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 862 kPa service and shall be the product of the same manufacturer. Grooved fitting and mechanical coupling housing shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Gaskets for use in grooved joints shall be molded synthetic polymer of pressure responsive design and shall conform to ASTM D2000 for circulating medium up to 110 degrees C. Grooved joints shall conform to AWWA C606. Coupling nuts and bolts for use in grooved joints shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A183. 2.2.4 FLANGES Bronze, Class 125 or 150 as applicable, ASME B16.24. 2.2.5 DIELECTRIC WATERWAYS AND FLANGES Waterways and flanges shall conform to the requirements of ASME B16.39. Dielectric waterways shall have metal connections at both ends suited to match connecting piping. Ends shall be threaded or soldered to match adjacent piping. Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric waterways and flanges shall be suitable for the temperatures, pressures, and antifreeze encountered. Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways. 2.2.6 BRONZE GATE, GLOBE, ANGLE, AND CHECK VALVES MSS SP-80, Type 1 (or nonslam, spring type), Class 125 or 150. 2.2.7 BALL VALVES MSS SP-72 or MSS SP-110, Class 125 or 150. 2.2.8 RELIEF VALVES, PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. Pressure relief valves located on the solar collector array upper manifold and on the expansion tank shall open and discharge the collector fluid [into drain indicated when fluid pressure rises above 862 kPa. Pressure and temperature relief valves located on the solar storage tank shall open and discharge water [into drain indicated when fluid pressure rises above 862 kPa or when fluid temperature rises above 99 degrees C. 2.2.9 CALIBRATING BALANCING VALVES Calibrated balancing valves shall be suitable for 862 kPa and 121 degrees C service. Calibrated balancing valves shall be of bronze body/brass ball construction with seat rings compatible with system fluid and shall have differential readout ports across valve seat area. Readout ports shall be fitted with internal insert of compatible material and check valve. Calibrated balancing valves shall have memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and reopened to set point without disturbing balance position, and shall have calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve settings. 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.2.10 AIR VENTS Brass or bronze valves or cocks suitable for 862 kPa service. Air vents shall be provided with threaded plugs or caps. 2.2.11 STRAINERS ASTM F1199, removable basket and screen, Y pattern, cast iron strainer with pressures to 862 kPa, simplex type; or a combination elbow-strainer with straightening vanes and strainer arranged for horizontal flow. 2.2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES ASME B40.100. Pressure gauges shall be provided with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shutoff valve. Minimum dial size shall be 90 mm. 2.2.13 THERMOMETERS ASME PTC 19.3, Type I, Class 3. Thermometers shall be supplied with wells and separable bronze sockets. 2.2.14 PIPE THREADS ASME B1.20.2M. 2.2.15 PIPE SUPPORTS MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Metal insulation shield shall be stainless steel. 2.2.16 ALUMINUM SHEETS ASTM B209M, Alloy 3003. 2.2.17 COPPER SHEETS COPPER ALLOY 110 ASTM B152/B152M. 2.3 ELECTRICAL WORK Electric motor-driven equipment specified shall be provided complete with motor, motor starters, and controls. Electrical equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Electrical characteristics shall be as specified or indicated. Motor starters shall be provided complete with thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified. Each motor shall be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified, and any control wiring required for controls and devices, but not shown, shall be provided. Integral size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 2.4 COLLECTOR SUBSYSTEM 2.4.1 SOLAR COLLECTOR CONSTRUCTION Collectors shall be of the flat plate, liquid, internally manifolded type. Each collector shall be provided with cover glazing, an absorber plate, heat transfer liquid flow tubes, 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 internal headers, weep holes, insulation, and a casing. Collectors shall be of weathertight construction. Solar collectors shall withstand a stagnation temperature of 177 degrees C and a working pressure of 862 kPa without degrading, out-gassing, or warping. Collector net aperture area shall be as shown and shall be a minimum of 2.6 square meters. Collector length, width, and volume shall be proposed by the specialized subcontractor. 2.4.2 ABSORBER PLATE AND FLOW TUBES Absorber sheet or plate shall be copper. Top of absorber plate shall be coated with selective surface of black chrome and shall have an emissivity less than 0.2 and absorptivity greater than 0.9. Flow tubes shall be Type L or Type M copper, and shall be soldered, brazed, or mechanically bonded to the absorber plate. Tubes shall be installed on the absorber plate so that they drain by gravity. 2.4.3 COVER GLAZING Each collector shall have a single layer of cover glazing made of clear float, water white or low iron type tempered glass. Glass shall meet ASTM C1048. Cover glazing shall be completely replaceable from the front of the collector without disturbing the piping or adjacent collectors. Cover glazing shall be separated from the collector by a continuous gasket made of EPDM rubber. 2.4.4 INSULATION Back and sides of the absorber plate shall be insulated. Insulation shall fill space between absorber plate and casing and shall have an R value of 4 minimum. Insulation shall conform to EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS and shall be fibrous glass, polyisocyanurate, urethane foam, or other material suitable for the intended purpose, and shall withstand the moisture, sun exposure, and stagnation temperature limitations of the solar collector. Polyisocyanurate insulation shall not come in contact with the absorber plate. 2.4.5 CASING Casing shall be aluminum. Finish shall be mill finish or factory applied baked enamel, embossed or bronze anodized aluminum. Cover glazing shall be separated from the casing by an EPDM rubber gasket or equivalent material. Allowance shall be made for thermal expansion between the cover and absorber plates and the casing, and for drainage of moisture through weep holes. 2.4.6 MOUNTING AND ASSEMBLY HARDWARE Mounting brackets and hinges shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Assembly hardware including all bolts, washers, and nuts shall be stainless steel. 2.4.7 SOLAR COLLECTOR PERFORMANCE Thermal performance shall be plotted on the thermal efficiency curve in accordance with ASHRAE 93. The y-intercept shall be equal to or greater than 0.68, and the numerical value of the slope of the curve (FRUL) shall be between 0 and minus 5.7 watts per square meter per degree K (0 and minus 1.0 Btu per hour per square foot per degree F). Manufacturers shall recommend s volumetric flow rate and the design pressure drop at the recommended flow rate. . 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.5 SOLAR COLLECTOR ARRAY 2.5.1 NET ABSORBER AREA AND ARRAY LAYOUT Array shall consist of an assembly of solar collectors as shown with a minimum total array aperture area. Solar collectors shall be assembled as shown in banks of equal number of collectors. Banks shall consist of no less than 2 and no more than 7 collectors each. Collector array shall be oriented so that all collectors face the same direction and are oriented within 20 degrees of true south and with respect to true south as indicated. Collectors arranged in multiple rows shall be spaced so that no shading from other collectors is evident between 1000 hours and 1400 hours solar time on December 21. Minimum spacing between rows shall be as shown. 2.5.2 PIPING The array piping shall include interconnecting piping between solar collectors, and shall be connected in a reverse-return configuration as indicated with approximately equal pipe length for any possible flow path. Flow rate through the collector array shall be as indicated on material submittal. Automatic pressure relief valves shall be provided in the array piping system as indicated, and shall be adjusted to open when the pressure within the solar array rises above 862 kPa. Each collector bank shall be capable of being isolated by valves, and each bank capable of being separated shall have a pressure relief valve installed and shall be capable of being drained. Manually operated air vents shall be located at system high points, and all array piping shall be pitched a minimum of 21 mm/meter as shown so that piping can be drained by gravity. Calibrated balancing valves shall be supplied at the outlet of each collector bank as indicated. 2.5.3 SUPPORTS FOR SOLAR COLLECTOR ARRAY Support structure for collector array shall be aluminum and shall be in accordance with Section [05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 14STRUCTURAL METAL FABRICATIONS Support structure shall secure collector array at the tilt angle with respect to horizontal and orientation with respect to true south. Support structure shall withstand static weight of filled collectors and piping, wind, seismic, and other loads as indicated. Seismic details shall [conform to UFC 3310-04 and Sections 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. Support structure shall allow access to all equipment for maintenance, repair, and replacement. 2.6 STORAGE TANK Solar system hot water storage tank shall have a storage volume as shown on plans and shall be as per hydraulic and thermal calculations. Solar system storage tank shall conform to specifications for hot water storage tanks in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. Insulation shall be in accordance with Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except that insulation shall have an R value of not less than 30. Tank penetrations shall be designed to allow for connections to copper piping without risk of corrosion due to dissimilar metals, and shall be factory installed as indicated. Thickness of tank insulation shall be PCAD (chapter 5, part II, table 5-5) 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.6.1 ELECTRIC BACKUP BOOSTER Electric backup booster to be part of the storage tank, consisting of copper elements. all sizing and character of this backup system to be submitted by specialized contractor for approval. 2.7 TRANSPORT SUBSYSTEM 2.7.1 HEAT EXCHANGER The heat exchanger construction and testing shall be in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1. Minimum design pressure rating shall be 862 kPa. Heat exchanger shall be capable of returning a hot- side exit temperature of [49] degrees C or less given a hot-side approach temperature of 60 degrees C and a cold-side approach temperature of 38 degrees C. Heat exchanger shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of at least 116 degrees C. Heat exchanger shall be capable of operation at the flow rates as shown. 2.7.1.1 Plate Heat Exchanger Heat exchanger shall be constructed of multiple plates of 316 stainless steel, titanium, copper, copper- nickel, or brass. Plates shall be frame-mounted, mechanically bonded, welded, or brazed at edges. Plate-type heat exchanger shall be able to be cleaned. Gaskets shall be of EPDM rubber or Viton. All plate heat exchanger characteristics shall be as indicated. 2.7.1.2 Tube-in-Shell Heat Exchanger Heat exchanger shall be fixed bundle, shell-and-tube type. Shell, tube sheets, and end plates shall be constructed of nonferrous, brass, copper-nickel, or 316 stainless steel. Shell insulation shall be in accordance with Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except that insulation shall have a minimum R value of not less than 12. Tubes shall be seamless copper or copper alloy and shall be mechanically bonded, welded, or brazed to the end tube plates. Tubes shall be straight and supported by tube sheets which maintain the tubes in alignment. [Straight tube heat exchanger shall be arranged for mechanical cleaning.] All tube-in-shell heat exchanger characteristics shall be as indicated. 2.7.2 PUMPS Circulating pumps shall be electrically-driven, single-stage, centrifugal type. The pumps shall be supported [on a concrete foundation. The pumps shall have a capacity not less than that indicated and shall be either integrally-mounted with the motor or direct-connected by a flexible-shaft coupling on a cast-iron or steel sub base. The pump shaft shall be constructed of corrosion resistant alloy steel, sleeve bearings and glands of bronze designed to accommodate a mechanical seal. Pumps shall have stainless steel impellers and casings of bronze. The motors shall have sufficient power for the service required, shall be of a type approved by the manufacturer of the pump, shall be suitable for the available electric service and for the heat transfer fluid used, and shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. The motors shall be controlled by suitable switches that can be activated by either the differential temperature controller or by manual override (Hand-Off-Automatic). Each pump suction and discharge connection shall be provided with a pressure gauge as specified. 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 12 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.7.3 PIPE INSULATION Pipe insulation and coverings shall be applied in accordance with PCAD ( chapter 5. Part II ) and Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, as called out for steam piping to 103 kPa. Array piping insulation shall be capable of withstanding 121 degrees C, except that piping within 450 mm of collector connections shall be capable of withstanding 204 degrees C. 2.7.4 EXPANSION TANK Expansion tank shall be constructed and tested in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 , the tank should be designed for a hydrostatic test pressure of 2 ½ times the allowable working pressure of the system and as applicable for a working pressure of 862 kPa. Tank shall be provided with an elastomeric EPDM bladder which separates the system fluid from the tank walls and is suitable for a maximum operating temperature of 116 degrees C. Expansion tank size and arrangement shall be proposed by contractor for approval. Tank shall be provided with 862 kPa pressure relief valve. Tank shall be factory pre-charged. 2.7.5 HEAT TRANSFER FLUID Solar collector loop fluid shall be uninhibited USP/food-grade propylene-glycol and shall be mixed with distilled or demineralized water to form a 50 percent by volume propylene-glycol solution. Solar collector loop fluid shall be potable water for direct circulation system 2.8 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SUBSYSTEM 2.8.1 DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT Differential temperature control equipment shall be supplied as a system by a single manufacturer. Controller shall be solid-state electronic type complete with an integral transformer to supply low voltage, shall allow a minimum adjustable temperature differential (on) of 4 to 11 degrees C, a minimum adjustable temperature differential (off) of 2 to 3 degrees C, and shall include a switching relay or solid state output device for pump control. Thermostat shall operate in the on-off mode. Controller accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.5 degree C. Controller shall be compatible with 10-kOhm thermostat temperature sensors. Differential control shall provide direct digital temperature readings of all temperatures sensed. Control shall indicate visually when pumps are energized. Control ambient operating range shall be a minimum of 0 to 49 degrees C. 2.8.2 THERMISTOR TEMPERATURE SENSORS Temperature sensors shall be 10-kOhm thermistors supplied by the differential temperature controller manufacturer, with an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent at 25 degrees C. Model supplied must have passed an accelerated life test conducted by subjecting thermistor assemblies to a constant temperature of 204 degrees C or greater for a period of 1000 hours minimum. Accuracy shall have remained within plus or minus 1 percent as stated above. Thermistors shall be hermetically sealed glass type. Operating range shall be minus 22 to plus 204 degrees C. Immersion wells or watertight threaded fittings shall be provided for temperature sensors. 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 13 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.8.3 SENSOR AND CONTROL WIRING 18 AWG minimum twisted and shielded 2, 3, or 4 conductor to match analog function hardware. Control wiring shall have 600 volt insulation. Multiconductor wire shall have an outer jacket of PVC. 2.8.4 FLOWMETERS Flowmeters shall consist of a venturi, 150 mm dial differential pressure meter, valved pressure taps, and bar stock needle valves. Venturi flow nozzle shall have threaded bronze ends for pipe sizes up to 50 mm and flanged ends for pipe sizes 65 mm and above. Venturi length shall not be less than 1.6 times the pipe size. Venturi shall be selected to read differential pressure corresponding to 0.5 to 1.5 times the system flow rate. Venturi shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent of the range. Meter shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent of the full scale range. 2.8.5 SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS Sight flow indicators shall consist of a clear glass window or cylinder and a nonferrous or 316 stainless steel body and impeller. Indicator shall have threaded ends for pipe sizes up to 50 mm and flanged ends for pipe sizes 65 mm and above. Maximum operating pressure shall be no less than 862 kPa. Maximum operating temperature shall be no less than 121 degrees C. 2.9 PAINTING AND FINISHING Equipment and component items, when fabricated from ferrous metal and located inside the building, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's standard finish. 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 14 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION After becoming thoroughly familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 COLLECTOR SUBSYSTEM 3.2.1.1 Collector Array Solar collector array shall be installed at the tilt angle, orientation, and elevation above roof as recommended by manufacturer. For installation on flat roofs with rack type collector mounting or for ground mounted collectors, bottom of collector shall be a minimum of 450 mm from roof or ground surface. For mounting on pitched roofs, back of collectors shall be installed a minimum of 50 mm above roof surface. Each solar collector shall be removable for maintenance, repair, or replacement. Solar collector array shall not impose additional loads on the structure beyond the loads scheduled on the structural drawings. 3.2.1.2 Array Piping Collector array piping shall be installed in a reverse-return configuration so that path lengths of collector supply and return are of approximately equal length. All piping must be coded with fluid type and flow direction labels in accordance with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. 3.2.1.3 Array Support Array support shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the collector manufacturer. Structural members requiring welding shall be welded in accordance with AWS D1.2/D1.2M for aluminum and welders should be qualified according to AWS B2.1/B2.1M. 3.2.2 STORAGE SUBSYSTEM Solar storage tank penetrations shall be installed as shown so that cold water inlet to storage tank and outlet from storage tank to collector array are located near the bottom of the tank, and inlet from collector array and outlet to load are located near the top of the tank. 3.2.3 TRANSPORT SUBSYSTEM 3.2.3.1 Flow Rates [System flow rate shall be based on recommended collector flow rate, and shall be as per manufacturer. All flow rates shall be below 1.5 meters/second. 3.2.3.2 Pumps [Pumps shall be installed on foundations, leveled, grouted, and realigned before operation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.] [All base mounted pumps shall have a straight pipe between the suction side of the pump and the first elbow. The length of this pipe shall be a minimum of five times the diameter 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 15 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 of the pipe on the suction side of the pump, or a suction diffuser of the proper size shall be attached to the suction side of the pump.] Drain line sizes from the pumps shall not be less than the drain trap or the pump dirt pocket, but in no case shall the drain line be less than 13 mm iron pipe size. Drain lines shall terminate to spill over the nearest floor or open sight drain. 3.2.3.3 Expansion Tank Expansion tank shall be installed on suction side of pump. 3.2.3.4 Piping, Valves, and Accessories Piping shall be installed in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE, except where noted otherwise. Solders used on piping shall be as shown. Piping shall be coded with fluid type and flow direction labels in accordance with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. When a foodgrade uninhibited propylene-glycol solution is used to heat potable service water, tamper resistant seals must be attached to all fill ports. All propylene-glycol circuits must be labeled "CONTAINS UNINHIBITED FOOD-GRADE PROPYLENE-GLYCOL: INTRODUCTION OF ANY NONAPPROVED FLUID MAY CONSTITUTE A HEALTH HAZARD." . Air vents shall be installed at the high points of the collector array and in the equipment room. 3.2.3.5 Pipe Expansion Expansion of supply and return pipes shall be provided for by changes in the direction of the run of pipe or by expansion loops as indicated. Expansion loops shall provide adequate expansion of the main straight runs of the system within the stress limits specified in ASME B31.1. Loops shall be cold- sprung and installed where indicated. Pipe guides shall be provided as indicated. Expansion joints shall not be used in system piping. 3.2.3.6 Valves Valves shall be installed at the locations indicated and where required for the proper functioning of the system. Valves shall be installed with their stems horizontal or above. Gate or ball valves shall be installed at the inlet and outlet of each bank of internally manifolded collectors. Calibrated balancing valves with integral pressure taps shall be installed at the outlet of each bank and at the pump discharge. Final setting for each valve shall be marked on each valve. Ball valves shall be installed with a union immediately adjacent. Gate valves shall be installed at the inlet and outlet of each pump and also at the inlet and outlet of each heat exchanger. A check valve shall be installed at pump discharges. Discharges of relief valves shall be piped to the nearest floor drain or as indicated on system drawings. 3.2.3.7 Foundations Concrete foundations or pads for storage tanks, heat exchangers, pumps, and other equipment covered by this specification shall be constructed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and be a minimum of 150 mm high with chamfered edges. 3.2.3.8 Grooved Mechanical Joints Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions. Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be the products of the same 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 16 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow- land micrometer, or other method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Grooved width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with the coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations. 3.2.4 CONTROL SUBSYSTEM 3.2.4.1 Differential Temperature Controller Automatic control equipment shall be installed at the location shown in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Control wiring and sensor wiring shall be installed in conduit. [Collector temperature sensor shall be provided by differential temperature controller manufacturer and mounted directly on the absorber plate by the manufacturer.] Unless otherwise indicated, operators, controllers, sensors, indicators, and like devices when installed on equipment casings and pipe lines shall be provided with stand-off mounting brackets, bases, nipples, adapters, or extended tubes to provide clearance, not less than the thickness of the insulation, between the surface and the device. These stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the devices or standard accessories of the controls manufacturer unless otherwise approved. Clamp-on devices or instruments where direct contact with pipe surface is required shall be exempted from the use of the above mounting items. All control wiring shall be color coded and identified with permanent numeric or alphabetic codes. 3.2.4.2 Sequence of Operation The differential temperature controller sensing temperature difference between the fluid in a solar collector and water in the storage tank shall start solar collector loop [and storage loop] pumps[s] when the temperature differential (Delta T - ON) rises above [8] degrees C, and shall stop the pump when the differential (Delta T - OFF) falls below [3] degrees C. 3.3 INSPECTION AND TESTING Submit an independent testing agency's certified reports of inspections and laboratory tests, including analysis, position of flow-balancing equipment, and interpretation of test results. Each report shall be properly identified. Describe test methods used and compliance with recognized test standards. 3.3.1 INSPECTION Make system available for inspection at all times. 3.3.2 TESTING PRIOR TO CONCEALMENT 3.3.2.1 Hydrostatic Test Demonstrate to PGC engineer that all piping has been hydrostatically tested, at a pressure of 862 kPa for a period of time sufficient for inspection of every joint in the system and in no case less than 2 hours, prior to installation of insulation. Expansion tank and relief valves shall be isolated from test pressure. No loss of 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 17 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 pressure shall be allowed. Leaks found during tests shall be repaired by replacing pipe or fittings and the system retested. Caulking of joints shall not be permitted. 3.3.2.2 Cleaning of Piping System piping shall be flushed with clean, fresh water prior to concealment of any individual section and prior to final operating tests. Prior to flushing piping, relief valves shall be isolated or removed. Solar collectors shall be covered to prevent heating of cleaning fluid, unless cleaning is performed during hours of darkness. The solution shall be circulated through the section to be cleaned at the design flow rate for a minimum of 2 hours. 3.3.3 POSTING FRAMED INSTRUCTIONS Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic shall be posted where directed. These instructions shall include a system schematic, and wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system. Condensed operating instructions explaining preventative maintenance procedures, balanced flow rates, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified above, and posted beside the diagrams. Proposed diagrams, instructions, and other sheets shall be submitted for approval prior to posting. The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the system. 3.3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND FINAL INSPECTION Tests shall be performed in the presence of PGC engineer. Furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests. A written record of the results of all acceptance tests shall be maintained, to be submitted in booklet form. The tests shall be as follows: 3.3.4.1 As-Built Drawings Submit, as a condition of final acceptance, a complete set of as-built system drawings. Drawings shall clearly indicate the actual condition of the installed solar energy system at the time of the final test. 3.3.4.2 Final Hydrostatic Test Demonstrate to PGC engineer that all piping has been hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 862 kPa for a period of time sufficient for inspection of every joint in the system and in no case less than 2 hours. Expansion tank and relief valves shall be isolated from test pressure. Gauges used in the test shall have been calibrated within the 6-month period preceding the test. Test shall be witnessed by PGC engineer. No loss of pressure shall be allowed. Leaks found during tests shall be repaired by replacing pipe or fittings and the system retested. Caulking of joints shall not be permitted. 3.3.4.3 System Flushing For the final inspection, the system shall be thoroughly flushed, in no case for less than 2 hours, of all foreign matter until a white linen bag installed in a strainer basket shows no evidence of contamination. The white linen bag shall be in the strainer basket during the entire flushing operation prior to its being presented to the Contracting Officer for approval. PGC engineer will inspect the linen bag 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 18 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 prior to completion of flushing and approve the flushing operation. System shall be drained prior to final filling. 3.3.4.4 System Filling System shall be filled through indicated connections with solution. Solution shall be mixed externally to the solar system and consist of [50] percent propyleneglycol and [50] percent distilled water by volume] [distilled water]. Air shall be vented from the system after filling. System pressure at the high point on the roof shall be 69 kPa minimum. 3.3.4.5 Operational Test Operational test shall occur over a period of 48 consecutive hours with sufficient solar insulation to cause activation of the solar energy system during daylight hours. With system fully charged so that pressure at the high point on the roof or the lowest system pressure is a minimum of 69 kPa and with fluid and pump[s] energized, [sight flow indicator must indicate flow] [flow meter must indicate flow as indicated]. Calibrated balancing valves with pressure taps shall indicate bank flow rate as shown. 3.3.4.6 Control Logic By substituting variable resistors for collector and storage tank temperature sensors, demonstrate the differential temperature controller correctly energizes the system pump[s] when the collector sensor indicates a temperature of [8] degrees C greater than the storage tank temperature, as indicated on the controller display panel. The differential temperature controller shall de-energize the system pump[s] when the displayed temperature of the solar collectors is [3] degrees C greater than the displayed temperature of the storage tank. 3.3.4.7 Temperature Sensor Diagnostics Demonstrate that the controller will correctly identify open and short circuits on both the solar collector temperature sensor circuit and the storage tank sensor circuit. 3.3.4.8 Overall System Operations Demonstrate that the solar energy system will operate properly while unattended for a period of at least 72 hours and that the controller will start pump[s] after being warmed by the sun, and that it will properly shut down during cloudy weather or in the evening over a minimum of three complete cycles. Contractor is permitted to manipulate the temperature of the storage tank by the introduction of cold water at local groundwater temperature. 3.4 FIELD TRAINING Provide a field training course for designated operating and maintenance staff members. T. The training shall include discussion of the system design and layout and demonstrations of routine operation and maintenance procedures. This training shall include: normal system operation and control; flow balancing; detection of a nonfunctioning system due to sensor, controller, and/or mechanical failure; filling, draining, and venting of the collector array; replacement of sensors, collectors, and collector components; collector cleaning and inspection for leaks; and heat exchanger cleaning and expansion tank charging if applicable. Submit [6] copies of operation and [6] copies of maintenance manuals for the equipment furnished. One complete set 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 19 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 prior to performance testing and the remainder upon acceptance. Manuals shall be approved prior to the field training course. Operating manuals shall detail the step-by-step procedures required for system filling, startup, operation, and shutdown. Operating manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and brief descriptions of all equipment and their basic operating features. Maintenance manuals shall list routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, troubleshooting guides, piping and equipment layout, balanced fluid flow rates, and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed. END OF SECTION 22 14 29 22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIPMENT PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 20 OF 20 PGC-230033-C-P8 22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 2 1.1 1.2 1.3 REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 2 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................. 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................... 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................................. 4 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 BOROSILICATE GLASS, TYPE BSG .......................................................................... 4 HIGH-SILICON CAST IRON, TYPE HSCI .................................................................... 4 POLYETHYLENE DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT, TYPE PE-DWV ................................ 4 POLYPROPYLENE DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT, TYPE PP-DWV ............................. 4 POLYVINYLCHLORIDE DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT, TYPE PVC-DWV .................... 5 PART 3 EXECUTION ........................................................................................................... 6 3.1 INSTALLATION AND TESTING ................................................................................... 6 22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 6 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. 1. ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) a. ASME B16.12 (2009) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings 2. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) a. ASTM A518/A518M (1999; R 2008) Standard Corrosion- Resistant High-Silicon Iron Castings Specification for b. ASTM C1036 (2010e1) Standard Specification for Flat Glass c. ASTM D2447 (2003) Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter d. ASTM D2665 (2012) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings e. ASTM D4101 (2011) Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials f. 1.2 ASTM D6927 (2006) Standard Test Method for Marshall Stability and Flow of Bituminous Mixtures SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL ROCEDURES: A. SD-02 Shop Drawings Submit Installation Drawings. B. SD-03 Product Data Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items: 1. Borosilicate Glass Materials 2. High-Silicon Cast Iron Material 3. Polyethylene Material 4. Polypropylene Material 5. Polyvinylchloride Material C. SD-06 Test Reports 1. Submit Test Reports 22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 6 PGC-230033-C-P8 D. SD-07 Certificates 1. Submit Listing of Product Installations. 2. Submit certificates for the following items showing conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section 3. Borosilicate Glass Materials 4. High-Silicon Cast Iron Material 5. Polyethylene Material 6. Polypropylene Material 7. Polyvinylchloride Material 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Submit installation drawings for chemical-waste drainage systems in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended instructions. 22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 6 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 2.3 BOROSILICATE GLASS, TYPE BSG A. Provide borosilicate glass materials for drain, waste, and vent piping systems, tempered and annealed in conformance with ASTM C1036, coupling per AISI Type 304 corrosion- resistant steel lined with Buna-N resilient member supporting a tetrafluoroethylene liner, ensuring that the liner is the only material wetted by waste stream. Verify piping class is BSG-1. B. Provide vent-system materials 1800 millimeter and higher above the floor of Type PP or PVC with extra-heavy Type HSCI extension through roof. HIGH-SILICON CAST IRON, TYPE HSCI A. For high-silicon cast iron material, conforming to ASTM A518/A518M, drain, waste, and vent piping systems provide bell-and-spigot or beaded-end straight barrel, extra heavy, acid-resistant soil pipe containing not less than 14-1/2 percent silicon. For joint seals provide lead and acid-resistant packing. Provide mechanical joint coupling constructed of AISI Type 304 corrosion-resistant steel with chloroprene resilient member supporting a tetrafluoroethylene liner, and ensure the liner is the only material wetted by waste stream. Tighten nut to a minimum of 12 newton meter. B. Provide vent-system materials at 1800 millimeter and higher above the floor of Type PP or Type PVC with extra-heavy Type HSCI extensions through roof. POLYETHYLENE DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT, TYPE PE-DWV A. For polyethylene material drain, waste, and vent piping systems provide products manufactured from polyethylene (PE) olefin resins in conformance with ASTM D2447 and ASME B16.12 for applicable dimensions and configurations, Schedule 40, Type PE- 2306, black, specifically suitable for joining by fusion of interfaces into a homogeneous mass at high temperatures. Ensure threaded assemblies are molded. No thread cutting is permitted. 2.4 B. Provide vent extensions through the roof of extra-heavy Type HSCI. C. Selected drainage-system components may be manufactured from polypropylene (PP) materials, provided proposed means and methods of connection are recommended by the manufacturing source. POLYPROPYLENE DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT, TYPE PP-DWV A. For Polypropylene material drain, waste, and vent piping systems provide products manufactured from Type I - 19509, black olefin resins conforming to ASTM D4101 and tested in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM D2447. Comply with applicable provisions of ASME B16.12 for material dimensions and configurations. B. Ensure pipe-wall thickness is Schedule 40 with minimum burst pressure when tested in accordance with ASTM D6927 for 60 to 90 seconds, as follows: 22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 6 PGC-230033-C-P8 Size (millimeter) DN Burst Pressure 2.5 40 50 80 100 4585 380 3650 3100 (kilopascal) C. Provide only PP materials specifically suitable for joining interfaces into a homogeneous mass by fusion at high temperatures, with molded threaded assemblies. No thread cutting is permitted. D. Provide vent extensions through the roof of extra-heavy Type HSCI. E. For selected drainage system components use products manufactured from PE materials when so specified, and provided proposed means and methods of connection as recommended by the manufacturing source. POLYVINYLCHLORIDE DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT, TYPE PVC-DWV A. For polyvinylchloride material drain, waste, and vent piping-system provide materials manufactured from Type I normal impact resins in conformance with ASTM D2665 and ASME B16.12 for applicable dimensions. Ensure materials are gray and specifically suited for joining socket interfaces into a homogeneous mass by solvent-cement welding. B. Ensure all fittings are molded to produce, upon insertion of pipe, an interference fit at approximately 2/3 of the depth of the socket. No thread cutting is permitted. C. Provide vent extensions through the roof of extra-heavy type HSCI. 22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 6 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION AND TESTING A. Submit test reports consisting of system operation tests for chemical-waste drainage systems. B. Within listing of product installations for chemical-waste drainage systems include identification of at least five units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a minimum of five years. Include purchaser, address of installation, service organization, and date of installation. C. Install and test equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 22 66 53.00 40 22 66 53.00 40 LABORATORY CHEMICALS-WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART B: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 6 PGC-230033-C-P8 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................2 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 RELATED DOCUMENTS......................................................................................... 2 SUMMARY............................................................................................................... 2 DEFINITIONS .......................................................................................................... 2 DESIGN CONDITIONS ............................................................................................ 3 DRAWINGS, INSTRUCTIONS AND SAMPLES ....................................................... 3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES ............................................................................ 5 LABELS, TAGS AND CHARTS ................................................................................ 5 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................................................... 6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTNEANCE TRAINING PROGRAM ................................. 9 INITIAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS ..................................................................... 13 NOISE AND VIBRATION ....................................................................................... 13 WARRANTEE ........................................................................................................ 14 QUALITY ASSURANCE......................................................................................... 14 WELDING .............................................................................................................. 15 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ............................................................. 16 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING ...................................................................... 16 ASSET CODING .................................................................................................... 17 PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................19 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS .................................................................................... 19 JOINING MATERIALS ........................................................................................... 19 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS......................................................................................... 20 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS .................................................................................... 21 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS ............................................................................ 21 PIPING SPECIALTIES ........................................................................................... 21 GROUT .................................................................................................................. 22 PART 3 EXECUTION ...........................................................................................................23 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS ................................................ 23 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS............................... 26 PAINTING AND FINISHING ................................................................................... 26 CONCRETE BASES .............................................................................................. 27 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE ..................................... 27 DEMOLITION......................................................................................................... 27 CUTTING AND PATCHING ................................................................................... 27 GROUTING............................................................................................................ 27 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 23 Sections. 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Concrete base construction requirements. 3. Escutcheons. 4. Dielectric fittings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Mechanical sleeve seals. 7. Equipment nameplate data requirements. 8. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in Division 23 Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment". 9. No shrink grout for equipment installations. 10. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports. 11. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections. 12. Mechanical demolition. 13. Cutting and patching. 14. Touchup painting and finishing. B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 23 Section 23 21 10 "Hydronic Piping". C. This section also includes other requirements to complement other sections in Division 23 sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. NP: Nylon plastic. PE: Polyethylene plastic. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. uPVC: unplasticized polyvinyl chloride plastic. RTRP: Reinforcement thermosetting resin pipe. GRE: Glass reinforced epoxy pipe. GRP: Glass reinforced plastic pipe. G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. 2. 1.4 CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber. DESIGN CONDITIONS A. Outdoor Design Conditions: 1. Outside Temperatures: Summer: i. ii. A. Dry Bulb: 46 deg.C. Wet Bulb: 29.4 deg.C. Indoor Design Conditions: Indoor Conditions (Summer) Area 1.5 Space Temp DB (degC) Rel. Hum. % DRAWINGS, INSTRUCTIONS AND SAMPLES A. Equipment and Materials Lists: As per contract requirement after award of contract, submit lists of equipment and materials with names of proposed 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 manufacturers and drawings of interrelated items. All submissions are to show submission dates. B. Shop and Installation Drawings: As per contract requirement, submit for approval detailed shop and installation drawings showing to-scale dimensions of equipment, ducts, pipes etc. in plan and elevation and in relation of same to space assigned. C. Shop and Installation Drawings: prepare composite installation drawings and sections to a scale of not less than 1/50 showing clearly how work will be installed in relation to the work of other trades. D. Shop and Installation Drawings of equipment and material are to include manufacturer's detailed drawings, cuts of catalogues and descriptive literature showing type, performance characteristics, construction, component parts, dimensions, arrangement, operating clearances, capacity, electrical characteristics, power requirements, motor, drive and testing information. E. Shop and Installation Drawings: submit manufacturer's certified drawings, templates and installation instructions to be furnished for all equipment showing operating weights, weight distribution, location of any vibration isolation mounts, size and location of anchor bolts, drains and other required openings and all other pertinent data to assist in design of bases and supports. F. Shop and Installation Drawings: mark clearly in ink catalogues, pamphlets and drawings for proper identification of item proposed and indicate, with reasons, deviations from the Specification and the Drawings. G. Shop and Installation Drawings lists etc.: submit five copies. H. Shop and Installation Drawings: submit for approval, materials not covered by drawings, e.g. pipes, fittings and incidentals, giving ratings and names of manufacturers. I. Shop and Installation Drawings: no equipment or materials to be purchased or delivered to Site until drawings etc. are approved. J. Further Drawings: during the progress of the work, submit shop-drawings, to 1/20 or 1/10 scale, as required by the PGC Engineer and as specified elsewhere. K. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and not to be scaled. Measurements are to be made from established bench marks. L. Drawings: check all architectural, structural and electrical drawings in laying out work to verify adequacy of space in which work is to be installed. Notify PGC where space appears inadequate. M. Substitution of Equipment and Material: reference to equipment and material by name, make or catalogue number, and lists of approved manufacturers are to be interpreted as establishing standard of quality and performance and are not intended to eliminate equivalent products of other manufacturers. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 N. Minor Changes and Modifications may be made in layout to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. O. Cooperate with other trades to permit their work to be installed satisfactorily and with minimum interference or delay. P. Coordinate space conditions where work will be installed in close proximity to and may interfere with work of other trades, and accept responsibility for the sufficiency of shafts and chases, clearance in double partitions, suspended ceilings etc. for proper installation of the work. Q. Furnish to other trades templates, patterns, setting out plans and shop details necessary for proper installation and coordination of adjacent work. R. Protection: close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction. S. Samples: submit for approval samples of proposed materials and workmanship. 1.6 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Access: install work to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair. Approved deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this. 1.7 B. Group Together as practically as possible concealed valves and devices to be easily accessible through access doors. C. Purpose: access doors are to be provided for the operation of concealed dampers, damper quadrants, controls, valves, traps, vents, drains, cleanouts, motors, air filters etc. D. Details of access doors and frames: Provide details, dimensions and locations of access doors required and submit for approval in sufficient time to enable access doors to be installed during normal course of work. LABELS, TAGS AND CHARTS A. General: refer to section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and the following to complete this task. Consult PGC Engineer for any discrepancy. B. Identification: Access doors are to be identified to indicate location of concealed work. Method and schedule for identification of access doors is to be approved. C. Nameplates: each piece of equipment to have a certified nameplate at a conspicuous location, permanently attached at factory, printed or stamped with name and address of manufacturer, equipment model number, serial number, date of manufacture, electrical characteristics, performance rating or duty, pressure, temperature or other limitations and other pertinent data. D. Label and Identify equipment, instruments, controls, electrical devices, valves etc. as to duty, service or function. Label controls and electrical devices to indicate clearly what they control. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 E. Labels: attach to equipment etc. or to adjacent permanent surfaces in an approved permanent manner. F. Labels: laminated Bakelite with different colours for and surface, core and incised lettering in English. Refer to section 23 05 53 "Identifications for HVAC Piping and Equipment". G. Tags: Refer to section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment". H. Tag controls and instruments that cannot be easily identified with Bakelite labels. I. Tag valves and controls, except equipment shut off valves located at equipment. J. Labels and Tags: submit for approval a schedule of equipment and devices to be labeled and tagged, with suggested nomenclature. K. Charts are to be prepared of schematic flow diagrams of each piping system with location and function of each valve and with type and size of each essential feature of the system. L. Charts: prepare schedules for equipment lubrication and maintenance and essential operating instructions. M. Charts: submit for approval. N. 1.8 Charts: mount on wooden plaques or 6 mm Masonite boards, cover with heat bonded clear plastic laminate or frame under glass, and permanently fix with four brass screws at approved locations. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Instruction Manuals: provide six copies in bound booklet form containing the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Brief description of each system and piece of equipment with basic operating features Descriptive literature of equipment and components with manufacturer's name, model number, capacity rating and operating characteristics Service manual prepared by manufacturer for every major piece of equipment giving operating and maintenance instructions, starting and shut-down instructions, lubrication instructions and list of possible breakdown and repairs Manufacturer's list of general spare parts for every piece of equipment with unit prices Manufacturer's list of recommended spare parts for one year of operation of each piece of equipment with unit prices Detailed and simplified one line colour coded flow diagram of each system with tag number, location and function of each valve and instrument Detailed and simplified colour coded as-installed wiring diagrams of motor controllers and automatic controls with tag number, location and function of each instrument and electrical device with description of sequence of operation and interlocks. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 B. Instruction Manuals: submit in draft form for review and approval prior to taking over as per the contract requirement. C. Record Drawings: submit an approved complete set of as-built drawings and electrical wiring diagrams in tracing or other reproducible form. D. Overall Purpose: provide a general overview of the original design intent. E. Description: provide the followings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Type of system. System location and what it serves. What the system depends upon in order to function. Design data, basic design parameters, basic assumptions made during design. Reasons for selecting particular plant. Expected service life (where available). Planned operational efficiency. F. Equipment Schedule: the type, model number and serial number of all component items within the system should be listed, together with the names of their respective manufacturers of suppliers. G. Parts Identification and Recommended Spares: this should comprise a parts identification list detailing and identifying replaceable assemblies, subassemblies and components. it should include supplier’s recommendation for both spares and “running spare” (i.e. parts required for scheduled replacement due to wear or deterioration), recommend stocking level of spare parts and manufacturing and shipping time required for imported spare parts. H. Commissioning Data 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. I. Measured Data. Measurement Points. Test Equipment used Calibration Certificate details. Test Certificates Safety & Fire Certificates (where applicable) A statement of whether design requirements. Operation: instructions must be given for the safe and efficient operation, under both normal and emergency conditions. These will be in addition to manufacturer’s literature for Plant Items and should include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. A recommended strategy for operation and control. An outline of the general operating mode. Control data (location, effect, object, sequence, limits of capability, modes, set points). Procedure and sequences for start-up, running and shutdown, under both normal and emergency conditions. Interlocks between plant items Operating procedure for standby plant. Precautions necessary to overcome known hazards. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 8. The means by which any potentially hazardous plants may be made safe. 9. Target figures of both energy consumption and energy costs. 10. Forms for recording plant running hours, energy consumption and energy costs. J. Maintenance: the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions for maintenance for each item of plant and equipment. Clear distinction should be made between planned tasks (preventative maintenance) and work done on corrective basis. instructions should be given on each of the following as appropriate: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. K. Maintenance Schedules: should be provided for preventative maintenance tasks and should be based on manufacturer’s recommendations and other authoritative sources and should include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. L. The isolation and return of plant and equipment. Adjustments, calibration and testing. Dismantling and re-assembly. The exchange of components and assemblies Dealing with hazards which may arise during maintenance. The nature of deterioration and the defects to be looked for. Special tools, test equipment and ancillary services. Inspections Examinations Tests Adjustments Calibration Lubrication Periodic Overhaul Procedure for the logical diagnosis and correction of faults should be provided. Modification Information: information on permitted plant or system modification’s allowed for by the manufacturers of system designers should be included for each system. Space must be provided in the name for the recording of all modifications and changes as they occur. M. Disposal Instructions: where relevant, information should be provided detailing: 1. 2. 3. Any known dangers likely to arise during the disposal of specific items of plant or equipment together with the necessary precautions and safety measures. Methods for safely disposing of or destroying the equipment or any parts thereof, including packaging, insulation and fluids. Sources from which further advice can be obtained. N. Names and Addresses of Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Name equipment / item Name of manufacturer Address Telephone number and telex/fax number Name of local supplier/agent Address Telephone number and telex/fax number. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 O. Index of Plans and Drawings: an index should be provided of all “as fitted” drawings supplied during the course of the installation work, identified by number and title. Index should also include a schedule of all drawings issued by the manufacturers and suppliers during the course of the installation work e.g. control panel-wiring diagrams. P. Emergency Information: should include names, addresses, telephone and telex/fax numbers of the appropriate contacts in the event of the fire, theft or burglary, and fuel, gas, electricity or water failure/leaks. It should also list those firms or staff to contact in the event of the failure or breakdown of such plant as lifts, plants, etc. Q. Manufacturers Literature: a complete set of all manufacturers’ literature should be provided for the plant and equipment installed and assembled. The literature should provide the following information: 1. Description of the product as purchased 2. The cost and date of purchase 3. Performance – behavioral characteristics of the equipment in use 4. Applications – suitability for use 5. Operation and maintenance 6. Resources of labor, plant, material and space required 7. Methods of Operation and Control 8. Clearing and maintenance requirements 9. Protective measures 10. Labor, safety and welfare associated with the equipment 11. Public safety considerations. 1.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTNEANCE TRAINING PROGRAM A. Manufacturers guarantees and warranties: manufacturers guarantees and warranties. B. Contractor – furnished training program: to provide trained operation and maintenance (O&M) personnel for the Employer’s Operations and Maintenance Program, Contractor shall develop and implement a program for the training of Employer nominated staff in operating and maintaining the facilities and systems/subsystems constructed and installed. Two copies of submittals required by this Attachment to the Special Conditions shall be supplied to Authorized Representative for review not later, than ninety (90) days prior to scheduled start of each formal training course. Thirty (30) days shall be allowed for such review. Training shall be performed only in accordance with such reviewed and approved training program submittals. All training aids proposed for use in the program shall be available for inspection prior to commencement of training. Upon completion of the training program, the training aids, tools, test equipment, training manuals and other materials relating to the program shall be handed over to the Employer. When short familiarization courses are offered to Contractor by the equipment manufacturer/vendor as a common industry practice at no extra cost to Contractor, then Contractor shall make arrangements for the Government nominated staff to attend such courses at the no additional cost to the Government. C. DESCRIPTION: this section covers the requirements for preparing, administrating and conducting a training program in English for Employer, nominated 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS include copies of PAGE 9 OF 28 all PGC-230033-C-P8 operator, maintenance, supervisor and instructor trainees in operation, maintenance and computer software programming of the system. Training shall be of sufficient scope and depth to ensure that all operations, maintenance and computer software trainees who complete the training program will be fully qualified, certified and capable of operating and/or maintaining the system/subsystems as installed under this Contract. The program shall provide the training, orientation and familiarization necessary to ensure a smooth transition between system installation and operations activities. D. Scope: Training shall be in sufficient scope to ensure that all trainees who complete the program will be certified as capable to operate and/or maintain the equipment, systems and facilities furnished and installed under this contract, and to ensure a smooth transition between construction and operation activities. E. Scope: training shall be performed in accordance with an approved training program. All training aids shall be available and approved prior to start of training. Each training course shall usually include classroom (theoretical) training and on-the-job (hands-on) training to provide practical experience. Where system/subsystem interfaces occur, such as with equipment or facilities furnished under other contracts, the contractor shall co-operate with and assist the Construction Manager in co-ordinating timing and scheduling of training so that trainees can be made familiar with the operation and maintenance of the system/subsystem as a complete, in-place, operating unit. F. Language: training shall be conducted in English and Arabic. G. Submittals: The following should be submitted: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. A training program stating all program courses and activities, and their individual duration’s sequence, and interrelationships. A narrative description of each course, including its purpose, technical scope and the number of hours from start of course to trainee certification. Current resumes of training and technical personnel who will be assigned to the classroom and/or on-the-job (hands-on) phases of training. Resumes shall be identified by course. The ration of training and technical personnel to trainees for both classroom and on-the-job phases of each course. A narrative (verbal) and graphic (pictorial) explanation of the system’s operational scheme and features which will be covered in the Operations-related courses. A narrative (verbal) and graphic (pictorial) explanation of the system’s operational and maintenance schemes which will be covered in the maintenance-related courses. A comprehensives training manual for each course in the form and content which will be used in both classroom and on-the-job phases of training. In addition to other information, the manual shall contain an agenda, the hours devoted to each topic/subject, and the objectives for each lesson. Such manual shall be prepared in English. A descriptive listing, by course, of all training aids to be used during both classroom and on-the-job phases of training. A narrative description of the practices to be followed to measure, record and report each trainee’s progress and proficiency on completion of formal 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 training. Also, a description of the method(s) to be used to certify trainees as being capable to operate and/or maintain the system/subsequent. 10. Samples of written examinations to be used for each course. 11. A narrative description of the methods proposed to provide make-up instruction for trainees who miss training sessions due to illness of approved absences. 12. A bibliography containing a listing of reference publications to be used in conjunction with classroom and on-the-job training. H. Employer Nominated Staff: Employer will nominate staff to receive training. Such trainees many be expected to be familiar with the fundamental concepts of the operation and maintenance of similar system and be basically qualified in both written and spoken English. Each trainee will be designated by Employer in one of three categories (trainees, supervisor-trainee, or instructor trainee) for operations, maintenance or computer software training. I. Assistance to Key Technical Personnel: all key technical personnel of Contractor shall have a general responsibility to assist Employer non-nominated trainees in conducting training for the operation and maintenance of the system/subsystem. Such assistance shall be a part of their duties and shall be included in their job descriptions. J. Qualifications of Training Personnel: personnel designated to conduct training shall be fully qualified and shall have a minimum of three years experience with the systems/subsystem as installed, or comparable successful experience as a trainee. K. Training Aids: Training aids shall include approved operation and maintenance (O&M) manual(s) prepared by Contractor as part of this Contract; training manuals, including course outline, basic test of instructions modules and trainee workbook; films; slides; video tape(s); charts; models; hand-outs; catalogues’ samples; and other visual and written aids to complement instruction. In addition spare parts and other special hardware shall be provided to support “hand-on” familiarization with the equipment or systems. L. Training Manuals: training manuals in English shall be provided for each training course covering both the classroom and on-the-job phases. The organisation of the manuals shall follow the same sequence as the course’s schedule presentation of material, providing such additional background and supplementary information as a trainee may need to understand the O&M manuals. The training manuals shall contain course agenda, schedule of hours devoted to each topic or subject and objectives for each lesson. M. Laboratory Equipment spare parts and mock-up models may be used for theoretical orientation. However, practical “hands-on” familiarization shall be provided on equipment which is either installed and operable or ready to be installed and capable of being operated. System spares of special hardware items may be used to support “hands-on” familiarization as long as said spares are returned to inventory in satisfactory condition in accordance with approved procedures. N. Proficiency: at designated intervals, each trainee’s proficiency level shall be determined by written, oral and practical performance tests. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 O. Completion: upon satisfactory completion of the training, it shall be certified, in writing, that each trainee, by name, is qualified to operate or maintain the system, supervise or instruct, as applicable. P. Disposition: upon completion of the training program, all training aids, test equipment and similar items provided by Contractor for this training program shall become the property of the Employer. Q. Schedule of all Plant Requiring Lubrication should be provided together with manufacturer’s recommendations on the type of lubricant and the method and frequency of application where the type of lubricant is identified by product name, a generic reference (e.g. B.S.) should also be given. Special requirements for the handling and storage of lubricants should be provided where applicable for recommended lubricants. R. Make-Up Instruction: make-up instruction shall be scheduled to accommodate shift work and authorised absences. S. Training Categories: training shall be provided using approved programs in the following categories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. T. Operations Training: operators shall be provided with a thorough training in all aspects of system/subsystem operation under both normal and abnormal conditions. This training shall include, but not be limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. U. Operations Maintenance Computer Software Operations – Supervisor Operations – Instructor Maintenance – Supervisor Maintenance – Instructor Other categories as may be required by CONTRACTOR’s system design. Orientation to provide overview of system/subsystem purpose, configuration and operations; Terminology; Operations theory and interface; Equipment appearance, functions, concepts and operation; Operating modes, practices and procedures under normal and emergency conditions; Safety precautions; On-the-job operating experience covering all system/subsystem operating functions, activities and tasks including those associated with degraded operating modes, failure recognition and recovery processes; Familiarity with the content and use of O&M manuals and related reference publications. Maintenance Training: maintenance training shall cover all on-site routine, preventive and remedial maintenance of the system/subsystem. This training shall include, but not be limited to: 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 12 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 1. Orientation to provide overview of system/subsystem purpose, configuration and operations; 2. Terminology; 3. Operations theory and interfaces; 4. Equipment modes, practices and procedures under normal and emergency conditions; 5. Safety precautions; 6. Use of tools and test equipment; 7. Preventive maintenance; 8. Troubleshooting, diagnostics and testing; 9. Assembly and disassembly; 10. Repair and parts replacement; 11. Parts ordering practices and storage; 12. Failure and recovery procedures; 13. System/subsystem cabling; 14. Familiarity with and use of O&M manuals and other reference materials. V. Computer Software Training: computer software training shall cover management, development and maintenance of system/subsystem the software. training shall include but not be limited to: use, This 1. Orientation to provide overview of system/subsystem concepts, configuration and operations; 2. Basis programming and software architecture; 3. System executive and utility program; 4. Application program; 5. Modification program; 6. Modification of command lines codes; 7. Interrupt logic; 8. Intra- and inter-system interfaces; 9. Processor system operating procedures; 10. Diagnostics; 11. Communications software; 12. File management; 13. Hand-on training; 14. Safety precautions; 15. Familiarization with and use of O&M manuals and other reference materials. W. Operations – Supervisor Training: supplemental and specialized training shall be provided for supervisor level trainees. This training shall impart the knowledge and skills necessary to schedule, supervise and improve the proficiency of operating and computer software personnel. X. Operations – Instructor Training: supplemental and specialized training shall be provided to prepare graduate trainees or nominated instructors successfully to instruct future trainees in system/subsystem operations and computer software. Y. Maintenance – Supervisor Training: supplemental and specialized training shall be provided for supervisory level trainees. This training shall impart the knowledge and skills necessary to schedule, supervise and improve the proficiency of maintenance personnel. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 13 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 Z. 1.10 Maintenance – Instructor Training: supplemented and specialised training shall be provided to prepare graduate trainees of nominated instructions successfully to instruct future trainees in all phases of system/subsystem maintenance. INITIAL OPERATION OF SYSTEMS A. After installation is complete, operate system for time required to complete tests specified under TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING, to demonstrate performance in accordance with design requirements and to provide instruction and training to the Employer's designated personnel. B. Commencement Date: obtain approval of commencement date. 1.11 1.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Equipment is to operate under all conditions of load without objectionable noise or vibration. B. Noise and vibration noticeable outside a room in which moving equipment is installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside the room, will be considered objectionable. C. Noise Level resulting from equipment and heard in the same building or nearby buildings is not to exceed specified noise levels as measured with a standard sound level meter on the 'A' scale. D. Correction: conditions considered objectionable are to be corrected by approved means and as directed. E. Method of Correction: noise is to be corrected by addition of sound absorbers in ducts, by internal duct lining, by installation of sound barriers or dampeners on walls and/or ceilings of equipment rooms or by other method to produce satisfactory noise levels. F. Vibration Control is to be by approved vibration isolators applied and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. WARRANTEE A. Warrantee is to cover perfect mechanical operation of systems, perfect attainment of temperatures and humidity’s within specified design conditions, acceptable noise and vibration levels and reasonable consumption of power, fuel and water. B. Defects during warrantee Period: if during warrantee period any equipment or material proves defective or any part of system fails to function properly, equipment is to be replaced and defects and malfunctions corrected as directed by the PGC Engineer. C. Extension of warrantee: if during warrantee period any piece of major equipment is replaced or rebuilt, the warrantee period is to be extended as per the contract conditions. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 14 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 D. Maintenance and Operation: provide necessary skills and labor to assure proper operation and to provide regular and preventive maintenance required for equipment and controls during warrantee period on a continuous 24 hour basis. E. Maintenance and Operation: act promptly to correct problems arising in operation of equipment or system. F. Maintenance and Operation: provide the Employer with monthly inspection certificates of equipment, record findings on a check list, and certify that each piece of equipment has been examined, is operating as intended and has been properly maintained as recommended by the manufacturer. G. Maintenance and Operation: check all controls monthly to ascertain that they function as designed. H. Spare Parts for normal wear and tear are to be provided by the Employer. 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished at no additional cost to the Contract, provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, equipment spaces, and the like are increased accordingly. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet design and commissioning requirements. C. Equipment Vibration Tolerance: 1. The allowable vibration tolerance is specified in Division 23 Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping" and equipment. Equipment specifications require factory balancing of equipment to this tolerance. 2. After air balance work is completed and permanent drive sheaves are in place, perform field mechanical balancing and adjustments required to meet the specified vibration tolerance. D. Products Criteria: 1. Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization that maintains a complete inventory of repair parts and is located reasonably close to the site. 2. Multiple Units: When 2 or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer. 3. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product. 4. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 15 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment. 5. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used. E. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Resident PGC Engineer prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material. F. Provide copies of approved equipment submittals to the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Subcontractor. 1.14 WELDING A. The Contractor is entirely responsible for the quality of the welding and shall: 1. 2. 3. Conduct tests of the welding procedures used by his organization, determine the suitability of the procedures used, determine that the welds made will meet the required tests, and also determine that the welding operators have the ability to make sound welds under standard conditions. Comply with ASME B31.1 and AWS B2.1. Perform all welding operations required for construction and installation of the piping systems. B. Qualification of Welders: Rules of procedure for qualification of all welders and general requirements for fusion welding shall conform with the applicable portions of ASME B31.1, Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications, and AWS B2.1, and / or, as approved by the Qualifications." C. Examining Welder: Examine each welder at job site, in the presence of the Resident PGC Engineer, to determine the ability of the welder to meet the qualifications required. Test welders for piping for all positions, including welds with the axis horizontal (not rolled) and with the axis vertical. Each welder shall be allowed to weld only in the position in which he has qualified and shall be required to identify his welds with his specific code marking signifying his name and number assigned. D. Examination Results: Provide the Resident Engineer with a list of names and corresponding code markings. Retest welders who fail to meet the prescribed welding qualifications. Disqualify welders, who fail the second test, for work on the project. E. Beveling: Field bevels and shop bevels shall be done by mechanical means or by flame cutting. Where beveling is done by flame cutting, surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of scale and oxidation just prior to welding. Conform to specified standards. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 16 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.15 F. Alignment: Utilize split welding rings or approved alternate method for joints on all pipes above 50 mm to assure proper alignment, complete weld penetration, and prevention of weld spatter reaching the interior of the pipe. G. Erection: Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or otherwise damaged either before, during, or after installation. H. Defective Welds: Replace and re-inspect defective welds. Repairing defective welds by adding weld material over the defect or by peening will not be permitted. Welders responsible for defective welds must be re-qualified. I. Electrodes: Electrodes shall be stored in a dry heated area, and be kept free of moisture and dampness during the fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that have lost part of their coating. J. Welding: welded joints for pipes larger than 300 mm and all pipes within tunnel to be subjected to 100 % x-ray testing. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The equipment supplied shall be packed for protection against damage during handling, transport, warehousing and installation. The efficiency of the packing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair or replace any damaged items, at no additional cost, as instructed by the Engineer even after delivery of the equipment, if it is proven that the damage was caused by packing, storage, or handling deficiencies. B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. C. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor, if stored inside. D. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. E. 1.16 Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. and bending. Support to prevent sagging SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other trades and building components. B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations. C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-inplace concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning before closing in building. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 17 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 1.17 E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access are concealed behind finished surfaces. G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. ASSET CODING A. The Sub-contractor shall identify all equipment, materials, spare parts and consumables and incorporate them into the as-built documentation and operating & maintenance manuals. B. The Sub-contractor shall also be responsible for the creation of the entire asset code electronic data base handed over to the Client upon completion of the project. An indicative Asset Coding format sample is shown hereinafter. The MEP Subcontractor shall note that the format may be revised at a later date. The MEP Subcontractor shall prepare the data base in excel/other formal capable of importing to other data bases. The MEP Subcontractor shall be also responsible for preparation and fixing of asset code tags to materials and equipment forming part of his supply. The asset codes shall be stated at the time of submittal to track order, manufacturing, delivery, installation and testing and commissioning. The minimum list of equipment to be coded is as follows: C. HVAC and Electrical (MEP) Installation 1. ACMV/BMS System a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2. Ventilation Systems - Fans. DX units, split unite and all associated automatic dampers, VFD, and local motor control panels (LMCP). Chilled Water System - MCC, chilled water pumps, feed & expansion tank, valves, automatic air vents, expansion bellow, chemical treatment system and heat exchangers. Cooling Tower System - Cooling towers, condenser water pumps, make up water tank & pumps, LMCP, and condenser water chemical treatment system. BMS/ Control System - All central hardware, and field panels and all field equipment. Smoke Control System - Fans, smoke curtains and smoke curtain control panel All landlord AHU, VAV, FCU, and heat recovery units including associated LMCP. VFD and automatic dampers. Thermal storage system. Workshop equipment including platform lift, cranes and monorails. Electrical System a. All Main LV switchboard and sub-boards. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 18 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 b. c. d. All UPS charger/battery system. All central battery system All emergency generator and associated cooling towers, pumps and LMCP. e. All power/lighting distribution panels. f. All main HV switchboards. g. All transformers h. All cables HV, MV and LV. i. All central dimmer panels/systems. j. ATS, power factor correction capacitors, and DB's. k. All exit lights, architectural light fittings, and wiring devices. l. All disconnector switches, sockets (normal, power) and wiring device. m. Lighting protection systems. n. Earthing system. o. Telephone raceways. p. Cameras. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections 23 21 10 "Hydronic Piping" B. 2.2 Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 or British Standard Taper Pipe Thread for factory- threaded pipe and pipe fittings. JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: piping system contents. 1. Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 3.2 mm maximum thickness, unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full- face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated; Bolts, Nuts and washers, stainless steel for potable/domestic water piping, galvanized for other piping systems. D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 19 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Alloy Sn95: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent lead content. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead content. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. 1. 2. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys. BAg1: Silver alloy. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. I. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket. J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: gasket, carbon-steel bolts and nuts. K. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. L. 2.3 ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138. AWWA C110, rubber Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron. Followers: ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. Gaskets: Rubber. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111. Finish: Enamel paint. Couplings for RTRP and Fittings: Piping manufacturer's standard. DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld- neck end types and matching piping system materials. C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 20 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 D. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 1725 kPa minimum working pressure at 82 deg. C. E. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 1035 or 2070 kPa minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. F. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full- face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1. 2.4 G. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 2070 kPa minimum working pressure at 107 deg. C. H. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 2070 kPa minimum working pressure at 107 deg. C. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe connections. Include 2070 kPa minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher working pressure is indicated, and ends according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 2.5 Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 1035 or 2070 kPa minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. DN50 and Smaller: Threaded. DN65 and Larger: Flanged. Option for DN65 and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings. B. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to hose. C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose. D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless- steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose. E. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple plies of NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 2070 kPa minimum working-pressure rating at 104 deg. C Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise indicated. MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 21 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: 1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.6 mm minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 3. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. a. b. B. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. Screws used for outdoor and wet application shall be of stainless steel. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping. OD: Completely cover opening. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw and polished chrome-plated finish. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge, set screw and polished chrome- plated finish. Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome-plated finish. Stamped Steel: One piece, with spring clips and chrome-plated finish. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set screw, and chromeplated finish. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chromeplated finish. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting. C. Screws: Provide Stainless Steel screws for outdoor and wet applications. 2.7 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B. 1. 2. 3. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: 34.5 MPa, 28-day compressive strength. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 22 OF 28 PGC-190008-C-P1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual Division 23 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements. B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping at indicated slope. D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated. H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 25 mm clearance around insulation. J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions. M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome-plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated finish. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 23 OF 28 PGC-190008-C-P1 N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and roof slabs. O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. 2. 3. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 50 mm above finished floor level. Extend sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. Install sleeves large enough to provide 6 mm annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than DN150. b. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes DN150 and larger, penetrating gypsum- board partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of soil pipe to extend sleeve to 50 mm above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. i. 4. 5. Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated. P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25 mm annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 150 mm in diameter. 2. Install steel sheet for sleeves 150 mm in diameter and larger. 3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. Q. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install steel pipe for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25 mm annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 24 OF 28 PGC-190008-C-P1 R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials. S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing- in requirements. U. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping Specification Sections: 1. 2. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. 3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS' "Soldering Manual," ` Chapter "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." 4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS' "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: a. b. c. d. e. 6. 7. 8. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal threading is specified. Align threads at point of assembly. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: a. b. c. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661. CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 25 OF 28 PGC-190008-C-P1 d. e. f. 9. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672. PVC Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2855. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and solvent cement according to ASTM D 3138. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657 procedures and manufacturer's written instructions. a. b. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. V. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping DN50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment with DN50 or smaller threaded pipe connection. 2. Install flanges, in piping DN65 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Engineer. C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope. F. 3.3 Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts if possible. PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and application of paint. B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 26 OF 28 PGC-190008-C-P1 1. Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over enamel undercoat and primer. 2. Interior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over galvanized metal primer. 3. Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over enamel undercoat and primer. 4. Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer. 5. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over galvanized metal primer. 6. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer. C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish. D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. 3.5 A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not less than 150 mm larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 21 MPa, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Concrete Specification Section. ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. Floor mounted metallic supports shall have base and concrete plinths beneath. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." C. Floor Mounted Support: Provide base plate and concrete plinths beneath each floor mounted support. 3.6 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove Work as indicated in Division 23 Sections and as stated below. B. If pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality. C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety. D. Work Abandoned in Place: Cut and remove underground pipe a minimum of 50 mm beyond face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish. E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from Project site. 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 27 OF 28 PGC-190008-C-P1 F. 3.7 Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational equipment indicated for relocation. CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3.8 GROUTING A. Install nonmetallic, no shrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions. - 23 05 00 ( COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS End of Section - PAGE 28 OF 28 PGC-230033-C-P8 ` 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................2 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 RELATED DOCUMENTS......................................................................................... 2 SUMMARY............................................................................................................... 2 REFERENCE STANDARDS .................................................................................... 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE........................................................................................... 3 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 3 WARRANTY ............................................................................................................ 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS ..............................................................................................................5 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 5 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS .............................................. 6 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS .............. 6 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS .................................... 6 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS ......................................... 7 STARTING EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................... 8 RATING ................................................................................................................... 8 PART 3 EXECUTION ...........................................................................................................10 3.1 3.2 3.3 APPLICATION ....................................................................................................... 10 INSTALLATION...................................................................................................... 10 TESTING ............................................................................................................... 10 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. 1.2 Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. SUMMARY A. Perform all Work required to provide and install high efficiency single- and threephase electric motors required for equipment supplied under this division of Work as indicated by the Contract Documents, with supplementary items necessary for proper installation. Refer to Electrical Drawings for motor starter sizes. Disconnect switches to be furnished in Division 26. B. The HVAC contractor shall furnish starters for HVAC Work. Motor starters shall be provided in accordance with Division 26 Specifications. Some motors furnished in mechanical equipment rooms shall have starters furnished and installed as part of Division 26 (as per Specification Section 26 29 14, Motor Starters). Coordinate with Division 26. C. Motors rated at less than 190 Watts and intended for intermittent operation need not conform to these Specifications. D. ECM (Electronically Commutated Motor) motors on terminal units, fan-coil units, and computer room air conditioning units are except from specification requirements that can not apply due to different electrical design characteristics. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and Workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. AFBMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. AFBMA 11 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. 3. EISA - The Energy Independence & Securities Act 2007. 4. ANSI/EEE 112 – Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 5. ANSI/NEMA/ MG 1 – Motors and Generators Part 31. 6. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code. 7. ANSI C19 – Industrial Control Apparatus. 8. NEMA ICS – Industrial Control and Systems. 9. NEMA RV 3 - Application and Installation Guidelines for Flexible and Liquidtight Flexible Metal and Nonmetallic Conduits 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 10. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable 11. NEMA FB 2.20 - Selection and Installation Guidelines For Fittings for Use With Flexible Electrical Conduit and Cable 12. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports 13. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports 14. NEMA OS 3 - Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes 15. UL 508 – Industrial Control Equipment. 16. ANSI/EEE 117 – Standard Test Procedure for Evaluation of Systems of Insulating Materials for Random Wound AC Electric Machinery. 17. ANSI/NEMA MG 2 – Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors. 18. ANSI/UL 674 – Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 19. ANSI/UL 1004 – Electric Motors. D. IEC STANDARDS: When IEC motors are used, all IEC specifications are to match NEMA specifications as a minimum. 1. IEC 60 034-1: General regulations for rotating electrical machines. 2. IEC 60 085: General regulations for rotating electrical machines. 3. IEC 60 034-7: Type of construction, installation and terminal box position. 4. IEC 60 034-9: Noise levels. 5. IEC 60 038: Standard voltages. 6. IEC 60 034-6: Cooling methods for rotating electrical machines. 7. IEC 60 034-14: Mechanical vibrations, rotating electrical machines. 8. IEC 60 034-5: Degree of protection for rotating electrical machines. 9. IEC 60 079: Hazardous Motors. 10. IEC 60 721: Paint finish. 1.4 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Motors associated with variable frequency drives (VFD) shall be inverter-duty rated, and provided with grounded shaft or ceramic bearings to insulate shaft, and Class B 130 degrees C rise insulation. Ref. NEMA MG1 Part 31. B. Conform to NFPA 70. SUBMITTALS A. All motors provided by the Contractor shall be of the same manufacturer unless they are an integral part of the piece of equipment to which they are attached. B. Product Data: Provide the following information for each motor: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Manufacturer. Rated full load horsepower. Rated volts. Number of Phases. Insulation Class. Frequency in Hertz. 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 7. Full load amperes (FLA). 8. Locked rotor amperes (LRA) at rated voltage or NEMA code letter. 9. Nominal speed at full load (rpm). 10. Service factor. 11. NEMA design letter. 12. NEMA machine type (ODP, WP-I, TEFC, etc.). C. For motors one horsepower and larger, include the following additional information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. NEMA frame size. NEMA insulation system classification. For motors required to be installed outdoors, include information showing compliance for outdoor Time rating. Maximum ambient temperature for which motor is application. Bearing size and type data. designed. Guaranteed efficiency and power factor at full load, 75% load, 50% load, 25% load and 0% load. D. For motors 20 horsepower and larger, include the following additional information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. No load amperes. Safe stall time. Guaranteed efficiency and power factor at full load, 75% load, 50% load, 25% load and 0% load. Motor manufacturer’s recommended maximum power factor correction capacitor (kVar) that can safely be switched with the motor. Expected value of corrected power factor at no load, 50 percent, 75 percent and full load. Full load amperes with corrected power factor. Maximum guaranteed slip at full load. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit operation and maintenance data including assembly Drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions. F. Alternate Motors: 1. 1.6 If a motor horsepower rating larger than indicated is offered as a substitute and accepted, provide required changes in size of conductors, conduits, motor controllers, overload relays, fuses, circuit breakers, switches and other related items at no change in the Contract price. WARRANTY A. Provide minimum one-year manufacturer’s warranty including coverage for motors one horsepower and larger. 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Electrical Service: Refer to Drawing schedules for required electrical characteristics. C. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment and for temperature rise in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, Service Factor and motor enclosure type. 1. C 2. Totally Enclosed Motors: Design for a service factor of 1.15 and a 130 degrees maximum temperature rise in the same conditions. Explosion-Proof Motors: UL approved and labeled for hazard classification, with over temperature protection. D. Visible Stainless Steel Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer’s name and model number, Service Factor, Power Factor, efficiency. E. Electrical Connection: Provide adequately sized metal electrical connection box for conduit connection. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide metal electrical box for conduit connection. F. Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest ANSI, IEEE and NEMA Standards and shall be fully coordinated with the equipment served, shall be of sizes and electrical characteristics scheduled and of approved manufacturer as listed below or of the same manufacturer as the equipment which they serve. Nameplate rating of motors shall match the characteristics scheduled. G. All motors shall be designed for normal starting torque unless the driven machine requires high starting torque and shall be selected for quiet operation, free from magnetic hum. H. All motors shall be provided with adequately sized electrical connection box for attachment of flexible conduit. Paragraph 1.3 of this specification refers to the NEMA standards and publications relevant to applications and use of both metal and liquid tight flexible conduit. When motors are connected to driven equipment by the use of a V-belt drive, they shall be furnished with adjustable rails. I. All air handling unit motor(s) with single and fan array arrangements, exhaust fan motors, chilled water pump motors, chiller motors shall be compatible with variable frequency drive controllers. Equipment manufacturer shall coordinate with VFD manufacturer to ensure compatibility. Characteristics of motors furnished on equipment shall be furnished to VFD manufacturer for review, prior to installing motor on equipment. VFD’s shall be furnished with driven equipment and shall be run tested as an equipment unit at factory prior to shipment. Submit 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 run test report prior to shipping. F.O.B. of motors to factory shall be by the equipment manufacturer. 2.2 J. Motors shall be open drip-proof type, except where specified or noted otherwise on the drawings. K. Motors ¼ to ¾ hp shall be Subtype II and meet the minimum requirements of EPAct92 for minimum NEMA nominal efficiency motors. L. Motors 1 to 200 hp shall be Subtype I and meet the minimum requirements of NEMA Table 12-12 for NEMA premium efficiency motors. SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current. C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque. D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. F. Single phase motors, shall be less than 3/4 horsepower and shall be permanent split phase, capacitor start, induction run, 230 volt, 50 hertz motors with dripproof enclosures except as hereinafter specified. These motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection and shall be rated for temperature rise as hereinbefore specified for 3-phase motors. 2.3 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current. C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings. D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, minimum Service Factor as specified herein, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector. E. 2.4 Single phase motors shall be less than 3/4 horsepower and shall be permanent split phase, capacitor start, induction run, 230 volt, 50 hertz motors. These motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection with automatic reset and shall be rated for temperature rise as hereinbefore specified for 3-phase motors. SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque. 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current. C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors shall have two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. F. Enclosures shall be of the open dripproof type with a service factor as specified herein and Class B insulation rated at 90 degrees C temperature rise measured above 40 degrees C room ambient condition at full load, unless otherwise noted. G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. H. Single phase motors, in general, shall be less than 3/4 horsepower and shall be permanent split phase, capacitor start, induction run, 230 volt, 50 hertz motors. These motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection and shall be rated for temperature rise as hereinbefore specified for 3-phase motors. 2.5 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS A. Enclosures shall be of the open drip proof type with a service factor as specified herein and Class B insulation rated at 130 degrees C temperature rise measured above 40 degrees C room ambient condition at full load, unless otherwise noted. B. All motors 3/4 horsepower and larger, unless smaller motors are indicated to be supplied as 3-phase, shall be 3-phase and shall be squirrel cage premium efficiency induction type with standard NEMA frame sizes. C. Three phase motors not connected to variable frequency drives are to be protected for phase loss and phase unbalance protection. D. Motors 1 HP and larger shall have integral frames. E. Starting Torque: Between one and one and one-half times full load torque. F. Starting Current: 1. 2. 3. 3-7.5 HP: Five times full load current. 7.5 to 50 HP: Two times full load current. 50 HP and above: 1.5 times full load current. G. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pullout Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics. H. Design, Construction, Testing and Performance: Conform to ANSI/NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 I. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better. J. Testing Procedure: In accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112, Test Method B. Load test motors to determine freedom from electrical or mechanical defects and compliance with performance data. K. Motor Frames: NEMA standard T-frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. L. Bearings: 1. 2. 3. 4. Ball or roller type, double shielded with continuous grease relief to accommodate excessive pressure caused by thermal expansion or over lubrication. All motor bearings shall be factory prepacked with a nondetergent lubricant and shall be provided with lubrication fitting arranged to provide easy access when installed on the driven apparatus except as noted hereinafter. Permanently lubricated factory-sealed motors may be provided in fractional horsepower sizes only where they are an integral part of a piece of approved apparatus. All bearings shall be designed for L-10, 40,000 hour minimum life hours of continuous service. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt centerline at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Direct driven fans may require specific bearings other then ball type, verify equipment specification where motor may be used where bearing life requirement may exceed L-10 rating. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. M. Sound Power Levels: Refer to ANSI/NEMA MG 1. N. Part Winding Start (Where Indicated): Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressure with rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel. Bearings shall be double shielded with waterproof non-washing grease. O. Nominal Efficiency and Power Factor: Meet or exceed values as scheduled at load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112. P. 2.6 2.7 Motors one horsepower and larger shall be provided with a copper frame grounding lug of hydraulic compression design, for installation by the electrical subcontractor. STARTING EQUIPMENT A. Each motor shall be provided with proper starting equipment. Starting equipment shall be furnished by this Division. B. Relays and equipment supplied by this Contractor shall be integral with electrical equipment supplied. RATING A. Speed and Size: Speed and approximate horsepower ratings are specified in equipment Specification Sections or are indicated on the Drawings. Furnish motors sufficiently sized for the particular application and with full-load rating not less 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 than required by the driven equipment at specified capacity. Size motors so as not to overload at any point throughout the normal operating range. B. Voltage: 1. 2. Single phase: 230 volts for 240-volt nominal system voltage. Three phase: 400 volts for 415-volt nominal system voltage. C. Frequency: 50 Hertz. D. Efficiency: Provide energy-efficient motors meeting the requirements of NEMA MG1- 12.55A, Table 12Y and MG 1.41.3. Efficiency to be determined by testing in accordance with NEMA MG 112.53 using IEEE 112A – Method B. E. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1-12.47 but not less than those indicated per the Table below. Table: NEMA Open Motor Service Factors: Horsepower 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 900 RPM 1/6 – 1/3 1.35 1.35 1.35 1.35 ½ 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.15 ¾ 1.25 1.25 1.15 1.15 1 1.25 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.5-150 and above 150 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 11 PGC-190008-C-P1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Single-phase motors for shaft mounted fans shall be split phase type. B. Single-phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers shall be permanent split capacitor type. C. Single-phase motors for fans shall be capacitor start, capacitor run type. D. Motors located in exterior locations and in direct drive axial fans, roll filters, humidifiers and draw-through air units shall be totally enclosed weatherproof epoxysealed type. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall recommendations. be in accordance with manufacturer’s published C. Properly install and align motors after installation on the driven equipment. D. Motor feeders shall be free of splices. In special cases when splice-free feeders are impractical, splices may be allowed given prior written approval from PGC. E. Use crimp-on, solderless copper terminals on the branch circuit conductors. For motors 20 horsepower and larger, use motor lead splicing kit or approved equal. F. When the motor and equipment are installed, the motor’s nameplate must be in full view. 3.3 TESTING A. General: Provide all necessary instruments, labor and personnel required to perform motor inspection and testing. B. Inspection: Inspect all motors for damage, moisture absorption, alignment, freedom of rotation, proper lubrication, oil leaks, phase and rotation and cleanliness, and report any abnormalities to PGC before energizing. C. Tests: Motor full load current and full load voltage shall be measured. Motor phase loss and phase unbalance protection shall be tested. Motor Test Report forms included at the end of this Section shall be completed and submitted prior to Substantial Completion. D. Energizing: After installation has been thoroughly checked and found to be in proper condition, with thermal overloads in motor controllers properly sized and all controls in place, energize the equipment at system voltage for operational testing. 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 11 PGC-190008-C-P1 E. Motor Test Report Form: - End of Section - 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 11 OF 11 PGC-230033-C-P8 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................2 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 RELATED DOCUMENTS......................................................................................... 2 SUMMARY............................................................................................................... 2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 2 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE........................................................................................... 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS ..............................................................................................................3 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL................................................................... 3 PACKLESS-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS........................................................ 3 SLIP-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS................................................................... 3 BALL-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS.................................................................. 3 GROOVED-PIPING-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS ........................................... 4 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES..................................................................................... 4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS.............................................................................. 4 PART 3 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................6 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 EXAMINATION ........................................................................................................ 6 PIPE EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION .............................................................. 6 FABRICATED-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION COMPENSATION INSTALLATION.......... 6 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE INSTALLATION ............................................................. 6 PIPE ANCHOR INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 6 PAINTING ................................................................................................................ 7 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. 1.3 1.4 This Section includes pipe expansion joints, guides, and anchors for mechanical piping systems. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Provide pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures. B. Fabricate and install expansion and anchor system capable of sustaining forces generated by gravity, thermal movement, and seismic events SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of pipe expansion joint and pipe alignment guide specified. C. Pipe expansion joint schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required expansion joint. D. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of pipe expansion joint, pipe alignment guide, and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component assembly. E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. welders comply F. Maintenance data for each type pipe expansion joint specified to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in the Division 1 Section "Project Closeout". 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel". 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications". 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 7 PGC-190008-C-P1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL A. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors. B. Refer to "Pipe Expansion Joint Schedule" for criteria of individual pipe expansion joints. C. Pipe expansion joint pressure ratings shall be compatible with piping system where system pressures require PN 16 or PN 32 components. This applies to all the following joint types. 2.2 PACKLESS-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS A. Metal-Bellows Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: Pressure rated for 1200 kPa minimum; conform to the standards of Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (EJMA); with end fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel. Features include the following: 1. Copper Piping Systems: 2 ply phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shrouds. 2. Steel Piping Systems: 2 ply stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shrouds. B. Expansion-Compensator Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: Pressure rated for 1600 kPa minimum for low-pressure systems and for 3200 kPa minimum for highpressure systems. Include 2 ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds, and end fittings for copper piping systems and 2 ply stainless-steel bellows, carbon-steel shrouds, and end fittings for steel piping systems. Include internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for proper positioning. C. Rubber-Sphere Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: Single-sphere type, fabric- reinforced butyl rubber with full-faced integral flanges, external control rods, and internal reinforcing. Include steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes over entire surface of flanges. Pressure rating is 1200 kPa minimum at 116 deg C minimum. D. Rubber-Sphere Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints: Double-sphere type, fabric- reinforced butyl rubber with full-faced integral flanges, external control rods, and internal reinforcing. Include steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes over entire surface of flanges. Pressure rating is 1200 kPa minimum at 116 deg C minimum. 2.3 SLIP-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS A. Carbon-steel packing-type expansion joint designed for repacking under pressure. Include limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match piping system, and drip connection where used for steam piping systems. 1.Joint Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) compound. 2. Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa minimum at 204 deg C minimum. For systems with higher pressure use 3200 kPa minimum pressure rating. 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 7 PGC-190008-C-P1 2.4 BALL-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Designed for 360 degree (6.3rad) rotation and minimum of 30 degree (0.52rad) angular deflection for sizes 150 mm and smaller and 15 degree (0.26rad) for sizes 200 mm and larger. B. Carbon steel and comply with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section II "Materials Specifications" and ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials and design of pressure containing parts and bolting. 1. 2. 3. 2.5 2.6 GROOVED-PIPING-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS A. Coupling: ASTM A 53, cut-grooved, short, steel-pipe nipples, and ductile-iron or malleable-iron shouldered couplings. Include removable ties to hold joint compressed or expanded during piping fabrication. Include suitable gasket materials for piping system. B. Slip-Joint: ASTM A 53, steel-pipe body; polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), modified- polyphenylene-coated steel-pipe slide; and ductile-iron or malleableiron housing. Include suitable gasket material for piping system. PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES A. Factory-fabricated cast semisteel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted twosection outer cylinder and base. Include two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to the pipe. 1. 2.7 Packing: Asbestos-free composition. Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa minimum at 204 deg C minimum.Use 3100 kPa pressure ratings for system with high pressures. Factory Test: Test before shipment with steam at working pressure of piping system with no leaks. Alignment Guide Lengths: As required for indicated travel. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, traand nuts. C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. D. Power-Actuated Fasteners: Attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. E. Concrete: Portland-cement mix, (20.7 Pa). 1. 2. 3. 4. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. Water: Potable. 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 7 PGC-190008-C-P1 F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink, nonmetallic. 1. 2. 3. Characteristics include post-hardening volume-adjusting dry hydraulic-cementtype grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: (34.5 MPa), 28 day compressive strength. Water: Potable. 4. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged. 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 7 PGC-190008-C-P1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Examine substrates and conditions under which pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PIPE EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION A. Install pipe expansion joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Align expansion joints to avoid end-loading and torsional stress. C. Use rubber sphere packless type expansion joints for pipes up to 200 mm and metal- bellows packless type for pipes above 200 mm. 3.3 3.4 3.5 FABRICATED-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION COMPENSATION INSTALLATION A. Install pipe expansion loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to absorb 50 percent of total compression or tension that will be produced during anticipated change in temperature. B. Connect risers to mains with at least 5 pipe fittings including tee in main. C. Connect risers to terminal units with at least 4 pipe fittings including tee in riser. PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE INSTALLATION A. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion joints. B. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion loops. C. Install pipe alignment guides on piping elsewhere as indicated. D. Secure pipe alignment guides to building substrate. PIPE ANCHOR INSTALLATION A. Install pipe anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS D1.1. C. Construct concrete pipe anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated. D. Where pipe expansion joints are indicated, install pipe anchors according to expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to compensators. 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 7 PGC-190008-C-P1 E. Pipe Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install pipe anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Preset anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. F. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors that are installed on or in concrete. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint, exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. B. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting". C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. - End of Section - 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 7 PGC-230033-C-P8 23 05 16.13 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING (UNDERGROUND) CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL.................................................................................................................2 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK....................................................................................... 2 REFERENCES......................................................................................................... 2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 2 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................... 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS ..............................................................................................................3 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 EXPANSION FITTING ............................................................................................. 3 PIPE BEND AND LOOPS ........................................................................................ 3 GUIDES ................................................................................................................... 3 ANCHORS ............................................................................................................... 3 PART 3 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................4 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION ................................................................... 4 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION................................................................. 4 GUIDE SUPPORT INSTALLATION ......................................................................... 4 ANCHOR INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 4 PAINTING ................................................................................................................ 5 23 05 16 13 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING (UNDER GROUND) PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 5 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for mechanical piping systems, and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Expansion joints. Expansion compensators. Pipe bends and loops. Rollers, guides and anchors. B. Refer to mechanical drawings for expansion joints details. 1.2 REFERENCES A. All pipe supports shall comply with MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69 and BS 3974 Part 1. B. The Expansion joint manufacturer shall maintain a QA system and a copy of the QA manual must be available for inspection. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Products designed and selected by the contractor and manufacturer shall be suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures. B. Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with section 01340. 23 05 16 13 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING (UNDER GROUND) PART B – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 5 PGC-230033-C-P8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EXPANSION FITTING A. Bellows shall be constructed of s

Mechanical Specifications - Fire, Plumbing, HVAC

Related documents

Study collections

Products

Support

Mechanical Specifications - Fire, Plumbing, HVAC

Related documents

Study collections

Add this document to collection(s)

Add this document to saved

Suggest us how to improve StudyLib